407
ete fe 2, Fi ehtoe
cata Eorat o at om
‘agit gsc be hi ON, Garret eet
Taine Bate.
meet vai
fon 8 4 {Ngee aise
eae
:
Saget
yreeure:
fol ui
ey deapasanys i
Cig ait nite eee ps
Pie eteta rian
ee Ua
(eae trees
nes teats aie
oF Seige Sit
Bile penitent ay,
Laptaareny 1%
505
ince EAI orient ete Bae Ae
i ws O Ae ue ee
HOES ac oases tice ay
Pa ACae vine a PS
af Wee
ib Or or
eden
eg
fa ae
pas Ath
pat 1 iG 3
aa
penn Lau
i is Sif ey
mane Rone ‘ay!
is ited
te een By
INSTITUTION NOILIILILON
S3iy¥vudl
LIBRARIES
NVINOSHLIWS
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
tf
ff.
NOILNLILSNI
LIBRARIES
NOILALILSNI
NVINOSHLINS S3!¥vVadll
SMITHSONIAN
NOILNLILSNI
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI
LIBRARIES
NOILNLILSNI
IBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
NVINOSHLIWS
OILNLILSNI
LIBRARIE:
NOILNLILSNINVINOSHLIWS
\
INSTITUTION
SSIYVYUSIT LIBRARIES
LIBRARIE
NOILALILS!
S3'yvVudIT LIBRARIES INSTITUTION NOILN
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSD
INSTITUTION NOILMLILSI
SJIMYVUGIT LIBRARIE
i z=
ow )
\y 0) =
Se Qe i -
oS, SENN |
LY = D
tc ae Oy m ; =
wn =
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILONLILSNI NVINOSHLINS id B RA
ria = ~ Faas 22) ae
x ‘. = < = < ~
pS 3 = =
S Ya = 2 & ay 5
YM ~ Wee ow np, wn ”
RY ED \ So) 7 O
: NS ee = =
NVINOSHLINS Sa IYVYE!IT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION Pili. .
: Z3 -- is
ul re wl = us
On = ce he = f&
ee = oe aS ox
a ame - Ps. co
~ as 23 me _
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3luvudll LIB RA
7 z & z is .
2 z ) Lay a
se 2 ae = =
8) = P = a
m ” m ” =
wn = a Pye = n
Pe 1yVvuad eS BRARI ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION |
= .s = a
o hig a o Tp ie : ws
O MYyiy = O Tr O
Zz Ci = 2 = , 2
> 2 = Ye = ; >
= 77) oa an bones
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS ~~
rs f | Z “ ar z
4 ” Ass tu
“s = 2 WN 2 4
= < = \ ee: =
4 ra + %N XX a =i
ye Oo _ O = O
. z = S Sy a >
NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYaIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILAL
Sega: : aes :
= w = L, w =
Ya 5 : 5 Gy = 5
a i = = = =
WY 2 5 Q* m —g
_ op) am WM =o
SMIT SONTAN _ INSTITUTION NOLEALIZSN( — SVINOSHLIWS: &S 3 lYyYvualt as
ae z pee = me oe
2 \o i G&? : Zz
no ~~. wn fou 7) wv 7)
r BANE 6 Gf his. i Oo Be
8 AN WS Re ae = = =
= SS >’ > >" =
a ‘ae Z 7) a a
NVINOSHLIWS Sa 1YVug (1 LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _INSTITUTION NOILAL
Yyg = = YU * Z
NS : : = Ye: :
x SS oc Cc oc IY. eps SG Rag
NO 5 z mh Aroha 5
on ra: ‘o) sors 2D om
baits _ Ve ARSE os
: : eB& =
oc
= oO za eS oo
S pe = Sion
S3JiIY¥vVYgIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
S a Ss ae Pale Neel
Ss w ae ow
= a aa Meee
od > = aces
: ic, z
Zz ys Zz ys
MITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3lYvudit
NVINOSHLIWS
SMITHSONIAN
NVINOSHLIWS
IWINOSHLINS SAldVdd!T LIBRARIES _INSTITUTION
ef za z
pass oe) wo
oc mn y eis)
. a, %
< | 2 ‘2
m a ae
aa | Zz Zz
LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3I1YVuUal)
on z i z
: ie O
> = zs s
& > ae =
Be) Ee ra
_ a = ee
0 2 ss ae:
pos laVd dl T_LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
g i Z we g z Aa
Aa EAN ee = a
2 Gy * 2 :
> wn = HD is Ss .
Fa Cp) ‘S z YW”) >
MITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILMLILSNI_NVINOSHLINS saluvud!y
li at i
10 ul A
= = = :
Coq
ar ac S ac
, S es 6 a
i 2 oa 2 Stee
WWINOSHLINS (S31YVYAIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
a pe
\ Oo as © -
We § 2 © Yi &
WE a = is WY,
SAS Se = cS Lebo
SNS Sa m a m
5 = w = ep)
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3I1uYvVudtt
oe eS :
= {X = (f% = zs
Z Nw 5 Wy? =
2] SS WS — W Ye Uy ”) Nn
ot aN SANS Oo a Me ale Oo
Es AS i n= =)
= WN > = >
a a 2 a 2
BVINOSHIIWS Saldvaai LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
: au. ys on
= = — Vly, ah
— (oa Uy pA nomad
. a x Uji Uj ai
a = fod pS
mM _ co. “i —
Sas oO ea i@)
4 SF ples
ai! fe y
: < fy Lif
a mo “if
Zz we ¢
NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHL1I
ie ae ‘>
. wo
2 >
= 3
Z HOG
LIBRARIES SMITHSON
cee wn
ean =
Zz C es
fo) SS Nogaro
e AN eg
i Wo =
=> RS Ss >
w : 2
NOILNLILSNI_ NVINOSHL
9) = ;
uu 7)
Fe a
< c
o o
en fe)
a Z
LIBRARIES SMITHSON
CF Zz
ov oO
ow ax
Po) ra Ve ¢
> = LY,
i = iy
m oe jf
Ww =
NOILNLILSN! NVINOSHL
w rds
= ae
= ht piel Ze
Se 4 )
i JL ?
2 “yy ie
> 77, =
Fe 7)
LIBRARIES SMITHSON
Z G2 |
” ud é;
a a Wit ie
Ge ow 49 Witz 5
. o Vy
Zz
NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHL
Zz ~ >
5 x
= \. S
— Ps) ee
tie = S&S.
EI BRARIES SMITHSO?
ze ep)
<< =
Fe =
Oo ao
Tp) 7)
ae O
i AN =
NN >
2) ae
NOILALILSNI NVINOSH:
(ep) Pd Ae
a nl eae
ac — WS
a = AS
(oa) Sm, NSN
Pa O SS
H
: ANNALS OF THE
S67% H AFRICAN MUSEUM
NH
VOLUME 84
ANNALE VAN DIE
SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
BAND 84
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
VOLUME 84 BAND
WRC:
S B:0.8:9'2)
FE)
ut é
5 S
“Vou nw WS
THE TRUSTEES OF THE DIE TRUSTEES VAN DIE
SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN KAAPSTAD
1981
e..
¥e
\ ; ie |
toe Lie
bm oe
a
'
e —a
= ¢ al
. 2 = i ws x e
7 as 7 :
© a : >
4 a . :
<3 - Es F a
3 fi 3 oe
ie 6 -
= + ry
ad —_
">
= i
hie = \
ee ie = z
‘oe =
att
i
ao —
= 2 3 P
- Le
= -
i ; ‘ ' Me
= 2 = ~
——)
x = =
}
= =
+
~
vi i
= ad : ts
4 i
f ¥
6
7
=
{
ee
ra
q
i
SET, PRINTED AND BOUND IN THE REPUBLIC OF
"THE RUSTICA PRESS (PTY.) LTD., WYNBERG.
C914
LIST OF CONTENTS
BARNARD, J. L. see KARAMAN, G. S.
GRINE, F. E.
Cragievarus kitchingi Brink, 1965: a subjective junior synonym of Diademodon
tetragonus Seeley, 1894 (Reptilia, Therapsida). (Published July 1981.) ........
GRINE, F. E.
A new composite juvenile specimen of Australopithecus africanus (Mammalia,
Primates) from Member 4, Sterkfontein Formation, Transvaal. (Published July
WOT) B'S Cicer ane cacy See Meee) Wee, Steel eat oe ae eee ee ee
GOSLINER, T. M. & GRIFFITHS, R. J.
Description and revision of some South African aeolidacean Nudibranchia (Mollus-
CasGasiropoda)= (eublished uly OSI een eerener rye ea eee. ota oe
GRIFFITHS, R. J. see GOSLINER, T. M.
HENDEY, QO. B.
Palaeoecology of the late Tertiary fossil occurrences in ‘E’ Quarry, Langebaanweg,
South Africa, and a reinterpretation of their geological context. (Published July
NO SiES Mee EE eRe yee sc 52 ols y Soe g Ptah ARV oo hielo Se ead ead
KARAMAN, G. S. & BARNARD, J. L.
The synonymization of Triodos K. H. Barnard with Ampelisca Kroyer (Crustacea,
Amp mipoda) a (kublisnedeAueust 19815) ei = ase sae ene a 5 soe
Kine, G. M.
The postcranial skeleton of Robertia broomiana, an early dicynodont (Reptilia,
Therapsida) from the South African Karoo. (Published July 1981.) ...........
KLEIN, R. G.
Ungulate mortality and sedimentary facies in the late Tertiary Varswater Forma-
tion, Langebaanweg, South Africa. (Published July 1981.)...................
Page
Jy
169
105
203
233
ou
V/
i
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN ~
— “” MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s) A
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction f ; ;
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19696; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
“As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.—H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FISCHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634. \
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Koun, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 84 ~ Band
July 1981 Julie
Part 1 Deel
PALAEOECOLOGY OF THE LATE
TERTIARY FOSSIL OCCURRENCES IN
‘E>’ QUARRY, LANGEBAANWEG,
SOUTH AFRICA, AND A REINTERPRETATION
OF THEIR GEOLOGICAL CONTEXT
By
©” B. HENDE Y
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
Ik, AUIS S39), KIS As he al); HUIS, 5, 7-2).
61 tpi); 70—4),8, 9a—25, 7), lou 3)2
11(@=2, 5, 7, tp), 15(4>5), 242), 27, 31053), 329), 33; 450)
EDITOR/REDAKTRISE
Ione Rudner
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 009 5
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
PALAEOECOLOGY OF THE LATE TERTIARY FOSSIL OCCURRENCES
IN ‘E’ QUARRY, LANGEBAANWEG, SOUTH AFRICA, AND A
REINTERPRETATION OF THEIR GEOLOGICAL CONTEXT
By
Q. B. HENDEY
South African Museum, Cape Town
(With 17 figures and 9 tables)
[MS. accepted 26 November 1980|
ABSTRACT
The late Tertiary succession in the vicinity of Langebaanweg, Cape Province, is correlated
with the global sea-level changes of that period. The principal fossiliferous elements are the
Quartzose Sand Member (QSM) and Pelletal Phosphorite Member (PPM) of the Varswater
Formation, which were laid down during the global early Pliocene transgression. The nature of
the succession was determined by the physical geography of the region, while the preservation
of an unusually large body of early Pliocene sediment in the Langebaanweg area was due to the
development at that time of an overlying coastal barrier complex, part of which survived
subsequent erosion.
All elements in the succession are fossiliferous in parts. Approximately 230 invertebrate
and vertebrate taxa are recorded from the Varswater Formation, in which a variety of marine,
freshwater and terrestrial depositional environments are represented. Species assemblages,
body part representation and condition of specimens vary according to the facies from which
they are derived. The fossils reflect the changing environmental conditions of the late Miocene
and early Pliocene, when local temperatures moderated from tropical to temperate, rainfall was
changing from a summer to a winter maximum, and woodland vegetation was giving way to
more open grasslands and fynbos.
CONTENTS
PAGE
RVR O CU CHORUS Pears ee Reece Rios wie de Renn gem ac, 8 Or a eon wee arc Z
(SASTINSIE | ie sk oe ats, sac aha pO Neer rr ORR SOME ed ge A,
PRCSEMeDIVITONMICM bettas is teat and Facade oes ae we Ota Bon Hex yteeas Bh a b)
(SiOOMCEAM sis, Bin 0 Pet ok POCO css SP RARER Aen RE eer aire Ser RO Grae 6
ithedbaneebaamvce successiOn.. 7.0 4e ee soe sabe Soe: 6
Tertiary sea-level movements on the west coast of South Africa ...... 8
Geological history and depositional environments of the Langebaan-
WC PEST CCC SCO Meee rie Bah Mics te Fatt ie aa aS Me oa el ets Bi le asl 18
ithe pne-WMiocene sca-levelichangess).-s4ean sor) sane eee as eee 18
iihelcanly: tomuddie Miocene transeression’ 22.57 -54 2257.62 42 19
ihemniddletovlateiNTOcene neeressiOniey ea: ae See Cee eae M1
itheveanly BhoOceme transenessiOMi sn jcu5-- atyaek yn ee ass 24
The late Pliocene regression and early Pleistocene transgression . . 39
|BHOMOPAT . o, os8 eek Ca aR cae eRe Se ARS a Oe cae eer ee, Re 42
ISIE DS 8 eg oo ook Bie Sk ets ea eee cee en Se 42
| EHEITUUOYE) i cccotene SS 3 chokes thane Olt Roe NOt AEE te ROT onan La ee ene gre eee oe ee 43
COMlPOsiWomere eres 4 ee ee RO en ee ree ne Canna eerie ss 43
glia ltonomyancrs® sesh: 2 Ae eaer Se et ae ee Cok ed ot) 56
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 84(1), 1981: 1-104, 17 figs, 9 tables.
p} ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
PAGE
Palacoenvironment: s'ssee-csyl. i See oe tees eee Oe es ae ee ere 65
Evolutionany aspects ol the mamimalianitaunian eee oe ee ee eee 79
Dating of the Laneebaanwes succession® sige a eo ee ee ee ee 91
Summary and conclusions si. ..02 2 ew fs secon ae ere Rois oe eee ey eee 96
Acknowledeementstss. Joana Gide. soaee sa ciots catioee agate ogee es en eae 99
FRETEROM CEST oA nn 8 See heen eet Sr hPa OD eC HLT ce 99
INTRODUCTION
General
Langebaanweg (18° 9’E, 32° 58'S) is situated in the south-western Cape
Province approximately 110 km north-north-west of Cape town, and a little less
than 2° north of the most southerly tip of Africa (Cape Agulhas) (Figs 1-2). It
is about 13 km inland (north-east) from Saldanha Bay, and 21 km south of the
mouth of the (Great) Berg River at St Helena Bay. The settlement originally
consisted of little more than a railway siding, but during the Second World War
the commencement of phosphate mining operations and the construction of a
military airfield enlivened the area.
The phosphate deposits of the area have long been known, and although
commercial exploitation commenced in 1943, it was not until 1958 that the
occurrence of vertebrate fossils in these deposits was reported (Singer &
Hooijer 1958). Since then the area has become one of the most prolific sources
of late Tertiary fossils in Africa. Phosphate has been mined in two areas, and
both have yielded fossils. Initially mining was confined to an area immediately
west of the Langebaanweg railway station. This open-cast mine, known as
Baard’s Quarry, was relatively small, and although large quantities of fossils
were recovered, most are unidentifiable fragments (Hendey 1978a). About 2
km further west is Varswater, a subdivision of the farm Langeberg, where
mining also started on a small scale, with few fossils having been recovered.
During 1965 a start was made on the New Varswater Mine (‘E’ Quarry), a
comparatively large undertaking which has been the source of the vast majority
of fossils from the Langebaanweg area (see Hendey 1970a, 1974a, 1976a, and
other publications cited below).
This report deals largely with the fossils and deposits of that part of the ‘E’
Quarry sequence which comprises the late Miocene/early Pliocene Varswater
Formation. In order that this element in the succession be placed in perspec-
tive, an account is also given of other late Tertiary deposits in the vicinity. The
entire succession is correlated with others on the west coast of southern Africa,
and to the record of global sea-level changes.
The emphasis in the palaeontological sections is on the palaeoecology of
the Varswater Formation. ‘Palaeoecology’ was defined by Olson (1962: 134) as
referring “precisely to the ecology at some ancient time or times and thus,
strictly, is an interpretation of the once living biological-physical system’. The
primary requirement in any such study is the identification of the plants and
animals which lived at the time in question. To this must be added a determina-
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 3
tion of the prevailing environment, that is, the physical setting and the climate.
Only then can the relationships of the plant and animal communities to each
other, and to their surroundings, be assessed.
Although comparatively little is known of the vegetation in Varswater
Formation times, the geology and fauna of the deposits have already been
Ltideritz
Bogenfels
Kleinzee 2) SPE Mga
zy
30°
Hondeklip Bay
ATLANTIC QO, .
“% ¢Vanrhynsdorp
OCEAN val =
2 32°
Fe
é
oe
aA
(=)
(=
rc
=
e &
\Lange- \%
baanweg =
19AIY
2
Cape Town “ 34°
False Bay_ Ne
0 100 200 km Gansbaai
Sy
@
Cape Agulhas
Fig. 1. The west coast of southern Africa.
4 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
studied in some detail. Previous publications resulting froin these studies have
included palaeoecological interpretations, and these are either simply referred
to, or the information they contain is repeated here, usually in an abbreviated
form. In addition, some previously unpublished observations are included. This
synthesis is intended only as an interim report, since relevant research is
continuing.
St Helena Bay
VREDENBURG
@
\WER COURSE
a Pe =
o ING THE
ee cloce,
Ee’ QUARRYX&@ %q,
SALDANHA 4y, "0's quarry
33° © Sho
p
2
Ss \
NOES?
2 4 Karnberg
QO °g
Massenberg
<n, oO *ELANDSFONTEIN
°6.
(=) %
%
o
o
(-)
2
& Gr. Swartberg
ATLANTIC
OCEAN
4 Slangkop
0 10 20km
ee
18°
Fig. 2. The Saldanha region of the south-western Cape Province.
18°30
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG >)
While the ‘E’ Quarry fossils and deposits have already provided a wealth
of palaeoecological information, a great deal more is promised by further
identification of taxa and detailed analyses of the nature and composition of
fossil assemblages from particular horizons or areas. The combination of an
unusually rich fauna, some palaeobotanical information, and a complex variety
of depositional environments, dating from a period when significant environ-
mental change was taking place, makes ‘E’ Quarry an excellent subject for
palaeoecological studies.
Stemming from the accounts of the geology and biology of the ‘E’ Quarry
deposits is a statement on some evolutionary aspects of the recorded fossil
mammals, together with a reassessment of the age of the principal fossil
occurrences in the area.
Present environment
The south-western Cape Province has a Mediterranean type of climate (Cs
of Koppen), and Langebaanweg 1s situated in the more arid north-westerly part
of this region. Rainfall is brought by the westerly wind system of southern
mid-latitudes, which is usually far enough north to affect the area only during
winter. Coastal fogs sometimes penetrate to the area during cooler months.
The mean annual precipitation is about 250 mm. Winters tend to be cool rather
than cold, and very rarely are sub-zero temperatures experienced, and then
only at night. The summers are dominated by high-pressure systems in the
south Atlantic and are long and dry. Although temperatures may be high (up to
40 °C), they are often moderated by the prevailing south-easterly winds. These
winds are frequently moderate to strong, and, being dry, they aggravate the
summer aridity by desiccating both the soil and plants. The low temperatures of
the adjacent South Atlantic Ocean are caused by an upwelling of Southern
Ocean water in the Benguela Current System. This cold water is a major factor
contributing to the aridity of the region. A summary account of the climate of
the south-western Cape and adjacent regions was given by Fuggle & Ashton
(STS).
In the immediate vicinity of Langebaanweg there is no naturally occurring
surface fresh water, except for small ephemeral ponds during winter. Otherwise
surface fresh water is available locally only at isolated springs, such as that
associated with the Quaternary fossil occurrences on the farm Elandsfontein, 20
km to the south-east (Hendey 1974a), or in the Berg River, 15 km to the
north-east. The Berg River is perennial and is the largest river in the south-
western Cape, draining the major part of this region (Harrison & Elsworth
1958; Harrison 1964).
The sclerophyllous natural vegetation, which has been considerably dis-
turbed by human activity, is classified as ‘coastal fynbos’, which in this sandy
area 1S ‘predominantly ericoid and rather open, the bushes being somewhat
rounded and up to 1 m high’ (Taylor 1978: 204). Proteoids, restioids, grasses,
geophytes, and annuals are present, but there are no indigenous trees. A
6 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
detailed account of the vegetation in the near-by area surrounding Langebaan
was given by Boucher & Jarman (1977).
The fauna of the area has been depleted during historic times (post-
seventeenth century). No larger mammals survive, although smaller ones are
not uncommon. They include a variety of imsectivores, bats and rodents
(including a porcupine), a hare, small carnivores (genets, mongooses, a wildcat,
foxes), and small antelope (steenbok, grysbok and probably grey duiker). Birds
are both diverse and abundant, nearly 100 species having been recorded in or
near ‘E’ Quarry (G. Benfield, pers. comm.). This is due largely to the
artificially well-watered environment created by the open-cast mining, which
has extended below the water-table in places. Lower vertebrates include frogs,
tortoises, lizards, and snakes. Invertebrates are common and include the land
snail, Trigonephrus, shells of which are frequently found in local terrestrial
deposits of late Cenozoic age.
GEOLOGY
THE LANGEBAANWEG SUCCESSION
The Cenozoic deposits in the vicinity of Langebaanweg have been the
subject of many published and unpublished studies, partly because of the
economically important phosphate occurrences, and partly because they are in
places so richly fossiliferous. At its maximum development the local succession
comprises over 100 m of clastic sediments resting on a pre-Mesozoic bedrock.
These deposits are largely unconsolidated, and the earliest evidently date back
to the early or middle Miocene, followed by a substantial element dating from
the Pliocene, while the succession is completed by a nearly ubiquitous covering
of Quaternary sands.
The most recent account of this succession, and the only one that deals
with it in its entirety, is that of Rogers (1980), whose lithostratigraphy (Table 1)
is basically similar to that recognized in earlier studies (e.g. Hendey 1973,
1974a, 1976a; 1980; Vankard 19744, 1975a, 19756; Dingle ci aly 1979) hie
earlier studies centred largely on the phosphate and fossiliferous deposits of the
Varswater Formation (sensu Tankard 1974a), which are best known from the
exposures in “E’” Quarry.
The *E’ Quarry succession was initially interpreted largely on palaeontolo-
gical grounds (Hendey 1973, 1974a), and this was followed by detailed studies
of the deposits themselves. Tankard’s (1974a) definition, description and dis-
cussion of the Varswater Formation in ‘E’ Quarry and adjacent areas is the
standard reference on the subject. In a subsequent study, Tankard (1975a)
dealt with those deposits underlying the exposures in ‘E’ Quarry and included
them in the ‘Saldanha Formation’. He gave a useful review of all the informa-
tion then available in an unpublished thesis (Tankard 1975b).
The ‘E’ Quarry succession has since been discussed by Hendey (1976a,
1980), Dingle et al. (1979), and Rogers (1980), while the latter two studies also
take into account underlying and overlying deposits.
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 7
TABLE |
The lithostratigraphy of Cenozoic deposits in the vicinity of Langebaanweg, Cape Province.
Rogers 1980 This Report
Formations Subdivisions Subdivisions Age
Bredasdorp Langebaan Limestone Surface sands Pleistocene and
Member (in part) (including duricrusts) Holocene
Baard’s Quarry
fluviatile deposits
Late Pliocene or
early Pleistocene
Anyskop Late Pliocene
terrestrial deposits
Bredasdorp . Langebaan Limestone
Member (in part)
Anyskop
marine deposits
‘phosphorite member’ Pelletal Phosphorite
Member (PPM)
(including beds 3aS and | (including beds 3aS and
3aN) 3aN)
Varswater Early Pliocene
‘quartzose sand Quartzose Sand
member’ Member (QSM)
(including ‘peat bed’ & | (including floodplain, peat
‘clay bed’) & tidal flat beds)
‘gravel member’ Gravel Member (GM) Late Miocene
Saldanha
— Pre-GM deposits Middle Miocene
Elandsfontyn
Changes in the nomenclature of the subdivisions of the Varswater Forma-
tion have been frequent enough to cause confusion, which is unfortunate since
the lithostratigraphy recognized in the various studies has remained virtually
unchanged (Rogers 1980, table 3.8). The most distinct of the recent termino-
logies is that of Dingle et al. (1979), and, although it is concise and comprehen-
sive, the largely informal terminology used in all post-1975 palaeontological
studies is retained here, with the addition of some completely informal terms
which refer to pre- and post-Varswater Formation (sensu stricto) deposits.
The latter deposits have hitherto received relatively little attention, and are
clearly in need of more detailed study. Only those which have a bearing on the
present interpretation of the area’s geological history are discussed below.
Since Langebaanweg is located close to the coast, the local succession has
been considerably influenced by past changes in sea-level. Although this
succession itself provides evidence of the nature and timing of such changes,
these can best be interpreted on the basis of regional and global evidence.
Consequently, before proceeding to a more detailed account of deposits in the
Langebaanweg area, the record of relevant sea-level movements is examined.
8 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TERTIARY SEA-LEVEL MOVEMENTS ON THE WEST COAST OF SOUTH AFRICA
The nature of the Langebaanweg succession is such that it provides some
unique data relevant to the interpretation of southern African sea-level
movements. However, since the local record is both complemented and sup-
plemented by evidence from further afield, account will be taken here of such
evidence from the approximately 600 km west coast of South Africa. This
stretch of coast can conveniently be divided into two regions. They are the
south-western Cape coast between False Bay and the Olifants River, and the
Namaqualand coast between the Olifants and Orange Rivers (Fig. 1). A coastal
plain of varying width fronts on a more or less continuous series of mountains,
which separates this plain from an inland plateau.
Shorelines of Cenozoic age are preserved along most of this coast, and
much attention has been focused on them, mainly because of associated
occurrences of phosphate and diamonds. Although particular reference 1s made
to the shoreline successions in the Langebaanweg area of the south-western
Cape and the Hondeklip Bay—Kleinzee section of the Namaqualand coast,
successions in other areas may be as well known and as relevant.
There are altimetric similarities between the recorded shorelines of the two
regions, and correlations between them, and shorelines elsewhere, have been
suggested (e.g. Hendey 1969; Carrington & Kensley 1969). The inter-regional
correlations have been modified (Tankard 1975b, 1976), while the broader
correlations have generally been discounted (e.g. Wolff et al. 1973). While the
criticism of the latter correlations was justified, more recent studies have
indicated that there is a sound basis for correlating the west coast shoreline
succession with global phenomena of the Cenozoic. Consequently, broader
correlations are feasible. For example, Tankard (19755, 1976) has correlated
the lower and more recent of the west coast shorelines with high sea-levels of
the last interglacial, and it follows that they are the local equivalents of last
interglacial shorelines recorded elsewhere in the world.
This aspect of Tankard’s studies is irrelevant here, since it is only the older
and higher of the late Cenozoic shorelines which are represented in the
immediate vicinity of Langebaanweg. According to Tankard (1975b, 1976) the
older late Cenozoic shorelines in the south-western Cape are at lower eleva-
tions than their counterparts in Namaqualand, this difference being ascribed to
differential epeirogenesis along the west coast. However, the difference is here
regarded as more apparent than real, and there is, in fact, a remarkable
altimetric similarity between all the late Cenozoic shorelines of the two regions.
The Namaqualand succession is both well developed and well documented
over a distance of about 400 km, and there has been little disagreement about
the elevations of the shorelines constituting this succession. The difference of
opinion over the inter-regional correlation centres on the elevation of the
higher shorelines in the south-western Cape, and it stems from the nature of
the record of these shorelines. The record in the two regions differs simply
because of distinctive characteristics in their physical geography.
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG )
The Namaqualand coast has a more or less regular north-north-west to
south-south-east trend, and, in those areas where ancient shorelines are best
developed, it has a bedrock profile which rises at a generally moderate angle
from the present shoreline to beyond the limit of the highest late Cenozoic
shoreline (c. 100 m). The situation is more complex at the mouths of rivers,
where marine and river terraces merge, and where fluviatile and estuarine
deposits are represented. In general though, the ancient shorelines have a fairly
regular development, with associated deposits forming a readily identifiable
sequence between 0 and 100 m elevation. The shorelines themselves are
generally incised on bedrock. This situation can be largely ascribed to the
configuration of the bedrock, and the fact that it is uniformly comprised of
‘Namaqualand gneiss’ (see Haughton 1968).
By contrast, the coastal area of the south-western Cape is much less regular
due to the more complex solid geology (i.e. Basement Complex granites,
Malmesbury System metamorphics and intrusives, and Cape Supergroup
sedimentary rocks). The more resistant rocks, and those of the relatively young
and uplifted Cape Supergroup, form areas of high relief. The bedrock may thus
rise steeply from present sea-level to the hills and mountains of the region,
although there are also wide areas where bedrock is below present sea-level and
where it 1s overlain by largely unconsolidated late Cenozoic sediments.
The areas of high relief are particularly significant since at times of the
higher late Cenozoic sea-levels (c. 50 m and above) those in the east would
have formed an irregular and often steep-sided coast, whereas those in the west
would have formed two island complexes off the southern and central parts of
the region. The islands would also have had irregular and steep-sided coasts,
and would have provided some shelter to the adjacent mainland coast from the
open ocean. Mechanical erosion by wave action on this coast might, therefore,
have been reduced.
Shoreline environments in the south-western Cape, botn now and at times
of past high sea-levels, thus differ appreciably from those of the Namaqualand
coast. Consequently, their features and associated deposits are likely to differ
in some respects.
In Namaqualand wave-cut platforms on bedrock, on which gravels and
other sediments accumulate, often had their onshore limits marked by notches
and low cliffs. In other words, they exhibit many of the classic manifestations of
‘raised beaches’, and are usually easily identified and differentiated.
The situation in the south-western Cape is by no means as simple. In those
areas where bedrock is below present sea-level, wave-cut platforms were
developed on unconsolidated deposits. They were, therefore, insubstantial and
very susceptible to subsequent erosion. In addition, deposits on the platforms
were later to intermingle with essentially similar unconsolidated deposits accu-
mulated under very different circumstances (e.g. subaerially, by aeolian
action). Furthermore, gravels would not normally have been deposited on thse
platforms because of the absence of a source-rock, while notches and cliffs
10 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
would also have been absent, with impermanent coastal dunes having been
present instead. As a result, evidence of past high sea-levels over wide areas in
the south-western Cape may be difficult to detect.
In those areas where bedrock rose steeply into hills and mountains, both
on the mainland and on the islands, older and higher notches, wave-cut
platforms and superimposed deposits would tend to be undercut and eroded
away during subsequent periods when sea-level was at lower elevations. In
addition, shoreline features developed on the mainland coast in the lee of the
two island complexes might have been relatively insubstantial because of
lower-energy waves. Consequently, some of the more obvious manifestations of
‘raised beaches’ may also be obscured in these areas of the south-western Cape.
It is, therefore, not surprising that surveys have found evidence of the older
and higher late Cenozoic shorelines in this region either absent or equivocal.
For example, Davies (1973: 722) believed that there was no direct proof of
high shorelines in that part of the south-western Cape which includes the
Langebaanweg area (Fig. 2), claiming that ‘the existence of pleistocene sea-
levels at 90 m and 60 m in [this area seems to be] inferred from these levels in
Namaqualand’. The existence of a c. 90 m marine platform in the vicinity of
Elandsfontein south-east of Langebaanweg was suggested by Mabbutt (1956), a
view subsequently substantiated by Rogers (1980), although he records marine
deposits up to an elevation of only about 80 m. This platform is on unconsoli-
dated sediments and is an example of one which lacks some of the classic
features of such platforms. The existence of a 50-55 m high sea-level in the
vicinity of Langebaanweg has been demonstrated by Tankard (1974a—see
p. 40), while Mabbutt (1956: 50) recorded a marine terrace at ‘45-60 m’ ‘inland
from Saldanha Bay’. This one also lacks the features of the kind that Davies
and others have sought.
Davies (1972: 270) also found ‘few indications of quaternary shorelines
above 30 m’ in the southern part of the south-western Cape (i.e. around False
Bay and along the southern coast to Gansbaai). However, he does record some
evidence of high sea-levels in this area at 45-60 m and 75-94 m. The fact that
these records are insubstantial is probably due to the generally precipitous
nature of the coast in this area and the destruction of higher shoreline features
by subsequent erosion. In addition, the eastern shore of False Bay was
sheltered by islands that now constitute the Cape Peninsula.
The fact that there is some evidence of these higher shorelines in the
south-western Cape is a certain indication that they exist. The evidence for
their presence cannot be dismissed because the shorelines are not obvious over
wide areas, or because they lack some of the characteristics of shorelines
elsewhere. Uncertainty about the actual elevation of the higher shorelines, or
discrepancies between recorded elevations in the south-western Cape and
Namaqualand do not nullify the correlation between the two regions. They are
simply explained by the fact that the south-western Cape record is poorer than
that in Namaqualand. In the latter region the stillstands in marine transgres-
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG itt
sions and regressions are usually determinable, whereas over wide areas of the
south-western Cape this is not necessarily the case. In spite of the difference in
the nature of the records, elevations for the higher shorelines in the two regions
are in remarkably close agreement.
Other Namaqualand shorelines which are supposedly absent or poorly
developed in the south-western Cape are those which Carrington & Kensley
(1969) recorded at ‘29-34 m’ and ‘17-21 m’. There is, in fact, unequivocal
evidence for a shoreline at c. 30 m in ‘E” Quarry at Langebaanweg, while there
is an indication of a much later high sea-level at about 20 m in the Langebaan-
weg area (see below), which was probably the one responsible for the 15 m
marine terrace recorded in the same area by Mabbutt (1956).
It is worth noting in this connection that Tankard (19755, 1976) has
suggested that shorelines recorded at 10 m and 13 m in the south-western Cape
may be the equivalent of the 17-21 m shoreline in Namaqualand. He ascribed
the lower elevation of the south-western Cape beaches to differential epeiro-
genesis on the west coast. Since this factor is dismissed here, the discrepancy
must have another explanation. It is possible that the 10 and 13 m records in
the south-western Cape represent vestiges of a shoreline at a higher elevation
(? c. 20 m), since features associated with shorelines may extend over appreci-
able vertical and horizontal distances. Ideally only the maximum elevation of a
high sea-level should be recorded (i.e. the shoreline itself), but this is not
always possible.
It may be significant that, whereas the 17-21 m shoreline is present and
well developed at Hondeklip Bay, it is apparently either not represented at
Kleinzee, 80 km further north (Hallam 1964), or its deposits are mixed with,
and not distinguishable from, those of the older 30 m shoreline. This may be an
indication that the stillstand during which the 17-21 m shoreline was developed
was not prolonged, and that, consequently, it was only because of some
exceptional circumstance of local geography that sporadic records of it have
survived. This would be consistent with the nature of the record of the c. 20 m
shoreline in the Langebaanweg area (see below).
The situation on the west coast of South Africa may be summed up by the
statement that there is evidence for four relatively high late Cenozoic shore-
lines, which are for the sake of convenience referred to by their approximate
elevations of 90 m, 50 m, 30 m and 20 m. All represent ‘transgressive’ or
‘regressive complexes’ and deposits associated with them may therefore be
encountered at elevations above or below those given above.
It has generally been assumed that there is a direct correlation between the
age and the elevation of these shorelines, the oldest being the highest, and with
elevations decreasing with age. It is evident from the Langebaanweg record
that this is not the case. In this area the 30 m shoreline is the oldest, followed in
descending order of age by the 90 m, 50 m and 20 m shorelines. The
Langebaanweg succession is also important in providing evidence of the actual,
or likely, age of these shorelines.
12 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Up until a decade ago it was common practice to suggest correlations between
South African shoreline sequences with others elsewhere, notably the classic ones
of the Mediterranean Basin, which in turn were correlated with the glacial—
interglacial chronology of the Quaternary. Since then the nature and timing of
sea-level changes during the late Cenozoic have been much more thoroughly
documented, while the complexities imposed by tectonic instability have become
more widely appreciated, and the earlier correlations are no longer accepted.
A positive advance in long-range correlation of west coast shorelines came
with the studies of Tankard (19755, 1976), who suggested that most, if not all, of
the lower shorelines in the south-western Cape date back to the last interglacial.
The validity of this conclusion will not be examined here as none of the shorelines
is represented in the immediate vicinity of Langebaanweg. At issue though is the
age of the older and higher beaches, which have for the most part continued to be
regarded as being of Pleistocene age as well. Vertebrate fossils associated with the
higher shorelines in the Langebaanweg area indicate beyond all doubt that this
succession Is largely, or entirely, late Tertiary in age. In addition, the nature of the
Langebaanweg fossil assemblages allows for an interpretation of depositional
environments which is in good accord with the late Tertiary sea-level movements
around southern Africa recorded by Siesser & Dingle (1981). These are in turn in
close agreement with the global sea-level changes which were determined by Vail
et al. (1977). Siesser & Dingle (1981: 83) were concerned only with the ‘gross
movements of the seas around southern Africa during the Tertiary’, and details of
these movements during the late Tertiary determined on the basis of the
Langebaanweg record match those of the global changes (Vail et al. 1977; Vail &
Hardenbol 1979) remarkably well (Fig. 3).
Siesser & Dingle (1981: 83) summarized the sea-level movements relevant
to the Langebaanweg succession as follows: ‘The major Neogene transgression
began in the middle Miocene and probably reached its greatest extent in the
late Miocene or early Pliocene. The overall middle Miocene to early Pliocene
transgression was interrupted by a brief regressive pulse near the Miocene—
Pliocene boundary. Seas withdrew again in the late Pliocene.’
The interpretation of global sea-level changes of Vail & Hardenbol (1979)
differs slightly in that they have the major Neogene transgression commencing
during the early Miocene, reaching a climax early in the middle Miocene, and
followed by a middle to late Miocene regression, which took the form of three
major drops in sea-level, separated by periods when sea-level was more or less
static. The last of these major drops evidently coincides with the ‘brief regres-
sive pulse near the Miocene—Pliocene boundary’ recorded by Siesser & Dingle
(9S t-7183):
The sea-level movements which affected the Langebaanweg area are
referred to in the discussions which follow as:
|. ‘the early to middle Miocene transgression’,
2. ‘the middle to late Miocene regression’, with ‘the terminal Miocene
regression’ climaxing this event,
13
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG
‘syisodap a]nerany Arend s.pieeg °/
‘syisodap yeigso1i9} doyskuy “9 ‘Samureqosuery jo jseo-yinos wuoyeid surrey “¢ ‘syisodap ourewu doyshtuy “‘p ‘Ndd ‘NSO ‘€ ‘WD ‘7
‘ssodap JIO-ud ‘[ ‘UoIssaoons SamuLegasuey] sy) Aq poayeoIpUl asoy] puK ‘sasuRYS [9Ad]-BIS UPOL}Y UTOYINOS pu [eqo]s Jo splosdy “¢€ ‘SIF
JIGGIW
INIIOIN
14A31-W4S INITLSVOI ~~
INIS3ud INIS4ud
—<— 9NI11vI QNISiy ——e (w) NOILWAaT4
(GL6L loquapieH B [len 1893;e) (1861 a1Gurq B 4aSsaig 12248)
dVINO I1ViSVOI NO G4SVa8 1]3A41-V4S NOISSZIINS JIMNVVEIINVI JHL SJONVWHI 13A341-V4S
40 SFIONVHI JAAILV19H JO S4I1DAN 1V98019 AG G4ILVIIGNI SAONVHD 13A51-W4S NVIIHIVY NYAHLNOS
0
= S
> >
e [=
(=<) m
ES) —
=
=
i-
S4I1IAINIdNS
S419A9
14 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
3. ‘the early Pliocene transgression ,
4. ‘the late Pliocene regression’ and ‘the early Pleistocene transgression’.
According to the present interpretation of the Langebaanweg succession,
deposits beneath the floor of “E’ Quarry (‘pre-GM’) are associated with the
early to middle Miocene transgression; the 30 m shoreline (GM) in ‘E” Quarry
dates from the middle to late Miocene regression; the 90 m shoreline represents
the climax of the early Pliocene transgression, with a large proportion of the
deposits in the immediate vicinity of “E’ Quarry having been laid down during
this transgression; while the 50 m shoreline represents a stillstand in the late
Pliocene regression. The 20 m shoreline is problematical, having been deve-
loped either during a second stillstand in the late Pliocene regression, or at the
climax of the subsequent early Pleistocene transgression. The reasons for this
interpretation will become evident from the discussions which follow in this,
and later, sections of this report.
On the basis of the altimetric correlation of south-western Cape and
Namaqualand shorelines, it follows that the 29-34 m shoreline in Namaqualand
must be of late Miocene age. Carrington & Kensley (1969) believed this
shoreline dated from the middle Pleistocene, but there 1s no firm foundation for
this suggestion. The 29-34 m shoreline is represented at Hondeklip Bay, where
it is ‘thin’ and ‘discontinuous’ (Carrington & Kensley 1969: 190), and at
Kleinzee (Hallam 1964), where it is also poorly developed (personal observa-
tion). This poor development sets it apart from other elements in the Nama-
qualand, succession, which suggests that it might have been subjected to
erosion during a subsequent period when sea-level was at a higher elevation. In
other words, it is likely to pre-date the 90 m and 50 m high sea-levels, rather
than post-date them as suggested by Carrington & Kensley (1969).
Again on altimetric evidence, the early Pliocene 90 m, late Pliocene 50 m,
and the late Pliocene/early Pleistocene 20 m shorelines in the south-western
Cape are correlated with the *75—90 m’, ‘45-50 m’ and ‘17-21 m° ‘transgressive
complexes’ in Namaqualand, which Carrington & Kensley (1969: 190-191)
dated as ‘Basal’, ‘Lower’ and ‘Middle Pleistocene’ respectively.
According to the above interpretation of west coast shorelines, there are
none of middle Pleistocene age. There undoubtedly were glacio-eustatic sea-
level fluctuations during this period, and it is likely that during the interglacial
phases sea-level was higher than at present, just as it was during the last
interglacial, and apparently also during the mid-Holocene. However, Shackle-
ton & Opdyke (1973) have suggested that middle Pleistocene interglacial
sea-levels would have been no higher than the highest of the last interglacial
levels. Consequently, in tectonically stable area all traces of their presence
might have been obscured or destroyed during the last interglacial.
Coastal deposits about which there is some uncertainty are those in the
Hondeklip Bay area which in mining terminology are referred to as ‘E stage’
(Tankard 1975b). Although they, too, relate to periods of higher sea-level, they
have been regarded as distinct from the deposits of the ‘transgressive com-
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG iL)
plexes’, and both Carrington & Kensley (1969) and Tankard (19755) dated
them as late Tertiary. Since the higher of the ‘transgressive complexes’ are here
also regarded as late Tertiary, it is necessary to reconsider the age and
relationships of the ‘E stage’ deposits.
The ‘lower E stage’ deposits were correlated by Tankard (19755) with the
middle Miocene phosphatic rock horizon in ‘E’ Quarry at Langebaanweg. This
correlation is accepted here and the ‘lower E stage’ is regarded as remnant
evidence for the early to middle Miocene transgression on the Namaqualand
coast.
The ‘middle E stage’ deposits were correlated by Tankard (19755) with the
QSM of the Varswater Formation, and this is also accepted here, although the
correlation is extended to include the PPM of the Varswater Formation. The
QSM and PPM date from the same episode (i.e. the early Pliocene transgres-
sion), and there are no grounds for believing that the ‘middle E stage’ is
contemporary with the QSM rather than the PPM.
The age of the ‘middle E stage’ was partly inferred from remains of two
vertebrate taxa which were believed to be derived from this ‘stage’ and
redeposited in younger sediments. One of these taxa, Ceratotherium praecox, is
represented by a single rolled tooth (Hooijer 1972), which almost certainly is a
derived specimen (A. J. Carrington, pers. comm.). The second, ‘Prionodelphis’
(= Homiphoca) capensis, is represented by an isolated canine and a metatarsal.
They are unrolled, but Carrington believed them to be derived since they are
phosphatized specimens from non-phosphatic deposits. This is not a convincing
point of view since phosphatized fossils in situ in non-phosphatic deposits have
been recorded from ‘E’ Quarry. A new development concerning the Namaqua-
land ‘Homiphoca capensis’ is that the metatarsal has been found to be appreci-
ably longer than any of the now numerous specimens known from ‘E’ Quarry.
This suggests that the Namaqualand specimen represents a species which was
more advanced than the ‘E’ Quarry H. capensis. Consequently, it may well be
contemporaneous with the post-‘middle E stage’ deposits from which it and the
isolated canine were recovered.
Other deposits on the Namaqualand coast which were a likely equivalent
of the ‘middle E stage’ were those at Kleinzee from which was recovered the
small vertebrate fauna described by Stromer (193la, 1931b). This fauna is
evidently broadly contemporaneous with those from the QSM and PPM at
Langebaanweg (Hendey 1974a, 1978c, 1978d).
The ‘upper E stage’ deposits in the Hondeklip Bay area contain pelletal
phosphorite, which led Tankard (19755) to correlate it with the PPM of the
Varswater Formation. While this interpretation cannot be discounted, it is not
favoured here. According to one interpretation, the ‘E’ Quarry pelletal phos-
phorite is largely derived from a ‘mechanical erosion’ of the ‘Miocene bedded
authigenic phosphorite’ (Tankard 1975c: 375), and there is no reason to believe
that a similar deposit on the Namaqualand coast is necessarily contempora-
neous. While it, too, might have been derived from a Miocene phosphorite, the
16 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
erosion process in Namaqualand could well have pre- or post-dated deposition
of the Varswater Formation PPM. The same applies if the ‘upper E stage’ and
‘E’ Quarry pelletal phosphorites are authigenic.
Tankard (19755) records that the ‘upper E stage’ sediments contain a rich
fossil fauna, the molluscs of which indicate warm-water conditions, and that the
sediments are recorded only up to an elevation of 30 m. Perhaps significantly,
the GM of the Varswater Formation is also comprised of a mechanically eroded
Miocene phosphorite, although in the form of a gravel rather than pellet-sized
particles, it is also associated with a warm-water mollusc fauna (see p. 68), and
it also occurs up to an elevation of 30 m. By contrast, the PPM contains an
element which suggests cold-water conditions, and is recorded at elevations
well above 30 m.
The ‘essentially bedrock-depression infilling’ ‘upper E stage’ (Tankard
1975b: 277) may, in fact, represent a part of the ‘thin, discontinuous’ ‘29-34 m
beach’ of Carrington & Kensley (1960: 190), and is recorded as such in Table 2.
The temperature of the adjacent ocean at the time that the various
elements in the west coast succession were laid down is of interest. The revised
interpretation of the Namaqualand succession means that all those deposits
from which warm-water mollusc faunas are recorded date back to the late
Tertiary, while those with cold-water faunas are Quaternary.
There are, however, apparent exceptions to this general rule. The 75-90 m
shoreline deposits in Namaqualand are unfossiliferous (Tankard 1975b), and
consequently provide no direct evidence of water temperatures prevailing at
that time. However, deposits laid down in ‘E’ Quarry during an early stage in
the 90 m transgression (i.e. the QSM and PPM) contain fossils that indicate
cold-water conditions (see p. 68). There is thus likely to have been a similar
cold-water fauna on the Namaqualand coast at that time. This period of cold is
correlated with the aftermath of the Antarctic glacial maximum during the
terminal Miocene (see p. 70). Since the 90 m early Pliocene transgression
post-dates this glacial maximum, it is possible that cold conditions prevailed
only during the early stages of the transgression, and that by the time it reached
its peak sea temperatures were higher.
Tankard (1975b) recorded that the 17-21 m shoreline in Namaqualand is
associated with a cold-water fauna. If this shoreline is late Pliocene in age, then
it would be an exception to the ‘late Tertiary/warm water’ rule. On the other
hand, this may be interpreted as evidence that the 17-21 m shoreline dates
from the early Pleistocene, which would be in keeping with evidence from the
Langebaanweg area (see p. 41).
Although the present study was confined to the shorelines on the west
coast of South Africa, it is obvious that a similar reinterpretation of coastal
sucessions elsewhere in southern Africa is possible. For example, according to
the present interpretation and contrary to earlier opinion, the ‘Upper Terraces
Group’ on the southern coast of the Namib Desert, with their warm-water
faunas (Hallam 1964), are likely to be late Tertiary in age.
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG Ly
TABLE 2
Records of late Tertiary and early Pleistocene sea-level changes on the west coast of southern
Africa.
ZZ
oe) —~
_ |
72) n ww =
m | & @ | 2 y| SOUTH-WESTERN| HONDEKLIP KLEINZEE SOUTHERN
2196 7 “ CAPE BAY NAMIB DESERT
ea
Za as (2) (3) (4) (4), (S)
-
ae)
20 m
(Baard’s Quarry
fluviatile)
17-21 m ? in part
Pleistocene
T
Ql
oO
= eee cane
9)
2
a 50 m 40-64 m 15 m
(Anyskop (E Beach)
terrestrial)
@ 90 m 75-90 m 82-88 m 20-25 m
S| . |= |CE’ QSM, PPM;| (? including (F Beach)
= = Anyskop ‘middle E
a marine) stage)
= aha eee ee
g2 3
= 0 =
Es x at No deposits No deposits No deposits No deposits
ES 3
B
2 30 m 29-34 m 21-40 m 2 tanh
3 (‘E’ GM) (? including (D Beach)
ia ‘upper E stage’)
=
» 2 a Pre-GM ‘lower E stage’ 33 spe ee
37 oO & rock gravels’ an
ae ce on Arrisdrift fossil
= = site)
(1) Vail & Hardenbol (1979). (2) Langebaanweg area (this report); complementary data from
Davies (1972, 1973), Tankard (1974a) and Rogers (1980). (3) Carrington & Kensley (1969)
and Tankard (19755). (4) Hallam (1964) and Corvinus & Hendey (1978). (5) Downwarped
coast — terraces at lower elevations than those on South African coast.
18 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The poorly developed ‘D Beach’ (12 m) of the ‘Upper Terraces Group’ is
here tentatively correlated with the late Miocene 30 m shoreline on the South
African west coast, although it could instead be the equivalent of the late
Pliocene 20 m shoreline. The latter alternative is less likely because the 20 m
shoreline is apparently associated with a cold-water fauna (see above). In
addition, the poor development of the ‘D Beach’ may be an indication of
erosion during a subsequent high sea-level. which was suggested in the case of
the 30 m shoreline on the South African west coast.
The ‘F Beach’ (25 m) and ‘E Beach’ (15 m) are here correlated with the
South African west coast 90 m and 50 m shorelines.
The ‘false bedrock gravels’, which extend northwards from the mouth of
the Orange River, evidently pre-date the ‘Upper Terraces’ (Hallam 1964),
and could therefore date back to the middle Miocene. They are the likely
equivalent of the pre-GM deposits at Langebaanweg and the ‘lower E stage’
of the Namaqualand coast. In addition, they are probably the coastal equiva-
lent of the middle Miocene river terrace(s) at Arrisdrift. 30 km inland from
the mouth of the Orange River (Corvinus & Hendey 1978; Hendey 1978b).
It is worth noting in this connection that the bedrock elevation of the chan-
nel which contains the middle Miocene fossils at Arrisdrift is 40 m, while the
river level is 7 m above sea-level. It follows that their coastal equivalent
should be at 33 m, which is, in fact, the elevation of the base of the cliff
against which the ‘false bedrock gravels’ are banked (Hallam 1964). It may
also be significant that while there are four river terraces recognized at
Arrisdrift (Corvinus & Hendey 1978), there are also four marine terraces of
late: Tertiary age on: the coast (les the DD’, = and Fo Beaches andmile
‘false bedrock gravels’).
The Arrisdrift fossil occurrence is of particular significance in the interpre-
tation of the southern African west coast succession, since it provides the most
reliable evidence of the time at which the early to middle Miocene transgres-
sion began to result in deposition on the present coast. The Arrisdrift fossils
date back about 16 Ma (Hendey 19785), that is, to the early part of the middle
Miocene.
The correlation of the west coast shorelines suggested here is summarized
in Table 2.
GEOLOGICAL HISTORY AND DEPOSITIONAL ENVIRONMENTS OF THE LANGEBAANWEG
SUCCESSION.
As indicated earlier, the Langebaanweg succession is most conveniently
interpreted in relation to the southern African sea-level changes recorded by
Siesser & Dingle (1981).
The pre-Miocene sea-level changes
There is no evidence in the Langebaanweg area (Figs 2,4) for any deposits
dating back to the early Tertiary. Two marine transgressions are recorded
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 19
rerein PRESENT
St Helena Bay Berg River
ae Phosphate
mines
LBW Langebaanweg
station
AK Anyskop
‘© Quarry
E Quarry Baards Quarry
Contours in metres
above present sea-
level
Saldanha Bay
Mk
Fig. 4. The Langebaanweg area today.
during this period, one in the late Paleocene/early Eocene and the other in the
late Eocene (Siesser & Dingle 1981).
There are records of Eocene marine deposits at 70 and 163 m on the west
coast in the southern Namib Desert (Bogenfels and Buntfeldschuh—Siesser &
Dingle 1981), as well as possible Eocene deposits at about 140 m at Buffels
Bank (Kamaggas) west of Springbok (South African Museum records), and of
uncertain elevation at Quaggaskop near Vanrhynsdorp (Lamont 1947). If the
latter records are indeed Eocene, then the shorelines of this period must have
abutted the western escarpment in Namaqualand, whereas in the downwarped
southern Namib they approached the present coast near Bogenfels following
the east-west trend of the Klinghardt Mountains in this area (Fig. 1). The
implication is that during the Eocene transgressions much of the south-western
Cape, including the Langebaanweg area, was below sea-level, the coastline
being along higher ground many kilometres east of Langebaanweg.
There was then a major regression spanning the entire Oligocene, and much
or all of the early Miocene, when sea-level reached several hundred metres
below that of the present (Siesser & Dingle 1981). This is likely to have been the
period of major continental erosion during which all traces of early Tertiary
sediments in the Langebaanweg area, and elsewhere along the west coast, were
removed. It might have been during this period that the bedrock in the
Langebaanweg area was eroded down to its present elevation of about —40 m.
The early to middle Miocene transgression
The presence of early Miocene vertebrates in fluviatile and lacustrine
deposits near the coast of South West Africa between Bogenfels and Lideritz
20 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
(Stromer 1926; Hopwood 1928; Hamilton & Van Couvering 1977; Hendey
1978b) is a possible indication that at least this section of the west coast was
then being influenced by the early to middle Miocene transgression. The
southern Namib region was certainly being influenced by this transgression
early in the middle Miocene, when the fossil assemblage at Arrisdrift was
deposited on a river terrace (Corvinus & Hendey 1978: Hendey 19785).
Apparently contemporaneously the ‘false bedrock gravels’ of the southern
Namib coast were being laid down, and these are in turn correlated with the
‘lower E stage’ and related deposits on the Namaqualand coast. and the
pre-GM deposits in the Langebaanweg area.
The pre-GM deposits are known only from boreholes, although small
exposures of their uppermost levels formerly exised in ‘C’ and *E’ Quarries.
About 70 m of these deposits are now known, ranging in elevation from about
—40 m to +30 m (Rogers 1980), although until recently only the upper 15-20
m had been placed on record (Tankard 19755). The sequence is apparently
comprised largely of deposits laid down under terrestrial environments, but at
least in the case of the upper levels studied by Tankard (19756: 34), ‘it is likely
that these deposits formed close to sea level’ during ‘a slow transgression .
Tankard found evidence in the sequence of a ‘marine incursion’, which was ‘a
minor event of very short duration. . . readily explained by breaching of a
barrier’. A second marine incursion ‘was accompanied by phosphate minerali-
zation to form a phosphatic sandstone’ (Tankard 19755: 34).
Peats in the succession have yielded abundant pollens which indicate a
forested environment, including subtropical elements such as palms (J. A.
Coetzee, pers. comm.), which was very different from the treeless sclerophyll
(fynbos) vegetation of the area today. Macroplant remains also include rem-
nants of trees. The plant fossils provide no direct evidence of age. but the
vegetation is consistent with a local one of Miocene age (Coetzee 1978).
The phosphatic sandstone mentioned above is recorded up to an elevation
of 30 m, and is a significant element in the succession. It contributed to
Tankard’s (1975a: 262) dating of at least this element as ‘middle Miocene
(Langhian)’, and provided some indication of the likely marine environment at
the time that it was developed (Tankard 1974a; Birch 1977). In addition. its
resistant nature served to protect the underlying deposits from erosion during
the marine regression that followed during the late Miocene.
The 30 m elevation of the phosphatic sandstone recorded in *E° Quarry
does not necessaily reflect the maximum elevation reached by the early to
middle Miocene transgression. If this phosphatic rock formed in an open shelf
environment as suggested by Birch (1977, fig. 4), then the ‘E’ Quarry area
might have been as much as 200 m below the sea-level of that time.
Another indication that this transgression reached an elevation substan-
tially higher than 30 m is the presence on the southern Namib Desert coast of
apparently contemporaneous deposits at 33 m (Table 2). It is evident from the
elevations of the late Tertiary shorelines post-dating the 33 m terrace that there
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG ul
has been appreciable downwarping of this coast. For example, the suggested
equivalent of the 90 m early Pliocene shoreline on the South African west coast -
is at an elevation of only 20-25 m in the southern Namib Desert, and drops to
even lower elevations northwards from the Orange River (Table 2; Hallam
1964). The implication is that the 33 m terrace is now also much lower than its
as yet unrecorded counterpart on the South African west coast.
It is, therefore, unlikely that the 30 m record at Langebaanweg and the
33 m record in the southern Namib represent the maximum elevation of the
early to middle Miocene transgression. There is apparently no way of determin-
ing this elevation on the basis of available evidence, and this is reflected in the
Langebaanweg record represented in Figure 3. However, it is possible that the
?Eocene marine deposits at Buffels Bank and Quaggaskop in Namaqualand
(see p. 19) are, in fact, of middle Miocene age. The former are at an elevation
of about 140 m, and although the elevation of the Quaggaskop deposits is
uncertain, it is apparently about 120 m. The middle Miocene transgression
might therefore have reached an elevation in the order of 120-140 m.
The middle to late Miocene regression
The middle to late Miocene regression affected the Langebaanweg area by
causing erosion of deposits laid down during the preceding transgression. The
middle Miocene phosphatic sandstone exposed in ‘C’ and ‘E’ Quarries, and
encountered in boreholes to the south and south-west of these quarries, was
reduced by wave action to a gravel comprising pebble-, cobble- and boulder-
sized elements. The north-easterly limit of this gravel, which was briefly
exposed in trenches on the floor of ‘E’ Quarry during 1972, occurs at an
elevation of about 30 m. The gravel itself forms the basal unit of the Varswater
Formation (i.e. the Gravel Member—GM).
The GM evidently had a complex history. For example, Butzer (1973: 238)
recognized five stages in its development, excluding the formation of the
original phosphatic sandstone. They are:
1. ‘Reworking of [the primary middle Miocene] phosphatic rock.’
2. ‘Induration of the previous agglomeration with phosphate’ to form
what is here termed the secondary phosphatic rock of the GM (Fig. 5).
3. ‘Reworking of this new generation of [phosphatic rock] into cobbles
and blocks.’
4. ‘Partial carbonate cementation and iron-enrichment of the previous
agglomerate’.
5. “Reworking of all the previous products of induration into a matrix of
unconsolidated, white (1OYR) medium-to-coarse-grade sands.’
Assemblages of marine fossils indicative of sandy and rocky beach environ-
ments occur in the secondary phosphatic rock (stage 2), and in the unconsoli-
dated sands (stage 5). These were termed ‘Marine Faunal Units 1 and 2’
respectively by Hendey (1974a), and their invertebrate components were
DD ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
14 Ol
it
Alii
it
VLU
1
7
AAU
Fig. 5. A Gravel Member (GM) boulder of primary phosphatic rock (labelled
section), encrusted with fossiliferous secondary phosphatic rock.
described by Kensley (1972), with some additional taxa having been recorded
by Tankard (1974a, 1975b).
Evidently an appreciable period of time elapsed between stages 1 and 5 in
the development of the GM, and throughout this period the deposits must have
been at, or near, sea-level. Since the primary phosphatic rock might also have
been formed in a similar environment, it is possible that sea-level was at an
elevation of about 30 m for much of the middle to late Miocene.
However, this interpretation is not favoured and it seems much more likely
that the early to middle Miocene transgression, during which the primary
phosphatic rock was formed, reached a much higher elevation, as indicated
above.
Another possible interpretation of the history of the GM is that it developed
during a temporary stillstand in the middle to late Miocene regression. Accord-
ing to Vail & Hardenbol (1979) this regression was interrupted by two periods
when sea-level was nearly static, one between 13 and 10 Ma (cycle TM2.3 of
supercycle Te), and the other between 10 and 6,6 Ma (cycle TM3.1 of supercycle
Te). Sea-level during the former period was comparable to that during the
Langhian (Vail & Hardenbol 1979: fig. 8), the age when the primary phosphatic
rock was formed (Tankard 1975a), and this coincidence, coupled with the
coincident occurrence of the primary and secondary phosphatic rocks in ‘E’
Quarry, may indicate that the GM dates from cycle TM2.3. On the other hand,
the elevation of the GM relative to that of subsequent high sea-levels recorded in
the Langebaanweg area suggests that the GM was. developed during the cycle
TM3.1, that is, immediately prior to the terminal Miocene regression.
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 23
It is also possible that one or more of the later stages in the development
of the GM took place during the subsequent early Pliocene transgression.
While this possibility cannot be dismissed, it is not favoured here, because both
invertebrate assemblages of the GM include warm-water taxa, suggesting sea
temperatures consistent with the late Miocene, whereas at least during the early
stages of the early Pliocene transgression sea temperatures were lower (see
p. 16). In addition, the repeated reworking of previous products of deposition
observed by Butzer (1973) is more consistent with a regression than a transgres-
sion.
A considerable amount of attention has been focused on the origin and age
of phosphatic deposits, including those in South Africa (e.g. Tankard 1974b;
Birch 1977; Siesser 1978) and further investigation of the primary and second-
ary phosphatic rocks of the GM may provide additional evidence relevant to
the history of this horizon. Tankard’s (1975a) belief that the phosphatic rock
horizons on the west coast are all of middle Miocene age is now discounted
(Siesser 1978; Dingle et al. 1979). This probably is indeed the age of the
primary phosphatic rock represented in the GM, but the secondary phosphatic
rock may be appreciably younger. Siesser (1978) has concluded from evidence
on the South African continental shelf that phosphate deposition also occurred
during the late Miocene and into the Pliocene. Although there is at present no
direct evidence linking this period of phosphate deposition with the secondary
phosphatic rock, such a link would be consistent with the inferred late Miocene
age of the GM.
It was suggested elsewhere (Hendey 1976a) that the GM includes some
fossils derived from pre-existing deposits. This suggestion was based on the
belief that the GM was broadly contemporaneous with the overlying QSM and
PPM, and the presence in the GM of some teeth tentatively identified as
belonging to the late Miocene horse, Hipparion primigenium (Hendey 1976a),
which is distinct from the H. cf. baardi and H. ct. namaquense found in
overlying deposits (Hooijer 1976). However, now that the GM 1s interpreted as
a late Miocene deposit, the H. cf. primigenium teeth may well be contempora-
neous with its deposition. If so, then the GM can be no older than 12,5 Ma, the
earliest date at which Hipparion could have entered Africa (Churcher &
Richardson 1978).
The reworking and accumulation of deposits constituting the GM ceased
with the retreat of the sea from the Langebaanweg area, probably at the time
of the terminal Miocene regression. Tankard (1974a) suggested that this retreat
was caused by the development of a sandbar to the south of ‘E’ Quarry during
a temporary stillstand in the transgression which led to the deposition of the
Varswater Formation. Tankard has demonstrated that such a bar did, indeed,
exist during the period of deposition of the QSM and PPM, while it is certain
that these elements in the succession were deposited during a transgression.
However, the stillstand postulated by Tankard is here interpreted as a regres-
sion (i.e. the terminal Miocene one), and it is believed that the bar was built up
24 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
only during the subsequent transgression (i.e. the early Pliocene one), when a
river began feeding sediment into the area.
The interpretation of the sea-level history at that time as ‘transgression—
regression—transgression’ over a prolonged period, rather than a shorter period
of ‘transgression-stillstand—renewed transgression’, was the key to the correla-
tion of the ‘E’ Quarry succession with certain global events of the late Miocene
and early Pliocene (see p. 70). This, in turn, suggested a correlation with the
record of sea-level movements around southern Africa as interpreted by Siesser
& Dingle (1981), and to the global sea-level changes recorded by Vail ef al.
(1977) and Vail & Hardenbol (1979).
Hitherto the deposits of ‘E’ Quarry have been interpreted as having been
laid down during a single transgression, probably that which resulted in
deposition of Dingle’s (1971, 1973) unit T, (e.g. Bishop 1980). The revised
interpretation of events indicates that while the OSM and PPM are referable to
T,, the underlying deposits correlate with unit T,. These units are respectively
correlated with sea-level supercycles Tf and Te of Vail & Hardenbol (1979).
The early Pliocene transgression
Introduction
Whatever the history of the GM and the period immediately following its
deposition, it is clear that thereafter there was a major change in the local
environment. This was brought about by another marine transgression, during
the early stages of which a river met the sea in the immediate vicinity of °*E”
Quarry and was responsible for discharging most of the sediment making up the
QSM and PPM of the Varswater Formation. The nature of these sediments was
dependent on the position of the river channel, which moved northwards as the
transgression progressed.
The QSM and PPM are by far the best documented deposits in the
Langebaanweg area (Table 3). The largest assemblages of fossils from this area
are from these deposits and they provide the evidence of age (c. 5,0 Ma) which
indicates their association with the early Pliocene transgression (see p. 94).
Judging from fossil evidence and the likely relationship of these deposits to
others in the vicinity, the OSM and PPM date from the earlier part of this
transgression. The earliest phase in this transgression is not represented by
deposits in the area, while towards its climax the area was largely, or entirely,
inundated by the sea. The only surviving record of local deposition during the
latter period are some of the deposits making up Anyskop, which overly the
PPM south of ‘E’ Quarry.
Three distinct positions have been recognized for the lower course of the
river during the period of deposition of the QSM and PPM. There were
intervals of undetermined duration between the successive positions of the river
channel. These intervals are reflected by evolutionary changes in taxa common
to more than one set of deposits associated with the channel positions (Hendey
1978d, 1980; Gentry 1980; De Muizon & Hendey 1980).
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 25
When the OSM was laid down, the river channel was to the south-east and
south of ‘E’ Quarry, its estuary being immediately north of the sand-bar
recorded by Tankard (1974a) (Figs 6-7). The configuration of the estuary and
the bar separating it from the sea was then probably similar to the analogous
area of the Berg River today, the principal difference being in the position of
the sea relative to the estuary. The sea is to the north of the present estuary,
which has a north-east to south-west trend, but in QSM times the bar had a
more or less east to west trend, with the sea to the south.
The second position of the channel was about 500 m further north, and it
cut diagonally across ‘E’ Quarry from north-east to south-west. The northward
movement of the channel was probably caused by the transgressing sea breach-
ing the sand-bar. The fossiliferous deposits of the second channel constitute bed
3aS of the PPM, while other largely unfossiliferous deposits make up part of
the undifferentiated element of the PPM. These deposits were laid down over
the OSM, filling the area north of the original bar. The extent of the bar was
thus considerably increased, both vertically and horizontally (Fig. 7). The
sea-floor beyond the river mouth was marked by a submarine channel (Fig. 6).
Later still the channel shifted northwards again, but this time the change was
slight. It might have affected only a relatively short section of the river, perhaps
as little as the last kilometre from its mouth, with the mouth itself probably
remaining in essentially the same position as in bed 3aS times. The new channel
still had a north-east to south-west trend, although once beyond the northern
perimeter of the quarry it swung southwards and truncated the south-westerly
parts of bed 3aS (Fig. 6). The deposits of the third channel. and associated
fossiliferous ones, constitute bed 3aN of the PPM, and once again contemporary
unfossiliferous deposits are included in the undifferentiated element of the PPM.
Thereafter, the river must have continued to discharge sediment (PPM
undifferentiated) into the area for a while, but as the transgression progressed,
the river mouth must have moved further north or east from the *“E*° Quarry
area, with a consequent diminution in the influence of the river on local
sedimentation. At the time of the climax of the transgression (90 m), the river
mouth must have been many kilometres away. The final extent of local
deposition at this time cannot be determined since the PPM in ‘E* Quarry. and
to the north and east. was truncated to a maximum of 50-55 m by erosion
during the subsequent late Pliocene regression. The only other recorded local
deposits dating from the early Pliocene transgression were some of those
comprising Anyskop (see below).
It has previously been assumed that the progressive northward shift in the
river channel during QSM and PPM times was caused by the rise in sea-level
during the transgression. A second factor involved may have been the build-up
in a northerly direction of the sand-bar separating the estuary from the sea.
Substantial sedimentation was then taking place, and this, together with the
rising sea, might have affected the lower course of the river. especially in the
case of the slight change from bed 3aS to bed 3aN.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
26
yueulWOpeid
SO}VIQSIOA =: [VIIJSOIIO} «= S pues
oneydsoyd Ul UOWUWOS ssoy
SUIWIODIQ Jnq ‘JURpUNQe S|ISSOJ
pues oneyd
-soyd ojur spiemdn suIpeis
sey jissoy} pue pues zjienb
PaPIAIp
-qns
jou
yueg IOAlI pue jouuvyo JdAII
quosoid Ajqeqoid
sud][od ynq ‘popso0deI $91¥1G9}10A
AjUO ‘]]J] JO YINos uUOUWUWOS
SSO] AJPAISSoISOId S]ISSOJ
suOzIjoy Avid pue
pues zjienb Jopun sowitjawWo0sS
‘AeJO pue pues snoasdeuogieo
puod pue ysiew
Aejo pue
JUCUIWIOPSId Sa}e1Q9}JOA [P11] | PUBS SNOSDeUOGIeS OJU! SUIPCIS | A] PU J] USOMJOq J}RIPOWIO}UI Ill
-S9119} PUB S]BIS ‘ UOWIUOD SjISsOJ | Sey jIssoJ} pue pues zjienb
UdddWNAAY ALIYOHdSOHdG 1WV14d114dd
yueuIWwOpeld Wdd
S3}VIQSJIOA [C1I}S9119} y901 a}eydsoyd jo 99] UI pue JQUUBYD J9ATI Il
pue sjeas ‘juepunqe sjissoj| “uo se] jISsoJ pue pues z}1enb
tay td
yUvUTWOpeid
SO}CIQO}IOA [CII}SOIIO} 4901 a3eydsoud uo pues Adkej9 yurg JOA I
pue sjeos ‘yuepunqe sjissoj
ic
aie AI9A S3yeIq payenusoJayipun 1d
-OJIOA “S|ISSOJOIOIL JUITBU IWOS pues oeydsoyd j1O}}] QUITBUT ‘Wdd a-V
ou
=®
SAONTNAUNIIO TIsso4 SLNAWIGIS OLLSINALOVUVH) SLNINNOWIANY TVNOILISOdIG }JOda1 SIU} Pu ORG] ABPUSH ~ oO
sas)
~
| :
=
=
“‘SOMULLQISUP |
‘AIIENG) .q, “UONPUNOT JO}eMSIVA 34} JO Wedd PUB WSO 94) UL S9dUdTINIDO |ISSOJ PUB SJUSWIPIS SIVSIIBJOVIeYS ‘SJUIUUOIIAUS |BUOI}ISOdaq
€ dav
Li
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG
"(¢ “8 “6161 7/2 /2 a[8ulq 92S)
syun AleUdUUIpPaIs JO Sade} 918 (AT O01 [ INSO Puke AT O1 | N&E Wedd ‘S}ug;eAinba sJ194y} pue) pa O} [| pue ¢q pu ZC SUOISIAIPqns su
UMOUy 30U
yueUIWOpald so}eIq
-SJIOAUI «~JoyeMYsos] pue sUIIe
-njso “oulIeU 2JUBpUNQe S|ISso}
UuOWWOS
$d} BIQIJIOA [BII{S91I9} ‘JURUTLUOp
-o1d suajjod ‘yuepunqe syjissoj
yUeUIWOpold
SOIBIQIJIOA [BIISOIIO}
>UOWWOS SdWI}IWIOS SjISSOJ
yueuIWwopaid
SOJCIQOIIOA [CII}S9II9}
:jUBpUNge SOUWIIJOWIOS s]ISso}
uMOUy JOU
ys Appnur
Aejo pue pues snosseuoqgies
pues z}1enb
(Ajzenb jo yynos
pue jsea-yyNOS s}sIxo Ajqeqoid
ynq pasodxd jOU) JOUUeYD JOATI
syey [ep!)
Ysieul
JOUUBYD JIAIJ 0} JOSO]O UTe]d
-pooy ¢ ‘| JO uorerseA o[qissod
(jouUvYS BSeUIeIP IOUIW
‘puod °3°d) S}UOWUOJIAUSOJOIUU
poyersosse = JIM
‘ulejdpooy
"10N
(Al) va
fe)
IIT S cd
v2)
=
N
= = o)
oA
IT WSO y rae
iw)
=
™
K<
(V)I cS
v2)
14
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
28
(¢ “S14 “PPL6] preyurL wos
podepy) “UMop pir] 919M NPE Wdd Pur “Sve Wdd “(NSO) Joquiayy purs dsozyeNd ay) UdYM SAUIl] dy] Je JIUUBYS dUTIIeUIQNS B pUe sjauURYO
JAM BY} JO SUONISOd posiajur ayeoIpul soul] PaMOLIW “(WWdd) Joquiay asoydsoyg [e12@]][9g ay} JO aseq ay} yo dew imojuod aInjong “9 “SIF
AYHVND 3,
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 29
While the bed 3aS deposits overlie and are generally at a higher elevation
than those of the OSM, the situation in respect of bed 3aN relative to bed 3aS
is more equivocal. Some of the bed 3aN deposits are higher than any of bed
3aS, but nowhere was the former clearly superimposed on the latter. In fact,
there was a lateral (westerly) truncation of bed 3aS by bed 3aN. and both were
superimposed on the OSM (Fig. 6, Table 8).
The actual elevation of sea-level when the river was in its various positions
cannot be accurately determined. The fossiliferous deposits of the OSM and PPM
range between elevations of 30 m and 40 m, which is a possible indication of the
magnitude of the sea-level rise which took place during their deposition. However,
the actual rise might have been less, since much of the deposition associated with the
3aS and 3aN channels apparently took place during floods when river levels were
high. Not even the elevation of the OSM tidal mudflat bed (QSM I—Table 3) is of
assistance in resolving this issue, partly because this bed was truncated by overlying
deposits, and partly because nothing is known of the local tidal range at that time.
This range may have been large because of the estuarine situation of the mud-flat
bed. The complex nature of tides in estuaries is well known, with ranges being
markedly affected by the volume and strength of the river flow. In addition, it is
possible that at the time that the QSM was laid down, the sea connection between
the present Saldanha and St Helena Bays was incomplete, in which case the ancient
Berg River, with its seasonal floods, would have discharged into a large bay, a
combination of circumstances which can also affect tidal ranges.
The OSM
The first of the three positions of the river channel was not exposed in *E’
Quarry, although it is possible that some of the deposits in the south and
south-east of the quarry were laid down in an enlarged flood-season channel.
The proximity of the channel to this area is indicated by the nature of the
deposits in the south-central part of the quarry, and, to a lesser extent, by other
exposures of the QSM on the floor of the quarry. Three main depositional
environments (i.e. facies) of the QSM are recognized. All were truncated
during the initial stages of the deposition of overlying deposits and _ their
original depth and areal extent can no longer be determined. Each of the facies
is characterized by distinctive sediments and fossil assemblages (Table 3).
In the south-central part of ‘E’ Quarry there survives the vestiges of a
tidally inundated mud-flat bed (QSM III of this paper, or Layer E3 of Dingle et
al. 1979). The fossil assemblage of this muddy silt includes an extensive
invertebrate assemblage which was described and discussed by Kensley (1977).
Vertebrate remains are rare and are comprised mostly of small bone fragments
washed in from elsewhere. The most remarkable of the non-invertebrate fossils
are fragments of bird egg-shell, which, like some of the invertebrates, retain
traces of their original colour. The invertebrates include terrestrial, freshwater,
estuarine and marine species, and comprise an assemblage typical of a mud-flat
environment (Kensley 1977).
30 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
EARLY PLIOCENE (A)
ee floodplain X fy
=| salt marsh X /j
Stidal Mack /4;
EARLY PLIOCENE (B) ,
Fig. 7. The Langebaanweg area during the early Pliocene (sea-level cycle TP1). A. Period of
deposition of the QSM (X-‘E’ Quarry exposures of the QSM). B. Period of deposition of the
PPM 3aN (Y-‘E’ Quarry exposures of the PPM 3aN). (See Fig. 4 for key.)
Immediately adjacent to the mud-flats bed, largely in a north-easterly
direction, is the more extensive ‘peat’ bed of the QSM (QSM II of this paper,
or Layer E2 of Dingle er al. 1979). These black, carbonaceous sands and clays
represent a marsh deposit. Their fossil content has yet to be analysed in detail,
but they are rich in both pollens and vertebrate fossils. They were briefly
discussed by Hendey (1976a: 225-226) and Rich (1980).
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG Sil
Elsewhere to the north-west, north, north-east, and east are exposures of
the quartzose sands which are the main component of the QSM (QSM I of this
paper, or Layer E1 of Dingle et al. 1979). These deposits apparently accumulated
on the floodplain of the river, and were therefore partly subaerially and partly
subaqueously deposited (Hendey 1974a: 32-33, 35-36, 349-353: 1976a:
223-224). It is believed that the inundation of these deposits during flood periods
was gentle rather than torrential. In other words, the area was not affected by the
strong currents in, and immediately adjacent to, the main river channel, but was
inundated by slow-moving backwaters which overflowed from the main channel.
The representation of fossils in QSM I is variable both in terms of condition of
specimens and associations of taxa. Apart from indicating the subaerial and
subaqueous conditions of dry and wet seasons respectively, they suggest the
existence of such microenvironments as ponds and minor drainage channels
(Hendey 1976a: 223, 226). Terrestrial vertebrates predominate, and there is good
evidence that at least some, and perhaps even most, were subaerially accumulated
(Hendey 1974a: 351; 1976a: 224). On the other hand, some subaqueous deposition
also took place, together with subaqueous disturbance of previously deposited
materials. This would account for the occasional presence of aquatic species in
association with terrestrial ones, and the nature of certain of the occurrences.
Although a wide variety of taxa are represented in QSM I, the most
characteristic are a tortoise (Chersina sp.), a francolin (gen. and sp. not
determined), a rhinoceros (Ceratotherium praecox), a pig (Nyanzachoerus cf.
pattersoni (or kanamensis)), and a boselaphine antelope (Mesembriportax (or
Miotragocerus) acrae). The tortoise is the most commonly represented of these
taxa. Remains of this animal were sometimes present in astonishing quantity,
and they occasionally occurred where no other fossils were obvious (see p. 78).
While much of QSM I was probably deposited some distance from the main
channel of the river, this was not the case with the more southerly and
south-easterly exposures. Here there are areas of coarser-grained sands, as well
as clayey sands, while the associated fossils differ in both condition and species
representation. Amongst the species recorded from these deposits are a seal
(Homiphoca capensis) and giraffids (Giraffa sp., Sivatherium hendeyi*), which
are otherwise characteristic of QSM II and the channel deposits of the PPM. The
seal is known from elsewhere in OSM I, but there it is represented mainly by the
remains of very young individuals, whereas in the other deposits mentioned
above, sub-adults and adults predominate. The latter probably died in, or near
one of, their natural habitats (i.e. the river channel), whereas the very young
ones of QSM I might have been carried away from their nursery by terrestrial
carnivores.
To sum up, the QSM was laid down when the river channel was largely to
the south and south-east of ‘E’ Quarry, where it was separated from the sea by
a sand-bar (Fig. 7). Remnants of a tidal mud-flat deposit laid down on the
* Churcher (1978) suggested that S$. hendeyi is conspecific with S. maurusium, but it is here
regarded as sufficiently distinct to warrant separate specific status.
32 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
northern margins of the estuary are preserved, as are remnants of an imme-
diately adjacent salt marsh. Elsewhere there are deposits which were inundated
by floods during the wet season. The picture that emerges is the almost classic
one of an estuarine environment and its associated sedimentary facies. The
present Berg River estuary appropriately provides an ideal modern analogue.
Perhaps the most significant characteristic that distinguishes the QSM from
the PPM is that the former are non-phosphatic. This is simply explained by the
fact that the development of authigenic phosphate did not occur in those facies
of the QSM exposed in ‘E’ Quarry (i.e. floodplain, salt marsh and tidal flat).
However, there evidently was phosphate deposition in other local environments
which existed at the time that the “E’ Quarry QSM deposits were laid down.
For example, the deposits comprising the sand-bar which separated the estuary
from the sea are phosphatic (Tankard 1974a), as are those which accumulated
in the marine littoral environment. The latter environment encroached on the
‘E’ Quarry exposures of the QSM as the transgression progressed, and resulted
in the deposition of the PPM in this area. There was a coincident north-easterly
migration of the estuarine facies in this depositional system (i.e. the QSM).
The QSM and PPM therefore represent lithostratigraphic units, and not
chronostratigrahic units (Fig. 8), and may be termed ‘magnafacies’, while any
chronostratigraphic units which may yet be defined would be termed ‘parva-
facies’ (see Krumbein & Sloss 1963: 320, fig. 9-6). It is fortuitous that none of
the PPM deposits laid down contemporaneously with the QSM have yet been
exposed in ‘E’ Quarry, while the QSM counterparts of the ‘E’ Quarry PPM
deposits are also not exposed, and may, in fact, no longer be preserved.
'
E’ QUARRY =
ne =
m= oa
= Se pe igs
i-5 ec —
<x So —
= =
oO Ls yv~o — 2
= i 2 & OF a)
= ° oo S oo g c
° ° fe} ° ° °
c Oey Seo oe? ke
9° ° °° fe} © fe} w
Ls ° ° ° o
n ° ° oo ° oo °
Oo ° fe} 9,0 °,0 ° =
° oo
fe}
2 eek PPM »50 x
on BO O69 859° 9 =
cre 5 ©9 6 89 5 GO
= — 959 9,59 0,0
oz =— oO o—|]-<0 S70 te Oo =O
°o? °,° 25° °
= 0 22 5 9° oo-<
= 02 969° Nry
C~¢ OO 6 OO & Sy
a FROMM OM AS NS ie eG aS
Os f i
= fo} Ye ~ =
S 1S Se as M Si
LNT oR SS
= sy RE 2ST “>
OSS ee WP UGS
= Se ean oe
=) Se
a aoe
> ae
==
Fig. 8. A diagrammatic representation of the QSM and PPM lithostratigraphic units (‘magna-
facies’), and their relationship to hypothetical chronostratigraphic units (‘parvafacies’).
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 33
The PPM
The channel deposits, and incorporated fossil assemblages, of beds 3aS and
3aN of the PPM are essentially similar. However, bed 3aS was in the form of a
relatively straight channel superimposed on an unconsolidated substratum,
whereas in the bed 3aN area an outcrop of phosphatic rock caused a southward
deflection in the course of the river, and, at least in flood times, it provided a
consolidated substratum for part of the channel (Hendey 1980: 58-62, fig. 26).
In addition, the seaward end of bed 3aS was truncated by the bed 3aN channel.
(Fig. 6), which resulted in the loss from bed 3aS of the marsh and pond facies
evident in bed 3aN (Table 3).
The bed 3aN deposits were recently discussed in some detail (Hendey
1980: 58-67), and were also mentioned earlier (Hendey 1976a: 228-230). The
latter account also deals with bed 3aS, while this bed (formerly 3a) was also
discussed by Hendey (1974a: 33, 36-37, 353).
While beds 3aS and 3aN have many species in common with the OSM, their
faunas are also in some respects distinct (see pp. 45-53), and the condition of
specimens and relative numbers of individuals in any given taxon may be very
different. The most characteristic of the beds 3aS and 3aN taxa are the seal
(Homiphoca capensis), giraffids (Giraffa sp., Sivatherium hendeyi), alcelaphine
antelope (Damalacra neanica and D. acalla), and a reduncine (Kobus subdolus).
There are, however, differences in the relative numbers of individuals repre-
sented in beds 3aS and 3aN, and to a lesser extent also in the taxa represented.
For example, the alcelaphines occur much more commonly than giraffids in bed
3aS, whereas in bed 3aN the reverse applies. In addition, species of Palaeotra-
gus, Tragelaphus, and Kobus are known only from bed 3aN.
Most of the fossils from beds 3aS and 3aN represent the remains of animals
washed into the area by the river, but at least some must represent animals that
were resident locally. The latter include aquatic species such as the seal and
fishes, while others might have lived on the river-banks. For example, hyaenas
might have roamed the banks scavenging carcasses stranded there.
The river might have had an important effect on the composition of the
bed 3aS assemblage. At the time that much of the latter was being deposited,
the river was flowing over the unconsolidated and often highly fossiliferous
deposits of the QSM. It is certain that at least some, and perhaps even a great
many, OSM fossils were picked up by the river and redeposited in bed 3aS.
Since such derived fossils might have suffered only minimal transport, they
would not necessarily show obvious signs of reworking. There is little likelihood
of a similarly serious complication with the bed 3aN assemblage (Hendey
1976a: 230).
Although the deposits and faunas of the QSM, bed 3aS, and bed 3aN
differ, and despite the evidence that intervals of time elapsed between their
deposition, there can be little doubt that they date from a relatively short
period and represent repetitive depositional phases of a single geological
episode. The period was long enough for evolutionary changes to take place in
34 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
taxa common to more than one level (see p. 24), and it is possible that the
composition of the local fauna also changed during this time (see p. 86).
However, most of the faunal differences, and all of the geological ones, can be
ascribed to the exposure in various areas and levels of differing depositional
environments within a major depositional system (i.e. an estuary and associated
environments).
Fossils do occur in the PPM deposits overlying bed 3aN, but they are not
common and probably represent the remains of animals occasionally washed
into a marine littoral environment by currents emanating from the river mouth,
which was progressively further from the “E’ Quarry area as the early Pliocene
transgression advanced.
The upper levels of the PPM, and, indeed, all the undifferentiated parts of
this unit, include marine microfossils such as foraminifera, fish teeth, and
mollusc fragments (Tankard 1974a).
The record of deposition of the PPM in the Langebaanweg area is
probably incomplete, since there was evidently truncation of the higher levels
during the subsequent late Pliocene regression.
Mobilization of phosphate in the PPM and its redeposition into phosphatic
rock horizons might have continued after deposition of the PPM itself ceased.
There are several phosphatic rock horizons in the more northerly exposures of
the PPM in ‘E’ Quarry and it is evident that they did not form contempo-
raneously (Dingle et al. 1979: 89). The one that affected distribution of bed 3aN
was formed after the accumulation of the QSM and before deposition of bed
3aN, while others higher in the sequence were formed subsequently. A possibly
significant feature of these horizons is that they occur only in the more northerly
exposures of the PPM. The bulk of the PPM deposits, which are spread out south
and south-west from ‘E’ Quarry, have at most thin lenses of phosphatic rock
which are superficially very different in appearance. The more northerly
phosphatic rock horizons cannot have formed in a deep-water continental shelf
situation, which was suggested in the case of the middle Miocene phosphatic rock
(see p. 20). The fact that they occur only on what was the landward side of the
developing Varswater Formation, suggests the possibility that seasonal
movement of the watertable in the phosphate-rich sediments might have led to
precipitation of a phosphatic matrix in the zone of movement.
Deposition of pelletal phosphorite apparently ceased during a stage in the
transgression when the Langebaanweg area was so deeply covered by the sea
that conditions necessary for its formation were no longer being met (see Birch
1977, fig. 4).
The Anyskop marine deposits
It was previously assumed that all those deposits overlying the PPM in the
vicinity of ‘E’ Quarry were deposited subaerially during the Quaternary (e.g.
Hendey 1974a; Tankard 1974a; Bishop 1980). However, this apparently applies
to only part of the overlying succession.
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 35
Although pelletal phosphorite continued to accumulate at higher eleva-
tions south-east of Langebaanweg (e.g. Elandsfontein—Rogers 1980) during
the latter stages of the early Pliocene transgression (i.e. in the shallower water
close to the river mouth and shoreline), in the immediate vicinity of Lange-
baanweg only non-phosphatic deposits were being laid down. This conclusion is
based on a reassessment of the calcareous deposits making up the bulk of
Anyskop, the hill immediately south of ‘E’ Quarry. These deposits have been
included in the ‘Langebaan Limestone’ (Visser & Schoch 1973), which Tankard
(1976) defined as a member of the Bredasdorp Formation. The ‘Langebaan
Limestone’ 1s generally regarded as a composite ‘of limestone types of . . . aeo-
lian origin’ (Tankard 1976: 114). The continued recognition of this lithostrati-
graphic unit is open to question, since it is evident that limestones and calcretes
of different ages and origin are included in it. The Anyskop calcareous deposits
are a case in point. The reinterpretation of these deposits which is outlined
below is tentative, and, although it may well be modified in future studies, it is
obvious that previous interpretations are incorrect. |
Anyskop is a prominent feature in the Langebaanweg area, rising to an
elevation of over 70 m, while the mean elevation in the immediate vicinity is
probably about 30 m. Deposits on its northern slope have been exposed by
overburden stripping associated with the ‘E’ Quarry mining operation. Features
of these deposits, including a previously unknown fossil content, have been
revealed by three years (1977-1980) of subaerial weathering and erosion which
took place while mining operations were suspended. The hill itself is a curious
feature, since it may be the only one in a wide area around Langebaanweg
which does not have a core of Cape granite. In fact, the bedrock beneath the
hill is at about 35 m below sea-level (Rogers 1980), a situation which apparently
applies within a radius of several kilometres. The existence of the hill, there-
fore, has no direct connection with the solid geology of the area.
Also anomalous is the fossil content of the calcareous deposits comprising
much of Anyskop. According to Tankard (1974a: 280-281), foraminifera are
abundant, with Anomalina tests outnumbering those of Elphidium 5: 1, the
former being ‘essentially fresh’, while the latter are weathered. Tankard’s belief
that the forams were ‘blown inland subsequent to the regression of the sea
responsible for the Varswater Formation’ is inconsistent with the condition of
the Anomalina tests and the fact that this genus occurs most commonly in
continental shelf rather than beach situations (R. A. Martin, pers. comm.). It is
much more likely that the fresh Anomalina specimens were deposited in a
marine environment where no abrasion by wind or wave action was possible.
On the other hand, Elphidium is common in inshore situations and the abraded
conditions of the Anyskop specimens suggest that they might have been
exposed to the wind or waves. It is probably also significant that, whereas
Elphidium and other inshore forams are recorded from the underlying marine
littoral PPM, Anomalina is not.
One possible interpretation of the above observations is that the calcareous
36 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
deposits of Anyskop were in part accumulated in a marine environment of
deeper water than the PPM, and also in part on a beach or adjacent terrestrial
environment. This is a combination of circumstances which exists on a sub-
merged barrier or barrier island. It is perhaps significant that the south-east to
north-west trend of Anyskop parallels at least a part of the sand-bar which
existed in QSM and PPM times, and it is conceivable that a submerged barrier
or barrier island was a vertical and north-eastward development from this
sand-bar as the Pliocene transgression progressed. Figure 9 illustrates the
hypothetical submerged barrier or barrier island in a ‘drumstick’ form of the
kind described for such features by Hayes (1976). The most substantial part of
this ‘drumstick’ survives as Anyskop today. The east-west trend of the barrier
(Fig. 9) is conjectural, and it might instead have extended southwards towards
Karnberg (Fig. 2; see also p. 39).
The development of this barrier was a very significant event, since the
deposits constituting it were subsequently to protect from erosion the underly-
ing and northward-extending Varswater Formation that survives today. The
preservation of so substantial a body of unconsolidated late Tertiary sediment
has hitherto been difficult to explain, just as there was no obvious reason why
Anyskop should have been developed by aeolian action in its present position
and form.
An apparent anomaly with this interpretation is the observation by Tan-
kard (1974a) that the most commonly occurring fossils in the calcareous sands
are shells of the land snail, Trigonephrus globulus. Also common are shells of
EARLY PLIOCENE
(C)
Fig. 9. The Langebaanweg area during the early Pliocene (sea-level cycle TP1). C. Period of
deposition of the Anyskop marine deposits. Sea-level at about 60 m above present level
(transgression maximum at 90 m). (See Fig. 4 for key.)
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 37)
another, unidentified land snail. The snail shells are now known to occur
together with fragmentary vertebrate remains, mainly of terrestrial species,
although marine and freshwater taxa are also recorded. Associated with these
fossils are ‘fossil roots’ (rhizoconcretions) and as yet unexplained circular
structures of calcrete with infillings of reddish sands (Fig. 10). The latter have
been suggested to represent remnants of tree stumps or clumps of sedge,
termitaria, or solution cavities.
Fig. 10. A. An exposure of the Anyskop terrestrial deposits showing one of the unidentified
features referred to in the text, together with snail shells and the horn-cores of an unidentified
antelope. B. A close-up view of a snail shell and the antelope horn-cores.
38 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
There can be little doubt that these structures, the rhizoconcretions, and
the fossils mark an old land surface. They appear to be confined to a horizon
extending from high up the north slope of Anyskop down towards the ‘E’
Quarry exposures of the PPM, although they are not known to occur in situ
below an elevation of about 40-45 m. In areas on the north slope which have
been excavated well below the present surface, the structures and fossils are
absent. These observations suggest that the old land surface was more or less
coincident with the present northern contours of Anyskop, occurring over a
limited vertical extent of the calcareous deposits immediately beneath the
unconsolidated surface sands. In other words, the fossils were deposited on
Anyskop at a time when the north slope was more or less in its present form.
The vertebrate fossil assemblage is as yet unstudied, and it may be too
small and the fossils too fragmentary to give an accurate indication of age. The
assemblage is, however, definitely distinct from those of the underlying QSM
and PPM. It includes at least one species otherwise known only from the late
Pliocene/early Pleistocene Baard’s Quarry assemblage (i.e. Hipparion baardi,
an advanced member of the lineage which includes the ‘E’ Quarry H. cf.
baardi—Hooijer 1976; Hendey 1978a). On the other hand, an unidentified
antelope from the Anyskop fauna (Fig. 10) is clearly distinct from the ones
represented at Baard’s Quarry, and, indeed, all other antelopes hitherto
recorded from the south-western Cape.
The implications of the Anyskop ancient land surface will be discussed
below, but its significance here is that there appears to be no direct association
between its terrestrial fossils and the marine fauna (including forams) recorded
by Tankard (1974a). Consequently, a distinction is made between the ‘Anyskop
marine deposits’ and the ‘Anyskop terrestrial deposits’, with the former being
correlated with the early Pliocene transgression, and the latter post-dating this
event. There is an as yet undetermined relationship between the Anyskop
deposits and those overlying the Varswater Formation on the western side of
‘E’ Quarry (exposure 1 of Dingle et al. 1979, figs 2-3).
The early Pliocene transgression reached an elevation of 90 m, which is
about 20 m above the maximum height of Anyskop. While it is possible that
post-early Pliocene erosion reduced the height of Anyskop, it might never have
been as high as 90 m, which means that at least during the latter stages of the
transgression, Anyskop was probably in the form of a submerged barrier rather
than a barrier island.
Remnants of the 90 m marine platform exist to the south-east of Lange-
baanweg. Its presence is inferred from the topography (Mabbutt 1956), while
marine deposits up to an elevation of 80 m have been recorded on the farm
Elandsfontein (Rogers 1980). Evidently it was developed in the lee of a series
of hills formed by outcrops of Cape granite. The trend of these hills is from
north-west to south-east, roughly parallel to the present coast. The hills are
Karnberg (177 m), 12 km south-south-west of Langebaanweg, followed by
Massenberg (161 m), Groot Swartberg (287 m), and Slangkop (258 m). Subse-
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 39
quent to its formation the 90 m platform was incised by the valley of the Sout
River, a northward-flowing tributary of the Berg River (Fig. 2).
It was suggested above that the Anyskop barrier island may have extended
southwards in the direction of Karnberg, rather than eastwards as indicated in
Figure 9. If this was indeed the case, then Karnberg and the other hills in the
series must have been influencing the local topography at an earlier stage
during the early Pliocene transgression. The Anyskop barrier island might in
fact, have been a longshore spit extending northwards from Karnberg.
This, and other, uncertainties relating to the later history of the early
Pliocene transgression should be resolved by further investigation of relevant
deposits in the Langebaanweg area.
The early Pliocene transgression which resulted in deposition of the OSM,
PPM, the Anyskop marine deposits and other marine deposits south-east of
Langebaanweg, represents sea-level cycle TP1 of supercycle Tf (Vail & Har-
denbol 1979: fig. 8).
The late Pliocene regression and early Pleistocene transgression
The history of late Pliocene and early Pleistocene deposition in the
Langebaanweg area is as yet not well documented, and inference played a large
part in the interpretation outlined below, with the nature and likely age of the
Anyskop terrestrial deposits and Baard’s Quarry fluviatile deposits being of
particular significance in this interpretation.
It is unlikely that Anyskop was in its present form during the early stages
of the late Pliocene regression. Had this been the case then it would have been
in the form of an island a few kilometres off the emergent mainland. The fact
that a vertebrate fauna, which is correlated with an early stage of the regres-
sion, left traces of its presence on the north slope of Anyskop when the sea was
at an elevation of between 40 and 60 m, means that a connection with the
mainland must have existed. This connection probably followed the trend of
the pre-existing coastal barrier, which might have been north-south, rather
than east—west, as indicated in Figure 11.
Figure 11 also shows the ancient Berg River passing westwards along the
northern side of this connection and meeting the sea to the south-west of ‘E’
Quarry. There is, in fact, no direct evidence for the position of the river, while
its local presence is inferred simply because it is the most likely source of fresh
water required by species such as the hippopotamus in the Anyskop fauna. A
more tenuous indication that the river was present locally is the unequivocal
evidence for its presence both during the early Pliocene (see above) and
subsequently during the late Pliocene/early Pleistocene (see below).
A sea-level elevation of about 50 m at this time is deduced from the
presence of a marine element in the Anyskop fauna, and from the recorded
elevation of the Anyskop terrestrial fossils and associated features. In addition,
the PPM of the Varswater Formation has been eroded down to a maximum
elevation of 50-55 m in the vicinity of Anyskop. The maximum elevations for
40 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
LATE PLIOCENE(A)
Groot Springfontein
i ( 50m shoreline)
4 km
LATE PLIOCENE /EARLY PLEISTOCENE(B)
eLBW
Fig. ll. The Langebaanweg area during the late Pliocene (sea-level cycle TP2) and the late
Pliocene or early Pleistocene (sea-level cycle TP3 or Ql). A. Period of deposition of the
Anyskop terrestrial deposits. B. Period of deposition of the Baard’s Quarry fluviatile deposits.
(See Fig. 4 for key.)
the PPM recorded by Tankard (1974a) are 53-54 m near ‘E’ Quarry, 54 m on
the farm Witteklip and at Paternoster, and 47-50 m at Duiker Eiland. Tankard
also records a marine horizon at 50 m on the farm Groot Springfontein,
south-east of Anyskop, the nature of the deposits and associated fossils indicat-
ing a shoreline situation.
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 4]
The various occurrences at about 50 m elevation are here interpreted as
representing a temporary stillstand in the Pliocene regression, probably the first
of two such stillstands during this event recorded by Vail & Hardenbol (1979)
in their synthesis of global sea-level changes (i.e. cycle TP2 of supercycle Tf).
Slender though the evidence may be, the vertebrate fauna of the Anyskop
terrestrial deposits suggests an age close to, but not necessarily contempora-
neous with, the fauna from the Baard’s Quarry fluviatile deposits (i.e. late
Pliocene/early Pleistocene). It is, therefore, not inconsistent with the inferred
Pliocene age of the 50 m shoreline.
As indicated above, there is unequivocal evidence for the presence of the
river during the late Pliocene/early Pleistocene. This is in the form of channel
deposits revealed west of Langebaanweg station by the prospecting for, and
mining of, phosphate (Tankard 1974a; Hendey 1978a). They are here referred
to as the ‘Baard’s Quarry fluviatile deposits’, and are correlated with the west
coast 20 m shoreline. This represents either the second of the stillstands in the
Pliocene regression recorded by Vail & Hardenbol (1979). (i.e.cycle TP3 of
supercycle Tf), or the climax of the early Pleistocene transgression (i.e. cycle
Q1 of supercycle Q).
According to Vail & Hardenbol (1979, fig. 8) cycle TP3 spanned the period
between 3,8 and 2,8 Ma, the latter being taken by them as the Pliocene—
Pleistocene boundary, while cycle Q1 is dated between 2,8 and 1,7 Ma. The
mammalian fauna of the Baard’s Quarry fluviatile deposits (= ‘lower levels’
fauna of Hendey 1978a) also suggested an age close to the Pliocene—Pleistocene
boundary, and it has recently become evident that at least one element in this
fauna is unlikely to be older than 1,9 Ma (see p. 95). Consequently, the Baard’s
Quarry fluviatile deposits are more likely to date from cycle Q1 than cycle TP3.
This is consistent with the record of the cold-water fauna associated with the
counterpart of the Baard’s Quarry fluviatile deposits on the Namaqualand coast
(Table 2; see also p. 16), and the suggestion that cold-water faunas are
characteristic of the Quaternary.
Figure 11 shows the river meeting the sea south-east of Anyskop, with the
pre-existing barrier island link to the mainland having been severed. If this link
did exist, then it is most likely to have been destroyed by river erosion. the
coincidence of this event with the 20 m stillstand is suggested by the fact that
the Baard’s Quarry fluviatile deposits are situated on a broad, flat plain (? an
ancient floodplain), which extends southwards through the area where the
hypothetical Anyskop-‘mainland’ connection existed (Fig. 11). It would have
been at this time that Anyskop took on its present form.
Subsequently, the river underwent a radical change in direction in its lower
course, shifting northwards to begin incising its present valley in the direction
of St Helena Bay. This process continued during the Pleistocene and at least by
the beginning of the late Pleistocene the Berg River must have been more or
less in its present position, since Tankard (1976) has identified last interglacial
marine deposits in the existing valley.
42 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Once the river and the sea were no longer in the vicinity of Langebaanweg,
sedimentation in the area was insignificant. The minor events of the Quaternary
included the development of the unconsolidated aeolian sands which blanket
the area, and duricrust (mainly calcrete) formation within them and in underly-
ing deposits. Early Stone Age artefacts, probably of middle Pleistocene age,
have been found cemented into the calcrete immediately underlying the surface
sands on Anyskop, and there is evidence for post-middle Pleistocene human
occupations in the area as well. There are recorded vertebrate fossil occur-
rences dating from the ?early Pleistocene (Skurwerug, near Saldanha), middle
Pleistocene (Elandsfontein), and late Pleistocene (Sea Harvest at Saldanha,
and others).
The late Cenozoic sequence in the Langebaanweg area is in many respects
unique, and although much attention has been focused on it, especially during
the last decade, most of the geological studies (e.g. Butzer 1973; Visser &
Schoch 1973; Tankard 1974a; Bishop 1980) have dealt only superficially with
the fossil occurrences and the nature of the various depositional environments
represented. Consequently, there is still a need for further study directed
specifically at the context of the recorded fossil assemblages and the history of
the deposits, especially those post-dating the PPM of the Varswater Formation.
Since large volumes of deposit have been mined away, it is no longer possible
to retrieve all the information on the succession which was once available.
Nevertheless, documentary records, sediment samples and exposures still exist,
and they offer a potential for further research.
BIOLOGY
FLORA
The flora of the Langebaanweg area during the period of deposition of the
late Cenozoic succession is not well known. Initially only indirect evidence was
available from which the nature of the local vegetation during QSM and PPM
times could be deduced. For example, large browsers amongst the herbivores,
particularly the long-necked giraffe (Giraffa sp.), have been cited on several
occasions as indicating the presence of trees (e.g. Hendey 1973, 1974a, 1976a,
1980). On the other hand, hypsodont grazing species such as the rhinoceros
(Ceratotherium praecox) indicate that grasslands were also present. The pos-
sible significance of the relative abundance of browsers and grazers at different
levels within the Varswater Formation will be discussed later (see p. 75).
Other indirect evidence for the presence of plants was that of leaf impres-
sions, probably of grass or reeds, on coprolites from the OSM (Hendey 1976a:
224). Attempts to recover pollens from coprolites have so far proved fruitless.
Physical remains of plants themselves are limited to pollens, algal nucules,
and fragments of petrified roots. Studies on pollens from the ‘peats’ of the
Varswater Formation and underlying deposits have yet to be published, but
passing references to these pollens have been made by Tankard (1975b),
Hendey (1976a), Tankard & Rogers (1978), and Dingle et al. (1979). In
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 43
addition, although not specifically mentioned, the pollens contributed to Coet-
zee’s (1978) study on vegetational changes in the south-western Cape during
the late Tertiary. These pollens indicate that the local vegetation during
pre-GM times (i.e. Miocene) was dominated by forests and woodlands,
whereas by QSM times (i.e. early Pliocene) sclerophyll (fynbos) vegetation was
becoming prominent. Details of the Langebaanweg pollen record will be
published elsewhere (J. A. Coetzee, in preparation).
The algal nucules (charophytes) were identified and discussed by Kensley
(1977), and they have also been studied by I. Soulié (Montpellier), although
her report on them is as yet unpublished. They were preserved in the tidal flat
bed of the QSM (i.e. QSM III), and were probably derived from freshwater
ponds on the OSM floodplain (1.e. QSM I). The existence of such ponds was
postulated by Hendey (1976a).
The fossil roots, which are in the form of slender fragments mostly from
the OSM, have not been studied. It is unlikely that they will reveal much about
the plants to which they belonged.
In conclusion, it should be mentioned that the rhizoconcretions and the
unidentified structures of the Anyskop terrestrial deposits may provide some
indication of the local vegetation later in the Pliocene.
FAUNA
Composition
This section deals only with the fauna of the Varswater Formation, from
which the assemblage of invertebrate and vertebrate fossils is exceptionally
large, both in terms of the numbers of specimens and in the variety of species
represented. However, it represents only a small fraction of the material which
was preserved in the deposits, much of which was lost during mining operations
and much of which remains unexcavated.
At least 230 distinct taxa have been recognized, ranging from protozoans to
mammals. Vertebrates predominate, and there are many phyla of lower animals
that are not recorded. Important groups such as the insects are also lacking, the
only tangible evidence of their presence being grooves on bovid horn-cores left
by keratophagous insect larvae (Fig. 12). Most specimens are well preserved and
individual species assemblages range from a few to many thousands of spe-
cimens. Most taxa are identifiable to species level, and incomplete identifications
usually indicate that taxonomic studies have yet to be undertaken.
The list of taxa which follows is given in systematic order and according to
the horizon from which material was derived. Material of doubtful provenance
(?) is listed under horizons where its presence was likely. In the case of the
equid, Hipparion cf. namaquense, it is still not known if the relevant material
came from the uppermost levels of the PPM, or the lowermost levels of the
overlying deposits (Hooijer 1976). Inferred habitat preferences are given, and
in instances where resting and feeding habitats differ (e.g. amongst many
birds), the latter are recorded.
44 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
|
|
Fig 12. Marks left on a Mesembriportax acrae horn-core from the PPM 3aS
(SAM-—PQ-40071) by keratophagous insect larvae.
Although the lists for individual horizons broadly reflect the local fauna of
the period of deposition, they do not necessarily represent the fauna of a single
habitat. In the case of some levels it is possible that the assemblages include
specimens derived from pre-existing deposits. This applies particularly in the
case of the fluviatile deposits (beds 3aS and 3aN), which are, in addition,
comprised largely of taxa whose remains were washed into the area from
upstream habitats. Palaeoecological interpretations of the assemblages constitu-
ting the ‘E’ Quarry fauna must, therefore, take these factors into account.
An example of the palaeoecological studies which are possible is that by
Kensley (1977) on the invertebrate assemblage from QSM III (1.e. the tidal-flat
bed). In this instance the remains of the resident animal community were
supplemented by others washed downstream by the river and upstream by the
tides. This assemblage proved to be essentially similar to ones in comparable
situations today, and, interestingly, it proved a better indication of the nature
of the depositional environment than the sediments themselves.
This was a general rule with most ‘E’ Quarry sediments, and attempts to
interpret their history without taking into account the composition of individual
assemblages and the condition of specimens, resulted in mistaken conclusions.
For example, Butzer (1973) misinterpreted the depositional environments of
the QSM (= Bed 2) and bed 3aS (= bed 3a) through using only geological
evidence. While Bishop (1980) evidently appreciated the significance of the
fossils, he supported Butzer’s conclusions and ignored the palaeontological
evidence which became available after 1970.
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 45
PPM PPM PPM Inferred habitat
GM QSM 3aS 3aN_ undiff. preference
PHYLUM PROTOZOA
ORDER FORAMINIFERA
Ammonia beccarii — — — — x marine (littoral) and
Elphidium advenum _. — — — — x estuarine
Cibicides lobatulus a _- — — x marine (littoral;
Planorbulina EE CIOS —— — — — x attached to vegetation
Rosalina cf. bradyi : = = = = x etc.)
PHYLUM BRACHIOPODA (lamp shells)
Kraussina rubra . : oe OX — — = == marine (rocky shore)
PHYLUM ECHINODERMATA
CLASS ECHINOIDEA (sea urchins)
Parechinus angulosus . mene — — — — marine (rocky shore)
PHYLUM ARTHROPODA
CLASS CRUSTACEA
ORDER CIRRIPEDIA (acorn barnacles)
Gen. and sp. indet. . x — — — — marine (rocky shore)
? ORDER DECAPODA (lobsters etc. y.
Gen. and sp. indet. . RIBS — — = == marine, estuarine and
fresh water
SUBCLASS OSTRACODA
Family Cytheridae
Gomphocythere expansa — ‘< — = —
Family Cyprididae
Zonocypris cordata . oo x — — — fresh water
Family not det.
Gen. and at least 3 spp not det. — x — — —
PHYLUM MOLLUSCA
CLASS GASTROPODA
ORDER ARCHAEOGASTROPODA
Family Patellidae (limpets)
Cellana capensis . : hat — — — — marine (rocky shore,
warm water)
? Cellana sp. : : ae — — — — :
Patella granularis Ws - -— ~— — f manne noch Shore)
Family Fissurellidae (keyhole
limpets)
Diodora parviforata . 2 xX --— — — _. marine (rocky shore)
Family Haliotidae (perlemoens or
abalones)
* Haliotis saldanhae : vero — — — — :
Panonis 3B. . wes Z. ie ea ins } marine (rocky shore)
Family Trochidae (top shells
Oxystele tigrina . wR TEX — — — —
Oxystele variegata : — x — — — cok (rocky shore)
Gibbula benzi__.. — x. — — —
Family Turbinidae (turban shells
Turbo sarmaticus : x — —— — = marine (rocky shore,
warm. water)
Family Phasianellidae (pheasant
shells)
Tricolia neritina . : an aX x — — — marine (rocky shore)
Tricolia capensis . : — x — _ ey marine (rocky shore,
cold water)
ORDER MESOGASTROPODA
Family Littorinidae (periwinkles)
Littorina cf. knysnaensis _ ‘< — —
; ; marine (rock
? Littorina sp. (rocky shore)
x
|
|
|
KH
46 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
GM
Family Hydrobiidae (snails)
Tomichia ventricosa . ——
Family Assimineidae (snails)
Assiminea sp... s oo
ORDER NEOGASTROPODA
Family Muricidae (rock shells or
whelks)
Ocenebra scrobiculata . aeX
Family Thaisidae (rock shells or
whelks)
Thais dubia : x
Family Columbellidae (dove shells)
Pyrene albuginosa : _
Family Nassariidae (plough shells,
dog whelks)
Bullia sp. . j : Sx
Bullia digitalis. : es
Bullia laevissima ; —
Bullia sp. nov. . A =
Nassarius cf. analogicus —
Nassarius sp.B . ‘ _
Nassarius sp. C . : ._
Family Marginellidae
Marginellasp. . : a
Family Turridae (screw shells)
‘Crassispira’ sp. . : 8 ay
‘Clavatula’ sp. . . a
*‘Turris’ sp. P : $x
ORDER ENTOMOTAENIATA
Family Pyramidellidae
Turbonilla kraussi ; wre
? Pyramidella sp. : yx
ORDER BASOMMATOPHORA
Family Siphonariidae (false limpets)
Siphonariasp. . AX
Family Ferrissiidae (snails)
Burnupia capensis : -_
Family Planorbidae (snails)
Ceratophallus natalensis
Bulinus ‘tropicus’ ; <a
ORDER STYLOMMATOPHORA
Family Succineidae (snails)
Succinea sp. ; : _
Family Endodontidae (snails)
Trachycystis cf. capensis oo
x
x
PPM PPM PPM
QSM_ 3aS
——$$<—_— ee
Inferred habitat
preference
fresh or brack water
mainly estuarine
marine (rocky shore)
marine (rocky shore)
marine (rocky shore,
warm water)
marine and/or
estuarine
marine (sandy shore)
marine (sandy shore)
and estuarine
marine and/or
estuarine
marine (sandy shore)
and estuarine
marine and/or
estuarine
marine and/or
estuarine
marine and/or
estuarine
marine
s marine
marine (rocky shore)
on rushes in fresh
water or estuaries
fresh water (sub-
tropical, tropical)
fresh water
terrestrial or semi-
aquatic (fresh water)
terrestrial
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 47
PPM PPM PPM Inferred habitat
GM QSM 3aS_ 3aN_undiff. preference
CLASS AMPHINEURA
Family Chitonidae (chitons)
Chiton nigrovirescens . — x — = = marine (rocky shore,
cold water)
CLASS PELECYPODA
Family Donacidae (sand mussels)
Donax serra ; : mesa x — = ' Pain
Donax sp(p) ¥ LAS s eee marine (sandy shore)
Family Carditidae (false cockles)
*Cuna aquaedulcensis . — x — — — marine
Family Arcidae (ark shells)
Barbatia obliquata , tess = — — — marine (rocky shore,
warm. water)
Family Mytilidae (mussels)
? Perna sp. eK a —_ == = marine (rocky shore)
Family Veneridae (venus shells)
Pitar sp. . : : a yox — — — — marine
x
MOLLUSCA INDET. ; : —— = — a
PHYLUM CHORDATA
CLASS CHONDRICHTHYES
ORDER SELACHII (sharks)
Family Hexanchidae
Notidanus serratissimus A pee x. — — — — marine
Family Carcharhinidae
G archarhinus melanopterus x S marine (warm water)
Carcharhinus limbatus os
Galaeorhinus sp. . : aX — _ -— a=
Prionace glauca . iS a
Negaprion or Hypoprionsp.. xX
Family Odontaspidae
Odontaspis accutissima ain OX — — —- —
Odontaspis sp. B ; Mat — — — —
Odontaspis sp. C : eX — = — —
Family Otodontidae marine
Megaselachus megalodon . x = — — —
Family Carcharodontidae
Carcharodon sp. . : Bes — — — —
Family Isuridae
Tsurus sp. . 4 f eee — — — —
Family Squalidae
Squalus sp. ‘ : sy os — — — —
Family Squatinidae
Squatina africana : a eX — — — _ marine (warm water)
Squatinasp.B . : ikex — — — — marine
SELACHII not det. 3 ‘ aa x x < —
ORDER BATOIDEA (skates, rays)
Family Rajidae (skates)
Rajasp. . oyoX — — = —=
Family Trygonidae (sting rays)
Gen. and sp. not det. x —_ — —~— —_ marine
Family Myliobatidae (eagle rays)
Myliobatis sp. . ‘ x — — = =
CLASS OSTEICHTHYES
ORDER PERCIFORMES
Family Sparidae (mussel-crackers)
Gen. and sp. not det. . eS —- — — — _ marine
48 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
PPM PPM PPM Inferred habitat
GM QSM 3aS— 3aN_undiff. preference
ORDER SILURIFORMES
Family Tachysuridae (catfish)
? Tachysurus sp. ; — x x x = marine and estuarine
OSTEICHTHYES not det. : a OX x x ‘< x
CLASS AMPHIBIA
ORDER ANURA (frogs, toads)
Gen. and sp(p) not det. — x x x = terrestrial and fresh
water
CLASS REPTILIA
ORDER CHELONIA (tortoises, turtles)
Chersina sp. ; ; “ox x x x ass terrestrial
Gen. and sp. not det. . — x = as = marine or fresh water
Gen. and sp. not det. . — = = x == marine or fresh water
ORDER SQUAMATA
SUBORDER LACERTILIA
Family Chameleontidae (chameleons)
Gen. and sp(p) not det. — x x x — bushes and trees
Family Gekkonidae (geckos) :
Gen. and sp(p) not det. — x x x — terrestrial
Family Varanidae (leguans,
monitor lizards)
Varanus sp. : : oo x — —_ -- terrestrial or fresh
water
SUBORDER OPHIDIA (snakes)
Gen. and sp(p) not det. — x x x — terrestrial
SQUAMATA not det. . : — x x x —
CLASS AVES
ORDER STRUTHIONIFORMES
Family Struthionidae (ostriches)
Struthio sp. : : — == x x = terrestrial (open
country)
ORDER SPHENISCIFORMES
Family Spheniscidae (penguins)
**Inguza predemersus . — x Si. Y — | marine (mainly coastal,
**Dege hendeyi . Sancle x ? x — f cold water)
ORDER PODICIPEDIFORMES
Family Podicipedidae (grebes)
Gen. and sp. not det. . to x = x — ? fresh water
ORDER PROCELLARIIFORMES (petrels
etc.)
Gen. and at least 3 spp not
dete: : : —— x = x — marine (pelagic)
ORDER PELECANIFORMES (pelicans
etc.)
Fam., gen. and sp. not det.. — x —- — =
Family Phalacrocoracidae
(cormorants)
Gen. and at least 2 spp not
det. —; : . — x — x = marine and/or fresh
water
? Family Sulidae (gannets)
Gen. and sp. not det. . oe x — — —_ marine
ORDER CICONIIFORMES
Family Ciconidae (storks)
Gen. and sp. not det. . pee x a x — _ terrestrial (open
country and/or marsh)
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 49
PPM PPM PPM Inferred habitat
GM QSM 3aS_ 3aN_undiff. preference
Family Threskiornithidae (ibises,
spoonbills)
Gen. and sp. not det. .
ORDER ANSERIFORMES
Family Anatidae (ducks, geese)
Gen. and at least 4 spp not
det. : :
ORDER FALCONIFORMES
Family Falconidae (falcons)
Gen. and sp. not det. .
Family Accipitridae (hawks, eagles
etc.)
Gen. and at least 4 spp not
det ; ; c
? Gypaetinae (vultures) gen.
and sp. not det.
ORDER GALLIFORMES
Family Phasianidae (game birds)
Gen. and at least 2 spp
(francolin and quail) not
det.
ORDER GRUIFORMES
Family Gruidae (cranes)
Gen. and sp. not det. .
Family Rallidae (rails)
Gen. and sp. not det. .
Family Otidae (bustards)
ORDER CHARADRIIFORMES
(shorebirds)
Fam., gen. and at least
10 spp not det.
Family Pteroclidae (sandgrouse)
Gen. and sp. not det. .
ORDER COLUMBIFORMES
Family Columbidae (pigeons,
doves)
Gen. and at least 2 spp not
Gciamar : : ;
ORDER PSITTACIFORMES (parrots)
Fam., gen. and at least 2 spp
not det. ;
ORDER STRIGIFORMES
Family Strigidae (owls)
Gen. and at least 2 spp not
deel L : ;
terrestrial
(open country) and
fresh water
fresh water and
estuarine
aerial, arboreal and/or
terrestrial
aerial, arboreal and/or
terrestrial
terrestrial (open
country)
terrestrial (open
country with low cover)
terrestrial (open
country, marsh)
terrestrial (dense cover)
and fresh water
terrestrial (cpen,
mainly dry country)
fresh water, estuarine
and/or marine
terrestrial (near water)
terrestrial and arboreal
arboreal (forests,
woodlands)
arboreal and terrestrial
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
PPM PPM PPM
GM QSM 3aS- 3aN_ undiff.
ORDER COLIIFORMES
Family Coliidae (colies)
Gen. and sp. not det. .
ORDER CORACIIFORMES (rollers etc.)
Fam., gen. and sp. not det. .
? Family Alcedinidae (kingfishers)
Gen. and at least 2 spp not
det.
ORDER PICIFORMES (woodpeckers
etc.)
Fam., gen. and at least 2 spp
not det.
ORDER APODIFORMES
Family Apodidae (swifts)
Gen. and sp. not det. .
ORDER PASSERIFORMES (songbirds)
Fam., gen. and at least 9 spp
not det.
AVES not det.
x
CLASS MAMMALIA
ORDER INSECTIVORA
Family Chrysochloridae (golden
moles)
Chrysochloris sp.
Family Soricidae (shrews)
Mysorex sp.
Suncus sp. ;
Soricidae cu and sp(p) not
deta
Family Macroscelididae (elephant
shrews)
Elephantulus sp. .
ORDER CHIROPTERA (bats)
Family Vespertilionidae
Eptesicus sp.
ORDER PRIMATES
Family Cercopithecidae (monkeys
ete»)
Gen. and sp. indet.
ORDER PHOLIDOTA (pangolins)
Phataginus sp.
ORDER TUBULIDENTATA Gani)
Gen. and sp. not det.
ORDER CARNIVORA
Family Canidae (foxes, jackals
etes)
Gen. and sp. not det. (? aff.
‘Canis’ brevirostris)
Vulpes sp. (fox) .
Family Ursidae (bears)
* Agriotherium africanum
Inferred habitat
preference
arboreal (bushland and
woodland)
arboreal and terrestrial
fresh water
arboreal and terrestrial
aerial
varied
fossorial
terrestrial
aerial
arboreal and terrestrial
terrestrial
terrestrial
terrestrial
terrestrial
(? woodlands)
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG >|
PPM PPM PPM Inferred habitat
GM QSM 3aS- 3aN_undiff. preference
Family Mustelidae (weasels,
martens etc.)
Plesiogulo monspessulanus
(wolverine) . : —— x 2 — — terrestrial
(? woodlands)
*Mellivora benfieldi (honey
badger) : — = x x — terrestrial
Enhydriodon africanus fetien) = = x x = fresh water
Family Phocidae (seals)
** Homiphoca capensis. cf: x x S — marine and ? estuarine
Family Viverridae (mongooses ete, )
‘Viverra’ leakeyi (? aff.
Civettictis) (civet) — ‘ = ~ —
Viverrinae gen. and sp. not
det. (? aff. Pseudocivetta)
(civet) : ; — x x
Genetta sp. (genet) : —— x == =
Herpestes spp A, B
(mongooses) 2 — x x =
Herpestinae spp C, D, E
(mongooses) : — x —
Herpestinae not det. . — — ~ XX
Family Hyaenidae (hyaenas)
**Adcrocuta australis . —
*Ictitherium preforfex . —
*Hyaena abronia . : —
Ayaenictitherium RTE TBI —
Euryboas sp. ; : —
Hyaenidae sp. E : —
Hyaenidae not det. . ——
Family Felidae (cats)
‘Machairodus’ sp. (sabre-
tooth) g . = x =
Homotherium sp. (sabre
tooth) : —— x x cf.
Felis sp. (wildcat- like) — x — =
Felis aff. issiodorensis (lynx-
hike) ee : — x x
* Felis obscura (lynx- like) a — x =
Dinofelis diastemata (false
sabre-tooth) : oo x x
Felidae not det. . : ._ — x x
CARNIVORA not det.
Gen. and sp. not det.
(Canidae or Viverridae) — x = = =
Gen. and sp. not det.
(? Procyonidae) . oo x — — =
Gen. and sp. not det.
(? Lutrinae) : , = x — — —
ORDER PROBOSCIDEA (elephants and
kin)
Family Gomphotheriidae
Anancus sp. : : . x x — —
Family Elephantidae fers (woodlands)
Mammuthus subplanifrons . — x 2 x —
x
terrestrial
Sl Se Ses
| | xxx | x
Kec oe
terrestrial
x
x
)
he
Sy ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
PPM PPM PPM Inferred habitat
GM QSM 3aS 3aN_ undiff. preference
ORDER HYRACOIDEA (hyraxes or
dassies)
Family Procaviidae
Procavia cf. antiqua . Se x — ? — terrestrial or arboreal
ORDER PERISSODACTYLA
Family Equidae (horses)
Hipparion cf. primigenium . x — — — —
Hipparion cf. baardi . oo x x
Hipparion cf. namaquense . — — — — z terrestrial (grasslands)
Family Rhinocerotidae (rhinos)
Ceratotherium praecox a x x — —
ORDER ARTIODACTYLA
Family Tayassuidae (peccaries)
*Pecarichoerus? (or
Barberahyus) africanus . — — x x — terrestrial
Family Suidae (pigs)
Nyanzachoerus cf. pattersoni
x
|
(or kKanamensis) . — x = — — | terrestrial
Nyanzachoerus cf. jaegeri . — == x = — f (? woodlands)
Family Hippopotamidae (hippos)
Gen. and sp. not det. . ae —- x x — fresh water and
terrestrial
Family Giraffidae (giraffes)
*Sivatherium hendeyi . — x x x =
Palaeotragus cf. germaini . — — — x — Lone t (woodlands)
Giraffa sp. _— x x x —
Family Bovidae (buffaloes,
antelopes etc.)
Tragelaphus sp. A (nyala-like) — x x x =
Tragelaphus sp. B (nyala-like) — — — x —
** Mesembriportax (or Mio- terrestrial (woodlands)
tragocerus) acrae (kudu
like relative of nilgai) . — x x x —
*Simatherium demissum
(buffalo) . , — x x x — terrestrial
(? grasslands)
* Kobus subdolus (kob-like) . — == x x — \ terrestrial (woodlands
Kobus sp. B (kob-like) eS x — f near fresh water)
** Damalacra neanica
(hartebeest-like) . — = x x =
** Damalacra acalla (hartebeest- > terrestrial (grasslands)
like) ee : — x x x —
* Raphicerus paralius (steenbok) — x x x — terrestrial
Gazella sp. (gazelle) . —— x x x — f (? grasslands)
Ovibovini gen. and at least
2 spp not det. , — x x x = terrestrial
ORDER LAGOMORPHA
Family Leporidae (hares, pee
Pronalagussp. . : — x x x — terrestrial
ORDER RODENTIA
Family Bathyergidae (rodent moles)
Bathyergus sp. . : tos x x x — \ fossorial
Cryptomys sp. . = x ma x == ff
Family Hystricidae (porcupines)
Gen. and sp. not det. A oo x oa Ee ae Re ror
Gen. and sp. not det. B _— = x x = J
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 53
PPM PPM PPM Inferred habitat
GM QSM 3aS 3aN_ undiff. preference
Family Cricetidae (rats, mice,
gerbils etc.)
Mystromys sp. A ; _— x — — — |
Mystromys cf. darti . oo x — == — ference
Mystromys cf. hausleitneri . — x = ==
Gerbillus or Desmodillus sp. — x _— os =
Dendromus sp. . : — x — — — terrestrial
(? woodlands)
Steatomys or Malacothrix sp. — x = — —
Family Muridae (rats, mice)
Aethomys spp A,B. oo x — — — terrestrial
MussppA,B . : = x — — —
Rhabdomys sp. . : — x -= os =
** Furyotomys pelomyoide oo x — — — terrestrial (? near fresh
water)
Family Muscardinidae (dormice)
Graphiurus sp. . ; Sf x — — — terrestrial
(? woodlands)
RODENTIA not det. . ; a x x x —
ORDER CETACEA (whales, dolphins)
Gen. and spp not det. eX x x x — marine
* Sp. nov. ** sen. et Sp. NOV.
References:
Foraminifera—Tankard 19756.
Other invertebrates—Kensley 1972, 1977; Tankard 19755; unpublished.
Chondrichthyes— Hulley, in Hendey 1976a.
Osteichthyes — unpublished.
Amphibia/Reptilia — unpublished.
Aves (Spheniscidae) — Simpson 1971, 1975, 1979.
Aves (other)— Rich 1980; unpublished.
Mammalia (Insectivora, Chiroptera, Lagomorpha, Rodentia —excluding Hystricidae) — Pocock
1976.
Mammalia (Rodentia — Hystricidae)— unpublished.
Mammalia (Primates, Pholidota, Tubulidentata, Hyracoidea, Hippopotamidae, Cetacea)—
unpublished, but some details in Hendey 1976a.
Mammalia (Carnivora)—Hendey 1972a, 1974a, 1974b, 1977, 1978c, 1978d, 1980; Hendey &
Repenning 1972; Wolff et al. 1973; De Muizon & Hendey 1980.
Mammalia (Proboscidea)— Maglio & Hendey 1970; Maglio 1973; Coppens ef al. 1978.
Mammalia (Perissodactyla)—Hooijer 1972, 1976, 1978; Churcher & Richardson 1978;
Hendey 1978a.
Mammalia (Tayassuidae)— Hendey 19765; Cooke & Wilkinson 1978.
Mammalia (Suidae)—unpublished, but referred to by Cooke & Wilkinson 1978, and Harris
& White 1979.
Mammalia (Giraffidae)—Harris 1976; Churcher 1978; unpublished.
Mammalia (Bovidae)—Gentry 1974, 1978, 1980.
The observations that follow supplement the last summary statement on
the composition of the ‘E’ Quarry fauna (Hendey 1976a: 231-243).
Most of the identified invertebrates are conspecific with, or closely related
to, living forms and most have counterparts still living in the Langebaanweg
area or adjacent ocean. Two new species have been recorded amongst the
Mollusca. Marine forms predominate, but estuarine, freshwater and terrestrial
54 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
species are also recorded. Palaeoenvironmentally significant species will be
discussed later (see p. 68).
Lower vertebrates (fish, amphibians and reptiles) are largely unstudied,
although the cartilaginous fish (sharks, skates and rays) and the terrestrial
tortoise (Chersina sp.) have received some expert attention. Other groups may
well be more diverse than the preceding list indicates but, although available
material is abundant, it is for the most part fragmentary and identification of
taxa may be difficult. With the exception of some sharks (see p. 68), the lower
vertebrates apparently represent forms which still occur in the region, or in the
adjacent ocean.
The remains of birds are also abundant, a preliminary study having
revealed that ‘E’ Quarry is the richest pre-Pleistocene fossil bird locality in the
world (Rich 1980). Although bird remains are less common than those of
mammals, and although fewer taxa are presently recognized, they may ulti-
mately prove to be the most diverse group represented in the ‘E’ Quarry
deposits. So far only the penguins have been studied in detail (Simpson 1971,
1975, 1979), and the fact that both identified taxa represent new genera
suggests that other birds may be equally distinctive.
The birds are a potentially valuable source of palaeo-environmental infor-
mation. For example, at least two species of parrots are represented, and
parrots no longer occur in the south-western Cape, being confined to wooded
tropical and sub-tropical regions further north. While this may indicate a warm,
wooded environment at Langebaanweg during the early Pliocene, the represen-
tation of marine birds, particularly the Procellariiformes, apparently indicates
temperate conditions in QSM and PPM times, which is in keeping with other
evidence (see p. 68).
However, a detailed analysis of available material is required before the
palaeoenvironmental implications of the avifauna can be assessed. Better
identification of the taxa represented is also necessary. For example, there are
several passerines that are characteristic of the south-western Cape fynbos
region today (McLachlan & Liversidge 1978), and the identification of such
forms in the ‘E’ Quarry avifauna would support the evidence which indicates
that the fynbos was being established locally during the early Pliocene (see
p. 43).
A curious feature of the avifauna is the under-representation of obvious
scavengers such as vultures and crows. Scavengers (hyaenas) are well repre-
sented amongst the mammalian carnivores, and the inferred presence of
abundant animal carcasses at the time that the deposits were laid down suggests
that avian scavengers should also have been common.
The potential importance of the birds as indicators of depositional environ-
ments was briefly discussed by Rich (1980).
Mammals are the best represented group in the ‘E’ Quarry fauna, both in
terms of the number of specimens and the number of species. Marine, fresh-
water, aerial and terrestrial species are recorded, the latter predominating. The
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 55)
mammals are also the most intensively studied group, although descriptive
accounts of about half the identified taxa have yet to be published. There are
apparently no extant species represented, and the described forms include four
new genera and sixteen new species.
A preliminary study of the small mammals (insectivores, bats, rodents and
hares) by Pocock (1976) revealed nothing obviously inconsistent with a late
Cenozoic fauna from this region. The most commonly represented of the small
mammals are fossorial forms (Chrysochloridae, Bathyergidae), which are today
still common in the vicinity of Langebaanweg, and elsewhere in the south-
western Cape. The small mammals are a potentially valuable source of
palaeoenvironmental information. For example, the only described rodent, a
new genus and species (Euryotomys pelomyoides) which is common in the
QSM, is a primitive otomyinine, a group which is characteristic of well-watered
environments. The presence of Dendromus and Graphiurus may be further
evidence for a wooded environment in the area at the time that the deposits
were laid down.
One primate only has been recorded from deposits in ‘E’ Quarry, and it is
known from fewer specimens than all other species. The under-representation
of this important order is discussed later (see p. 87).
The carnivores are still the most diverse of the mammalian orders repre-
sented in ‘E’ Quarry. They are known from a large number of often complete
and well-preserved specimens, a situation which is remarkable in view of the
generally poor representation of this group at other African localities of late
Miocene and Pliocene age. Since the last summary statement on them (Hendey
1976a: 234-240), further studies have been published on the bear (Hendey
1977, 1980), hyaenas (Hendey 1978c), mustelids (Hendey 1978d), and the seal
(De Muizon & Hendey 1980). However, only the accounts of the bear and
mustelids can be regarded as complete at this stage. Much material belonging
to other families is undescribed, and at least some of the recorded taxa require
reinterpretation.
For example, an incomplete study of the civet material has suggested that
two species may be represented, one being related to the living African civet
(Civettictis civetta), while the other may be related to the late Pliocene/early
Pleistocene Pseudocivetta (Fig. 17). Similarly, the material referred to the canid
(Vulpes sp.) may also represent two species, one being a generalized form
possibly related to later African Vulpes, while the second may be related to the
late Pliocene/early Pleistocene ‘Canis’ brevirostris. The difficulty in identifying
the ‘E’ Quarry civet and canid specimens is evidently due to the material
representing early stages of lineages which were only clearly differentiated later.
This applies in the cases of other ‘E’ Quarry mammals as well (see p. 82).
Although the identification of, and comments on, the ‘E’ Quarry probo-
scideans made by Coppens et al. (1978) are probably substantially correct, this
group requires further study. None of the Anancus specimens, which
apparently represent a new species, has been described, and the relationship
56 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
between the ‘E’ and Baard’s Quarry species (Hendey 1978a) has yet to be
substantiated. An appreciable number of unstudied teeth of the elephant
(Mammuthus subplanifrons) are now available, and they may contribute
towards resolving the problems surrounding this unsatisfactory taxon.
The ‘E’ Quarry perissodactyls are palaeoenvironmentally significant since
both the rhinoceros and the Hipparion are hyposodont forms, indicating the
presence of grasslands, whereas most of the other large herbivores are wood-
land browsers. Although the study of the perissodactyls is largely complete, the
Hipparion specimens warrant further attention directed at their implications in
respect of the succession of strata in the vicinity of Langebaanweg. For
example, it is the Hipparion from the Anyskop terrestrial deposits which
suggests that they are broadly contemporaneous with deposits in Baard’s
Quarry (see p. 38). In addition, it 1s the Hipparion from the GM which
supports the suggestion that this horizon may predate the QSM and PPM by an
appreciable period (see p. 23).
The artiodactyls, which are predominantly browsers, are a_ well-
represented and diverse group, ranging in size from a very small peccary to the
giant Sivatherium. With the exception of the pigs, hippopotamus, and palaeo-
tragine, all have now been described, although additional material of most
species is available. The palaeotragine is of particular interest since, although
Africa is the home of the only living palaeotragine (Okapia johnstoni), the
post-Miocene history of this group is poorly known, and the ‘E’ Quarry species
is comparatively well represented by both cranial and postcranial material.
Other ‘E’ Quarry mammals which are unstudied are a pangolin, an
aardvark, two species of porcupine, and several cetaceans.
Taphonomy
Taphonomy ‘involves all aspects of the transference of organic remains
from the biosphere to the lithosphere, and includes both the biological and
physical factors and processes that are involved’ (Olson 1962: 134). It 1s,
therefore, a branch of palaeontology that is particularly relevant to palaeo-
ecological studies. Some information of a taphonomic nature, such as the mode
of accumulation of many of the ‘E’ Quarry fossils, has been given above, and
the summary account which follows deals with other matters.
A taphonomic study of the ‘E’ Quarry fossils such as the now classic one
on a late Tertiary vertebrate fauna from Nebraska by Voorhies (1969) has not
been undertaken. Nevertheless, almost unavoidably observations of a tapho-
nomic nature have been made in the course of fieldwork at Langebaanweg, and
subsequently also in the laboratory. Some of these observations have already
been recorded elsewhere (Hendey 1974a: 348-353; 1976a: 222-230; 1980:
53-67).
In any assessment of the taphonomy of individual fossil assemblages from
‘E” Quarry, it is important that allowance be made for collecting biases, recent
damage to bones and the post-depositional disassociation of body parts. Conse-
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG >//
quently, the manner in which material was acquired needs to be known.
specimens were recovered from the ‘E’ Quarry sediments in the following ways:
Surface collecting.
Controlled excavation.
Uncontrolled excavation.
Screening of small sediment samples in the field or the laboratory using
mesh of 2 mm or less.
5. Screening of bulk sediment samples in the field using a double-bank of
sieves with mesh of 10 and 5 mm.
Pee
In the case of surface collecting, material had mostly been exposed by the
mining operations, in which case specimens were often out of context, damaged
and disassociated from other skeletal elements of the individual involved. A
large quantity of material was acquired in this way, with most specimens being of
medium to large size. Alternatively, specimens were exposed by wind or water
erosion, in which case their condition was often as in burial, and associations of
specimens were sometimes preserved. Once again much material was collected
in this way, and all except microscopic specimens were recovered.
Only a few controlled excavations were undertaken in ‘E’ Quarry, two in
1966 and one or two in the years 1969, 1970, 1975, and 1976. However, although
most of the fossiliferous horizons and areas of the QSM and PPM were sampled,
the size of the excavations was very variable, ranging from a few to hundreds of
cubic metres of deposit. The condition of specimens for the most part reflects
that in burial, and associations were recorded. Uncontrolled excavations differed
in that they were always on a small scale, usually being centred on a significant
fossil discovered on the surface (Fig. 13). Except for the recording methods, they
could be considered as controlled excavation when carried out by qualified
personnel, but otherwise they served only to build up sample sizes.
It was the latter factor, together with the need to recover small fossils, that
was the motivation in the screening of sediment samples. The screening of
small samples usually involved the use of hand-sieves washed in ponds on site,
or in containers of water in the laboratory. Since the deposits were mostly
unconsolidated fine- to medium-grade sands, little agitation of the sieves was
required and damage to specimens was minimal. However, associations of body
parts were usually lost.
The co-operation of the mining company made the screening of bulk
sediment samples possible. This was done when mining or other factors
threatened fossiliferous deposit, and involved the removal by mechanical means
of samples ranging in size from a few tons to hundreds of tons, and the
transportation of the sample by truck to an area where a stand with double-
banked two-man sieves was set up. Piped water was used to wash the ‘dumps’
through the sieves. This process allowed the recovery of some very large
samples of fossils, and was particularly useful in the recovery of rare taxa.
However, the process which variously involved mechanical excavators, bull-
58 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
RP i
whiny
ie i, a
+.
oe
fe pe
we ee
ne
ye,
pl Se
Fig. 13. The skull and vertebral column of a buffalo Simatherium demissum,
(SAM-PQ-L23400) in situ in the QSM.
dozers, front-end loaders, and tip-trucks, was very destructive. In addition,
there were instances where the removal process was not carefully controlled
and fossiliferous sediments of the QSM and bed 3aN were mixed.
The provenance of material was one of the recurrent problems encoun-
tered in the fossil-collecting programme. Material of doubtful provenance
includes much of that collected prior to 1969, but the problem continued even
when the nature of the succession was well known and exact sites of discovery
were recorded. Both beds 3aS and 3aN truncated the QSM, while bed 3aN
truncated bed 3aS, and it was in such situations that doubts about provenance
arose. Nevertheless, assemblages of known provenance do exist, and it is these
that will ultimately be used in the detailed analyses of fossils from particular
horizons. A problem which may be impossible to deal with is that of material
reworked from pre-existing deposits. It affects mainly bed 3aS, which includes
specimens derived from the QSM.
The depositional environments of the ‘E’ Quarry succession need not be
discussed again, but some comments on the agencies responsible for concen-
trating fossils in certain areas are necessary.
The principal agency involved was water action. In the case of the GM
fossils, concentration was by wave action, and in QSM III it was the combined
effects of the river and tides which led to the accumulation of fossils. Elsewhere
in the QSM and in beds 3aS and 3aN the river was largely responsible for
concentrating fossils deposited in a subaqueous environment, although a
subsidiary role for wave and tidal action cannot be ruled out.
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 59
One of the common field practices in taphonomic studies is the recording of
the orientation of in situ fossils, since the resultant data may indicate whether or
not the fossils were deposited by flowing water, and, if so, the current
direction(s). In one of the earlier controlled excavations in ‘E’ Quarry
(LBW/E/1969/1) some such recording was done, but the procedure was aban-
doned since it was found to be time-consuming and probably pointless. It seemed
obvious at that time that the deposits in question (bed 3aS) were channel-laid
and that the trend of the channel was north-east to south-west. All subsequent
observations on the bed 3aS deposits confirmed this early impression. Much the
same applied in the case of the bed 3aN deposits (see Hendey 1976a: 228-230;
1980: 57-63), although in this instance the nature and distribution of the fossils
were much more obviously indicative of a fluviatile environment.
Evidence for the subaerial accumulation of some QSM fossils has been
discussed elsewhere (Hendey 1974a: 349-353; 1976a: 223-224). This includes
the record of a vertebrate microfaunal concentration, apparently an owl pellet
accumulation, which was burnt prior to incorporation in the deposits. Microfau-
nal concentrations of this kind were not common in ‘E’ Quarry. The most
notable examples were two that occurred at the interface between the QSM
and bed 3aS. These assemblages, designated 1/1968 and 12/1968, were dis-
cussed by Hendey (1970a: 81, 86-88), and remain something of a mystery.
They are probably comprised largely of the residues of owl pellet accumulations
which were transported a short distance and redeposited by minor drainage
channels in QSM or bed 3aS times. This process would account for the
admixture of larger fossils which obviously did not feature in the diet of owls.
Two species of owls are recorded from the OSM.
Otherwise there is no evidence for animals having been ‘bone collectors’
during the period of deposition of the ‘E’ Quarry deposits. Elsewhere in the
south-western Cape concentrations of fossils in porcupine lairs and hyaena dens
have been recorded (Hendey 1974a; Klein 1975). Some of these are in rock
shelters, of which none existed in the ‘E’ Quarry area, while others are found in
what are presumed to be aardvark burrows. Such burrows would not be
expected in the largely subaqueously deposited PPM, and it is unlikely that any
existed on the floodplain of the river in QSM times. An aardvark is recorded
from the OSM, but it is an extremely rare element in the fauna. The aardvark
remains from beds 3aS and 3aN were probably washed into the area by the
river.
Large numbers of fossils were found in certain exposures of the QSM,
although not necessarily concentrated in restricted areas. For example, the
remains of small mammals and birds were abundant in the QSM I collecting
area named ‘East Stream’ (Hendey 1974a, fig. 3). The East Stream fossils
probably represent a microenvironment (floodplain grassland or thicket) in
which predation by small carnivores (mainly mongooses) occurred frequently.
Larger mammals that died there include an elephant (MVammuthus subplani-
frons) several pigs (Nyanzachoerus cf. pattersoni), a large cat (Dinofelis dias-
60 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
temata), and hyaenas (Hyaena abronia). Some redistribution of animal remains
apparently took place when this area was inundated during floods (Hendey
19744: 351-3525 19 7]oaz 223-225).
An impression gained during field and laboratory work was that the body
part representation of vertebrates varied according to the source of material.
The only body part analyses undertaken to date are those of bird remains from
the QSM I and QSM II assemblages (Rich 1980), to which may be added the
detailed record of the number and condition of penguin bones from QSM I
given below. Many more such analyses are required before meaningful tapho-
nomic interpretations are obtained, but some general statements on body part
representation are already possible.
Complete skeletons were not found, although partial skeletons were recov-
ered from both the QSM and PPM. The most complete was that of the
holotype of Hyaena abronia from QSM I, which comprises the skull and about
eighty postcranial bones (Hendey 1974a: 103-115, 351-352). Otherwise
elements of individual skeletons tended to be completely disassociated, or
represented by only a few bones such as parts of a vertebral column or limb.
Even in the latter instances it was exceptional to find bones still articulated. An
example of a partial skeleton from the QSM in which some elements were in
articulation is that of the buffalo illustrated in Figure 13. It is one of several
medium to large mammals from the QSM which probably represent the
remains of animals killed in situ and subsequently dismembered by the primary
predator and by scavengers (Hendey 1974a: 351).
By contrast, the recently described partial skeleton of an Agriotherium
(SAM-PQ-L45062) from bed 3aN, in which all remaining skeletal elements
were disassociated (Hendey 1980: 62-63), was a more common type of occur-
rence. In this instance, the specimen was transported to its point of deposition
by the river and it might well have been complete when deposited, but suffered
subsequently from a variety of destructive post-depositional processes, includ-
ing disarticulation after loss of soft tissue, fire, pressure of overlying deposits,
and, more recently, the mining operation and collecting.
It is virtually certain that the skull of L45062 was intact at the time of
deposition and that its subsequent fragmentation was due largely to the pressure of
overlying deposits. Complete, or nearly complete, skulls are not common in the
‘E’ Quarry assemblage, and all the known specimens suffered some degree of
crushing. Restoration of these specimens was, however, facilitated by the fact that
fragments were easily recovered from their unconsolidated matrix and were
usually undistorted. Missing parts were probably lost during the recovery process
rather than earlier. One of the most complete skulls recovered is illustrated in
Figure 17, while others have been illustrated elsewhere (e.g. Hendey 1974a, figs
19-20; Gentry 1980, figs 28-29; De Muizon & Hendy 1980, figs 1-3, 5). One
instance is known where an exceptionally robust skull might have been intact in
the deposits but was damaged by the mining operation. This is the skull of the
Plesiogulo, SAM-PQ-L40042, described by Hendey (1978d: 330-336).
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 61
In general, the fossils from ‘E’ Quarry are well preserved, although
damage caused by post-mortem processes is not uncommon. These processes
include the mining operation and collecting methods which led to the recovery
of specimens, and they are obviously of no taphonomic significance. Neverthe-
less, it is important that they be recognized and not be confused with that
post-mortem damage which is relevant to taphonomic studies.
This damage is significant since it reveals some of the physical, chemical and
biological processes which affected animal remains from the time of death until
their discovery. From a palaeoecological point of view it is the factors operating
at the time of death and shortly thereafter that are important, since they may
reveal something of prevailing biological interactions and physical conditions.
For example, the activities of predators and scavengers may be revealed by
distinctive types of damage and thus provide evidence of trophic relationships,
while the condition of specimens may also indicate the nature of depositional
environments, which are a reflection of the prevailing physical environment.
The bed 3aN Agriotherium may again be cited as an example, since the
recently discussed post-mortem damage to the specimens (Hendey 1980: 63-66)
is typical of that encountered amongst the larger mammals from ‘E’ Quarry.
Similar and additional types of damage were discussed elsewhere (Hendey
1974a: 349-353). Table 4 lists various types of post-mortem damage evident in
specimens from ‘E’ Quarry. Only one of the more unusual types of damage is
discussed below, since the example cited has not previously been recorded.
Hendey (1974a: 353) mentioned a series of bones from the QSM which had
apparently been etched by the stomach acids of a hyaena. Such specimens are
not common, but one striking example involves the penguins from ‘E’ Quarry.
Two penguin species are recorded, namely, /nguza predemersus and Dege
hendeyi (Simpson 1971, 1975, 1979), and a high proportion of the bones in the
available assemblages have been etched, evidently by stomach acids (Fig. 14).
By contrast, this type of damage is either rare or not recorded in bones of other
birds from the same deposits.
The most likely explanation of this difference in condition is that the
penguins were preyed upon by an animal that ingested their carcasses and later
regurgitated the indigestible remnants, whereas other bird bones found in the
deposits were not ingested by predators. It is only the stouter and more durable
bones of the penguin skeleton which have been recorded (i.e. mainly limb
bones). While other bones of the skeleton are less diagnostic, and therefore less
likely to be recognized as belonging to penguins, their absence is probably due
_ to their having been destroyed by the stomach acids which damaged most of the
surviving bones. The most delicate of bones belonging to other birds are
preserved together with those of penguins, which indicates that the effects of
depositional processes can be eliminated as the cause of the condition and
representation of penguin bones.
Modern penguins are preyed upon by sharks and other large predaceous
fish, and seals (Simpson 1976), and these animals are all possible predators in
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
62
“susuideds Juing Woy sqeysinsuNsip AjIpee. Ajjensn aie Kay} yng ‘y4oRIqQ Ose 2B NeE Peg ‘Wdd PUB WSO 24) JO ,spoq jead, oy) WoL sjIssoq,
(82 “SY “0861 *C ‘OLL Ssy
‘DpL6| AIPpusH) SoIOATUIeS
Aq sUIMeUS puUe sug
auo0g jJusdeipe
JO SSO] Je[NSe1IT YPM sow}
-9WOSs ‘soUOg UO pd}ej}USTIO
A[WOpue ‘SoAOO1S Ie[N3I11]
(ZI “314) (6c “8Y ‘0861 AepucH)
QLAIL] JOOSUI SNOSeYdo wy | s}UDPO! Aq SUIMeUD
$o109
-UJOY PIAOG UO poqeUdTIO S9UOg UO SdAOOI3
A}WOpues ‘SOAOOIS Je[NSoy | [o];esed ssoj 10 DIO
(€ “Sy
>DQL6| A2pucx{) uontIsodep
Jayye usuIdeds JOAO SUIMOY
1oyeM posieyo-pues ‘10d
AdpusH)
sung
(GLL “SY ‘PPLol
SOIOATUIES Kq
(t “3U ‘0861
AgpusyH =‘3'd—s]]NyS jew
-weuw Suljdoye Alpeisedso)
SUsOdep BUIA[IZAO JO
ainssoid [euOolIsodep-1sog
( “3Y ‘6L6l :S-p S8y
"¢L6| Uosduis) (p] “3!4)
SOIOAIUILS JO SPIOB YOVWOIS | (OE “SY °086] AOPUSH) B14
-SUBI] ADATI SUOIIOR SALMA
souoqg poysiq Povel]Ojxa puke PayxdeVid UdIJO| YI90}] puke soudg popriqy
pue ‘Asis s10/pue , 49e]q
Po2INO/ODSIP 41901 puke souog
soauoq peysnid
AgpuoH)
sug
(WLL “30 “PrLol ;
SOIOATUIBS Aq aGNV
souoq
suo]
(siisodap se] us °S°d) Sul
-1oy}eoM Snoonbegns jeuon
-Isodep-isod ‘fSulioyjeVoM
Jelseeqns yeuorlsodop-o1g
GNV
y}90} puke sau0q
poweyojxa pue payorig
SNOILVULSATIVT
SASNVD alavaoug
SNOILVULSONTIT
Sasnv_ ATEVdOud
ADVWAVG JO sadAL
“SIMULLQISUL]T ‘AIIENG JF, WO} Sjisso} Aq poviqiyxs asewep Wajow-}sod jo sajdwexy
bp ATV
ox
OO
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG
Fig. 14. Undamaged (above) and acid-etched (below) penguin tibiotarsi, femora and
carpometacarpi from the QSM (East Stream sample).
the case of the ‘E’ Quarry penguins. In addition, penguins are preyed upon by
terrestrial animals, and ‘E’ Quarry is unique amongst recorded Tertiary pen-
guin localities in that the penguin bones come from non-marine deposits
(Simpson 1976) occurring in association with a wide variety of terrestrial
vertebrates, including predaceous forms. Consequently, it could also be signi-
ficant that ‘E’ Quarry is apparently the only known locality from which penguin
bones etched by stomach acids have been recorded. In fact, the ‘E’ Quarry
penguins are likely to have been preyed upon by several aquatic and terrestrial
predators, although only one is likely to have caused the acid-etched bones.
This was probably an animal that bolted its food, and subsequently regurgitated
indigestible residues. This behaviour applies in the case of sharks (P. A.
Hulley, pers. comm.), and of the predators recorded in association with the ‘E’
Quarry penguins, sharks are here favoured for the role.
Further clues concerning predation on the ‘E’ Quarry penguins may
emerge from more detailed examinations of the available material and compari-
sons with stomach contents of modern penguin predators. Even the most
superficial examination of the ‘E’ Quarry penguin assemblages reveals features
that may be of taphonomic significance. For example, etching is more pro-
nounced on leg bones than those of the flipper (Table 5). In addition, certain
TALULA LULL
|
rn
ilo
PURE ALLAAH
112 11S 114
11
8
7
64 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 5
Limb bones of adult penguins (QSM I, East Stream sample) from ‘E’ Quarry, Langebaanweg.
Inguza predemersus Dege hendeyi
Specimens Specimens Specimens} Specimens Specimens
with little with with little with
or no pronounced Ap orno pronounced We
etching etching etched etching etching etched
Huneius ton a geese ee eG 67
eee a a 6 10 63 — 1 100
Radius ay ere 8 Si 1 — 0
Carpomencannes ey Ce ees bares 43 a — —
Tone i 19 27 59 1 1
Eo rs:
Tibiotarsus.
Tasounaintenons :
Total leg ae
TABLE 6
Etching on penguin leg bones (QSM I —East Stream sample) from ‘E’ Quarry, Langebaanweg.
Inguza predemersus Dege hendeyi
Little or Pronounced Yep Little or Pronounced Wi
no etching _ etching etched |noetching etching etched
Femur,
proximal end : 4 5 56 7 1
Femur,
distalend . : 2, i 78 72 6
Tibiotarsus,
proximal end : 1 9 90 1 1
Tibiotarsus,
distalend . . 4 8 67 l 3
Tarsometatarsus,
proximal end : — 13 100 — >
Tarsometatarsus,
distalend . 5 10 67 1 5)
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 65
parts of individual bones are more affected than others. For example, the
proximal ends of femora are less often etched than distal ends, while all the
proximal ends of the tarsometatarsi are etched, and, at least in the case of
Inguza predemersus, the proximal ends of the tibiotarsi are more affected than
distal ends (Table 6). Furthermore, although there is a general similarity in the
condition of the bones of the two penguin species, there are very marked
differences in the representation of individual bones. This may simply be due to
the smaller Dege hendeyi sample size, but it is striking that whereas there are
nearly as many femora of D. hendeyi (ten) as there are of J. predemersus
(twelve), other limb bones of the former are appreciably less common. This
applies particularly in the case of flipper bones (Table 7).
TABLE 7
Flipper and leg bones of penguins (QSM I—East Stream sample)
from ‘E’ Quarry, Langebaanweg.
Dege
hendeyi
Inguza
predemersus
Total flipper
Total leg
Flipper: leg
The above observations are not interpreted here, but they presumably
reflect events which followed shortly after the deaths of the birds concerned,
and thus indicate a potential value in analyses of this kind.
Certain of the ‘E’ Quarry fossils also reveal something about the condition of
animals during their lifetimes, and although this does not necessarily fall within the
scope of taphonomy, it is convenient to mention it here. The majority of
specimens show no signs of abnormality, but pathological conditions amongst
carnivore specimens have already been recorded (Hendey 1974a: 184-185; 1978d:
336; 1980: 53), while abnormalities observed amongst herbivores will be men-
tioned later (see p. 76). The latter are ascribed to dietary factors, but most of the
other recorded conditions are evidently due to old age or injury. Apart from their
intrinsic interest in the field of palaeopathology, dental and osteological abnor-
malities are significant since they may provide evidence of prevailing environmen-
tal conditions, the age structure of populations, cause of death, and behaviour
patterns. Consequently, a detailed study of relevant specimens is clearly desirable.
PALAEOENVIRONMENT
The nature of environments in the south-western Cape and adjacent
regions during the Palaeozoic, Mesozoic, and early Cenozoic are known only in
a very general way, but the record for the late Cenozoic is better (Deacon
1979). However, even for this period the record is only intermittently detailed,
66 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
and for the late Tertiary it is the deposits in the vicinity of Langebaanweg that
provide the most substantial body of information.
The environment at Langebaanweg at the time that the Varswater Forma-
tion and other late Tertiary deposits were laid down was clearly very different
from that of the present. An account of the physical setting of the area and of
the geological history of these deposits was given earlier, and the present
section will deal with the climate and the environmental implications of the
Varswater Formation flora and fauna. It is important to note that information
presented below contributed to the revised interpretation of the geological
history of the Langebaanweg area. In other words, although these two aspects
of the present study are interrelated, the interpretation of the geological history
stemmed in part from the palaeoenvironmental study rather than the reverse,
which is implied by their order of appearance in this report.
The late Miocene and early Pliocene (i.e. between about 10 and 4 Ma) was
a period of great change over much of the earth’s surface. It was the time when
the generally moderate climatic conditions which characterized most of the
Tertiary were coming to an end, and when the most recent of the world’s ‘ice
ages’ was beginning. This ‘ice age’ has been a period of marked oscillations in
world climates, and these have had a profound effect on the biology of the
earth.
The Miocene—Pliocene boundary is defined on the basis of the marine
sedimentary succession in the Mediterranean Basin, and it is now generally
taken to date back about 5 Ma, with marine microfossils and palaeomagnetic
data having facilitated widespread correlations (e.g. Berggren & Van Couv-
ering 1974). Apart from changes in marine microfaunas, the terminal Miocene
was characterized by a world-wide marine regression, a phenomenon that was
caused by increased glaciation in Antarctica (see below), and which had
significant effects in coastal and continental shelf regions of the world.
In the Mediterranean this regression contributed to the so-called ‘Messinian
[or Mediterranean] salinity crisis’, which ‘was an interval of highly restricted
circulation reflected in extensive deposition of stagnant water and evaporative
sediments’ (Van Couvering et al. 1976: 263). This event, which lasted approxi-
mately 1,5 m.y., was concluded by ‘a return to former water depths coinciden-
tally with the beginning of the Pliocene . . . which is calibrated to t = 5 Ma
(Van Couvering et al. 1976: 263). Hsti et al. (1977: 402) have stated that the
Messinian salinity crisis is ‘such a geologically recent catastrophic event [that it]
had a great impact on the modern world, . . . on regional and global climates
and on the evolution and distribution of plants and animals’.
An example of the biological impact of this event was that it allowed the
late Miocene faunal interchange between Africa and Eurasia which will be
mentioned later (see p. 84), and hence the presence in the ‘E’ Quarry fauna of
certain ‘Eurasian’ taxa. However, the principal significance of the Messinian
event here is that it is well documented and thus illustrates the nature and
timing of certain of the global phenomena that occurred during the late
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 67
Miocene and early Pliocene. For example, the Messinian event was simply one
result of the increased late Miocene Antarctic glaciation and the consequent
global marine regression, which are events of far greater significance in the present
instance. Langebaanweg is situated in southern mid-latitudes, 7 500 km south of
the Mediterranean, whereas it is only 4 000 km from Antarctica, and separated
from it by an ocean that influences the climates of both regions. In addition, its
near-coastal location makes it subject to the effects of sea-level changes.
In a recent review of late Cenozoic palaeoenvironments on the west coast
of southern Africa, Tankard & Rogers (1978) related the aridity of this region
to the history of the Southern Ocean and the Antarctic ice-cap. Although there
are many conflicting statements on the timing of Antarctic ice-cap origin and
growth (see Mercer 1978), there is evidence that maximum growth was
achieved late in the Miocene (see McLachlan & McMillan 1979, fig. 2). Once
the Antarctic ice-cap had formed it ‘remained a semi-permanent feature exhi-
biting some changes of volume’, ‘the most important [being] during the latest
Miocene (t = 5 MY ago) when ice volumes increased beyond those of the
present day’ (Kennett 1978: 41). This was followed by ‘a regressive ice phase
with extensive melting and iceberg calving’ (Hayes et al. 1973: 24). The glacial
maximum led to the terminal Miocene global marine regression (cycles TM3.2,
TM3.3 of Vail & Hardenbol 1979), while the subsequent regressive ice phase
caused the early Pliocene global transgression (cycle TP1).
The fact that these events are correlated not only with the Messinian
Salinity crisis and its conclusion, but also with coastal strata elsewhere (e.g.
New Zealand—see Loutit & Kennett 1979), suggested that correlation with
Miocene-—Pliocene strata in South Africa is also feasible.
Relevant here is evidence that local sea temperatures declined during the
period of deposition of the Varswater Formation.
Present sea temperatures on the Cape west coast are low, and the area falls
within the Cold Temperate Province of the southern African coast (Brown &
Jarman 1978). However, the coast near Langebaanweg is close to the southern
boundary of this province and the western limit of the ‘overlap region’ between
the Cold and Warm Temperate Provinces (Brown & Jarman 1978: 1246). This
‘overlap region’ includes areas where the proportion of cold west coast species is
high, and others, such as False Bay, where ‘south coast species are much in
evidence’ (Brown & Jarman 1978: 1261). The northern shore of False Bay is at
present only about 130 km south of Langebaanweg, and during the past when
sea-levels were substantially higher, this bay was linked across the Cape Flats
with Table Bay, 20 km further north. Furthermore, Langebaanweg is today only
13 km inland from the ‘almost landlocked body of water comprising Langebaan
Lagoon and Saldanha Bay’, with its ‘biota of great richness, diversity and
productivity’ that includes species that ‘are characteristic of other provinces,
notably the south coast warm-temperate region’ (Brown & Jarman 1978: 1267).
Langebaanweg is thus situated in an area where the local marine fauna is
potentially subject to marked differences in composition depending upon
68 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
prevailing climatic and environmental factors. Even today elements of two .
contrasting faunas (warm and cold temperate) are represented near by (Lange-
baan Lagoon, Saldanha Bay), or not far away (False Bay), while the local
occurrence of thermally anomalous molluscs during the late Pleistocene has
been documented by Tankard (1975d).
Molluscs of the GM are mostly of taxa found along the adjacent coast
today, but some ‘suggest water temperatures considerably warmer (about
3-5 °C) than today. These warm water molluscs include Cellana capensis, Turbo
sarmaticus, Barbatia obliquata, Ostrea atherstoni, and Striostrea margaritacea
(Tankard 1974a: 281). The oysters Ostrea and Striostrea are not known from ‘E’
Quarry exposures of the GM, but are from equivalent deposits on the near-by
farm of Sandheuwel (Tankard 1974a). Cellana capensis is today found north of
Port Alfred on the east coast (i.e. the Subtropical Province), while the other
four species occur eastwards from False Bay (i.e. the Warm Temperate and
Subtropical Provinces) (Kensley 1973; Day 1974; Brown & Jarman 1978).
In addition, although the sharks of the GM have yet to be studied in detail
(Hendey 1976a: 233), three of the species that have been recorded are today
characteristic of warmer oceanic regions. They are Carcharhinus melanopterus,
C. limbatus, and Squatina africana (Bass et al. 1973, 1975).
Indications are, therefore, that the GM was laid down during a warm
phase (i.e. warm temperate to subtropical), probably the period late in the
Miocene that preceded the onset of colder conditions towards the end of this
epoch.
Molluscs of the QSM are also mainly of taxa found along the adjacent
coast today, although one is a warmer water species. This is Pyrene albuginosa,
which presently ranges from False Bay to Natal. On the other hand, the QSM
assemblage, unlike that of the GM, also includes two essentially cold-water
species, namely, Chiton nigrovirescens and Tricolia capensis, which are largely
confined to the Cold Temperate Province of the west coast. In this instance, T.
capensis is particularly significant, since it is the most commonly occurring of
the QSM marine species (Kensley 1977).
It is, therefore, likely that local sea temperatures at the time of deposition
of the QSM were somewhat lower than those prevailing earlier when the GM
was laid down, and might have been little different from those of the present
(i.e. cold temperate). Consequently, the OSM is likely to date from the period
when the effects of Antarctic glaciation were being manifested in southern
mid-latitudes (i.e. terminal Miocene or later).
A similar, and probably contemporaneous, change from warm to cold
water is recorded on the west coast of South America. Mercer (1978: 80).
quoting W. J. Zinsmeister, noted that the ‘presence of distinctly warm-water
genera of molluscs indicates that during Middle and Late Miocene time the
coastal waters of southern Chile were warm subtropical’, and that these
‘warm-water faunas were replaced by distinctly cool temperate faunas in latest
Miocene or earliest Pliocene time’.
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 69
Although no identifiable molluscs are recorded from deposits overlying the
QSM (i.e. the PPM), remains of another marine species, the seal (Homiphoca
capensis), suggest that either there was a further temperature drop in the
period between deposition of beds 3aS and 3aN, or that temperatures remained
consistently cold during this period. The evidence for this concerns the greater
development of the maxillo-turbinals in the bed 3aN population of H. capensis
(De Muizon & Hendey 1980: 123). This adaptation to low sea and ambient air
temperatures may either reflect a lowering of such temperatures during the
period in question, or a delayed reaction to the prevailing cold conditions. In
the case of the latter alternative, the implication is that the cold adaptation in
H. capensis lagged behind the onset of the cold. This may be a more reasonable
supposition in the case of a large mammal than the one that would have the
adaptation immediately coincident with the temperature change.
It is worth noting in this connection that H. capensis was almost certainly
resident in the Langebaanweg area, and consequently that the cold adaptation
reflects local conditions. H. capensis was definitely not represented by occasio-
nal vagrant individuals as is the case today with certain Antarctic and sub-
Antarctic seals recorded on the Cape coast (e.g. Mirounga leonina, Lobodon
carcinophagus and Hydrurga leptonyx). The presence of the remains of very
young, probably neonate, individuals in the ‘E’ Quarry assemblage indicates
that breeding took place in the immediate vicinity. Otherwise the individuals
represented range from young to very old, and at least in beds 3aS and 3aN
they are present in large numbers, indicating large local populations at the time
of deposition.
In addition, it is unlikely that H. capensis was seasonally migratory. Its
dental and postcranial characteristics suggest it was a coastal species, unlike its
closest living relatives, the pelagic crabeater and leopard seals (Lobodon
carcinophagus and Hydrurga leptonyx) (De Muizon & Hendey 1980). These
two species are migratory, moving southwards during summer when the pack-
ice begins to break up (King 1964). Southward migration during summer was
probably characteristic of all the southern middle and high latitude migratory
seals that are now extinct, and since beds 3aS and 3aN were probably laid down
during summer (see p. 73), H. capensis evidently did not follow this practice.
Other evidence of prevailing temperatures may yet be obtained from a
study of the QSM and PPM avifaunas. There are indications that the avifaunas
also reflect cold conditions (see p. 54), but this has yet to be substantiated.
Available evidence therefore indicates a lowering of sea temperatures
during the period between deposition of the GM and QSM, and either a further
drop between deposition of beds 3aS and 3aN, or consistently low temperatures
at that time. Although there is as yet no positive evidence of what occurred
between deposition of the QSM and bed 3aS, it is unlikely that there was a
deviation from the generally cold conditions otherwise indicated, since the
QSM, bed 3aS and bed 3aN represent deposition during a single geological
episode (i.e. a marine transgression). Sea temperatures were low at this time
70 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
apparently because it followed immediately after the terminal Miocene glacial
maximum in Antarctica. Temperatures might have risen again later in the early
Pliocene transgression (see p. 16).
Thus, while deposition of the GM probably took place before the onset of
the terminal Miocene glacial maximum, the QSM and PPM are likely to
post-date this event. This conclusion, taken in conjunction with others dis-
cussed in this report, contributed to the correlation of the ‘E’ Quarry deposits
with the late Miocene-early Pliocene events in Antarctica, the Mediterranean
Basin and elsewhere. This correlation is summarized in Table 8, which formed
the basis of the correlation of the entire late Tertiary succession in the
Langebaanweg area with the global sea-level changes recorded by Vail &
Hardenbol (1979) (Fig.3, Table 2).
To sum up, the GM is here interpreted as representing an event dating back
to a warm phase during the late Miocene, while the post-GM regression is
correlated with the world-wide lowering of sea-level which coincided with the
glacial maximum in Antarctica during the terminal Miocene (i.e. between 5,5
and 5 Ma—see Van Couvering et al.1976). Amongst other significant events, this
regression has been correlated with the climax of the Messinian salinity crisis,
and the formation of phosphate nodule beds in Australia and alsewhere in the
world (Carter 1978). The transgression during which the QSM and PPM were
laid down is in turn correlated with the regressive ice phase in Antarctica during
the early Pliocene, between 4,5 and 5 Ma (Van Couvering et al. 1976). This
transgression, which is recorded in countries as far apart as Spain and New
Zealand (Loutit & Kennett 1979), brought the Messinian salinity crisis to an end.
This interpretation of events indicates that the main exposures of the Varswater
Formation in ‘E’ Quarry (i.e. the QSM and PPM) are of the same age as the
early Pliocene deposits in the Mediterranean Basin (including those at Montpell-
ier in France), and at least part of the Opoitian Stage in New Zealand.
Correlation with other early Pliocene coastal deposits is clearly possible.
One possible inconsistency with this interpretation concerns the suggestion
that sea temperatures might have declined during the period of deposition of the
QSM and PPM. Since the early Pliocene transgression post-dates the late
Miocene glacial maximum in Antarctica, it would be expected that sea temper-
atures in southern mid-latitudes would be rising at this time. However, according
to Hayes et al. (1973: 24) ‘the waters around [Antarctica] would not necessarily
exhibit warming at that time but simply a slowdown in the rate of cooling’. At
issue here is the nature and timing of events in Antarctica during the late
Tertiary, and, according to at least some interpretations, Southern Ocean
surface temperatures did decline during the early Pliocene (Mercer 1978: 84-86,
fig.4). This is consistent with palynological evidence from the south-western
Cape that suggested to Coetzee (1978: fig.2) that the local climate changed from
‘Cool Wet’ during the late Miocene to ‘Colder Drier’ during the Pliocene.
There is abundant evidence from various parts of the world that the
Miocene and Pliocene were epochs when terrestrial environments were under-
71
(861) 992190) «+ (6L61) JOQUOPIEH WF TPA x
puejsseis pue (19]009
(YW 9 ‘9-8 ‘6) | S010} UOOSUOLU SUTUUI050q ) («FEIN 91949)
SUDDOIJY 93°] jeordosjqns jestdosqns 0} jesidosjqns 0} UOISSIISOI yoevog
x (QIed Ul) IAT =| o}eJOdUIN} We AA | 9} eJOdW9} WIAA | SULINP PUeISTINS
os
(ND)
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG
(BW 7 “S—9 °9)
QUdDOII
[eUrUIS |,
tm 2s @ AUT
pe)
as
. oul
ag
2 [eAIO}UI
oO
®
a OUI TL
S
os
oo)
=
2
dOV
Spuvysseis
pue spur[poom
9) e13d Wd [|
4 ¢SOQUAJ
dy} jo
yusUIdooIANp
BUOI}S 1SIU
: Spuvysseis
pue spuevypoom
9} e10d Wd |,
ax(Jded Ul) HAT
NOILV.LAO4A
CNV
¢%S4INOZ NAT1Od
9} e19d Wd |
+ 4910 JOQ
uBy} JOLIp
pue Iaploo
‘oye1Odw9 |,
ALVAIIO
9)eJ0d UID}
plo Ajqeqoig
a}eJ0odw9}
PIOD
SAYOLV aad NAL
vds
(x€°€
‘TEL $1949)
UOISSOISOY
(41d. L 91949)
UOISSOISSUBI |,
THAAT-VAS
syisodop ON
[e11So119}
pue oulien}sy
o[yeIANy
a[eIAN]
[e10} I] OUTIL
SLNAUNNOYIANA
TIVNOILISOdaa
TVdIONId
‘soMuvegosur’y “AlIend) 4, ‘UONeWIO. In}eMSIeA IY
Q ATAV
UAGWNAWN THAVAD
(WSO)
daa NaN
GNVS dSOZLUVNO
(poyejue
-Joyipun Wdd)
ddan
HLIMOHdSOHd
TVLAT Td
SLINO.
JIHdVaADILVULs
NOILVWUOdT YALVMSUVA
72 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
going significant change. For example, Webb (1977: 355) has recorded that
‘early in the Cenozoic Era North America was covered almost entirely by
forest’, and that ‘during the mid-Cenozoic . . . an increasing proportion of the
land opened up, forests giving way to woodland savanna, thorn forest, and
thorn scrub’, while ‘by the late Cenozoic forested areas had decreased still
further and much of the savanna was being replaced by grassland steppe and
even desert’. Webb (1977: 371) also states that ‘the last step in dismantling the
once continuous forests of North America came in the Pliocene, about five
million years ago’. He goes on to note that ‘a remarkably similar series of
changes affected the fauna of temperate South America during the same
40-million-year interval’ (Webb 1977: 355).
Kemp (1978) has recorded the environmental changes undergone in the
south-east Indian Ocean region during this period and, amongst other observa-
tions, she noted that the ‘latest Miocene was marked by an intense and sudden
chilling [which] must have caused marked precipitation decrease in much of
Australia’ (Kemp 1978: 170). These and subsequent climatic events had a
pronounced affect on the vegetation of the continent. For example, Axelrod &
Raven (1978: 112) recorded that ‘evidence in south-eastern Australia ...
[indicates] that the transition from a humid temperate rainforest to the present
dominant Eucalyptus-Acacia vegatation occurred at ~ 4.5 m.y. (Gill 1975)’.
There were comparable changes in Europe at this time. Delson (1975: 46)
has suggested that the deterioration in the European environment late in the
Miocene was determined largely by ‘relative decrease in moisture’, there being
‘a gradient from well-watered deciduous (or even evergreen) woodland in the
north, through parkland, scrub and into steppelike vegetation . . . with gallery
forests along watercourses’. The situation in southern Europe is relevant in the
present instance, since those areas bordering the Mediterranean now have a
climate similar to that of the south-western Cape, and changes undergone in
the two regions during the late Tertiary are likely to have been comparable.
The faunas of Langebaanweg and Montpellier in southern France are
broadly contemporaneous and similar in composition (see p. 89), and these
localities are similarly situated in near-coastal environments which today have a
Mediterranean type of climate. Consequently, it is possible that conclusions
reached concerning the palaeoenvironment of Montpellier early in the Pliocene
are relevant in the case of Langebaanweg.
Delson (1975: 47), quoting Lobreau-Callen & Suc (1972), states that
pollens from Montpellier indicate a ‘monsoon/dry season climate’, ‘closely
analogous to that of ... North Vietnam’. Schulze & McGee (1978, table 1),
following Képpen & Geiger (1936), have monsoon climate characterized by
‘mean temperatures above 18 °C for all months’, with ‘forest-vegetation despite
[a] dry season’.
There is evidence to suggest that these conditions might have prevailed in
the Langebaanweg area during the period of deposition of the middle to late
Miocene elements in the succession (i.e. the GM and the upper levels of the
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 73
pre-GM deposits), but that by the early Pliocene (i.e. QSM, PPM) they were
changing, with the present climate and vegetation patterns being in the process
of development.
The predominance of browsers amongst the QSM and PPM herbivores
indicates that forests or woodlands existed in the area during the early
Pliocene, probably having been present locally for an appreciable period. This
is confirmed by palynological evidence from the upper levels of the pre-GM
deposits, which also indicates that the forests of the time included tropical
elements such as palms (J.A. Coetzee, pers. comm.). The local vegetation
during at least a part of the middle to late Miocene might therefore have been
of a monsoon-forest type. The presence of grazers in the QSM and PPM faunas
indicates that by the early Pliocene grasslands had developed locally, while
there is palynological evidence for fynbos vegetation types making an appear-
ance (see p. 43).
At the time of deposition of the QSM and PPM, rainfall was strongly
seasonal, with the wet season probably being summer. However, the rainfall
regime was then apparently changing, and the summer-wet/winter-dry pattern
was probably more characteristic of the late Miocene than the early Pliocene.
This possiblity, together with the likely vegetation, suggests the monsoonal
combination of forest/dry season quoted above.
It has yet to be certainly established when the summer-dry/winter-wet
rainfall pattern was first established in the south-western Cape, but there can
be little doubt that the QSM and PPM date from a period when the transition
was taking place; or was about to take place. According to Taylor (1978: 75)
‘dry summers are of recent origin in southern Africa and probably only
appeared at the beginning of the Pleistocene’. Axelrod & Raven (1978: 112)
are more cautious in stating the ‘there is no evidence that the summer-dry
(mediterranean) climates in southern Africa existed before the formation of a
major ice sheet on Antarctica (~ 5 m.y.)’. Although the fynbos vegetation is
today centred on the south-western Cape winter-rainfall region, it evidently had
its origins under summer-rainfall conditions (Levyns 1964; Axelrod & Raven
1978; Taylor 1978). Consequently, the fact that fynbos was being established in
QSM times does not necessarily mean that the summer-dry/winter-wet pattern
already existed then.
The situation in respect of prevailing temperatures during the Miocene and
early Pliocene is less complex. It was suggested earlier that temperate condi-
tions prevailed in QSM and PPM times, and conditions then may have been
little different from those of today. The present mean annual temperature in
the south-western Cape is about 17 °C, with a mean annual range of about 8 °C
near the coast (Fuggle & Ashton 1979). The region is thus cooler than those
with monsoon climates, but the temperature difference is not great. During
warmer phases such as that during the Miocene when the GM and upper levels
of the pre-GM deposits were laid down, temperatures characteristic of mon-
soon climates might well have prevailed.
74 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Langebaanweg during the Miocene, like Montpellier during the early
Pliocene, might therefore have had a monsoon climate and vegetation. The
essential difference between these two localities was in the timing of a drop in
temperature and its consequent affect on rainfall and vegetation. The glaciation
of the Arctic lagged behind the glaciation of Antarctica, with the expansion of
the Arctic ice-cap and sea-level ice dated to 3 Ma (Berggren & Van Couvering
1974). Thus, while conditions at Montpellier during the early Pliocene were still
‘tropical’, at Langebaanweg they had already moderated to ‘temperate’.
In his account of the palaeoenvironments of the south-western Cape and
adjacent regions, Deacon (1979, table 1) recorded that the Miocene was
characterized by an ‘alternation between dominance by tropical palm and
temperate vegetation’, while during the Pliocene ‘ancestral fynbos communi-
ties’ were established. The evidence for these changes comes from fossil pollens
studied by Coetzee (1978), who found that there was a warm phase in the
region during the late Miocene when the vegetation was palm-dominated.
Coetzee dated this phase to 8 Ma, but since it immediately preceded the
terminal Miocene temperate phase associated with the Antarctic glacial maxi-
mum, it could have lasted to about 6 Ma. Palms and a casuarina apparently
persisted through the terminal Miocene cool phase (Coetzee’s Pollen Zone
Lvi), into the Pliocene (Pollen Zone Lvii), when species typical of the fynbos
make their first strong appearance. Consequently, it is possible that even
though temperatures were no longer favourable, vestiges of a pre-existing
monsoonal vegetation were still in evidence at Langebaanweg when the QSM
and PPM were being deposited.
Axelrod & Raven (1978: fig. 6C), following Greenway (1970), indicate
that during the latter half of the Miocene (i.e. c. 15-7 Ma) the south-western
Cape was an area of ‘subtropical forest’ bounded a little to the north of
Langebaanweg by ‘sclerophyll vegetation’. During the period of environmental
transition that followed, the forest was replaced by the sclerophyll vegetation.
The displacement of the forests was evidently a gradual process which was still
under way at the time that the QSM and PPM were being laid down.
It seems then that the main fossiliferous deposits of ‘E’ Quarry date from a
period of transition, when climate, vegetation and fauna were in the process of
change. These sometimes astonishingly rich fossiliferous deposits represent a
period when a previously hospitable environment was undergoing a marked
change for the worse. It was colder and drier, perhaps with rainfall tending
towards a winter rather than summer peak, but in any case with a pronounced
dry season; the vegetation was changing from forests or woodlands to more open
types (fynbos and grassland), while there was a corresponding change amongst
the terrestrial vertebrates, with open-country forms making a strong appearance.
The fynbos of the south-western Cape, in contrast to some other vegeta-
tion regions in Africa, is a less favourable habitat for larger mammals, and
although the situation was to vary in response to changing environmental
conditions during the Pleistocene (Hendey 1974a; Klein 1980), the environmen-
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG TD
tal deterioration early in the Pliocene brought to an end the period when
mammals perhaps enjoyed their greatest success in this region. The Varswater
Formation provides the final and, indeed, only local evidence of this period.
The inferred habitat preferences of many of the ‘E’ Quarry taxa were given
earlier (see pp. 45-53). The habitats of invertebrates tend to be very specific, and
the ‘E’ Quarry species were invaluable in determining the depositional environ-
ments of the horizons in which they occur. As a general rule, vertebrates are less
useful in this repect, although they are usually indicative of the major habitat
types, namely, marine, fresh water and terrestrial. For example, representatives
of the marine environment include sharks, certain birds, the seal, and cetaceans;
freshwater taxa include the otter and the hippopotamus. The majority of the
vertebrates are, however, terrestrial forms, and it is this group that will be dealt
with here, since some provide an additional insight into the nature of the
environment at the time that the Varswater Formation was laid down.
Amongst the herbivorous mammals both woodland species (browsers) and
grassland species (grazers) occur. While the former predominate in terms of the
number of species, grazers were more commonly represented at certain levels
in the succession, or areas within the mine, evidently because of the tapho-
nomic factors in operation. For example the alcelaphines (Damalacra neanica
and D. acalla), which were undoubtedly grazers although relatively primitive
representatives of their group, were the most commonly occurring of the larger
mammals in the bed 3aS channel deposits of the PPM.
Before analysing the significance of faunal representation at any given
level or area, it would be desirable if minimum numbers of individuals were
determined. This has yet to be done because in many instances assemblages are
very large and the sorting of body parts and identification of taxa represented is
incomplete. Nevertheless, some patterns of representation are already obvious.
It was stated elsewhere (Hendey 1980: 56) that the remains of certain
woodland species were incorporated in the Varswater Formation with increas-
ing frequency as deposition progressed. The example cited was that of the
giraffids, Sivatherium, Palaeotragus, and Giraffa. Conversely, the grazing rhi-
noceros Ceratotherium is represented in decreasing numbers.
This was interpreted as indicating that either woodlands were an increas-
ingly widespread habitat in the vicinity, or that taphonomic factors were such
that the remains of large woodland species were incorporated in the deposits in
increasing numbers, while those of a large grazer correspondingly decreased.
The former alternative is less likely in view of the representation of other
grazers. These include the alcelaphines, Damalacra neanica and D. acalla,
which are common in the higher levels (beds 3aS and 3aN), but very rare lower
down (QSM). If grasslands were, indeed, giving way to woodlands, then the
alcelaphines would also have been represented in diminishing numbers.
It may, in fact, have been the reverse situation that led to the observed
representation of woodland-grassland species, that is, a diminution of wood-
lands in the area. The deteriorating local environment probably caused wood-
76 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
lands to be increasingly confined to the immediate vicinity of the river, thus
restricting the habitat available to browsing species. Such animals would then
have been increasingly hard-pressed in exploiting the diminishing food resour-
ces, with an increase in mortality caused by starvation being likely. In addition,
it is possible that as the rainfall pattern was changing from a summer to winter
maximum, it became more irregular and perhaps even diminished. Droughts
might, therefore, have been an added hardship confronting the fauna.
There is evidence that at least some of the ‘E’ Quarry browsers were
ill-adapted to prevailing conditions by bed 3aN times. For example, teeth of
Sivatherium from this level sometimes exhibit hypoplasia of the enamel (fig.15)
iii PUA LLL LLLP LLL i
Fig. 15. A-C. Incisors of Sivatherium hendeyi from the PPM 3aN (unnumbered
Dump 10 specimens), with hypoplasia of the enamel. D. A healthy specimen.
This condition results from disturbances in the formation of the enamel matrix
during development of the teeth, and is a positive indication of ill-health in the
immature individual (Scott & Symons 1974). The aetiology in the case of the
bed 3aN Sivatherium is not known, but a nutritional inadequacy is most likely.
Such inadequacies could be caused by reduced food resources.
A second dental abnormality observed amongst bed 3aN browsers, is
irregular and excessive wear of teeth. Although this was observed in several of
the bovid species, it is most common in the teeth of the reduncines and/or
tragelaphines. There are problems in distinguishing the teeth of these animals
(see below), but it is virtually certain that the abnormal bed 3aN specimens
belong to the reduncines (mostly Kobus subdolus, but some Kobus sp. B), the
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG Fig)
species most commonly represented by easily distinguishable horn-cores.
Abnormal wear on the teeth (Fig. 16) is reminiscent of that which is often
found in zoo animals that have been provided with inappropriate food. For
example, abrasive food such as hay, which is suitable only for hypsodont
grazers, causes excessive and irregular wear on the teeth of browsers. Living
reduncines are grazers, but the ‘E’ Quarry species have teeth resembling those
of the browsing tragelaphines (Gentry 1980: 255-256). The implication is that
the bed 3aN reduncines were browsers that were including in their diet an
abrasive food (probably grasses) to which they were ill-adapted.
Indications are, therefore, that by bed 3aN times at least some, and perhaps
all, the browsing herbivores in the fauna were under stress, with mortality
probably being higher than usual. Thus, it could have been the diminution rather
than an increase in woodland habitats that led to the increased number of
browsers being incorporated into the accumulating ‘E’ Quarry deposits.
It has previously been postulated that rainfall at that time was strongly
seasonal and that the fossiliferous channel deposits of beds 3aS and 3aN
represent flood-season accumulations (e.g. Hendey 1980: 60-62). Conversely,
the subaerially accumulated fossils of the QSM accumulated during the dry
season (Hendey 1976a: 223-225). These conclusions are based on the nature of
the deposits and the incorporated fossils.
For example, burnt bone is a not uncommon element of the QSM and
PPM assemblages, indicating that vegetation and/or peat fires were a feature of
the area at the time of their deposition (Hendey 1980: 66-67). Since hominid
activity can be excluded as a possible cause of fires, as can volcanic activity and
li
1
HHI
I
ni
f
7
nhl
I
S
nu
9\1
Zi1
—
Fig. 16. Reduncinae upper and lower molars from the PPM 3aN (unnumbered
Dump 10 specimens), showing abnormal and excessive wear.
78 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
rock falls, it is most likely that fires were started by lightning. Such fires could
be expected only if a pronounced, and perhaps prolonged, dry season had left
the vegetation and peat deposits desiccated and inflammable. These fires must
have placed the fauna under additional stress. Firstly, animals trapped in the
fires would be injured or killed. This would apply especially in the case of
slow-moving forms, such as tortoises, and this could account for the large
numbers of tortoises found in the QSM, with its component of fossils accumu-
lated subaerially during the dry season (see above). Secondly, fires would have
further reduced the food supply available to herbivores, aggravating a starva-
tion problem caused by a deteriorating environment, and the drought which
preceded the first thunderstorms of the rainy season.
Lightning as the cause of fires is itself of palaeoenvironmental interest.
Under existing climatic conditions thunderstorms occur in the south-western
Cape only rarely (‘nearly five occasions per year—Schulze 1965: 313), and
although lightning is known to cause fires in this region, such fires are infrequent,
especially in the coastal areas (Kruger 1979). On the other hand, since
thunderstorms are a characteristic accompaniment of strong solar heating,
‘lightning is about ten times more frequent’ in summer-rainfall regions (Kruger
1979, quoting Kroninger 1978). This may be further evidence for summer rather
than winter rainfall in the Langebaanweg area during the early Pliocene.
Another possible effect of fires and the consequent reduction in vegetation
cover at this time was the exposure of the unconsolidated sediments of the
region to erosion at the onset of the wet season. This would account for the
large volumes of sediment carried by the river and deposited at its mouth, so
building up the Varswater Formation. In addition, there was probably an
increased rainfall run-off from the devegetated areas and, consequently, an
increase in the volume and duration of flooding. The devastating effects of the
floods would, therefore, have been intensified.
There is now some additional evidence to support the hypothesis of
seasonal deposition in the PPM during flood periods. A preliminary analysis of
a sample of Sivatherium teeth from bed 3aN suggests that it represents a
‘catastrophic’ rather than ‘atritional’ mortality (see Voorhies 1969: 46, pl. 13
(figs 1-2)). There is also a suggestion that the material in this sample was
accumulated during a restricted period of the year. Since it is abundantly clear
that the bed 3aN Sivatherium specimens were deposited in a river channel, it is
almost certain that they reflect a flood-season accumulation.
The situation that resulted in many of the fossils being incorporated in the
QSM and PPM is summed up below.
During the dry season terrestrial vertebrates would tend to concentrate in
the immediate vicinity of the river, including the now exposed QSM floodplain,
where fresh water in the generally sandy region was probably most readily
available. The area adjacent to the floodplain was probably the one to which
woodlands were largely confined, and was therefore the main habitat available
to browsing herbivores. Towards the end of each dry season the shortage of
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 79
food for herbivores might have become acute, with fires caused by electrical
storms further reducing available supplies. The fires probably killed many
animals, and might have caused others to drown when they sought refuge in the
river. Most affected would have been slow-moving non-swimmers such as
tortoises, which are abundantly represented in the QSM.
The first heavy rains of the wet season would cause flooding of the river.
If the rains fell inland and not locally, the flooding may have caught animals
concentrated on the floodplain unawares and swept them downstream to be
deposited at its mouth, which was then in the vicinity of the present ‘E’ Quarry.
Animals weakened by starvation or injured by fires were less likely to escape
the flooding than healthy animals. In addition to animals drowned in the flood,
the river would have carried with it remains of the animals that had previously
died on the floodplain. The arrival at the river mouth of large numbers of
carcasses of terrestrial vertebrates must have attracted aquatic carnivores such
as seals and sharks to the area, while carcasses stranded on the river-banks
would have attracted terrestrial scavengers. Those that died had their remains
added to the accumulating deposits.
The representation of animals in the QSM and PPM, the large numbers of
individuals involved, and the condition of their remains are thus indicative of
the deteriorating environment in the region during the early Pliocene. A
comparison between the mammals represented then and in modern times
indicates very clearly that the fauna of the region underwent a radical change in
the intervening period. Evidently this change had already been initiated by the
early Pliocene.
The period of deposition of the Varswater Formation was one of transi-
tion, with the local physiography, climate, vegetation and fauna all being in the
process of change. Patterns established earlier during the Miocene were still in
evidence, but those that were to characterize the Quaternary were already
being established.
EVOLUTIONARY ASPECTS OF THE MAMMALIAN FAUNA
Dating as it does from the period near the Miocene—Pliocene boundary, it
is to be expected that the fauna of the Varswater Formation would have
characteristics of both the time that Kurtén (1971: 152) has termed the ‘climax
of the Age of Mammals’ (i.e. the late Miocene), and the Quaternary, which is
characterized by similarly spectacular faunas only in some tropical regions, and
with progressively less diverse faunas in higher latitudes. The ‘E’ Quarry fauna
is, indeed, of a transitional nature and, at least in terms of its mammals, it
provides a record unparalleled in Africa of the final flowering of Tertiary life
before the climatic instability and extremes of the Quaternary so drastically
altered the character and composition of the continent’s fauna.
The ‘E’ Quarry carnivores serve admirably to illustrate the transitional
nature of the fauna. They include representatives of genera such as Agriother-
80 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ium, Plesiogulo and Enhydriodon, which were characteristic of the late Tertiary
over wide areas of Africa, Eurasia and North America. Similarly, the hyaenas
have previously been cited as an example of a group that had maintained a
pattern of representation established during the late Miocene, and which
contrasted with that during the Quaternary when the family was less diverse
and individual species were more highly specialized (Hendey 1978c). The larger
felids from ‘E’ Quarry are all sabre-toothed forms, and although such forms
had a long subsequent history, they were never again to predominate as they
did during the late Tertiary. By contrast, the mongooses of the early Pliocene
were then only in the early stages of their radiation, which was to reach a
climax during the Quaternary (Hendey 1974b).
Perhaps the best single example of a species intermediate between genera-
lized Miocene forms and highly specialized Quaternary ones was not a terres-
trial species but the seal, Homiphoca capensis (Hendey & Repenning 1972; De
Muizon & Hendey 1980). In this instance the intermediate character could be
fully documented, since H. capensis is very well represented, and there are
closely related forms still living which are both generalized (monk seals) and
specialized (Antarctic seals).
The ‘E’ Quarry carnivores also include early ancestors of species that were
to become characteristic of later carnivore faunas. For example, Hyaena
abronia and Mellivora benfieldi are likely ancestors of H. hyaena and M.
capensis respectively (Hendey 1978c, 1978d). It is, however, equally significant
that ancestors of several important elements of the Quaternary carnivore fauna
of Africa are not represented at ‘E’ Quarry. These elements are the lion
(Panthera leo), leopard (P. pardus), cheetah (Acinonyx jubatus), spotted
hyaena (Crocuta crocuta), hunting-dog (Lycaon pictus), and jackals (Canis
spp). They are largely open-country carnivores, with the cursorial cheetah
being a particularly good example of an animal evolved to meet the changing
environmental conditions of the late Tertiary. The cheetah has no counterparts
amongst the ‘E’ Quarry felids, although the fauna does include an early
‘hunting-hyaena’ (Euryboas), which was an ecological vicar of the cheetah
during the late Pliocene and early Pleistocene.
While the evolution of specialized carnivores such as the lion, leopard,
cheetah, spotted hyaena, and hunting-dog can be ascribed ultimately to the
changing environment of the late Tertiary, the reasons for the subsequent
success of generalized forms such as the Jackals are less obvious. The ecological
vicars of the jackals in the ‘E’ Quarry fauna were the civets (Hendey 1974a). At
least in terms of their size and dentitions there was little difference between
jackals and civets and it can be assumed that they had similar feeding-habits.
However, the early Pliocene civets had relatively small brains (Fig. 17), and it
is possible that in terms of sight, smell, and/or hearing they were inferior to
jackals and were thus unable to compete with them successfully. The living
African civet that survived this competition did so by becoming a nocturnal
omnivore and coincidentally increasing its brain size.
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 81
il
|
5
uy
Wa a NUNN LN EL TTL ELAR VLE VELL ELE VALERA LEL LLL ELH LL LLL LL i ni
Fig. 17. Dorsal, lateral and ventral views of a civet skull (SAM-—PQ-L51590) from the
PPM 3aN.
82 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
In the case of the marine vertebrates such as the seal, the changing
characteristics manifested in late Tertiary lineages can also be ascribed to
environmental factors, principally falling sea temperatures. The development of
the nutrient-rich cold upwelling in the Benguela Current System resulted not
only in an adaptation in Homiphoca to colder conditions, but also led to
adaptations in the postcranial skeleton, which permitted the more pelagic way
of life required to exploit the rich off-shore food resources, and those parts of
the skull connected with feeding in order to deal with the pelagic foods.
The fact that the ‘E’ Quarry mammals date from a period when the fauna
was adapting to changing conditions has contributed to the difficulties in
identifying certain taxa. In such instances the differentiation of new lineages
was in its early stages, as in the case of the civets and canids (see p. 55), and
consequently the distinguishing characteristics, which were later to become
unequivocal, were still only slhght. Apart from the examples cited above, forms
that resemble one another in many respects are included amongst the mon-
gooses (Hendey 1974a, 19746), hyaenas (Hendey 1978c), and bovids (Gentry
1980).
The diminution of forested or wooded environments was probably the
most significant factor in bringing about change amongst the terrestrial mam-
mals. This change was manifested by extinctions, by reducing the distribution
of species, and by the evolution of new taxa that were better adapted to the
changed environment. Large herbivorous species must have been most
affected, while the viability of carnivores which depended on them as a source
of food would have been placed in jeopardy. The large bear, Agriotherium,
falls into the latter category (Hendey 1980; 69-72). Ultimately though, the
entire fauna must have been affected to some extent.
A herbivore that became extinct without issue was the woodland bos-
elaphine, Mesembriportax (or Miotragocerus) acrae. During the late Miocene,
near relatives of this bovid had been amongst the most successful and wide-
spread of their family in Eurasia, and perhaps also Africa. Apart from the
living four-horned antelope (Tetracerus quadricornis) and nilgai (Boselaphus
tragocamelus) of India, the ‘E’ Quarry boselaphine is probably the last
recorded survivor of its group.
Much the same applies in the case of the okapi-like Palaeotragus cf.
germaini. Palaeotragines were an important element in the late Miocene faunas
of Eurasia and Africa, but the sole survivor of the group today is the rare
Okapia johnstoni, which is confined to forests in equatorial Africa (Churcher
1978). The Pliocene and Pleistocene history of the Palaeotraginae is poorly
documented, or perhaps misinterpreted, but ‘E’ Quarry is one relatively late
occurrence where its presence is indisputable. It is, however, a rare element in
the fauna, and by the early Pliocene the heyday of the subfamily was clearly
past.
Sivatherium hendeyi is the most commonly occurring of the ‘E’ Quarry
giraffids and, although the genus survived well into the Pleistocene in Africa, it
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 83
is nowhere as commonly represented as it is in ‘E’ Quarry. The group to which
it belonged flourished in Eurasia, and perhaps also Africa, during the late
Miocene, and ‘E” Quarry may provide a record of its final flowering.
There are several instances where descendants of taxa recorded from ‘E’
Quarry, or later related forms, had adapted to changing conditions through
altering their dietary preferences. Adaptations to grazing rather than browsing
were already evident in the ‘E’ Quarry rhinoceros (Ceratotherium praecox) and
alcelaphines (Damalacra acalla and D. neanica), and perhaps also the buffalo
(Simatherium demissum), gazelle (Gazella sp.), and neotragine (Raphicerus
paralius). Notochoerus, the warthog-like descendant of Nyanzachoerus (Cooke
& Wilkinson 1978; Harris & White 1979), was subsequently to follow suit. The
‘E’ Quarry grazers were still relatively primitive members of their groups, and
from the stocks that they represent were to arise the characteristic grazing
species which flourished in Africa during the Quaternary.
Although it was vegetational change that had the major affect on the
composition of the fauna, the related factors of rainfall and temperature must
also have played a role. There can be little doubt that the ‘E’ Quarry fauna had
its origins under tropical rather than temperate conditions, and, consequently,
that adaptation to cooler conditions in the terminal Miocene and early Pliocene
was required. Certain of the ‘E’ Quarry taxa, both mammals and non-
mammals, have modern counterparts only in the warmer parts of Africa, and
this suggests that ultimately they did not successfully adapt to the temperate
conditions that prevailed in the south-western Cape after the late Miocene.
Such taxa include a snail (Ceratophallus natalensis), the parrots (gen. and spp
not determined), the giraffe (Giraffa sp.), the ‘okapi (Palaeotragus cf.
germaini), and the reduncines (Kobus spp). It is possible that even by the early
Pliocene, falling temperatures had influenced the composition of the fauna,
with some tropical forms having already become extinct locally (see p. 89).
The effects of a change in rainfall are not obvious. If there was indeed a
change from summer to winter rainfall, this would not necessarily have had an
advserse effect on the mammals, although there might have been a reaction to
a lowering of rainfall and/or a lengthening of the dry season.
In assessing evolutionary aspects of the ‘E’ Quarry fauna, account must be
taken of events elsewhere, since this fauna was as much influenced by them as
it was by local environmental changes.
In the Old World the record of terrestrial life during the late Miocene is
well documented in parts of Europe and Asia, but in Africa the fossil record for
this period is poor. It is, however, safe to assume from the little that is known,
and from earlier and later records, that Africa during the late Miocene was as
richly endowed faunally as Eurasia. Its fauna was comprised of both endemic
lineages and ones that had their origins in Eurasia and North America.
After a long period early in the Tertiary when it was isolated from other
continents by seas and oceans, Africa—Arabia was joined to south-western Asia
early in the Miocene (Berggren & Van Couvering 1974). This event had a
84 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
profound impact on the faunas of both Africa and Eurasia. Whereas earlier in
the Tertiary faunal interchange had been limited to ‘sweepstakes routes’ (sensu
Simpson 1967), or ‘Noah’s Arks’ (sensu McKenna 1973), the early Miocene saw
the opening of ‘corridor routes’ which allowed the first free faunal interchange
in perhaps 40 million years. African emigrants to Eurasia included primates and
proboscideans, while an array of Eurasian taxa, including carnivores and
perissodactyls, made their appearance in Africa (Maglio 1978).
Thereafter, the corridors between Eurasia and Africa were restricted or
closed intermittently, and Africa’s faunal history was punctuated by periods of
isolation which were interrupted by new periods of immigration. In spite of the
closer connection with Eurasia, immigrant lineages to Africa evolved taxa that
were usually in some respects distinct from their Eurasian counterparts, and
they, together with representatives of endemic lineages, gave the African fauna
a largely distinctive character throughout the later Cenozoic.
The ‘E’ Quarry fauna, and others of late Miocene and early Pliocene age
elsewhere in Africa, provide evidence for a period of immigration from Eurasia
during the late Miocene. Conversely, there is evidence from Eurasia of the
immigration of African mammals at this time. For example, Azzaroli (1975: 69)
concluded that it is ‘firmly established that interchange of terrestrial mammals
between southern and northern shores of the Mediterranean took place some
time around 6,5 m.y. ago or shortly later’.
Amongst those mammals from ‘E’ Quarry with a late Miocene Eurasian
connection is the bear, Agriotherium africanum (Hendey 1980). A slightly
earlier member of the lineage which includes A. africanum is recorded from c.
6 Ma deposits at Sahabi in Libya (Boaz et al. 1979), and it is likely that the
earliest African representative of the group entered the continent about that
time or slightly earlier, that is, during the c. 6,5 Ma faunal interchange
recorded by Azzaroli (1975). Other likely immigrants to Africa at this time are
the hyaenids, /[ctitherium, Palhyaena (=Hyaena), and Hyaenictitherium; the
wolverine, Plesiogulo; and the false sabre-toothed cat, Dinofelis, the latter
being a descendant of Eurasian Metailurus (see Hendey 1974a, 1978c, 1978d,
1980). The largest of the ‘E’ Quarry hyaenids, ‘Adcrocuta’ australis, was
previously thought to be included in this category, having been descended from
Eurasian Adcrocuta eximia, but it now seems likely that these two species had a
common ancestor in an earlier African percrocuta.
Immigrants amongst the herbivores are less obvious. One possiblility is the
boselaphine, Mesembriportax (or Miotragocerus) acrae. According to one inter-
pretation, this species was descended from the widespread Miotragocerus of the
Eurasian late Miocene, again with an intermediate form being recorded from
Sahabi (Thomas 1979). On the other hand, it may represent an endemic
African lineage that had its origins with the middle Miocene Protragocerus, and
which evolved in parallel with Eurasian Miotragocerus (Gentry 1974, 1980).
It is significant that descendants of late Miocene immigrants are most
obvious amongst the larger Carnivora. Such animals are less affected than
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 85
herbivores by environmental factors, and are thus capable of more rapid
dispersal, while individual species tend to have wider distributions. Conse-
quently, descendants of late Miocene immigrant carnivores to Africa might
have become established in the far south of the continent sooner than their
herbivorous counterparts. The more slowly dispersed herbivores are also likely
to undergo more rapid evolutionary changes as they adapted to new environ-
mental conditions, and their relationships to pre-existing forms may therefore
be more difficult to determine.
Not all the ancestors of Eurasian immigrants represented in the ‘E’ Quarry
fauna reached Africa late in the Miocene. One obvious exception is Hipparion,
whose appearance in Africa dates back about 12,5 Ma (Churcher & Richardson
1978). By the end of the Miocene endemic African species of Hipparion had
evolved (Churcher & Richardson 1978). The Langebaanweg Hipparion is of
particular interest, since it is recorded from all the main fossil-bearing horizons
of the Varswater Formation, as well as from younger deposits. At least one
lineage (H. cf. baardi-H. baardi) is represented which is distinct not only from
its counterparts in Eurasia, but also those elsewhere in Africa. The same
apparently applies in the case of the two alcelaphines from ‘E’ Quarry, one of
which has a descendant form in Baard’s Quarry, although in this instance the
origins of the group are still obscure (Gentry 1980).
Another of the ‘E’ Quarry species that might have been descended from an
Eurasian middle Miocene species is the peccary, Pecarichoerus? africanus.
Previously a connection with the Asian Pecarichoerus orientalis was suggested
(Hendey 19766), but a recently described peccary from the late Vindobonian of
Spain, Barberahyus castellensis (Golpe-Posse 1977), is remarkably similar to the
‘E” Quarry species and they may have a close phylogenetic relationship, with
descendants of the Spanish form having entered Africa at the same time as
Hipparion.
In interpreting the evolutionary history of Varswater Formation mammals
it is therefore necessary to take into account the following possibilities:
1. Species represent lineages endemic to Africa.
2. Species represent lineages of Eurasiatic origin, and with a long history
in Africa.
3. Species represent lineages of Eurasiatic origin, and with only a short
history in Africa.
4. Species represent lineages of African or Eurasian origin, but which are
endemic to the southerly parts of the continent.
In addition, account must be taken of the possibilities that certain lineages
represented elsewhere in Africa failed to make an appearance in the Lange-
baanweg area, only arrived there long after they were established further north,
and became extinct there earlier, or survived later, than they did further north.
The matter of locally endemic species, non-arrivals, late arrivals, early
extinctions, and late ‘survivors during any given period depends on local
86 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
environmental conditions, as well as the degree to which the south-western
Cape, or southern Africa, was zoogeographically isolated from regions further
north. The potential for isolation of the south-western Cape, largely by a
barrier of aridity or semi-aridity, has already been established (Hendey 1974a;
14-19), although the degree of isolation at various times in the past is difficult
or impossible to determine. This applies particularly to pre-Quaternary times,
when African environments were very different from those of the present, and
when the fossil record is generally poor.
The fact that ‘E’ Quarry species such as Hipparion cf. baardi and the two
alcelaphines are, or may be, different from contemporary counterparts further
north in Africa, suggests that the south-western Cape, or an even larger area of
southern Africa, had been zoogeographically isolated some time during the late
Miocene. On the other hand, this isolation could not have been complete, or
had broken down very late in the Miocene, since there evidently had been
some immigration of taxa shortly before deposition of the QSM and PPM. Such
taxa include Agriotherium and the others referred to above.
Since the Varswater Formation was laid down over an appreciable period,
it is also possible that during this period some species arrived in the area as
immigrants, while others became extinct. However, it may not be possible to
determine that this actually happened. The simple fact that certain species are
not recorded low in the sequence does not necessarily mean that they were not
present in the area. In other words, the first appearance of a species in the
sequence was not necessarily coincident with its first appearance in the region.
Conversely, the presence of certain taxa low in the sequence, and their absence
higher up, is not necessarily indicative of their extinction. Both sampling
inadequacies and taphonomic factors are potential biases in the “E’ Quarry
record.
Sampling inadequacies is the less serious problem, since the sample sizes
from the QSM, bed 3aS, and bed 3aN are large. Nevertheless, past experiences
at this locality have shown that it is a factor that cannot be dismissed. For
example, it was once thought that porcupines had not been an element of the
fauna (Hendey 1974a), but remains of a single individual were subsequently
found in the QSM (Hendey 1976a), and since then fragmentary remains of a
second species have turned up on several occasions in beds 3aS and 3aN.
The problem with taphonomic factors is that the environments of deposi-
tion of the various elements in the succession vary, and it is obvious that taxa
represented in one (e.g. river floodplain) may differ from those in another (e.g.
river channel).
The QSM assemblage largely represents the remains of animals that lived
and died in the immediate vicinity, whereas the beds 3aS and 3aN assemblages
are largely comprised of animal remains washed in by the river from elsewhere.
Consequently, the presence of species in these two sets of deposits simply
reflects the opportunity for their remains to reach their points of deposition,
and may have nothing to do with their presence or absence in the region.
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 87
Individual taxa must, however, be assessed separately. For example, the
fact that hippos are not recorded from the QSM may be due to the lack of
exposures of those deposits where their remains were most likely to be
preserved, that is, those of the main river channel of that time. However, even
in the recorded channel deposits hippos are unequally represented. They were
extremely rare in bed 3aS, whereas they were much more common in bed 3aN.
It is thus possible that the representation of this animal in the ‘E’ Quarry
sequence is a true reflection of its initial absence (i.e. in QSM times), and its
subsequent presence in increasing numbers (i.e. in beds 3aS and 3aN).
The occurrence of the giant pig, Nyanzachoerus, is in curious contrast to
that of the hippo. Nyanzachoerus occurs quite commonly in the QSM, N. cf.
pattersoni being one of the characteristic species of this horizon. This species
may also be present in bed 3aS, although it is extremely rare. A second species,
N. cf. jaegeri, is definitely recorded from bed 3aS, although it, too, is un-
common. However, neither species, nor any other pig, is recorded from bed
3aN. This creates the impression that Nyanzachoerus was ‘replaced’ locally by
the hippo. There is, however, no evidence from elsewhere that hippos and
Nyanzachoerus were mutually exclusive taxa, although they might well have
competed for a common food source.
The situation in respect of these animals at Langebaanweg might have
differed from that in areas where they did co-exist. Since the local environment
was deteriorating during the early Pliocene, it is possible that competition
between hippos and Nyanzachoerus for diminishing food resources was critical
enough to cause the extinction of the latter. Thus the record of hippos in bed
3aS may, indeed, coincide with the first appearance of these animals in the
Langebaanweg area and the initiation of competition with Nyanzachoerus, the
latter process being concluded in the favour of the hippos by the time that bed
3aN was deposited. Alternatively, the two forms might have co-existed throu-
ghout the period of deposition of the QSM and bed 3aS, with the displacement
process being more gradual. The first of these alternatives is perhaps the more
likely in view of the observed relative abundance of the two forms.
One of the more intriguing features of the QSM and PPM faunas is the
extreme rarity of primates in the former and their complete absence in the
latter. Of the many thousands of mammalian teeth recovered to date, there are
only two specimens from the QSM identified as primate, while there are no
primate bones amongst the far more numerous identified postcranial remains
from the QSM and PPM. Primates are clearly grossly under-represented in the
‘FE’ Quarry fauna, given its location in Africa, the great number and variety of
mammals recorded, and the vast number of specimens already collected and
identified. In older and broadly contemporary faunas elsewhere in Africa, and
in southern Eurasia, both terrestrial and arboreal primates are represented,
sometimes in appreciable numbers and variety and often in assemblages far
smaller than that from ‘E’ Quarry.
It was suggested elsewhere that the location of Langebaanweg on the coast
88 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
in the far south of the continent might have had a bearing on the under-
representation of primates (Hendey 1976a: 234). The coastal situation is
unlikely to have been significant, since primates are not necessarily averse to
this kind of environment, either now or in the past. For example, the broadly
contemporary fauna from Montpellier, which was accumulated in a similar
environment, includes primates (see below).
The situation of Langebaanweg at nearly 34°S may be a more significant factor.
Over 80 per cent of Africa’s non-hominid primates occur in low latitudes, between
15°N and 15°S (see distribution maps in Dorst & Dandelot 1970), and are thus most
characteristic of the hot tropical regions. In the warm-temperate south-western
Cape there is only one non-hominid primate recorded, which is about 2 per cent of
the total in the Ethiopian Region. This species is the chacma baboon, Papio ursinus.
A monkey (probably Cercopithecus) is tentatively recorded on the basis of early
historical records. The Pleistocene fossil record for the south-western Cape is
comparatively good, but once again only one non-hominid primate is recorded, 1.e.
the baboon, Theropithecus oswaldi, from the middle Pleistocene of Elandsfontein.
Clearly, the frequency in the occurrence of primates can be correlated with latitude,
and, consequently, also with temperature.
However, the lower temperatures of higher latitudes do not necessarily
directly limit the occurrence of primates. Instead, they have the effect of
limiting the food resources available to essentially herbivorous primates. Tropi-
cal regions remain productive in terms of such food resources throughout the
year, but in temperate regions they are readily available only during summer.
Consequently, although the vegetation at Langebaanweg during the early
Pliocene was such that the occurrence of both terrestrial and arboreal primates
might have been expected, winter temperatures were probably already too low
to have maintained adequate food supplies for most primates. This order may,
therefore, be included in the hypothetical group of animals that became extinct
in the south-western Cape earlier than elsewhere (see p. 83).
It is worth noting that primates were still present in contemporary faunas
of comparable latitudes in the Northern hemisphere. This is readily explained
by the fact that the existing zonality in world climates had yet to be established.
The glaciation of the Arctic lagged behind that of Antarctica, and it was not
until about 3 Ma that the situation in the two hemispheres was more or less
equalized.
The above theory implies that primates were still present in the far south
of the continent during the warmer period in the late Miocene and earlier.
However, although the Miocene mammal record for southern Africa is very
poor, it may again be significant that this record includes no primates. Only one
Miocene occurrence is presently known where the assemblage is sufficiently
large for primates to have been expected. It is from Arrisdrift in the southern
Namib desert, and in this instance it was suggested that zoogeographic barriers
between east and southern Africa might have impeded the southward dispersal
of primates (Hendey 1978b: 35).
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 89
Other notable absentees from the ‘E’ Quarry fauna are the Deinother-
lidae, Chalicotheriidae, and, amongst the non-mammals, the Crocodilia. Pro-
boscideans are a comparatively rare element in this fauna, and the absence of a
deinothere may therefore reflect a sampling deficiency. The same may apply in
the‘case of the chalicothere, an animal that was uncommon elsewhere in Afriica
as well. The situation in respect of the Crocodilia is likely to be different, since
wherever these animals are present they are likely to be well represented at
least by isolated teeth and scutes, if not by other skull parts and postcranial
bones. Crocodiles have not been recorded from any other south-western Cape
deposits either, and their absence is probably due to the relatively low temper-
atures in local aquatic environments in post-Miocene times.
Both deinothere and crocodile are recorded from the early middle
Miocene deposits at Arrisdrift, 500 km to the north, so they, like primates,
might have had their ranges restricted by falling temperatures in the far south
of the continent during the late Miocene and early Pliocene.
Although the ‘E’ Quarry fauna includes Eurasian immigrants, it was
dominated by taxa that were, and, in some cases, still are, characteristically
‘African’. These include groups such as the Macroscelididae, Chrysochloridae,
Tubulidentata, Proboscidea, Hyracoidea, and certain tribes of Bovidae.
The ‘African’ character of this fauna is clearly manifested by a comparison
with the broadly contemporary Montpellier fauna (Table 9). Apart from these
faunas being of comparable age, they are from similar coastal situations. In
their overall composition the faunas of ‘E’ Quarry and Montpellier are remark-
ably alike, comprising of a similar array of carnivores, proboscideans, perisso-
dactyls, artiodactyls, cetaceans, and some smaller mammals. The latter are
under-represented at Montpellier probably because of sampling deficiences,
while the under-representation of primates in ‘E’ Quarry is ascribed to the
climatic factors discussed above.
In spite of their overall similarities, the two faunas are taxonomically distinct,
the differences being mainly at generic and specific level. Conspecificity, or very
close relationship, is largely confined to the Carnivora, for reasons discussed
earlier (see p. 84), but even in this group there are obvious differences.
The most striking and unexpected of these differences is the absence of
hyaenas at Montpellier. Hyaenas are well represented in Europe at localities of
late Miocene and Pleistocene age, and they are also common in ‘E’ Quarry.
Their comparative rarity (or absence) at European localities of early Pliocene
age has yet to be satisfactorily explained. Smaller viverrids are also not
recorded at Montpellier, but otherwise differences from ‘E’ Quarry carnivores
are at generic or specific level.
For example, the badgers represent the genera that are still characteristic of
the continents concerned (i.e. Mellivora in Africa, Meles in Europe). Similarly,
the seals, both of which belong to the subfamily Monachinae, are most closely
related to taxa that are still found in geographical proximity (i.e. Homiphoca to
Antarctic Lobodontini, Pristiphoca to Mediterranean Monachus monachus).
90
TABLE 9
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The mammalian faunas of the Varswater Formation (QSM and PPM), Langebaanweg, and
the Pliocene deposits at Montpellier, France.
Insectivora and Chiroptera
Primates
Pholidota and Tubulidentata
Carnivora
Canidae
Ursidae
Mustelidae
Phocidae
Viverridae
Hyaenidae
Felidae
Proboscidea
LANGEBAANWEG
Present
1 species
Present
. 2 species
. Agriotherium africanum
(aff. insigne)
. Plesiogulo monspessulanus
Mellivora benfieldi
Enhydriodon africanus
. Homiphoca capensis
. ‘Viverra’ leakeyi
Viverrinae sp. B
Genetta and Herpestinae
. Several species
. Machairodontinae (2 spp)
Felis aff. issiodorensis
(? aff. christoli)
Other Felinae (3 spp)
. Mammuthus subplanifrons
MONTPELLIER*
Not recorded
3 species
Not recorded
Not recorded
Agriotherium insigne
Plesiogulo monspessulanus
Meles gennevauxi
Lutra affinis
Pristiphoca occitana
Viverra aff. pepratxi
Not recorded.
Not recorded
Machairodontinae (1 sp.)
Felis christoli
Not recorded
Mastodon arvernensis
Pliehyrax occidentalis
Hipparion crassum
Dicerorhinus megarhinus
Tapirus arvernensis
Not recorded
Sus arvernensis
Not recorded
Not recorded
3 species
2 or 3 species,
Gazella sp.
including a
Prolagus sp.
Anancus sp.
Hyracoidea . Procavia cf. antiqua
Perissodactyla
Equidae . Hipparion cf. baardi
Rhinocerotidae . Ceratotherium praecox
Tapiridae . Not recorded
Artiodactyla
Tayassuidae . . | species
Suidae . . Nyanzachoerus (2 spp)
Hippopotamidae . 1 species
Giraffidae . 3 species
Cervidae . Not recorded
Bovidae . 12 species, including a Gazella
sp.
Lagomorpha . Pronolagus sp.
Rodentia . Many species
Cetacea
*Anonymous 1975
. Several species
1 species
Several species
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 9]
Amongst the non-carnivores, giraffids and bovids are the predominant
ungulates in ‘E’ Quarry, whereas at Montpellier giraffids are absent (or not
recorded), and cervids are present in addition to bovids. Hipparion is recorded
at both localities. The combinations of Bovidae—Giraffidae—Equidae in ‘E’
Quarry and Cervidae—Bovidae—Equidae at Montpellier are still characteristic of
the continents concerned.
DATING OF THE LANGEBAANWEG SUCCESSION
One of the most persistent problems pertaining to the Varswater Forma-
tion is that of its age. As is frequently the case in southern Africa with deposits
of late Cenozoic age, only indirect dating methods can be used. The situation
is, however, exceptional in that in this instance faunal, botanical and geological
evidence is actually or potentially available for relative dating purposes. The
present study has clarified the dating problem.
Hitherto dating has depended largely on the fossil mammals of the Vars-
water Formation. Initially these fossils were thought to be of early Pleistocene
age (e.g. Singer 1961; Boné & Singer 1965; Hendey 1969, 1970a), but subse-
quently it was suggested that the formation included both Pliocene and Pleis-
tocene elements (Hendey 1970b). This is, indeed, the case with the fossil
assemblage from Baard’s Quarry (Hendey 1978a), but the Varswater Formation
in “E’ Quarry is entirely of late Tertiary age. This was established with the
realization that geological evidence had been misinterpreted, that some of the
mammalian taxa represented had been misidentified, and that the provenance of
an Equus tooth had been incorrectly recorded (Hendey 19726). Thereafter, the
most widely accepted age estimate was early Pliocene (c. 4-5 Ma) (e.g. Hendey
1973, 1974a). Instead of resolving the issue, more recent faunal studies have
provided contradictory dating evidence and have also indicated that deposition
of the Varswater Formation took place over a prolonged period (e.g. Hendey
1976a, 1978d, 1980). As a result, when referring to the age of this formation it
has been the practice to give only the outside age limits, which are 7 and 3,5 Ma.
These limits include the terminal Miocene as well as the early Pliocene.
The principal difficulty with faunal dating has been that broadly contempor-
ary faunas elsewhere in Africa, some of which are securely dated by absolute age
determinations, are not well known. Consequently, the basis for comparison is far
less than the lengthy ‘E’ Quarry faunal list would suggest. In addition, the location
of Langebaanweg near the southern continental extremity raises the problem of
regional peculiarities in the fauna of the kind discussed above (see pp. 85-89).
In that discussion the ‘E’ Quarry hippo was used as an example to illustrate
a point, and it can be used again to indicate the kind of difficulties that arise in
faunal dating. The fossil record of Hippopotamidae in east Africa is good, and
the evolutionary history of the family is well understood (Coryndon 1978).
Hippos are not the best mammals to use for relative dating purposes, since they
are conservative animals in an evolutionary sense, and are difficult to identify
92 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
to species level on the basis of fragmentary material. Nevertheless, they may
serve as age indicators in the case of faunas such as the one from ‘E’ Quarry.
It was suggested earlier that hippos might have made their appearance in
the Langebaanweg area only during the period of deposition of bed 3aS (or
shortly before). Hippos are first recorded in east Africa as early as 10 Ma
(Coryndon 1978), but it would be unwise to conclude that their first appearance
there coincided with their appearance in the Varswater Formation. It is much
more likely that environmental factors retarded the southward dispersal of this
water-demanding animal, perhaps for an appreciable period. Hippos may thus
be an example where geography is a complicating factor when they are used for
relative dating purposes.
A contrasting example of a herbivore noted for its rapid dispersal and
utility in faunal dating is that of Hipparion, the three-toed horse that first made
its appearance in Africa at about 12,5 Ma, and which survived on this continent
well into the Pleistocene (Churcher & Richardson 1978). Again there is a
complicating factor with the Langebaanweg representatives of this genus. The
most commonly occurring of the ‘E’ Quarry species 1s Hipparion cf. baard1i,
which evidently belongs on a lineage endemic to the more southerly parts of
Africa, and comparisons with broadly contemporaneous Hipparion elsewhere
in Africa, therefore, provide little evidence of their likely relative age.
The Langebaanweg Hipparion has, however, provided useful relative age
information on deposits occurring in the immediate vicinity. For example, the
GM H. cf. primigenium is consistent with the late Miocene date for this horizon
deduced on other evidence (see p. 23). Another species, H. cf. namaquense, is
known only from the uppermost levels of the Varswater Formation, and may
even come from overlying deposits (Hendey 1976a; Hooijer 1976). Finally, the
Baard’s Quarry H. baardi, which is now also recorded from the Anyskop
terrestrial deposits, is clearly distinct from the ‘E’ Quarry H. cf. baardi, and
suggests a younger date for the deposits in which it occurs (Hendy 1978a; see
also p. 38).
Bearing in mind the difficulties in long-range correlations suggested by the
hippo and Hipparion, and the other potential regional peculiarities discussed
earlier, it is evident that in faunal dating of the Varswater Formation the
following two factors are of the greatest significance:
1. The occurrence at more securely dated localities of species conspecific
with ones occurring in “E’ Quarry.
2. The evolutionary state of ‘E’ Quarry taxa relative to those of related
taxa from dated localities elsewhere.
Initially it was two species from the QSM that were at the core of the
correlations indicating an early Pliocene age. They were the elephant, Mammu-
thus subplanifrons, and the pig, Nyanzachoerus cf. pattersoni (or kanamensis).
A 5 Ma maximum age for the OSM was based on the belief that counterparts of
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 93
these two species in the Lothagam 1 fauna from Kenya were aged between 5
and 6 Ma (Patterson et al. 1970; Maglio 1973). Subsequently Hooijer & Maglio
(1974: 4) concluded that this fauna ‘may be somewhat older than [6 Ma, but] it
is not likely to be much younger’. Behrensmeyer (1976: 167) noted that it is
‘obviously important to think of the Lothagam 1 fauna as representative of a
relatively long time span’ and that ‘the fauna from 1C may be somewhat
younger than 6,0 m.y.’ The base of the Lothagam sequence is underlain by
volcanics dated at 8,3 Ma (Behrensmeyer 1976), which is, therefore, the
absolute maximum age of the Lothagam fauna.
Although there is still uncertainty about the actual age of the Lothagam 1
fossils, there can be virtually no doubt that they pre-date those from the OSM,
and, consequently, also those from beds 3aS and 3aN. The Lothagam 1
elephants (Stegotetrabelodon orbus, Primelephas gomphotheroides) and the pig
(Nyanzachoerus tulotus) are more primitive than their counterparts from ‘E’
Quarry, as is an undescribed hyaenid from Lothagam 1.
On the other hand, the c. 4 Ma fauna from Kanapoi, 75 km south of
Lothagam (Behrensmeyer 1976), is apparently younger than that from ‘E’
Quarry, although the evidence for this is more slender. An undescribed
hyaenid from Kanapoi is certainly more advanced than its counterparts in the
‘E’ Quarry ‘Hyaena group’ (see Hendey 1978c). The presence of the pig,
Notochoerus, at Kanapoi and its absence in ‘E’ Quarry is also indicative of a
younger age for the former. In addition, the QSM Nyanzachoerus cf. pattersoni
is slightly more primitive than the N. pattersoni from Kanapoi in retaining P’.
The preceding evidence indicates that the age difference between the two
faunas is of no great magnitude, an opinion supported by the fact that their
elephants are in a comparable evolutionary state (Maglio 1973).
There is, however, a complication with the Nyanzachoerus cf. jaegeri from
bed 3aS in ‘E’ Quarry. White & Harris (1977) and Harris & White (1979) have
suggested that the relative stratigraphic positions of N. cf. pattersoni (or
kanamensis) and N. cf. jaegeri in ‘E’ Quarry are evidence in support of their
theory that the latter evolved from the former. According to their correlation
the upper levels of the Varswater Formation (i.e. beds 3aS and 3aN) actually
overlap with the Kanapoi Formation (Harris & White 1979, fig. 134). This
conclusion is in conflict with the evidence that suggests that all of the Varswater
Formation is older.*
The most positive indication of the earlier date for the Varswater Forma-
tion relative to the Kanapoi Formation comes from the hyaenids. The three ‘E’
Quarry species most closely related to the Kanapoi hyaenid are Ictitherium
preforfex, Hyaena abronia, and Hyaenictitherium namaquense, all of which
retain P; and Mp, teeth which the Kanapoi species has lost.
* A recent examination of the ‘E’ Quarry N. cf. jaegeri by T. D. White has led him to
believe that it represents a more primitive variety than the one from Kanapoi, and that the ‘E’
Quarry pigs are consistent with a 5 Ma date.
94 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Correlation of the ‘E’ Quarry fossils with those from east African localities
such as Lothagam and Kanapoi was recently further complicated by Gentry’s
(1980: 333) conclusion that ‘the bovids best indicate an age of about 6 m.y. for
the fauna’. The bovids thus suggest an age comparable to Lothagam 1, and
appreciably older than Kanapoi. However, the bovids do not necessarily rule out
a younger age, and at least in the case of the buffalo, Simatherium demissum, are
consistent with such an age. Gentry (1980: 332) found that ‘Parabos boodon,
which is at a comparable evolutionary level [to S$. demissum, but] on a different
lineage, comes from Perpignan, which is given an age of about 4,8 m.y.’
While the utility of groups such as the elephants, pigs, and bovids in faunal
dating is undeniable, preference is here given to that of the carnivores. The
environmental tolerance of these animals allows at least the larger species to
disperse rapidly when the opportunity arises, with little or no evolutionary
adaptation necessarily required, and with consequent wide distributions for
individual species. This facilitates long-distance correlations. The post-
Lothagam 1 and pre-Kanapoi age for the ‘E’ Quarry fauna indicated by the
hyaenids is, therefore, regarded here as more acceptable than the conflicting
evidence of the pigs and bovids, and the equivocal evidence of the elephants.
The outside age limits of 3,5 and 7 Ma are thus reduced to 4 and 6 Ma, with a
median estimate of 5 Ma applying.
The ‘E’ Quarry carnivores provide further evidence in support of the 5 Ma
estimate. The recent study of the Agriotherium from this locality suggested that
it is at a comparable evolutionary stage, or, in the case of the bed 3aN material,
perhaps even slightly more advanced than the Agriotherium from Montpellier
in France. Similarly, available materials of the Plesiogulo and a small Felis
from the two localities are virtually indistinguishable. Other, more general
similarities between the two faunas were referred to earlier (see p. 89, Table 9),
and faunal evidence thus points to broad contemporaneity between the ‘E’
Quarry deposits and those of Pliocene age at Montpellier.
The latter were laid down during the marine transgression that terminated
the Messinian salinity crisis and ushered in the Pliocene. It was this correlation
that first suggested that deposits in the Langebaanweg area could be related to
global phenomena of the late Tertiary, and which prompted the re-examination
of the local succession, a process that was to culminate with the correlation with
global sea-level changes (see pp. 12-18, Fig. 3, Table 2).
This correlation has placed the matter of the age of individual elements in
the Langebaanweg succession in an entirely new light. Whereas previously even
correlations with deposits and faunas elsewhere in Africa were generally
tentative, there is now the potential for secure correlations with successions
recorded from all the continents and oceans of the world. In addition, the
Langebaanweg area could become the key to interpreting other late Tertiary
strata in southern Africa, which have often proved difficult to date, and which
have had obscure histories and relationships.
While the correlation of individual elements in the Langebaanweg succes-
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 95
sion with subdivisions of the late Tertiary epochs appears secure, the absolute
or chronometric ages of these elements have yet to be precisely determined.
For example, although the QSM, PPM, and Anyskop marine deposits date
from the early Pliocene transgression, there is as yet no consensus on the timing
and duration of this event. On the basis of evidence from the Mediterranean
Basin, Van Couvering et al. (1976) and Van Couvering & Berggren (1977)
indicate that this transgression took place between 5,0 and 4,5 Ma, whereas
Vail & Hardenbol (1979) indicate it as a rapid event that took place at 5,2 Ma.
The essential difference between these interpretations concerns the dating of
the Miocene—Pliocene boundary, which is taken respectively at 5,0 and 5,2 Ma,
while there are also implications concerning the duration of the transgression.
Clearly, the dating of the Miocene—Pliocene boundary is a matter that
cannot be resolved on the basis of evidence from Langebaanweg. There is,
however, little doubt that a generally acceptable date, probably 5,2 Ma (see
Van Couvering 1978), will result from the many investigations relevant to this
question. The same applies in the case of the duration of. the early Pliocene
transgression. Judging from evolutionary changes manifested in certain mam-
malian taxa common to more than one level of the QSM and PPM (see p. 24),
the phase of the transgression represented by these deposits might have been in
the order of many millennia, while the transgression as a whole could conceiv-
ably have lasted several hundred thousand years.
Until these issues are resolved, it will be convenient to use the 5 Ma
estimate suggested above in reference to the deposits in the Langebaanweg
area that date from the early Pliocene transgression (i.e. the QSM, PPM and
Anyskop marine deposits).
There are more marked differences of opinion over the dating of the
Pliocene—Pleistocene boundary, and these have a bearing on the inferred
chronometric dates of the later elements in the Langebaanweg succession,
particularly the Baard’s Quarry fluviatile deposits. In recent years it has become
common practice to date the Pliocene—Pleistocene boundary at either 1,8 Ma
(e.g. Berggren & Van Couvering 1974), or 1,6 Ma (Haq et al. 1977). A
contrasting opinion is that of Vail & Hardenbol (1979), who fixed this boundary
at 2,8 Ma, which coincides with the termination of their sea-level cycle, TP3.
It was with an age range of 2-3 Ma in mind that the age of the Baard’s
Quarry fluviatile deposits fauna was suggested to be late Pliocene/early Pleis-
tocene. It now appears that at least a part of this fauna is younger than 2 Ma, a
conclusion that is based on the presence of Equus. According to Lindsay et al.
(1980: 135) ‘there were at least three major dispersal events of large mammals
during the Pliocene (at 1,9, 2,6 and 3,7 Myr)’, with Equus having dispersed into
Africa during the 1,9 Ma event. The Baard’s Quarry fluviatile deposits,
therefore, cannot be older than 1,9 Ma, and are more likely to date from
sea-level cycle QI than cycle TP3 (see p. 41).
This raises another problem concerning the fauna of these deposits. There
are other elements in the assemblage that would be more consistent with an age
96 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
of more than 2 Ma. This was discussed by Hendey (1978a) and Gentry (1980),
and it now seems that the possible temporal heterogeneity of this fauna was
dismissed too lightly in the former study. The composition of this fauna can be
most readily explained by the hypothesis that while the deposits themselves
date from cycle Ql, they include both contemporary fossils and others
reworked from pre-existing Pliocene deposits.
There are thus several issues relating. to the age of the post-Varswater
Formation deposits in the Langebaanweg area that have yet to be settled, while
the chronometric ages of all elements in the succession have also to be
established. In addition, Vail & Hardenbol (1979: 79) concede that there ‘is no
question that considerably more research needs to be undertaken to document
the magnitudes and timing of eustatic sea-level changes’. Nevertheless, little
significance is attached to the present uncertainties concerning details of the
Laangebaanweg succession and global sea-level changes. The agreement
between them is sufficient to justify the conclusion that the former can for the
most part be regarded as securely dated in a geological sense. At the very least,
there is now a sound basis on which future research on dating can be based.
In conclusion, it should be mentioned that botanical evidence of age is
potentially available for certain elements in the succession, although for the
present and in the immediate future the faunal and geological dating of the
Langebaanweg sequence will provide data for palaeobotanical sudies. A tenta-
tive ‘Pollen Zone’ sequence for the south-western Cape has already been
established (Coetzee 1978), and there is apparently considerable potential for
refining this scheme (J. A. Coetzee, pers. comm.). The existing pollen sequence
is only tentatively correlated with the ‘E’ Quarry succession (Table 8).
SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
Cenozoic deposits in the vicinity of Langebaanweg are comprised largely of a
late Tertiary succession of clastic sediments. They include economically important
phosphate deposits and some immensely rich fossil occurrences. The history of
this succession has been reinterpreted on the basis of geological and palaentologi-
cal evidence, and it has been correlated with the record of South African west
coast sea-level changes, for which successive shorelines at 30 m, 90 m, 50 m and 20
m above present sea-level are recognized. This interpretation is in accord with the
global sea-level changes recorded by Vail & Hardenbol (1979).
The succession is as follows:
1. Basal element (‘pre-GM deposits’)—early to middle Miocene trans-
gression (part of global sea-level cycles TM1.3, TM1.4, TM2.1 and
TM2.2); terrestrial and marine complex.
2. No local record—middle to late Miocene regression (cycle TM2.3).
3. Gravel Member (GM) of the Varswater Formation—late Miocene
regression (30 m shoreline—cycle TM3.1); marine beach complex.
4. No local record—terminal Miocene regression (cycles TM3.2, TM3.3).
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 97
5. Quartzose Sand Member (QSM) of the Varswater Formation—early
Pliocene transgression (cycle TP1); estuarine complex with floodplain
(QSM I), salt marsh (QSM II) and tidal flat (QSM III) facies.
6. Pelletal Phosphorite Member (PPM) of the Varswater Forma-
tion—early Pliocene transgression (cycle TP1); fluviatile (beds 3aS
and 3aN) and marine littoral (PPM undifferentiated) complex.
7. Anyskop marine deposits—early Pliocene transgression (cycle TP1);
coastal barrier complex.
8. Marine platform south-east of Langebaanweg—early Pliocene trans-
gression (90 m shoreline—cycle TP1).
9. Anyskop terrestrial deposits—late Pliocene regression (50 m shore-
line—cycle TP2).
10. Baard’s Quarry fluviatile deposits—late Pliocene regression, or, more
probably, early Pleistocene transgression (20 m shoreline—cycle TP3
on cycle @)):
The local succession is completed by Quaternary deposits, including a nearly
ubiquitous covering of aeolian sands. The area also has fossil occurrences and
hominid occupation sites dating from the middle Pleistocene, late Pleistocene,
and Holocene.
The nature of this succession was determined by the physical geography of
the region, while the preservation of an unusually large body of early Pliocene
sediment was due to the development of a coastal barrier complex, part of
which survived subsequent erosion, and which protected underlying deposits.
Palaeontological investigations have centred on the Varswater Formation
as it is exposed in an open-cast phosphate mine, ‘E’ Quarry. Some plant fossils
are represented in these and underlying deposits, while about 230 invertebrate
and vertebrate taxa, ranging from protozoans to mammals, have been
recorded, mainly from the QSM and PPM. The fossils were recovered from a
variety of marine, freshwater and terrestrial depositional environments. The
species and body part representation, and the condition of specimens, was
dependent on the source of the material.
Most of the collected invertebrates have been described, but the lower
vertebrates are still largely unstudied. The birds evidently represent the largest
pre-Pleistocene assemblage known anywhere, and they are also largely un-
studied. The mammals are the most intensively studied and best represented
group, although only about half of the eighty species recognized have been
described. They range from shrews and mice to elephants and whales, and
those already studied include four new genera and sixteen new species.
Detailed analyses of assemblages from the various depositional environ-
ments have yet to be undertaken. However, preliminary observations have
revealed evidence for both subaerial and subaqueous deposition of material
(e.g. in QSM 1, and in PPM, 3aN respectively). Individual specimens show
signs of damage by such processes as carnivore activity (e.g. toothmarks,
etching by stomach acids) and fires.
98 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Late Tertiary environments contrast sharply with that of the present, which
is semi-arid (summer dry/winter wet), with no naturally occurring surface
freshwater, and with a rather sparse sclerophyll (fynbos) vegetation without
indigenous trees. During the Miocene, tropical forests, possibly associated with
a monsoon climate, existed in the area, but by the early Pliocene the environ-
ment was deteriorating. Temperatures had moderated from tropical to temper-
ate, while precipitation had probably declined. Rainfall was then strongly
seasonal, with a summer-wet/winter-dry pattern being likely. Wooded areas
were probably restricted to the immediate vicinity of the river which was
responsible for feeding in most of the sediment comprising the QSM and PPM.
Grazing species amongst the mammalian herbivores indicate the presence of
grasslands, and there is palynological evidence for the presence of fynbos
vegetation types. However, woodland browsers still formed a_ significant
element in the mammalian fauna, although dental abnormalities indicate
stresses in these populations which might have been due to the diminution of
suitable habitats, and aggravated by factors such as droughts and fires.
The evidence for changing environments at Langebaanweg during the late
Tertiary is in keeping with the record elsewhere in the word. This contributed
to the correlation of the local succession with others elsewhere in the world
(e.g. the Mediterranean Basin), which were also under the influence of such
phenomena as changes in the volume of the Antarctic ice-cap.
The mammalian fauna of the QSM and PPM is in several respects
‘intermediate’ in character, which is in keeping with the environmental changes
of the period in question. Although it is essentially ‘African’ in character, it
includes descendants of several Miocene immigrants from Eurasia (e.g. the
three-toed horse, Hipparion, and the bear, Agriotherium). The composition of
certain groups (e.g. the hyaenas) still reflected a pattern more characteristic of
the Miocene than the Quaternary. However, early representatives of successful
Quaternary lineages are recorded (e.g. the white rhinoceros, Ceratotherium).
While individual taxa represent advances over their Miocene ancestors, many
were much less specialized than their Quaternary descendants (e.g. the seal,
Homiphoca capensis). Some ‘tropical’ elements were still present (e.g. parrots,
giraffes), but the moderating climate might already have caused some to
become extinct, or nearly extinct (e.g. crocodiles, primates).
Faunal evidence of age is in good accord with the geological evidence,
although absolute, or chronometric, dates for the various elements in the
succession are still lacking.
In a little more than a decade the Langebaanweg succession has become
one of the more intensively studied and best understood complexes of late
Tertiary deposits in southern Africa. It has also become the source of the
largest assemblage of late Tertiary vertebrates known anywhere in Africa. The
unique set of geological, botanical and faunal data already available have
combined to provide an unparalleled insight into the nature of local late
Tertiary environments and the changes that they underwent. In spite of all this,
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 99
there is still a considerable potential for further research, and the significance
of this area in southern African Cenozoic studies should increase still further.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I am indebted to the following persons who assisted in the preparation of
the manuscript of this paper: Mr F. Grine, Miss P. Haarhoff, Miss B. Mann,
Miss J. Nolte and Miss L. Scott (South African Museum); Dr J. A. Coetzee
(University of the Orange Free State); Prof. H. J. Deacon (University of
Stellenbosch); Prof. R. V. Dingle, Mrs R. Martin and Mr D. Salmon (Univers-
ity of Cape Town); Mr H. Jenner-Clarke (ASAM Minerals (Pty) Ltd);
Dr R. G. Klein (University of Chicago); Mr C. A. Repenning (United States
Geological Survey); Dr J. Rogers (South African Geological Survey);
Dr W. G. Siesser (Vanderbilt University); Dr C. G. Stocken (Consolidated
Diamond Mines of SWA (Pty) Ltd); and Dr A. J. Tankard (University of
Tennessee).
Much of the information presented here was derived from the research of
the many past and present collaborators in the Langebaanweg Research
Project, and my thanks go also to them. This research was made possible by the
co-operation of the management and employees of Chemfos Ltd, and the many
field and laboratory assistants involved in the collection and preparation of
material. Special thanks are due to Mr I. Tembo (Orapa, Botswana) for his
dedicated work over many years as senior field assistant. His efforts did much
to ensure the success of the collecting programme.
The Langebaanweg Research Project is supported by Chemfos Ltd, the
South African Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, and the
Wenner-Gren Foundation for Anthropological Research (Grant no. 2752-1834),
and the assistance of these organizations is gratefully acknowledged.
REFERENCES
Anonymous, 1975. Données sur quelques localités 4 mammiféres d’Age Néogéne supérieur du
Languedoc. Act. I Col. Intern. Sobre Biostrat. Cont. Neogeno Sup. Cuat. Inf. 4: 23-29.
AXELROD, D. I. & Raven, P. V. 1978. Late Cretaceous and Tertiary vegetation history of
Africa. In: WERGER, M. J. A. ed. Biogeography and ecology of southern Africa: 77-130.
The Hague: W. Junk.
AZZAROLI, A. 1975. Late Miocene interchange of terrestrial faunas across the Mediterranean.
Act. I Col. Intern. Sobre Biostrat. Cont. Neogeno Sup. Cuat. Inf. 4: 67-71.
Bass, A. J., D’AuBrey, J. D. & Kistnasamy, N. 1973. Sharks of the east coast of southern
Africa. I. The genus Carcharhinus (Carcharhinidae). Invstl Rep. oceanogr. Res. Inst.
Durban 33: 1-168.
Bass, A. J., D’AusBrey, J. D. & Kistnasamy, N. 1975. Sharks of the east coast of southern
Africa. V. The families Hexanchidae, Chlamydoselachidae, Heterodontidae, Pristiophori-
dae and Squatinidae. Invstl Rep. oceanogr. Res. Inst. Durban 43: 1-50.
BEHRENSMEYER, A. K. 1976. Lothagam, Kanapoi and Ekora: A general summary of stratigra-
phy and fauna. In: Coppens, Y. et al. eds. Earliest man and environments in the Lake
Rudolf Basin: 163-170. Chicago: University Press.
BERGGREN, W.A. & VAN COUVERING, J. A. 1974. The Late Neogene. Amsterdam: Elsevier.
100 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
BircH, G. F. 1977. Phosphorites from the Saldanha Bay region. Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 42:
223-240.
BisHop, W. W. 1980. Palaeogeography and continental taphonomy. Jn: BEHRENSMEYER, A. K.
& Hin1, A. P. eds. Fossils in the making: 20-37. Chicago: University Press.
Boaz, N. T., Gaziry, A. W. & EL-ARNaAuTI, A. 1979. New fossil finds from the Libyan Upper
Neogene site of Sahabi. Nature, Lond. 280: 137-139.
Bone, E. L. & SINGER, R. 1965. Hipparion from Langebaanweg, Cape Province and a revision
of the genus in Africa. Ann. S. Afr, Mus. 48: 273-397.
BoucHErR, C. & JARMAN, M. L. 1977. The vegetation of the Langebaan area, South Africa.
Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 42: 241-272.
Brown, A. C. & JARMAN, N. 1978. Coastal marine habitats. Jn: WERGER, M. J. A. ed.
Biogeography and ecology of southern Africa: 1239-1277. The Hague: W. Junk.
ButTzer, K. W. 1973. On the sedimentary sequence from the ‘E’ Quarry, Langebaanweg, Cape
Province. Quaternaria 17: 237-243.
CARRINGTON, A. J. & KENSLEY, B. F. 1969. Pleistocene molluscs from the Namaqualand coast.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 52: 189-223.
CarTER, A. N. 1978. Phosphatic nodule beds in Victoria and the late Miocene—Pliocene
eustatic event. Nature, Lond. 276: 258-259.
CHURCHER, C. S. 1978. Giraffidae. In: Macuiio, V. J. & Cooxe, H. B. S. eds. Evolution of
African mammals: 509-535. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press.
CHURCHER, C. S. & RicHARDSON, M. L. 1978. Equidae. In: Mac.io, V. J. & Cooke, H. B. S.
eds. Evolution of African mammals: 379-422. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University
Press.
CorETzEE, J. A. 1978. Late Cainozoic palaeoenvironments of southern Africa. In: VAN
ZINDEREN BAKKER, E. M. ed. Antarctic glacial history and world palaeoenvironments:
115-127. Rotterdam: Balkema.
Cooke, H. B. S. & Wiikinson, A. F. 1978. Suidae and Tayassuidae. In: MAGLIO, V. J. &
Cooke, H. B. S. eds. Evolution of African mammals: 435-482. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard
University Press.
Coprens, Y., Mactio, V. J., MADDEN, C. T. & BEDEN, M. 1978. Proboscidea. In: MaG.io, V.
J. & Cooke, H. B. S. eds. Evolution of African mammals: 336-367. Cambridge, Mass.:
Harvard University Press.
Corvinus, G. & HENDEy, Q. B. 1978. A new Miocene vertebrate locality at Arrisdrift in
Namibia (South West Africa). N. Jb. Geol. Palaont. Mh. 1978: 193-205.
CoryNpDon, S. C. 1978. Hippopotamidae. /n: MaG.io, V. J. & Cooke, H. B. S. eds. Evolution
of African mammals: 483-495. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press.
Davies, O. 1972. Pleistocene shorelines in the southern and south-eastern Cape Province (2).
Ann. Natal Mus, 21: 225-279.
Davies, O. 1973. Pleistocene shorelines in the western Cape and South West Africa. Ann.
Natal Mus. 21: 719-765.
Day, J. H. 1974. A guide to marine life on South African shores. Cape Town: Balkema.
DEAcon, H. J. 1979. Palaeocology. In: Day, J., SIEGFRIED, W. R., Louw, G. N. & JARMAN, M.
L. eds. Fynbos ecology: a preliminary synthesis: 58-69. Pretoria: S. Afr. natn. scient.
Progm. Rep. 40.
Detson, E. 1975. Paleoecology and zoogeography of the Old World monkeys. Jn: Tuttle, R.
H. ed. Primate functional morphology and evolution: 37-64. The Hague: Mouton.
DincLeE, R. V. 1971. Tertiary sedimentary history of the continental shelf off southern Cape
Province, South Africa. Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 74: 173-186.
DINnGLE, R. V. 1973. The geology of the continental shelf between Ltideritz and Cape Town
(south-west Africa), with special reference to Tertiary strata. J. geol. Soc. Lond. 129:
337-363.
DINGLE, R. V., Lorp, A. R. & HENDEY, Q. B. 1979. New sections in the Varswater Formation
(Neogene) of Langebaan Road, south-western Cape, South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 78:
81-92.
Dorst, J. & DANDELOoT, P. 1970. A field guide to the larger mammals of Africa. London:
Collins.
FUGGLE, R. F. & Asuton, E. R. 1979. Climate. In: Day, J., SIEGFRIED, W. R., Louw, G.N. &
JARMAN, M. L. eds. Fynbos ecology: a preliminary synthesis: 7-15. Pretoria: S. Afr. natn.
scient. Progm. Rep. 40.
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 101
Gentry, A. W. 1974. A new genus and species of Pliocene boselaphine (Bovidae, Mammalia)
from South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 65: 145-188.
Gentry, A. W. 1978. Bovidae. In: MaG.io, V. J. & Cooke, H. B. S. eds. Evolution of African
mammals: 540-572. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press.
Gentry, A. W. 1980. Fossil Bovidae (Mammalia) of Langebaanweg, South Africa. Ann. S.
Afr. Mus. 79: 213-337.
GiLL, E.D. 1975. Evolution of Australia’s unique flora and fauna in relation to the plate
tectonics theory. Proc. R. Soc. Victoria 87: 215-234.
Go pE-PosseE, J.-M. 1977. Barberahyus castellensis n. g. n. sp., Tayasuido del Vindoboniense
terminal de Castell de Barbera (Cuenca del Vallés, Espana). Paleont. Evoluc. 12: 31-43.
GREENWAY, P. J. 1970. A classification of the vegetation of east Africa. Kirkia 9: 1-68.
Hatta, C. D. 1964. The geology of the coastal diamond deposits of southern Africa (1959).
In: Haucuton, S. H. ed. The geology of some ore deposits in southern Africa 2: 671-728.
Johannesburg: Geological Society of South Africa.
HamILTon, W. R. & VAN COUVERING, J. A. 1977. Lower Miocene mammals of South West
Africa. Namib Bull. (Suppl. 2, Transv. Mus. Bull.): 9-11.
Hag, B. U., BERGGREN, W. A. & VAN Couverinc J. A. 1977. Corrected age of the
Pliocene/Pleistocene boundary. Nature, Lond. 269: 483-488.
Harris, J. M. 1976. Pliocene Giraffoidea (Mammalia, Ariodactyla) from the Cape Province.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 69: 325-353.
Harris, J. M. & WuirtE, T. D. 1979. Evolution of the Plio-Pleistocene African Suidae. Trans.
Am. phil. Soc 69 (2): 1-128.
Harrison, A. D. 1964. An ecological survey of the Great Berg River. Jn: Davis, D. H. S. ed.
Ecological studies in southern Africa: 143-158. The Hague: W. Junk.
Harrison, A. D. & Etswortu, J. F. 1958. Hydrobiological studies on the Great Berg River,
Western Cape Province. Part 1. A general description, chemical studies on the water and
main features of the fauna and flora. Trans R. Soc. S. Afr. 35: 125-226.
HaucutTon, S. H. 1968. Geological history of southern Africa. Johannesburg: Geological
Society of South Africa.
Hayes, M. O. 1976 Beaches—barrier islands. In: Hayes, M. O. & Kana, T. W. eds. Terrigenous
clastic depositional environments: I 81-I 108. Columbia, SC: University of South Carolina.
Hayes, D. E., FRAKEs, L. A., BARRETT, P., BURNS, D. A., CHEN, P. H., Forp, A. S., KANEps,
A. G., Kemp, E. A., McCoLium, D. W., Piper, D. J. W., WALL, W. E. & WEsB, P. N.
1973. Leg 28 deep-sea drilling in the Southern Ocean. Geotimes 18 (6): 19-24.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1969. Quaternary vertebrate fossil sites in the south-western Cape Province. S.
Afr. archaeol. Bull. 24: 96-105.
HENDeEY, Q. B. 1970a. A review of the geology and palaeontology of the Plio/Pleistocene
deposits at Langebaanweg, Cape Province. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 56: 75-117.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1970b. The age of the fossiliferous deposits at Langebaanweg, Cape Province.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 56: 119-131.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1972a. A Pliocene ursid from South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 59: 115-132.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1972b. Further observations on the age of the mammalian fauna from
Langebaanweg, Cape Province. Palaeoecol. afr. 6: 172-175.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1973. Fossil occurrences at Langebaanweg, Cape Province. Nature, Lond. 244:
13-14.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1974a. The late Cenozoic Carnivora of the south-western Cape Province. Ann.
S. Afr. Mus. 63: 1-369.
HENpeY, Q. B. 1974b. Faunal dating of the late Cenozoic of southern Africa, with special
reference to the Carnivora. Quaternary Res. 4: 149-161.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1976a. The Pliocene fossil occurrences in ‘E’ Quarry, Langebaanweg, South
Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 69: 215-247.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1976b. Fossil peccary from the Pliocene of South Africa. Science 192: 787-789.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1977. Fossil bear from South Africa. S. Afr. J. Sci. 73: 112-116.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1978a. The age of the fossils from Baard’s Quarry, Langebaanweg, South
Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 73: 1=24.
HENpDEY, Q. B. 1978b. Preliminary report on the Miocene vertebrates from Arrisdrift, South
West Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 76: 1-41.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1978c. Late Tertiary Hyaenidae from Langebaanweg, South Africa, and their
relevance to the phylogeny of the family. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 76: 265-297.
102 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
HENDEY, Q. B. 1978d. Late Tertiary Mustelidae (Mammalia, Carnivora) from Langebaanweg,
South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 76: 329-357.
HENpDEY, Q. B. 1980. Agriotherium (Mammalia, Ursidae) from Langebaanweg, South Africa,
and relationships of the genus. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 81: 1-109.
HENDEY, Q. B. & REPENNING, C. A. 1972. A Pliocene phocid from South Africa. Ann. S. Afr.
Mus. 59: 71-98.
Hooyer, D. A. 1972. A late Pliocene rhinoceros from Langebaanweg, Cape Province. Ann. S.
Afr. Mus. 59: 151-191.
Hoover, D. A. 1976. The late Pliocene Equidae of Langebaanweg, Cape Province, South
Africa. Zool. Verh. 148: 1-39.
Hoover, D. A. 1978. Rhinocerotidae. In: MaGctio, V. J. & Cooke, H. B. S. eds. Evolution of
African mammals: 371-378. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press.
Hoover, D. A. & Macuio, V. J. 1974. Hipparions from the late Miocene and Pliocene of
northwestern Kenya. Zool. Verh. 134: 1-34.
Horwoop, A. T. 1928. New and little known mammals from the Miocene of Africa. Am. Mus.
Novit. 344: 1-9.
Hsu, K. J., Montapert, E., BERNOULET, D7, Cms, MB) ERICKSON; A“, GARRISONS Rem
Kipp, R. B., MELIERES, F., MULLER, C. & WriGuT, R. 1977. History of the Mediterranean
salinity crises. Nature, Lond. 267: 399-403.
Kemp, E. M. 1978. Tertiary climatic evolution and vegetation history in the southeast Indian
Ocean region. Palaeogeogr., Palaeoclimatol., Palaeoecol. 24: 169-208.
KENNETT, J. P. 1978. Cainozoic evolution of circumantarctic palaeoceanography. Jn: VAN
ZINDEREN BAKKER, E. M. ed. Antarctic glacial history and world palaeoenvironments:
41-56. Rotterdam: Balkema.
KENSLEY, B. 1972. Pliocene marine invertebrates from Langebaanweg, Cape Province. Ann. S.
Afr. Mus. 60: 173-190.
KENSLEY, B. 1973. Sea-shells of southern Africa. Gastropods. Cape Town: Maskew Miller.
KENSLEY, B. 1977. A second assemblage of Pliocene invertebrate fossils from Langebaanweg,
Cape. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 72: 189-210.
Kine, J. E. 1964. Seals of the world. London: British Museaum (Natural History).
KLEIN, R. G. 1975. Paleoanthropological implications of the non-archaeological bone assembIl-
age from Swartklip 1, south-western Cape Province, South Africa. Quaternary Res. 5:
275-288.
KLEIN, R. G. 1980. Environmental and ecological implications of large mammals from Upper
Pleistocene and Holocene sites in southern Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 81: 223-283.
KOppPEN, W. & GEIGER, R. 1936. Handbuch der Klimatologie. Berlin: Borntraeger.
KRONINGER, H. 1978. National Lightning Recording Scheme. News/. natn. Elect. Engng Res.
Inst. (CSIR): 1-18.
KruGEr, F. J. 1979. Fire. In: Day, J., SIEGFRIED, W. R., Louw, G. N. & JARMAN, M. L. eds.
Fynbos ecology: a preliminary synthesis: 43-57. Pretoria. S. Afr. natn. scient. Progm. Rep. 40.
KRUMBEIN, W. C. & SLoss, L. L. 1963. Stratigraphy and sedimentation. San Francisco: W. H.
Freeman.
KurtTEN, B. 1971. The Age of Mammals. London: Weidenfeld & Nicolson.
Lamont, G. 1947. The geology of part of the Vanrhynsdorp Division, Cape Province.
University of Cape Town: Unpublished Ph. D. thesis.
Levyns, M. R. 1964. Migrations and origins of the Cape Flora. Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 37:
85-107.
Linpsay, E. H., OppykE, N. D. & JoHNnson, N. M. 1980. Pliocene dispersal of the horse Equus
and late Cenozoic mammalian dispersal events. Nature, Lond. 287: 135-138.
LoBREAU-CALLEN, D. & Suc, J.-P. 1972. Présence de pollens de Microtropus fallax (Celas-
traceae) dans le Pleistocéne inférieur de Celleneuve (Hérault). C.r. hebd. Séanc. Acad.
Sci. Paris (D) 275: 1351-1354.
Loutit, T. S. & KENNETT, J. P. 1979. Application of carbon isotope stratigraphy to Late
Miocene shallow marine sediments, New Zealand. Science 204: 1196-1199.
Massutt, J. A. 1956. The physiography and surface geology of the Hopefield fossil site. Trans.
R. Soc. S. Afr. 35: 21-58.
Maa uio, V. J. 1973. Origin and evolution of the Elephantidae. Trans. Am. phil. Soc. 63: 1-149.
Maac.io, V. J. 1978. Patterns of faunal evolution. In: MaGuio, V. J. & Cooke, H. B. S. eds.
Evolution of African mammls 603-619. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press.
PALAEOECOLOGY OF LANGEBAANWEG 103
Macuio, V. J. & HENDEy, Q. B. 1970. New evidence relating to the supposed stegolophodont
ancestry of the Elephantidae. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 25: 85-87.
McKenna, M. C. 1973. Sweepstakes, Filters, Corridors, Noah’s Arks, and Beached Viking
Funeral Ships in palaeogeography. Jn: TarLinc, D. H. & Runcorn, S. K. eds. Implications
of Continental Drift to the Earth Sciences 1: 295-308. London: Academic Press.
MCLACHLAN G.R. & LIVERSIDGE, R. 1978. Roberts birds of South Africa. Cape Town: The John
Voelcker Bird Book Fund.
McLacuian, I. R. & McMiLran, I. K. 1979. Microfaunal biostratigraphy, chronostratigraphy,
and history of Mesozoic and Cenozoic deposits on the coastal margin of South Africa.
Spec. Publs. Geol. Soc. S. Afr. 6: 161-182.
Mercer, J. H. 1978. Glacial development and temperature trends in the Antarctic and in South
America. In: VAN ZINDEREN BAKKER, E. M. ed. Antarctic glacial history and world
palaeoenvironments: 73-93. Rotterdam: Balkema.
Muizon, C. DE & HENDEY, Q. B. 1980. Late Tertiary seals of the South Atlantic Ocean. Ann.
S. Afr. Mus. 82: 91-128.
Otson, E. C. 1962. Late Permian terrestrial: vertebrates, USA and USSR. Trans. Am. phil.
Soc. 52 (2): 3-224.
PATTERSON, B., BEHRENSMEYER, A. K. & SILL, W. D. 1970. Geology and fauna of a new
Pliocene locality in north-western Kenya. Nature, Lond. 226: 918-921.
Pocock, T. N. 1976. Pliocene mammalian microfauna from Langebaanweg: A new fossil genus
linking the Otomyinae with the Murinae. S. Afr. J. Sci. 72: 58-60.
Ricu, P. V. 1980. Preliminary report on the fossil avian remains from Late Tertiary sediments
at Langebaanweg (Cape Province), South Africa. S. Afr. J. Sci. 76: 166-170.
Rocers, J. 1980. First report on the Cenozoic sediments between Cape Town and Elands Bay.
Rep. geol. Surv. S. Afr. 1980-165: 1-64. (Open file.)
SCHULZE, B. R. 1965. Climate of South Africa. 8. General Survey. Pretoria: Government
Printer.
SCHULZE, R. E. & McGee, O. S. 1978. Climatic indices and classifications in relation to
biogeography of southern Africa. Jn: WEeRGER, M. J. A. ed. Biogeography and ecology of
southern Africa: 19-52. The Hague: W. Junk.
Scott, J. H. & Symons, N. B. B. 1974. Introduction to dental anatomy. Edinburgh & London:
Churchill Livingstone.
SHACKLETON, N. J. & OppykeE, N. D. 1973. Oxygen isotope and palaeomagnetic stratigraphy of
Equatorial Pacific Core V28-238; Oxygen isotope temperatures and ice volumes on a 10°
and 10° year scale. Quaternary Res. 3: 39-55.
SIESSER, W. G. 1978. Age of phosphorites on the South African continental margin. Marine
Geol. 26: M17—M28.
SIESSER, W. G. & DINGLE, R. V. 1981. Tertiary sea-level movements around southern Africa.
J. Geol 89: 83-96.
Smmpson, G. G. 1967. The geography of evolution. New York: Capricorn Books.
Simpson, G. G. 1971. Fossil penguin from the late Cenozoic of South Africa. Science 171:
1144-1145.
Simpson, G. G. 1975. Notes on variation in penguins and on fossil penguins from the Pliocene
of Langebaanweg, Cape Province, South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 69: 59-72.
Simpson, G. G. 1976. Penguins. Past and present, here and there. New Haven: Yale University
Press.
Simpson, G. G. 1979. A new genus of late Tertiary penguin from Langebaanweg, South Africa.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 78: 1-9.
SINGER, R. 1961. The new fossil sites at Langebaanweg (South Africa). Curr. Anthrop 2:
385-387.
SINGER, R. & Hoover, D.A. 1958. A Stegolophodon from South Africa. Nature, Lond. 182:
101-102.
STROMER, E. 1926. Reste land- und stisswasser bewohnender Wirbeltiere aus den Diamantenfel-
dern Deutsch-Stidwestafrikas. Jn: KaAIsER, E. ed. Die Diamantenwiiste Stidwestafrikas 2:
107-153. Berlin: D. Reimer.
STROMER, E. 193la. Reste stisswasser- und land bewohnender Wirbeltiere aus den Diamanten-
felden Klein-Namaqualandes (Stidwest-afrika). Sber. bayer Akad. Wiss. 1931: 17-47.
StroMER, E. 1931b. Palaeothentoides africanus, nov. gen., nov. spec., ein erstes Beuteltier aus
Afrika. Sber. bayer. Akad. Wiss. 1931: 177-190.
104 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TANKARD, A. J. 1974a. Varswater Formation of the Langebaanweg-—Saldanha area, Cape
Province. Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 77: 265-283.
TANKARD, A. J. 1974b. Petrology and origin of the phosphate and aluminium phosphate rock of
the Langebaanweg—Saldanha area, south-western Cape Province. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 65:
217-249.
TANKARD, A. J. 1975a. The marine Neogene Saldanha Formation. Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 78:
257-264.
TANKARD, A. J. 1975b. The late Cenozoic history and palaeoenvironments of the coastal
margin of the south-western Cape Province, South Africa. Rhodes University: Unpu-
blished Ph. D. thesis.
TANKARD, A. J. 1975c. Varswater Formation of the Langebaanweg—Saldanha area, Cape
Province. (Discussion.) Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 78: 373-375.
TANKARD, A. J. 1975d. Thermally anomalous Late Pleistocene molluscs from the south-western
Cape Province, South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 69: 17-45.
TANKARD, A. J. 1976. Pleistocene history and coastal morphology of the Ysterfontein—Elands
Bay area, Cape Province. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 69:73-119.
TANKARD, A. J. & RoGers, J. 1978. Late Cenozoic palaeoenvironments on the west coast of
southern Africa. J. Biogeogr. 5: 319-337.
TayLor, H. C. 1978. Capensis. In: WeRGER, M. J. A. ed. Biogeography and ecology of southern
Africa: 171-229. The Hague: W. Junk.
Tuomas, H. 1979. Miotragocerus cyrenaicus sp. nov. (Bovidae, Artiodactyla, Mammalia) du
Miocéne supérieur de Sahabi (Libye) et ses rapports avec les autres Miotragocerus.
Geobios 12: 267-281.
VaIL, P. R. & HARDENBOL, J. 1979. Sea-level changes during the Tertiary. Oceanus 22: 71-79.
VaIL, P. R. Mitcuum, R. M. & THompson, S. 1977. Seismic stratigraphy and global changes in
sea level. Part 4: Global cycles of relative changes of sea level. Mem. Am. Ass. Petrol.
Geol. 26: 83-97.
VAN COUVERING, J. A. 1972. Radiometric calibration of the European Neogene. /n: BisHop, W.
W. & MiLieR, J. A. eds. Calibration of hominoid evolution: 247-271. Edinburgh: Scottish
Academic Press.
VAN CoUuveRING J. A. 1978. Status of late Cenozoic boundaries. Geology 6: 169.
VAN COUVERING, J. A. & BERGGREN, W. A. 1977. Biostratigraphical basis of the Neogene time
scale. In: KAUFFMANN, E. G. & HazeEL, J. E. eds. Methods of biostratigraphy: 283-306.
Stroudsburg, Pa.: Dowden, Hutchinson & Ross.
VAN COUVERING, J. A. BERGGREN, W. A., DRAKE, R. E., AGuirrE, E. & Curtis, G. H. 1976.
The terminal Miocene event. Mar. Micropaleontol. 1: 163-286.
Visser, H. N. & ScHocn, A. E. 1973. The geology and mineral resources of the Saldanha Bay
area. Mem. geol. Surv. S. Afr. 63: 1-150.
VooruieEs, M. R. 1969. Taphonomy and population dynamics of an Early Pliocene vertebrate
fauna, Knox County, Nebraska. Univ. Wyoming, Contr. Geol., Spec. Paper 1: 1-69.
Wess, S. D. 1977. A history of savannah vertebrates in the New World. 1. North America. A.
Rev. Ecol. Syst. 8: 355-380.
Wuite, T. D. & Harris, J. M. 1977. Suid evolution and correlation of African hominid
localities. Science 198: 13-21.
Wo rr, R. G., SINGER, R. & BisHop, W. W. 1973. Fossil bear (Agriotherium Wagner, 1837)
from Langebaanweg, Cape Province, South Africa. Quaternaria 17: 209-236.
*
ee
ae
ri
ry
y
i
i x
‘ in
“
4 7 » ; ; a
’ : 5 Ri ii a 5 iy 4
%: 4 & at
Vb it =) i ;
» by L i ‘
ors *
y ~t t ur
Sai . a i
a oi ‘
{ C = ;
y ‘ i
vf é 3 =
your e ’
i i > fic a «
pane 5 i ‘
> . “i — ¢
\\ t . i
x a i} 7
i ‘ at at
4 i ) f
i — i 8
i) aA ; hy vi
( 5 ; By ‘
oe ; A is :
} ee, d
(ee
A | t
; vy o %,
sg” y 2 ‘3 i
Y ail ad J F }
i i < j ;
Die , =
i oo A i
£ ‘
‘ 5 .
K P t
~
Ea i i
. ¢
~ s
) ~ rk
Ve ry : s ‘
* =~ ‘
? i
Li ‘
2 -
: a 5 ‘
2 es i
3
; &) ene
5 i a 5
' és
' bt
\ fe i
a j a fi
r >
=
2 }
1
a .
bs iS
, > ~ rt eT,
9 ~
es YY er
aa \ St
re J
r ‘ 2
q t
| frat
¥ ‘ !
} ms Ny é J 1 i
~
} PB Ke i
{ {
e ? Po
Fi ct &
aw 1
B i. te
4 ’ t
ra t v
is ¢
*
I , =X)
a i % W ey -
ji E oF f 2
3
j :
7 A
by 1 Gi ‘] 2
{ i.
ro) # 4
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc. .
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
- comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
~ not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
9
e.g. ‘.. . the Figure depicting C. namacolus...’; ‘. .. in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’ a
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
Q. B. HENDEY
PALAEOECOLOGY OF THE LATE
TERTIARY FOSSIL OCCURRENCES IN
‘FE’ QUARRY, LANGEBAANWEG,
SOUTH AFRICA, AND A REINTERPRETATION
OF THEIR GEOLOGICAL CONTEXT
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
~~ MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN.
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
Scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P. —H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHer, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gen. 74: 627-634.
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Gon. (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 1960b. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull, Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
cele
A. Flabellina funeka sp. nov. B. Flabellina capensis (Thiele, 1925). C. Aeolidiella indica Bergh,
1888a. D. Catriona columbiana (O’Donoghue, 1922). E. Catriona casha sp. nov. F. Cuthona
speciosa (Macnae, 1954) with lilac cerata.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 84 Band
July 1981 Julie
Part 2 Deel
D> S
Alig ce
VID No Of
DESCRIPTION AND REVISION OF SOME
SOUTH AFRICAN AEOLIDACEAN
NUDIBRANCHIA (MOLLUSCA, GASTROPODA)
By
T. M. GOSLINER
&
R. J. GRIFFITHS
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
il, AUB, 5-8), HUB, 4-5, 8, tant), SUES, 5, FO,
AC, taps), TO), 8, O02, 7), MOG).
GED, 5, 7, pai), 15S), BNO), Wi, SG), 3S), 23, 4S)
EDITOR/REDAKTRISE
Ione Rudner
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 010 9
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
he sRusticas bresssweivemeides Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
DESCRIPTION AND REVISION OF SOME SOUTH AFRICAN
AEOLIDACEAN NUDIBRANCHIA (MOLLUSCA, GASTROPODA)
By
TTERRENCE M. GOSLINER
South African Museum
&
ROBERTA J. GRIFFITHS
Department of Zoology and Institute of Oceanography,
University of Cape Town
(With 22 figures and 5 tables)
[MS. accepted 2 December 1980]
ABSTRACT
This study examines aeolids of the families Flabellinidae, Aeolidiidae, Tergipedidae, and
Embletoniidae from South Africa. The genus Coryphella Gray, 1850, is regarded as a junior
synonym of Flabellina Voigt, 1834. Flabellina funeka sp. nov. is described and Flabellina
capensis (Thiele, 1925) is rediscovered from the Cape Peninsula. Aeolidiella indica Bergh, 1888,
is designated as the senior synonym of A. saldanhensis Barnard, 1927, and A. multicolor
Macnae, 1954, from South Africa, as well as several other species from other parts of the
world. Catriona columbiana (O’Donoghue, 1922) is newly recorded from South Africa and C.
casha sp. nov. is described. Cuthona speciosa (Macnae, 1954) is redescribed and transferred to
Cuthona. Embletonia gracilis Risbec, 1928, is recorded from South Africa.
CONTENTS
PAGE
IMEKOGUCH Ons. % es .nos, SNe ee arene 105
Familyablabelimidac snes as soe 106
amulye Ne Ollie ae ye see on 2)
FanmilyeRenoipedidde® aa ase s a: > 129
Rannlysemibletonidacen a0 sae ao: 142
AcknowledsementSrereme a2. seas see 148
INCEEKCHCE Spree ia cea Mian Ano Su 05's 148
IND TEVIATONSAF 4h owes eee ease Mess 149
INTRODUCTION
The aeolidacean nudibranch fauna of South Africa has been sporadically
and poorly studied. Bergh (1907) recorded the cosmopolitan, pelagic species,
Glaucus atlanticus and Thiele (1925) described the external morphology and
radula of Coryphella capensis based on a single specimen collected off Pletten-
berg Bay. Barnard (1927) studied the external morphology and radula of
105
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 84(2), 1981: 105-150, 22 figs, 5 tables.
106 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Aeolidiella saldanhensis, Godiva quadricolor (as Hervia), Cratena capensis, and
Facelina faurei. The only complete descriptions of South African aeolid nudi-
branchs were provided by Macnae (1954). He further elucidated the morph-
ology of species described by Bergh and Barnard and described seven addi-
tional taxa. Of the 13 species of aeolids recorded from South Africa to date, 8
are members of the Facelinidae, 2 of the Aeolidiidae, and 1 each of the
Flabellinidae, Tergipedidae, and Glaucidae.
Our collections and morphological study of some South African opistho-
branchs have yielded several new taxa, of which two species are here described.
Two additional species, not previously recorded from South Africa, are
described in detail and the descriptions of three species previously recorded
from South Africa are amplified and their systematic placement revised.
Family Flabellinidae
Flabellina funeka sp. nov.
Figs 1A, 2-4
Material
Holotype
South African Museum, Cape Town, SAM—A34317, 10 m depth, Castle
Rocks, False Bay (34°14’S 18°29'E), 17 January 1980.
Paratypes
SAM-A34318, 10 m depth, Castle Rocks, False Bay (34°14’S 18°29’E), 17
January 1980
SAM-A34319, 10 m depth, Venus Pool, False Bay (34°17’S 18°28’E), 6
January 1980
SAM-A34320, 17 m depth, New Harbour wall, Hermanus (34°17’S
IPS 13), Il Ocroosr 19/7/Il
SAM-A34321, 17 m depth, New Harbour wall, Hermanus (34°17’S
19°15), 1 October 1971
Etymology
‘Funeka’ is derived from Zulu, meaning to be sought after, owing to its
beauty.
External morphology
The fully mature animals (Fig. 1A) are 9 to 40 mm in length, when actively
crawling. The oral tentacles are shorter than the rhinophores and are basally
thickened (Fig. 2A). The foot corners are short and well developed. When fully
extended they are held at an angle of 90° from the foot, but are recurved
inwardly when the animal’s head is raised. The foot is slender and transversely
grooved anteriorly. The rhinophores are conical with 10 to 14 transverse
lamellae which may be complete or interrupted (Fig. 2B). The cerata arise from
SOME SOUTH AFRICAN AEOLIDACEAN NUDIBRANCHIA 107
A 4
Be
SS a. Ps
SOU ¢
Nee ES
Ne X. Pe,
ne NS. Le
1,0 mm
1,0mm
fl
0,25mm
Fig. 2. Flabellina funeka sp. nov. A. Dorsal view of head. B. Lateral view of pedunculate
cerata and rhinophore. C. Jaw. D. Reproductive system. E. Penis.
compound peduncles which generally contain two or three major subdivisions.
The right anterior digestive branch is formed by 2 or 3 compound peduncles
with 4 to 6 cerata in the anteriormost cluster, 9 to 10 cerata in the second, and 6
to 10 in the third. In some instances the first and second peduncles are
incompletely separated, thus forming a single, larger peduncle. These pedun-
cles are followed by the long interhepatic space. In the posterior digestive
branch there are 7 to 9 peduncles per side. They consist of 7 to 11, 6 to 9, 5 to
7,4 to 6, 2 to 4, 1 to 3, 1 to 2, 1, 1 cerata per peduncle. The pleuroproctic anus
108 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
is situated in the middle of the interhepatic space. The gonopores are ventral to
the first and second peduncles of the right anterior digestive branch.
The body surface is covered by vivid mauve pigment. The rhinophores and
oral tentacles are tipped with opaque white pigment. The ceratal peduncles are
purple but the ceratal epidermis is translucent. The vermilion-red digestive
gland does not entirely fill the lumen of the cerata. Each ceras has a subapical
band of opaque white pigment.
Internal morphology
The buccal mass is small relative to the size of the animal. There are
well-developed oral glands which extend into the anteriormost ceratal pedun-
cle. The jaws (Fig. 2C) are thin and broadly ovoid with 5 to 6 rows of denticles
on the masticatory border. The outer row contains 23 to 33 prominent denti-
cles. The triseriate radula (Fig. 3) consists of 30 to 35 rows of teeth. The
rachidian teeth are broad with a thick basal portion and 5 to 10 shallow to
deeply incised denticles on each side of the slightly larger central cusp. The
lateral teeth are triangular, basally arched and terminate in an acute apex. The
number of denticles on the inner face of the laterals is variable. In some
instances denticles may be absent, but there are commonly 7 to 12.
The reproductive system (Fig. 2D) has a large, slightly convoluted
ampulla. A postampullary duct of variable length gives rise to the duct of the
receptaculum seminis. The large, pear-shaped receptaculum seminis lies ventral
Fig. 3. Flabellina funeka sp. nov. Scanning electron micrograph
of the radula. Scale: 10 um between squares.
SOME SOUTH AFRICAN AEOLIDACEAN NUDIBRANCHIA 109
to the ampulla. Slightly more distally from the receptaculum duct, the postampull-
ary duct bifurcates into a short oviduct and a longer vas deferens. The thick,
prostatic vas deferens constricts sharply and terminates in a short, conical,
unarmed penial papilla (Fig. 2E). The female gland mass is well developed with
the mucous gland forming the largest portion. The saccate bursa copulatrix is
situated near the female gonopore and appears to have a glandular epidermis.
Natural history
Flabellina funeka has been found at several localities in False Bay and at
Hermanus. It has only been found subtidally in 7 to 17 m of water. It appears to
feed exclusively on members of the gymnoblastic hydroid genus, Eudendrium.
Egg mass
The egg mass of Flabellina funeka (Fig. 4) is highly convolute and
undulate, consisting of several whorls. There is a single egg per capsule.
Discussion
The generic distinction between Coryphella Gray, 1850, and Flabellina
Voigt, 1834, is based upon the manner in which the cerata are inserted into the
notum. Coryphella is characterized by cerata that insert directly into the notum,
while a stalk or peduncle of notal tissue is found in species of Flabellina. While
the majority of species can be separated using this feature, several others are
more problematic. Coryphella iodinea (Cooper, 1862) (MacFarland 1966), C.
pellucida (Alder & Hancock, 1843) (Kuzirian 1979), C. cynara Marcus &
Marcus, 1967, C. pricet MacFarland, 1966, and C. trilineata O’Donoghue, 1921
(MacFarland 1966, as C. fisheri) possess cerata on cushions that are somewhat
more elevated than in most species of Coryphella, but less pronounced than
those of Flabellina. This fact led MacFarland (1966) to erect the genus
Fig. 4. Flabellina funeka sp. nov. Egg mass at 5 X magnification.
110 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Flabellinopsis for Aeolis iodinea Cooper, 1862. Marcus and Marcus (1967)
quite correctly noted that this further complicates the problem of separating
Flabellina and Coryphella and suggested that Flabellinopsis be regarded as a
junior synonym of Coryphella.
If one compares the type species of Coryphella (Eolis rufibranchialis
Johnston, 1832 = Eolidia verrucosa M. Sars, 1829) with that of Flabellina
(Doris affinis Gmelin, 1791), several other differences appear. In Coryphella
verrucosa the pleuroproctic anus is situated near the anterior limit of the right
posterior digestive branch (Kuzirian 1979) while in Flabellina affinis it is
situated in the interhepatic space. In Coryphella verrucosa the rhinophores are
slightly rugose (Kuzirian 1979) while in Flabellina affinis they possess 25 to 28
annulations (Bergh 1875). These and other morphological criteria of Coryphella
verrucosa, Flabellina affinis and species which appear to be intermediate between
Coryphella and Flabellina are compared in Table 1. Other species of Flabellina
were considered by Gosliner (1980). Analysis of the features listed in Table 1
demonstrates several morphological trends. Within the Flabellinidae there is a
tendency for the cerata to become modified into more discrete clusters and for
these clusters to become elevated from the notum on peduncles. The rhinophores
can be smooth, rugose, annulate or perfoliate and this appears to be a
morphological sequence to increase sensory surface area. All species of Flabellina
possess perfoliate rhinophores except for F. affinis, which has annulate rhino-
phores. There is also a tendency towards the anterior migration of the anus into
the interhepatic space. Despite these major trends within the family, it is difficult
to find a high degree of correlation of these characters among species that are
intermediate between Coryphella and Flabellina. Of species with somewhat
pedunculate cerata, C. pellucida retains smooth rhinophores, C. pedata has rugose
rhinophores, C. pricei and C. trilineata have annulate rhinophores, and C. cynara
and C. iodinea have perfoliate ones. In C. iodinea and C-. trilineata the anus is
found posteriorly while in C. cynara, C. pedata, C. pellucida, and C. pricei it is in
the interhepatic space. Radular and reproductive characters provide no additional
basis on which to separate the genera.
Mayr (1969) suggested that a distinct morphological gap should exist
between genera. The presence of intermediate forms with poor correlation of
morphological characteristics suggests that maintenance of the generic separa-
tion of Coryphella and Flabellina is untenable. We therefore regard Coryphella
Gray, 1850, as a junior subjective synonym of Flabellina Voigt, 1834, syn. nov.
on the basis of priority. The species regarded as members of Flabellina are as
follows:
Flabellina affinis (Gmelin, 1791)
Doris affinis Gmelin, 1791
Flabellina affinis (Gmelin, 1791), Voigt, 1834
Flabellina albomarginata (Miller, 1971)
Coryphella albomarginata Miller, 1971
Flabellina albomarginata (Miller, 1971)—comb. nov.
Flabellina alisonae Gosliner, 1980
SOME SOUTH AFRICAN AEOLIDACEAN NUDIBRANCHIA
Flabellina annuligera (Bergh, 1900)
Samla annuligera Bergh, 1900
Flabellina annuligera (Bergh, 1900), Miller, 1971
Flabellina athodona (Bergh, 1875)
Coryphella athodona Bergh, 1875
Flabellina athodona (Bergh, 1875)—comb. nov.
Flabellina barentsi (Vayssiére, 1913)
Coryphella barentsi Vayssiére, 1913
Flabellina barentsi (Vayssiere, 1913)—comb. nov.
Flabellina babai Schmekel, 1970
Flabellina berghi (Vayssiére, 1888)
Coryphella berghi Vayssiére, 1888
Flabellina berghi (Vayssiere, 1888)—comb. nov.
Flabellina browni (Picton, 1980)
Coryphella browni Picton, 1980
Flabellina browni (Picton, 1980)—comb. nov.
Flabellina borealis (Odhner, 1922)
Coryphella borealis Odhner, 1922
Flabellina borealis (Odhner, 1922)—comb. nov.
Flabellina californica (Bergh, 1904)
Coryphella californica Bergh, 1904
Flabellina californica (Bergh, 1904)—comb. nov.
Flabellina capensis (Thiele, 1925)
Coryphella capensis Thiele, 1925
Flabellina capensis (Thiele, 1925)—comb. nov.
Flabellina cooperi (Cockerell, 1901)
Coryphella cooperi Cockerell, 1901
Flabellina cooperi (Cockerell, 1901)—comb. nov.
Flabellina cynara (Marcus & Marcus, 1967)
Coryphella cynara Marcus & Marcus, 1967
Flabellina cynara (Marcus & Marcus, 1967)—comb. nov.
Flabellina dushia (Marcus & Marcus, 1963)
Coryphella dushia Marcus & Marcus, 1963
Flabellina dushia (Marcus & Marcus, 1963)—comb. nov.
Flabellina engeli Marcus & Marcus, 1968
Flabellina falklandica (Eliot, 1907)
Coryphella falklandica Eliot, 1907
Flabellina falklandica (Ehot, 1907)—comb. nov.
Flabellina frigida (Grieg, 1905)
Coryphella frigida Grieg, 1905
Flabellina frigida (Grieg, 1905)—comb. nov.
Flabellina fusca (O’Donoghue, 1921)
Coryphella fusca O’Donoghue, 1921
Flabellina fusca (O’Donoghue, 1921)—comb. nov.
Flabellina gracilis (Alder & Hancock, 1844)
Eolis gracilis Alder & Hancock, 1844
Coryphella gracilis (Alder & Hancock, 1844), Alder & Hancock, 1855
Flabellina gracilis (Alder & Hancock, 1844)—comb. nov.
Flabellina incognita (Derjugin, 1926)
Coryphella barentsi Derjugin, 1924, non Vayssiére, 1913
Coryphella stimpsoni incognita Derjugin, 1926, non Verrill, 1879
Flabellina incognita (Derjugin, 1926)—comb. nov.
Flabellina iodinea (Cooper, 1862)
Aeolis (Phidiana?) iodinea Cooper, 1862
Flabellinopsis iodinea (Cooper, 1862), MacFarland, 1966
Coryphella iodinea (Cooper, 1862), Marcus & Marcus, 1967
Flabellina iodinea (Cooper, 1862)—comb. nov.
Well
UD ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 1
Comparison of some species of Coryphella and Flabellina.
Distribution Coloration Cerata Rhinophores
Flabellina affinis Mediterranean body and cerata
violet ; speckled,
pale brown
on compound
peduncles
Coryphella verrucosa North Atlantic
Circumboreal
body transparent
white; cerata red
(rarely green) white
tips
not elevated
Flabellina funeka South Africa body mauve; cerata on compound
red, white tips peduncles
Coryphella cynara Gulf of California body semi-
transparent blue;
cerata orange-brown,
white tips, body with
blue lines
North Pacific
Coryphella fusca not elevated
body transparent,
cerata deep brown,
Opaque tips
North-eastern body purple; cerata markedly elevated
Pacific orange
Coryphella iodinea
Coryphella pedata European Atlantic body violet; cerata_ slight elevation
Mediterranean orange-red, white
tips
Coryphella pellucida North Atlantic body transparent,
white: cerata
carmine, white tips
markedly elevated
body translucent
white. cerata red-
orange or olive green
Coryphella pricei California slight elevation
Coryphellatrilineata North-eastern body translucent first group only
Pacific grey, cerata orange- slightly elevated
red
Flabellina islandica (Odhner, 1937)
Coryphella islandica Odhner, 1937
Paracoryphella islandica (Odhner, 1937), Miller, 1971
Flabellina islandica (Odhner, 1937)—comb. nov.
Flabellina japonica (Volodchenko, 1941)
Coryphella japonica Volodchenko, 1941
Flabellina japonica (Volodchenko, 1941)—comb. nov.
Flabellina lineata (Lovén, 1846)
Aeolis lineata Lovén, 1846
Aeolis argentolineata Costa, 1866, Trinchese, 1877
Coryphella lineata (Lovén, 1846), Bergh, 1875
Flabellina lineata (Lovén, 1846)—comb. nov.
Flabellina longicaudata (O’Donoghue, 1922)
Coryphella longicaudata O’Donoghue, 1922
Flabellina longicaudata (O’Donoghue, 1922)—comb. nov.
Flabellina macassarana Bergh, 1905
Flabellina nobilis (Verrill, 1880)
Coryphella nobilis Verrill, 1880
Flabellina nobilis (Verrill, 1880)—comb. nov.
Flabellina orientalis (Volodchenko, 1941)
Coryphella orientalis Volodchenko, 1941
Flabellina orientalis (Volodchenko, 1941)—comb. nov.
18-25
annulations
rugose
10-14 annulations
on simple ‘cushions’ 30 perfoliations
32-38 annulations
46-80 perfoliations
rugose
smooth
c. 20 annulations
14-20 annulations
Denticles
Radular rows per side of
rachidian
34 6-7
13-20 4-8
30-35 5-8
16 7-9
19 4-7
2D) 14-16
20 3-6 |
|
30-40 8-11
19 6-8
17-18 5-8
SOME SOUTH AFRICAN AEOLIDACEAN NUDIBRANCHIA dS
Denticles
on
laterals
6
7-12
0-12
12-15
3-5
11-16
smooth
smooth
Position of Position of
receptaculum bursa Penis Anal Foot Reference
seminis copulatrix position corners
distal or rarely distal elongate, conical interhepatic space short, stout Bergh 1875;
proximal Vayssiere 1913;
Schmekel 1970
proximal distal trumpet-shaped lateral on anterior moderate length Thompson & Brown
margin of second 1976; Kuzirian 1979
hepatic group
proximal distal short, conical interhepatic space short, stout present study
absent distal bulbous, papillate interhepatic space long, slender Marcus & Marcus
1967
unknown unknown unknown unknown long, slender O’ Donoghue 1921
absent distal short, conical lateral, below margin short, stout MacFarland 1966:
of second hepatic Marcus & Marcus
group 1967
two proximal absent bulbous interhepatic space short, stout Alder & Hancock
; 1848. Thompson &
Brown 1976:
Schmekel 1970
proximal distal unknown interhepatic space long, slender Kuzirian 1979
absent distal short, conical interhepatic on stout, tapering MacFarland 1966
anterior lateral edge
of second group
proximal distal short, conical, tip lateral on anterior short, pointed O’Donoghue 1921
pointed andcurved margin of second MacFarland 1966
hepatic group
Flabellina ornata (Risbec, 1928)
Coryphella ornata Risbec, 1928
Flabellina ornata (Risbec, 1928), Baba, 1955
Flabellina parva (Hadfield, 1963)
Coryphella parva Hadfield, 1963
Flabellina parva (Hadfield, 1963)—comb. nov.
Flabellina pedata (Montagu, 1815)
Doris pedata Montagu, 1815
Eolis landsburgii Alder & Hancock, 1846, Alder & Hancock, 1855
Coryphella pedata (Montagu, 1815), Odhner, 1939
Flabellina pedata (Montagu, 1815)—comb. nov.
Flabellina pellucida (Alder & Hancock, 1843)
Eolis pellucida Alder & Hancock, 1843
Coryphella pellucida (Alder & Hancock, 1843), Gray, 1850
Flabellina pellucida (Alder & Hancock, 1843)—comb. nov.
Flabellina poenicia (Burn, 1957)
Hervia? poenicia Burn, 1957
Coryphella poenicia (Burn, 1957), Burn, 1962
Flabellina poenicia (Burn, 1957)—comb. nov.
Flabellina polaris (Volodchenko, 1946)
Coryphella polaris Volodchenko, 1946
Flabellina polaris (Volodchenko, 1946)—comb. nov.
114 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Flabellina pricei (MacFarland, 1966)
Coryphella pricet MacFarland, 1966
Flabellina pricei (MacFarland, 1966)—comb. nov.
Flabellina robusta (Trinchese, 1874)
Coryphella robusta Trinchese, 1874
Flabellina robusta (Trinchese, 1874)—comb. nov.
Flabellina rubrolineata (O’Donoghue, 1929)
Coryphellina rubrolineata O’Donoghue, 1929
Coryphella rubrolineata (O’Donoghue, 1929), Miller, 1971
Flabellina rubrolineata (O'Donoghue, 1929)—comb. nov.
Flabellina salmonacea (Couthouy, 1838)
Eolis salmonacea Couthouy, 1838
Coryphella salmonacea (Couthouy, 1838), Bergh, 1864
Flabellina salmonacea (Couthouy, 1838)—comb. nov.
Flabellina stohleri Bertsch & Ferreira, 1974
Flabellina telja Marcus & Marcus, 1967
Flabellina trilineata (O’Donoghue, 1921)
Coryphella trilineata O’Donoghue, 1921
Flabellina trilineata (O’Donoghue, 1921)—comb. nov.
Flabellina trophina (Bergh, 1894)
Himatella trophina Bergh, 1894
Himatina trophina (Bergh, 1894), Thiele, 1931
Coryphella trophina (Bergh, 1894), Marcus, 196la
Flabellina trophina (Bergh, 1894)—comb. nov.
Flabellina verrucosa (M. Sars, 1829)
Eolidia verrucosa M. Sars, 1829
Eolis rufibranchialis Johnston, 1832, Odhner, 1939
Coryphella verrucosa (M. Sars, 1829), Gray, 1850
Flabellina verrucosa (M. Sars, 1829)—comb. nov.
Flabellina verta (Marcus, 1970)
Coryphella verta Marcus, 1970
Flabellina verta (Marcus, 1970)—comb. nov.
Flabellina violacea (Risbec, 1928)
Coryphella ornata violacea Risbec, 1928
Coryphella violacea Risbec, 1928, Gosliner, 1980
Flabellina violacea (Risbec, 1928)—comb. nov.
Several species of Flabellina possess purple ground colour: Flabellina
affinis (Gmelin, 1791), F. pedata (Montagu, 1815), F. iodinea (Cooper, 1862),
F. annuligera (Bergh, 1900), F. violacea (Risbec, 1928), F. telja, Marcus &
Marcus, 1967, F. babai Schmekel, 1970, and F. alisonae, Gosliner, 1980.
Flabellina affinis, F. annuligera, F. telja, F. babat, and F. alisonae have
distinctly pedunculate cerata; however, the peduncles are simple except in F.
affinis. Of the described species of Flabellina, F. affinis is most similar to F.
funeka but differs in several significant features. The cerata of F. affinis are
purple, while in F. funeka they are red. There are 25 to 28 annulae on the
rhinophores of F. affinis, while there are 10 to 14 in F. funeka. F. affinis
possesses a single compound ceratal peduncle in the right anterior digestive
branch, while F. funeka has 2 or 3 compound branches. There are no signi-
ficant radular differences between the two species. The reproductive systems of
F. affinis and F. funeka differ in two important features. In F. affinis the
prostate is thin and highly convoluted (Schmekel 1970) while in F. funeka it is
SOME SOUTH AFRICAN AEOLIDACEAN NUDIBRANCHIA GS
thick and significantly shorter. In F. affinis the penial papilla is slender and
elongate, while it is short and conical in F. funeka. Schmekel (1970) described
a typical and an atypical form of the reproductive system of F. affinis. In the
typical form the receptaculum seminis and bursa copulatrix are both distal to
the female gland mass, while in the atypical form the receptaculum is proxi-
mally situated. The latter configuration is found in F. funeka. These differences
between F. funeka and F. affinis are consistent and warrant specific separation.
Flabellina capensis (Thiele, 1925)
Figs 1B, 5-6
Coryphella capensis Thiele, 1925: 287, pl. 34 (fig. 1).
Flabellina capensis (Thiele, 1925) comb. nov.
Material
University of Cape Town, Department of Zoology
CP 811, 10 m depth, Oatlands Point, False Bay (34°12'S 18°27’E), 10
December 1972, 2 specimens
CP 819, 10 m depth, Castle Rocks, False Bay (34°14’S 18°29’E), 13 May
1973, 1 specimen
CP 827, 10 m depth, Oudekraal, west coast Cape Peninsula (33°59'S
18°21'E), 20 February 1974, 1 specimen
CPR 86C, 17 m depth, New Harbour wall, Hermanus (34°27'S 19°15’E),
11 October 1974, 1 specimen
South African Museum, Cape Town
SAM-A34878, 18 m depth, Castle Rocks, False Bay (34°14’S 18°29’E), 17
January 1980, 1 specimen
SAM-A34879, 10 m depth, Castle Rocks, False Bay (34°14'S 18°29’E), 30
March 1980, 4 specimens
SAM-A34880, 10 m depth, Rooi Els, Cape Hangklip (34°18’S 18°49’E), 23
January 1980, 1 specimen
SAM-A34881, 10 m depth, Castle Rocks, False Bay (34°14’S 18°29’E), 11
February 1980, 1 specimen
Distribution
Cape Province, Cape Peninsula to Plettenberg Bay.
External morphology
Live animals (Fig. 1B) may reach 43 mm in length; they are extremely
active and bristle their cerata when disturbed. The body is long and slender.
The oral tentacles are long and tapered, attaining 12 mm in length in a 26 mm
animal. The shorter rhinophores are rugose and nodular (Fig. 5A). The foot 1s
transversely grooved anteriorly with acute tentacular foot corners. The cerata
116 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
10,0 mm
0,5 mm
2,0 mm
Fig. 5. Flabellina capensis (Thiele, 1925). A. Dorsal view of animal showing branching of the
digestive system and position of the gonopores, nephroproct and anus.
B. Jaw. C. Reproductive system.
SOME SOUTH AFRICAN AEOLIDACEAN NUDIBRANCHIA 1Ay
are arranged in linear rows that are not clearly separated into distinct clusters
(Fig. 5A). There are up to 8 ceratal rows in the right anterior digestive system,
followed by as many as 17 rows per side in the posterior digestive branches.
The pleuroproctic anus is ventral to the second or third ceratal row of the
posterior digestive system and the nephroproct is in the interhepatic space
anterior to the anus. The gonopore is ventral to the third and fourth ceratal
rows of the right anterior digestive branch.
The animals are translucent white with red or brown ceratal cores. Opaque
white markings are distributed as follows: two lines, one on the dorsal surface
of each cephalic tentacle, which converge and terminate on the head imme-
diately anterior to the rhinophores; an anterior and posterior vertical line and
varied spots on each ceras; and a line on the dorsal surface of the posterior 3 to
5 mm of the foot.
Internal morphology
The jaws (Fig. 5B) are delicate and elongate with 5 to 6 rows of irregularly
shaped denticles on the masticatory border. The triseriate radula (Fig. 6)
contains 13 to 15 rows of teeth. The rachidian teeth are sharply arched with 6 to
8 acute denticles on each side of the slightly more prominent central cusp. The
lateral teeth are triangular with a thickened basal portion. The inner margin of
Fig. 6. Flabellina capensis (Thiele, 1925). Scanning electron micro-
graph of the radula. Scale: 30 um between squares.
118 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
each lateral tooth bears 10 to 13 denticles. There are no obvious labial glands
around the buccal mass.
The reproductive system (Fig. 5C) consists of a large, slightly convoluted
ampulla that joins the elongate receptaculum seminis via a short duct. The vas
deferens is short, with a small prostatic portion that expands into a hollow
paddle-shaped penis. At the distal end of the female gland mass a bursa
copulatrix lies ventral to the receptaculum seminis and enters the female atrium.
The bursa may be elongate or spherical in shape.
Natural history
Flabellina capensis feeds on the gymnoblastic hydroid Eudendrium sp. in
shallow subtidal waters.
Discussion
Flabellina capensis was described by Thiele (1925) from a single specimen
collected off Plettenberg Bay, South Africa. He stated that the preserved animal
was 10 mm long with elongate oral tentacles and nodular rhinophores. The
triseriate radula consisted of 17 rows of teeth. The rachidian teeth were arched
with 8 to 9 denticles on each side of the slightly prominent central cusp. The
triangular laterals had 9 to 12 denticles on their inner face. Although the species
was poorly described, the external features bear a strong resemblance to the
present material. The radular teeth of our specimens and those described by
Thiele (1925, pl. 66 (fig. 1)) are very similar in shape and number of denticles on
the rachidian and lateral teeth. The material in this study 1s consistent with these
characteristics and is considered to be conspecific with Flabellina capensis.
Flabellina capensis resembles the European Flabellina lineata (Lovén, 1846)
in its external and internal morphology. Both species possess elongate oral
tentacles, reddish colour with numerous white lines (Thompson 1976; Thompson
& Brown 1976) and radular teeth which are similar in form (Odhner 1939). The
reproductive systems are virtually identical (Schmekel 1970). There are, how-
ever, consistent differences in the external morphology. The South African
material possesses Opaque white lines along the oral tentacles which converge
and terminate just anterior to the rhinophores, while in F. /ineata a white line
extends along the dorsomedial surface for the entire length of the animal. There
are also two lateral lines along the body in F. lineata. Odhner (1939) and
Thompson & Brown (1976) described the presence or absence of opaque white
lines on the notum in F. lineata. F. lineata also has white lines on the posterior
surface of the rhinophores, which are absent in specimens of F. capensis. While
both species have the opaque white line on the anterior face of each ceras, there
is an additional line on the posterior face of the cerata in F. capensis. The
rhinophores are largely smooth in F. lineata, while they are strongly wrinkled to
nodular in F. capensis. Despite their similarity, F. capensis and F. lineata appear
to have several consistent differences which are here considered sufficient to
warrant specific separation. Picton (1980) has similarly suggested separation of
F. lineata and F. browni which occur sympatrically in the British Isles.
SOME SOUTH AFRICAN AEOLIDACEAN NUDIBRANCHIA 119
Family Aeolidiidae
Aeolidiella indica Bergh, 1888
Figs 1C, 7-10
Aeolidiella indica Bergh, 1888a: 755, pl. 78 (figs 1-2).
Aeolidiella orientalis Bergh, 1888b: 673, pl. 16 (figs 8-13) syn. nov.
Aeolidiella saldanhensis Barnard, 1927: 201, figs 2-3 syn. nov.
Aeolidiella hulli Risbec, 1928: 262, fig. 88, pl. 10 (fig. 7), pl. 12 (fig. 4) syn. nov.
Aeolidiella takanosimensis Baba, 1930: 122, fig. 4a—b, pl. 4 (fig. 5a—c) syn. nov.
Aeolidiella multicolor Macnae, 1954: 36, figs 27-29, pl. 2 (fig. 4) syn. nov.
Aeolidiella lurana Marcus & Marcus, 1967: 115, figs 149-150 syn. nov.
Material
University of Cape Town, Department of Zoology
LB 572A, intertidal Schaapen Island, Saldanha Bay (33°06’S 18°02’E), 6
May 1973 |
CP 797, intertidal, Clovelly, False Bay (34°05’S 18°26'E), 16 April 1972
Other material
intertidal, Langebaan Lagoon (33°06'S 18°02'E), 5 December 1979
intertidal, Onrus (34°26’S 19°10'E), 5 February 1980
intertidal, Knysna Lagoon (34°05’S 23°04’E), 3 March 1980
intertidal, Langebaan Lagoon (33°06'S 18°02'E), 6 April 1980
intertidal, Coffee Bay, Transkei (31°59’S 29°09'E), 7 March 1981*
Distribution
Japan (Baba 1930, 1949, 1979); California (Sphon 1971); Mexico (Ferreira
& Bertsch 1975); Hawaii (Gosliner 1980); Mauritius (Bergh 1888a); Noord-
wachter Island (Bergh 18885); Red Sea (Eliot 1908); Tanzania (Edmunds
1969); New Caledonia (Risbec 1928); Naples (Schmekel 1970); Brazil (Marcus
& Marcus 1967).
External morphology
Live mature animals may attain a length of up to 35 mm (Fig. IC). The
conical oral tentacles are slightly longer than the smooth rhinophores. A pair of
black eyes are visible at the posterior base of the rhinophores. The foot is
transversely grooved anteriorly and rounded, with stout, slightly produced
corners. The anterior digestive group contains 7 obliquely set ceratal rows per
side, followed by up to 20 rows in the posterior branches (Fig. 7A). The
gonopore is situated on the ventral edge of the third to fifth rows of the right
anterior digestive group and the cleioproctic anus between the third and fourth
rows of the first ceratal group of the right posterior digestive branch.
* Additional data received while in press.
120 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
>
con
WU WOU ei
NANG |
TENN
(@)
=)
3] 9
3
ol
.
0.5mm
Fig. 7. Aeolidiella indica Bergh, 1888a. A. Branching of the digestive system.
B. Lateral view showing oral gland. C. Jaw.
The body is translucent white with or without opaque white on the tips of
the oral tentacles and rhinophores. The head bears a U-shaped pattern of
orange extending from the rhinophores to the base of the oral tentacles. In
some specimens, up to half of the base of the U may be filled with orange
pigment. Extending posteriorly from the base of the rhinophores are trans-
lucent or opaque white areas outlined with orange pigment in the shape of an
elongate diamond, followed by a large orange circle outlining the pericardial
region. Combination of these two areas of pigmentation has been characterized
as a ‘Greek vase’ by Eliot (1908) in describing Aeolidiella orientalis. Posterior
to this, a second but smaller circle of orange pigment may occur. Outside of
these designs on the dorsum, the back may be covered with orange pigment of
varying intensity. The ceratal epithelium is diffusely covered with orange
pigment which may be either interrupted by a subapical band of translucent
white or overlain with opaque white or pale blue flecks. The digestive gland in
the cerata is brown and terminates in a white cnidosac.
SOME SOUTH AFRICAN AEOLIDACEAN NUDIBRANCHIA IPA
Internal morphology
The jaws (Fig. 7C) are broad and ovoid with an elongate, smooth mastica-
tory border. The radula (Fig. 8) bears 15 to 22 teeth that have a widely
emarginate anterior margin with a prominent central cusp and 17 to 32 evenly
graded lateral denticles on each side. A large oral gland (Fig. 7B) extends on
either side of the buccal mass to the posterior end of the stomach. The
reproductive system is identical to that described by Macnae (1954, as Aeolidiella
multicolor).
Natural history
In this study Aeolidiella indica was found in the intertidal zone from
Langebaan Lagoon, Saldanha Bay to Coffee Bay, Transkei. In all cases it has
been found associated with the sea anemone Anthothoe stimpsonii (Verrill)
upon which it feeds voraciously. In the field, A. indica are frequently found
aggregated under stones and in the vicinity of their egg masses (Fig. 9).
Discussion
The generic distinctions between Aeolidiella Bergh, 1867, and Spurilla
Bergh, 1864, have been the subject of considerable controversy (Marcus 1961a;
Burn 1969; Edmunds 1969). Marcus (1961a) differentiated the taxa on the basis
of smooth rhinophores in Aeolidiella in contrast to perfoliate rhinophores in
Spurilla. Burn (1969) noted that several species have rhinophores with bulbous
swellings or oblique ribs and stated that the ornamentation of the rhinophores
and denticulation of the jaws were not important in the separation of the genera.
He suggested that the branching of the ‘liver’ (digestive gland) and the anal
position should serve as more significant criteria for generic separation. How-
ever, Burn (1969) included species with both an arch or several rows in the right
anterior digestive branch within the genus Spurilla (Table 2), and did not specify
the anal position for the majority of species he included in this genus. Burn noted
that the presence of an anterior accessory digestive branch within the head is
unique to Spurilla, although its presence has been noted in only three of the
seven species which he included in the genus. The final criterion that he used to
separate the genera was the presence of broadly emarginate, concave teeth in
Aeolidiella as opposed to evenly curved teeth in Spurilla. However, the radular
teeth of the type species, Aeolidiella soemmerringi (Leuckart, 1828) Bergh 1867,
non Leuckart = A. alderi (Cocks, 1852) (G. Brown, University of Bristol, 1980
pers. comm.), as well as A. glauca (Alder & Hancock, 1845) and A. sanguinea
(Norman, 1877) are of the same shape as those found in Spurilla macleayi (Burn
1969), S. japonica (Baba 1949), S. chromosoma (Marcus 1961a), S. olivae
(MacFarland 1966) and S. alba (Edmunds 1969). The radular teeth of Spurilla
neapolitana (Marcus 1955; Gosliner 1980) and S. orientalis (Bergh 1905) are
evenly curved without emargination of the anterior border. As greater variation
occurs among species of Spurilla than between Spurilla and Aeolidiella, the
shape of the teeth cannot be utilized for generic separation.
iA ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 8. Aeolidiella indica Bergh, 1888a. Scanning electron micro-
graph of the radula. Scale: 30 um between squares.
¢
Fig. 9. Aeolidiella indica Bergh, 1888a.
Egg mass at 10 X magnification.
123
SOME SOUTH AFRICAN AEOLIDACEAN NUDIBRANCHIA
S[V19}R]
Yyouvsgq SAI}SosIp JO 9ZIS 901M} 9[DIUOp
6r6l eqeq yuosoid IOLI91sod js1Y JO s[pprur [eU99 ‘oyeUIsIvUIa §=©poqqouy SMOL { SMOI p paiuodpl ‘5
youvsg 9AI}sosIp S[V10} 8]
6961 IOII9}SOd JO SMO JO OZIS 901M} 9[DIWUOp
uing {696[ Spunuipq juosoid PUOS9S PU SIU UI9M19q [eU99 ‘oVeUISIVUIO §=©poqqouy SMOL Q p JO ¢ pqv ‘Ss!
soporjuap
popeis Ajusojrun
S061 Usiog UMOUYyUN uMouyun *XOAUOD UISIVUL JOLIOVUe d}eT;OJIod ~ uUMOUyUN SMOI € S1]DJUALAO *S!
YOuvIg 9ATISOSIP IO1I9}sod Sg[dIJUSp popes
DIO6[ ShoIePY + UMOUYUN SIU JO YOIe UY ATUDAD ‘OJCUISIVUIO 9} eI[OJIOd yore | SMOI Q 0} § DUuosouoJsYyo“sS
popeis ATUDAO
996] puryiejoepy UMOUyUN 9g puke ¢ MOI UDdM}jOq ¢ SOPOIJUSP “OJVUISIVUIO 9}¥ITOJIOd SMO SMOI ¢ IO € ¢ avaljo ‘Ss!
so[oryUEp
[e191 8] Se OZIS 9UIeS
YOURIG SAI}SOSIP JOLINjSOd | VIJUD ‘so[DIJUOp [e.19}¥]
696] UINg UMOUyUN {SIU JO YOie UIYIM popeis ‘oyeuIsIeWS =8§©6peqqli yole | yore | 1ADa]9DUL *S;
OZIS UI poonposs
gpouep [e1UN9 “popes
6961 YOuRIg 9AI}SOSIP 10110}Ssod ATUIIOJIUN saporyuop
uINg '606] pueTeqoryPy juosoid JSIG JO YOIe UIYUM “UISIEUW JOIIOJUe X9AUOD 9}¥I[OJIOd yole | yore | punjyodvau *s
youriq youriq
yoursq IOII9}Ssod JOIIO}Ue
QOUDIOJOY OATSOSIP uorjisod jeuy qo L soroydouryy sorsedsg
AIOSSODD YW B1C19N JO UOTINIISIG
“sorsods nyj1inds Jo soinjeoj [eorsojyoydiow jo uostiedwog
Z FAV
124 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Edmunds (1969), referring to Burn’s (1969) discussion, stated that the anus
is situated more anteriorly in Spurilla. However, in Spurilla japonica the anus is
situated in the middle of the first ceratal group of the posterior digestive branch
(Baba 1949) as is the case in most species of Aeolidiella. There are thus inherent
problems in separating the genera. If all species of Spurilla do, indeed, possess a
branch of the anterior digestive system within the head as suggested by Burn
(1969), this will serve as an important generic distinction, particularly as it can be
found in species with ornamented rhinophores. This character, however, needs
to be verified in S. macleayi, S. chromosoma, S. olivae, and S. orientalis. If these
species do not possess cephalic extensions of the digestive gland, a further
possible generic distinction may exist in the structure of the digestive system. In
the type species of Spurilla, S. neapolitana, the right anterior digestive gland
consists of a single arch as in S. macleayi. However, the remaining species
considered as Spurilla by Burn (1969) have a series of ceratal rows in the anterior
digestive branch, as do all species considered to be members of Aeolidiella in this
study. This means of separating the genera was followed by Baba (1979).
Generic separation of the related aeolid genera Berghia and Baeolidia is also
based on the configuration of the right anterior digestive branch (Gosliner 1980)
as is the separation of the facelinid and favorinid aeolids (Miller 1974; Gosliner
1980). Pending additional morphological data with regard to accessory branching
of the anterior digestive branch into the head, we prefer to maintain the
separation of Aeolidiella and Spurilla, following Burn (1969).
Three species of Aeolidiella, A. glauca, A. alderi, and A. sanguinea, have
been reviewed by Tardy (1969). Tardy demonstrated consistent differences
between these taxa, which he considered significant enough to justify separa-
tion of these species previously placed in synonymy (Engel 1925). These three
species all possess only two ceratal rows in the anterior digestive branch, rather
than an elongate arch as suggested by Engel (1925) and Macnae (1954). All
other species of Aeolidiella, where described, possess five or more rows in the
anterior digestive system. Of the remaining species, A. indica, A. orientalis, A.
saldanhensis, A. hulli, A. takanosimensis, A. multicolor, and A. lurana are
strikingly similar in their morphology and a detailed comparison of these
species is presented in Table 3.
Variation in colour has been adequately described only in Aeolidiella
multicolor and A. takanosimensis. The latter appears to be more variable but is
commonly decorated with red or orange pigment surrounding distinctive shapes
of opaque white areas on the head and mid-dorsal region of the pericardium
(Sphon 1971; Baba 1979). Alternatively, A. takanosimensis may rarely lack
orange pigment or other dorsal markings (Gosliner 1980). Similar pattern
distribution is found in A. multicolor. The latter species is far more consistent
in its coloration and always bears a U-shaped area of orange pigment on the
head and opaque or translucent white patches in the region of the pericardium,
which resemble a ‘Greek vase’ (Eliot 1908). The above basic pattern of
coloration has also been recorded in A. orientalis (Bergh 1890, pl. 86 (fig. 1);
SOME SOUTH AFRICAN AEOLIDACEAN NUDIBRANCHIA WD
Eliot 1908; Edmunds 1969), A. hulli (Risbec 1928, pl. 12 (fig. 4)), and A.
lurana (Marcus & Marcus 1967, fig. 149). The coloration of A. indica was
superficially described (Bergh 1888a) and there is nothing contradictory to that
of the above species. A. saldanhensis (Barnard 1927) was described from
preserved specimens and coloration was not given.
In all citations of the above species the rhinophores and masticatory border
of the jaws are smooth and the foot corners are short. The two South African
species A. saldanhensis and A. multicolor were separated by Macnae (1954) on
the basis of the rounded foot corners reported in the former. However, in his
drawing Barnard (1927: 201, fig. 2) indicated the presence of angular foot
corners.
Where it has been described, the anterior digestive branch in all the above
species consists of 5 to 7 oblique ceratal rows. The arrangement of the posterior
digestive branches was used by Baba (1979) to distinguish A. takanosimensis
from A. multicolor based on Macnae’s (1954) account. However, the descrip-
tion by Macnae of the ceratal branching in A. multicolor is erroneous. Our
examination of South African material has shown the ceratal configuration to
be identical with that described for A. takanosimensis (Fig. 7A). The first three
ceratal groups of the posterior digestive system of A. /urana were described as
arches (Marcus & Marcus 1967) in an 8,5 mm specimen. The authors consider
that these may be groups of two rows which in larger specimens may proliferate
into additional rows. The branching of the posterior digestive system is incom-
pletely described in A. saldanhensis, A. indica, A. orientalis, and A. hulli.
Examination of specimens of varying size shows that the radula of A.
orientalis contains 9 to 25 teeth with 5 to 35 denticles on each side of the central
denticle (Bergh 18885; Eliot 1908; Edmunds 1969). The number of teeth and
denticles of A. indica, A. saldanhensis, A. hulli, A. takanosimensis, A. multico-
lor, and A. lurana fall within the limits of this variability. Figure 10 shows the
structure and variability of the radular tooth within and between species.
Marcus & Marcus (1967) suggested that A. multicolor is distinct from A. indica
on the basis of the radular tooth. However, at least the same degree of
variability is shown in the drawings of the teeth of A. takanosimensis (Baba
1949, 1979; Ferreira & Bertsch 1975; Gosliner 1980).
Large oral glands have been described in A. multicolor, A. takanosimensis,
and A. hulli, but have not been studied in A. saldanhensis, A. indica, A.
orientalis, and A. lurana. The reproductive system has been described only in
A. multicolor (Macnae 1954) and A. takanosimensis (Schmekel 1970) and they
are entirely consistent with each other. The penis has been described for A.
orientalis (Bergh 1888b) and is identical with that of the above two species.
The distribution of the above species under discussion (A. indica, A.
orientalis, A. saldanhensis, A. hulli, A. takanosimensis, A. multicolor, and A.
lurana) has been listed in Table 3. Aeolidiella takanosimensis has the widest
recorded distribution. This pattern of wide-ranging, dispersed taxa is difficult to
explain if they are considered as distinct species.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
126
086] JoulsoH
‘OL61 JOXewWYyIS = spurys
‘6LO6I PAPE ‘6h6l EQLE [e10 o31L|
SMOL
¢ Aq POMOTIOJ SMOL Z
L76{ Pleureg uUMoUyUN
Apnjs
quosold ‘po6] ovuoRJ] [B10 FIL]
spur|3
696] Apiey, UMouxuUN
696] Apiey UMouyun
9L6I
UMOIg 299 UOSdUIOY [,
6961 APIPL ‘Sys
yooouepx ® JOpyy UMouXyUN
spurls
QIUDIOJOY [e410
pueq 714M ;eordeqns
‘UMOIG O} Pol B}eII9
‘UINMsIOp UO U19}1ed
114M onbedo sulpuno.1
-Ins JUSWIsId osueIO
sojdeny
TTEMB FY “OSIX9PAI
qoys pue ¢‘p’pjosdnoisp sMOly O7-SI 07-ZI yJoous -pol Ajjensn folqeiieva ‘elulojIjed “ueder sisuawisounyn: py
y10ys uMoUyUN UMOUyUN 1 14 16 yoows uMouyun BOW YINOS * sisuayuDplos ‘py
enjq pue
SMOI Q esuvio v}eII0 ‘UINSIOp
AQ PIMO][OJ SMO E-Z uo U19}}ed OTM
y1oys “6-7 “p-Z Jo sdnois ¢ ZE-LI ZC-SI YJOOUIS PUL OSULIO YIIM 97IGM Boy YINOS * 40]091]]NU *
UOT][IWIISA
10 9SO1 “odUPIO-MOTIOA
peinojlos Apog sfo4M
pue oj1yM onbedo
Yu sorloydourys
qoys SMOL O[SUISG SMOIZ O£€-ST 07-81 yJOous pue sojoev}U9} [VIO UvOURLIONIpSy, * DAUINSUDS ‘py
UMOIQ
IO UOW]PS-9SO1 ¥1L199
‘asUBIO IO MOTIOA purlsuq
yioys SMOIO[BUIS 6G SMOIZ O£€-STZ 07-81 yJootus ‘oI M Soloydourys ‘UvoURIIONpI, * ‘ lapjp "py
UMOIQ YIP 0}
uid e7e.199 ‘sojdev1U9}
[e10 pue so1oydourys puvjsuq
yoys SMOL O[SUIS ‘OICWISQ[ SMOIZ O€-SZ 07-81 yJoous ‘Kpoq UO sjods 914M URSURTIOVIPSY, * * ponvojs
Joliojsod JOlojue
s19u109 ~———— sooyuop y1001 Jap10q
1004 W19}SAS 9AT}SOSIP [e197P] Iejnper A1o}eONseuL IMojog uolnqisiq so1seds
jo suryourig JO ‘ON JO ‘ON MEL
‘DIJaIpyoap JO Saiseds JUdIOYIP JO sorjsiiojowreyS [essojoydiow! jo uostsedwoD
€ aATaV],
1D
SOME SOUTH AFRICAN AEOLIDACEAN NUDIBRANCHIA
(sorpuy
PL8I Ysieg UMOoUyUN UMOUyUN uMOoUyUN UMOUyUN O€-8Z 6I-SI yoous uMouxuN 1SO9MA\) SPUIOU TL IS Sypjuap1290 “yv
pueq
[eoideqns 9714M YIIM
eBuvio &1e199 ‘UINSIOp
uO Ulo}}ed 3}
onbedo pue osuv10
L961 SNOTPIN 79 SNoIeW UMOUUN = AOYS_- Yow SMOIZ JOsSdno1s Eg sMOIG 17-81 91 Yioows ‘Mojjad Syurd yITM O71 [izeig * puvany "Vy
6961 UINg 7196] Spurs
SNIILIAT - 966] IqStYy [B40 V8 1e] Joys uMOUyUN UMOUYUN OP-SE SI yoows uMouyuUN UWIBUJOIA * 190qGS14 "V
UMO1Q-YsIppol
Spars B1B190 ‘J1B9Y IZAO
86 99GSIY [BIO o31R] JOYS uMOUyUN uUMOUyUN O€-bT SI yjOoouS BOI O}IYM YIM AoId EIUOPs|eD) MON : 1Jny *V
spueg o}IYM [eordeqns
WIM UMOIG-pol
#18199 ‘ pod sejov}usy
[elo pue so10oydourys
‘ jo yJed jeorde ‘sy1eu
6961 SPUNUPA - 8061 OvIYM YIM pol Winsiop eIUEZUR ], ‘ULIDO
ION +9888] Ysiog UMouyUN yoys SMOI Pp] SMOIL SE-S ST7-6 YIOOWS 714M JUSONTSULIy Apog U¥IPU] ‘VIS poy S1]0]UA140 “
SMOL MOOK 10 AOIS
8 Aq P9MO]JOJ SMOI SMO B1e199 ‘Apo MOTO
888] Ysiog UMoUXUN y10ys €-~ sey dnoisjsig =f 01¢ VOLT Z7-61 yJoows -Ud013 10 MO][OA-9714M sniqineyy poipul *y
a ee We eae oe REPRISES EE Tae ES ae icee mayen ta
povernis
0061 Y3ieg UMOUXUN UMOUyXUN UMOUyUN UMOUyUN SE SZ Ajouy uMouyuUNn purleoZ MON, DUuLIsnDf *V
spurs peers
0061 Usi9g [e10 O31] J10Ys uMouyUN UMOUXZUN SZ-€Z IZ Ajouy. uMouyuUn purleeZ Mon, * pyisnap “VW
128 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
indica takanosimensis takanosimensis
| { a fee
takanosimensis takanosimensis saldanhensis
“Usual ) Ar
jurana
multicolor hulli
L
J K
}
SS
orientalis orientalis occidentalis
Fig. 10. Radular teeth of some species of Aeolidiella. A. A. indica (after Bergh 1888a).
B. A. takanosimensis (after Baba 1949). CC. A. takanosimensis (after Ferreira & Bertsch 1975). D.
A. takanosimensis (after Baba 1979). E. A. takanosimensis (after Gosliner 1980). F. A. saldan-
hensis (after Barnard 1927). G. A. multicolor (after Macnae 1954). H. A. lurana (after Marcus &
Marcus 1967). I. A. hulli (after Risbec 1928). J. A. orientalis (after Bergh 18885). K. A.
orientalis (after Edmunds 1969). L.A. occidentalis (after Bergh 1874).
SOME SOUTH AFRICAN AEOLIDACEAN NUDIBRANCHIA 129
Based on the above morphological and distributional comparison, we find
as much variability for any single characteristic within a single species as
between species. The similarity in coloration pattern, radular teeth and branching
of the digestive system leads us to the conclusion that A. orientalis, A.
saldanhensis, A. hulli, A. takanosimensis, A. multicolor, and A. lurana should
be regarded as junior subjective synonyms of A. indica Bergh, 1888. The
description of A. indica was published earlier in 1888 than that of A. orientalis
and, therefore, has priority.
The descriptions of A. risbeci Marcus, 1961a, A. occidentalis Bergh, 1874,
A. faustina Bergh, 1900, and A. drusilla Bergh, 1900, are incomplete and
prevent meaningful comparison with A. indica.
Family Tergipedidae
Catriona columbiana (O’Donoghue, 1922)
Figs 1D, 11-12
Amphorina columbiana O’Donoghue, 1922: 160, pl. 6 (figs 23-24).
Cuthona alpha Baba & Hamatani, 1963a: 340, pl. 11. Williams & Gosliner, 1979: 214.
Cratena spadix MacFarland, 1966: 351, pl. 60 (fig. 4), pl. 68 (figs 12-17), pl. 69 (figs 6-7a).
Williams & Gosliner, 1979: 214.
Catriona columbiana (O’Donoghue, 1922), Marcus & Marcus, 1960: 179.
Catriona alpha (Baba & Hamatani, 1963a) Roller, 1969: 421.
Material
South African Museum, Cape Town
SAM-A34873, 1 m depth, Cape Town docks (33°54'S 18°26’E), 25 June
1972, 4 specimens.
Distribution
Japan (Baba & Hamatani 1963a), British Columbia (O’Donoghue 1922),
California (MacFarland 1966), South Africa (present study).
External morphology
Several specimens were examined, the largest measuring 11 mm in length
when alive (Fig. 1D). The foot is broad with anteriorly rounded corners. The oral
tentacles are shorter than the rhinophores. The rhinophores are smooth and
elongate and eye spots are visible at their posterior base. The distribution of cerata
and digestive branches is shown in Figure 11A. The left and right anterior digestive
groups each comprise 4 or 5 parallel rows of cerata. There are 6 posterior digestive
branches per side which, except for the last row, branch alternately from the
midline. During movement the cerata are characteristically carried flat over the
back of the animal and may hang down over the lateral edges of the foot. The
gonopores are ventral to the second and third ceratal rows of the right digestive
group. The acleioproctic anus is situated in front of the inner corner of the second
ceratal group and the nephroproct adjacent to the anus.
130 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The general body colour is translucent white as are the cephalic tentacles
and rhinophores (Fig. 1D). The cerata contain the light pink or yellow digestive
gland and all are covered with a layer of opaque white epidermal pigment. This
pigment also extends over the dorsum with a thick line between the rhino-
phores extending on to the front of the head, but not reaching the anterior
margin. The oral tentacles bear an inner dorsolateral opaque white line down
their length and the basal third of the rhinophores is speckled with white
pigment. The middle of the rhinophores contains a broad transverse orange
band, while the distal portion is densely opaque white.
Internal morphology
The jaws are fragile and elongate (Fig. 11C). The masticatory border (Fig.
11D) is thin and bears a row of strong bristles along the cutting edge. The
radula (Figs 11B, 12) is long and thin with 80 teeth that become progressively
larger and more developed towards the formative end. An elongate pre-radular
tooth is present. The mature teeth have a receded median cusp and may or may
not be flanked by 1 to 3 minute secondary denticles. There is usually a minute
secondary denticle between the first and second lateral denticles.
The reproductive system (Fig. 11E) has a large bulbous ampulla on top of
the genital mass. The albumen gland is small and closely associated with the
membrane gland. The mucous gland is the largest portion of the female gland
mass. The receptaculum seminis is attached by a short duct to the lateral side of
the vagina. The proximal portion of the vas deferens is thickened and glandu-
lar, forming the prostate, while the distal end narrows and 1s closely folded
against, and opens into, the penis. A large bulbous penial gland is present and
the penis is elongate, conical and armed with a short stylet (Fig. 11F—G).
Natural history
Catriona columbiana was found crawling upon the ascidian Ciona intestina-
lis (Linnaeus) growing on wooden pilings in Table Bay docks.
Discussion
This species 1s discussed together with Catriona casha below.
Catriona casha sp. nov.
Figs 1E, 13-14
Material
Holotype
South African Museum, Cape Town
SAM-A34871, 1 m depth, Cape Town docks (33°54'S 18°26'E), 26 June
LOZ
Paratypes
SAM-A34872, 1 m depth, Cape Town docks (33°54’S 18°26’E), 26 June
1972, 5 specimens.
SOME SOUTH AFRICAN AEOLIDACEAN NUDIBRANCHIA 131
A B C
aye
0,045 mm
~~ _ _lol
2,0 mm
0,5 mm
Fig. 11. Catriona columbiana (O’Donoghue, 1922). A. Dorsal view showing distribution of cerata and
position of gonopores, nephroproct and anus. B. Radular teeth. C. Jaw. OD. Detail of bristles
of jaw. E. Reproductive system. F. Penis with retracted stylet. G. Penis with everted stylet.
132 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 12. Catriona columbiana (O’Donoghue, 1922).
Scanning electron micrograph of the radula.
Scale: 10 um between squares.
Etymology
The word ‘casha’ is derived from Zulu, meaning to hide or conceal oneself
and refers to the manner in which the cerata are carried horizontally, conceal-
ing the body.
External morphology
The live animals varied from 2 to 11 mm in length (Fig. 1E). They are
small, somewhat stout with a broad anteriorly rounded foot. The rhinophores
are smooth, stout and longer than the oral tentacles. A pair of eye spots is
visible at the base of the rhinophores. The cerata are distributed in distinct
transverse rows, 4 on each side of the anterior digestive group and 7 pairs of
posterior rows (Fig. 13A). The cerata are fairly large and thick and droop on
the ground as the animal crawls. When disturbed, the cerata bristle. The
gonopores are below the second right ceratal row and the acleioproctic anus lies
in front of the fifth ceratal row (Fig. 13A).
The body is translucent white with white internal organs visible through
the body wall (Fig. 1E). The rhinophores and tentacles are also translucent
white. The cerata contain a branch of the orange to orange-brown digestive
gland and each bears a band of dense opaque white epidermal pigment at the
distal end. Juvenile specimens show the same coloration pattern as the adults.
SOME SOUTH AFRICAN AEOLIDACEAN NUDIBRANCHIA 133
7
7 ¢O7
or
4
A
eS
Vo\
”?,
/ Ye Me
ey hes
a)
/
Ue
oP I
memg
Z
ZO/-Fo,——
sor" 67
Came
2,0mm Ps
1mm
C
\
I
0,05mm 0,2mm
Fig. 13. Catriona casha sp. nov. A. Dorsal view of ceratal distribution and positions of gonopores
and anus. B. Radularteeth. C.Jaw. D. Reproductive system. E. Penis showing penial stylet.
134 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Internal morphology
The masticatory border of the jaw (Fig. 13C) bears a row of stiff bristles.
The long tapering radula (Figs 13B, 14) has 76 teeth with an elongate pre-
radular tooth. The teeth bear a receded central cusp and 2 large lateral
denticles on either side. No variation in the number of large lateral denticles
was observed, as seen in Catriona columbiana. There are 2 to 4 minute
secondary denticles beside the central cusp and 2 or 3 between the lateral
denticles. The tooth, therefore, bears more secondary denticles than that of C.
columbiana.
The reproductive system is typically tergipedid. A large bulbous ampulla lies
between the mucous and membrane glands (Fig. 13D). The post-ampullary duct
from the ampulla is very thin. A glandular prostate forms the proximal portion of
the vas deferens which narrows distally and becomes folded against the base of the
large penial gland. The penis is conical and stout and bears a minute straight stylet
(Fig. 13E). The receptaculum seminis is elongate and folded upon itself, with an
enlarged, apparently glandular duct joining the vagina.
Natural history
Catriona casha has been found in association with the gymnoblastic hydro-
zoan, Tubularia sp., on which it presumably feeds. *
Discussion
The generic status of Catriona and Cuthona has been the subject of
considerable controversy and has been reviewed by Burn (1973), Miller (1977),
and Williams & Gosliner (1979). Although Miller (1977) suggested that there was
no clear distinction between the two genera, Williams & Gosliner (1979)
distinguished Catriona by the presence of bristles on the masticatory border of the
jaw and the possession of more than 50 radular teeth which bear a quadrangular
rather than an angular cutting edge. They also noted that the radula always bears a
pre-radular tooth. These features are not common to members of the genus
Cuthona. Williams & Gosliner suggested that the specimen upon which much of
Miller’s argument for joining the two genera is based, is not conspecific with C.
columbiana (as C. alpha (Miller 1977)). This view is supported by examination of
material from South Africa and is discussed below. Furthermore, examination of
Catriona casha and C. columbiana from South Africa and comparison of these
species with others in the genus confirm that the above characters (Williams &
Gosliner 1979) remain distinctive to Catriona, with the possible exception of the
absence of bristle-like denticles on the masticatory border of the jaw in the type
material of Catriona oba (Marcus 1970; present study). The specimens described
by Williams & Gosliner (1979) are probably not conspecific with C. oba.
Table 4 compares the distribution, colour and morphology of the different
species assigned to the genus Catriona and Figures 15 and 16 illustrate the
structure of the radular teeth and penial stylet. The coloration and morphology
* Additional data received while in press.
SOME SOUTH AFRICAN AEOLIDACEAN NUDIBRANCHIA iS
Fig. 14. Catriona casha sp. nov. Scanning electron micrograph of
the radula. Scale: 10 um between squares.
of the South African specimens of C. columbiana agree closely with that of the
holotype of C. alpha described by Baba & Hamatani (1963a) and Roller (1969),
and there is little doubt that they are conspecific. Williams & Gosliner (1979)
considered C. alpha (Baba & Hamatani 1963a) and C. spadix (MacFarland 1966)
as junior synonyms of C. columbiana (O’Donoghue, 1922). Within the geogra-
phical range of C. columbiana, the cerata vary from pale yellowish-brown to light
pink, orange, brown or vermilion with external opaque white over the whole
surface or restricted to a white longitudinal line or subapical band on the cerata.
The brighter coloured specimens (North America) have orange rhinophores and
oral tentacles, while in the paler specimens (Japan, South Africa) the orange
pigment is restricted to a band on the rhinophores. Although Williams &
Gosliner (1979) stated that C. columbiana characteristically has only 2 large
lateral denticles on the radular tooth, it should be noted that Baba & Hamatani
(1963a) showed the possession of 2 or 3 denticles. South African specimens also
possess 2 or more commonly 3 lateral denticles interspersed with 0, 1, or 2
minute denticles. The penial stylet in C. columbiana from South Africa is small
and is visible only under high magnification. It is embedded in the tip of the
elongate penis (Fig. 11F—G) and resembles that described for C. columbiana
(MacFarland 1966, as C. spadix). The presence of a penial stylet in C.
columbiana as C. alpha) was not described by Baba & Hamatani (1963a), but
was confirmed by Roller (1969). The shape of the penis (Baba & Hamatani
1963a, pl. 11 (fig. 6)) resembles that of the South African specimens. Regrettably
the penis and stylet described by O’Donoghue (1922) were not illustrated.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
136
DS
SSUIY ICU
Joy}O OU {puerq 91M ssUSp
(Sd) p yuosoid jesruos ‘4104s SO] 1SIIQ OL [edideqns YM B3ULIO b}eII Bolyy yINoS DYSDI “dD
nnn nn OS
yurd Io Moy[aA
JUSIT Vye199 [e1eV199 UO 9}IYM
gsuap ‘so[de}US} [VIO UO SUIT
oy ‘yOeq pue peoy UO 9}IyM
(Sd) S-r yuosoid jeoruos ‘eyesu0[a sop}sliq 08 ‘pueg osurio YIM soloydoulys BOILIFW YINOG (Sq) VUDIGuinjod °*D
I a A ——————————
$9[9e}U9} [VIO UO SUIT
OVIYM SOUT] OJIYM [VUIPNIISUOT
6L6[ IOUT[SOD 29 SUIPTTTIAA Ieoq ABW pue UMOIG IO MOTI9A
£6961 J910U ‘UOT[IUIIOA JUSSI] C}V1IVN 5S vyeI1N0
$9961 puelie toe pue winsiop ‘pray ‘so1oydourys
‘DEG Wue}eUleHY 7 eqea ‘s9[0B}U9} [PIO UO 9}IGM ‘pueqg uvder ‘ermiojyeD
S76] onysou0d.O ¢ yuosoid [eoruos ‘a};e3u0l[a So[}StIq SOI-S9 esuvio IO oduvIO soIOyYdoUTYyI ‘eIquIN[OD Yslig puviquinjod *D
[ap ee ES SS Ln, = ee a ne. ae.
SZUI[}JOU! U90I3 YIM UMPJ JO 93ur}
ystyuid ‘uMoig SI] e7ye199
{so1oydouryi uo pueqg s3ueri0
£e}e199 UO pueq [edIdeqns
97enuUIS Syoeq pue so[devjUs} [10
LL6I JIT $-€ jyuosqe 9}e3UO[S AISA Ajie[Nso1I1 +9 ‘so1oydoulys uo JUOWISId 9}IYM pur[esZ MONT = IOJ[IA, JO vydjo "5D
pe a a a a ae UT ese
218199 UO
sjods pue pueq [evoideqns 9}1qM
‘yorq pue peroy uo JuoWwsId
396] Spunuipgd € yuosoid yeoruos “4104s so[}StIq LEI ‘soloydouryi uo pueq s3ueIO eueyy Dua} “dD
ene a a an ae ee a ao nn i Le a a Ce
OU] SYA [VUIPNIsUO] YIM yuid
(Sd) #1199 {YO"q UO SOUT] OYM 7
OL6] snore €-Z jyuosold [esruos ‘9}e3U0[9 (Sd) qioouls €S *yeO1JS pol YIM soloydourys eplioyy ‘Ize1g pqo°y
! I
JOATT UMOIQ
ged 0} pol ‘sedis [eurpnyzisuoy
OuUM 7 UJI eID [OUI]
8961 pol 10110}sod YM so1oydourys
PoxowyIS * p96 Spunupy $yoeq pure peoy ‘sejdej}Ue}
$096] SHOVE 2 snore p-€ yuosoid [eoruo0d ‘o}esduU0l[e So]}STIQ OZI-O8 [e1o pue soloydourys uo 9}IyM sojdeny Seprolz pnou *y)
ne ike Se Se Se Se ee a enn aa
(Sd) ‘6L61
JOUI[SOD) FY SUIPITITAA
£6€61 JOUUPO: OL8I Aouulg sd1} oduvio pue
® pinoy ‘scsi yoourH (Sd) pug o}IYM [PISIP UJIM vIVIIO Por ysvod OULITV “V'S'N
9 IOPIV SEST AnoyNoD (Sd) ¥-€ qyuesoid (Sq) [edTu0d ‘a}esu0]e (Sd) Se]3S11q 18-89 0} o3URIO ‘soIOydoUTYI sduUeIO ‘adoing UISyIION pjouwuds °9D
A fede AN Cal renee nso ee ee ee ee
wio}sAs
QoUdIOJOY 9AI}SOZIP a]AIs stuog Jop10oq 109} uonelojogd uOrNgIIysIq so1seds
JOII9}Ue UT [euog WN jo ‘ON
SMOI JO ‘ONT
ee ea ee a a
“Apnys yUasoId WOT} UONVUIOJUI SoyedoIPUI (Gq) “VUO14JDD Jo so1oads yUdIayIp oy} Jo uostredu0+D
p ATaV
SOME SOUTH AFRICAN AEOLIDACEAN NUDIBRANCHIA 137
sia
columbiana tema
B
F
: : .
aay | , | | maua
columbiana oba
C G K
L
at
maua
gymnota
Columbiana L
|
casha
Columbiana
gymnota
Fig. 15. Comparison of the radular teeth of Catriona species. A. C. columbiana (after
O’Donoghue 1922). B.C. columbiana (after Baba & Hamatani 1963a as Cuthona alpha). C.
C. columbiana (after MacFarland 1966 as C. spadix). D.C. columbiana (present study). E.
?C. alpha (after Miller 1977). FF. C. oba (after Marcus 1970). GG. C. gymnota (after Alder
& Hancock 1855). H.C. gymnota (present study). I. C. tema (after Edmunds 1968). J.
C. maua (after Marcus & Marcus 1960). K. C. maua (after Edmunds 1964). L. C. casha
(present study).
138 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
A D | G
ae a —s
columbiana columbiana tema
H
E
columbiana ?alpha maua
pete
oba gymnota casha
Fig. 16. Comparison of the penial papillae of Catriona species. A. C. columbiana
(after MacFarland 1966 as C. spadix). B. C. columbiana (present study). C. C. oba
(after Marcus 1970). D.C. columbiana (after Baba & Hamatani 1963a as Cuthona
alpha). EE. ?C. alpha (after Miller 1977). F. C. gymnota (present study). G. C.
tema (after Edmunds 1968). H.C. maua (after Marcus & Marcus 1960). I. C. casha
(present study).
The masticatory bristles on the jaws of South African specimens are large
and clearly defined (Fig. 11D). The denticulation of the jaw of C. columbiana
(O’Donoghue 1922, pl. 6 (fig. 23)) resembles that of the present material,
although O’Donoghue did not distinguish their bristle-like structure. Roller
(1969) confirmed the presence of bristles in Japanese and Californian material.
Based upon the similarities in coloration, radular teeth, jaws, penis and
penial stylet, the present material is also considered to be synonymous with C.
columbiana and closely resembles the Japanese material (Baba & Hamatani
1963a).
The status of New Zealand specimens identified as C. alpha by Miller
(1977) remains uncertain. Although they may superficially resemble the
description of C. alpha (Baba & Hamatani 1963a) as stated by Miller (1977),
there are significant differences that require confirmation, particularly as the
description of this species is now further amplified by the present study.
Specimens described by Miller (1977) differ in that they have fewer ceratal rows
in the anterior digestive branch, up to 4 lateral denticles in the radular tooth
SOME SOUTH AFRICAN AEOLIDACEAN NUDIBRANCHIA 139
instead of 2 to 3, a very elongate penis without a penial stylet and the absence of
bristles on the masticatory border of the jaw.
Catriona casha agrees with other members of the genus in the possession of
a long tapering radula bearing more than 50 teeth, a pre-radular tooth, a
quadrangular cutting edge to the teeth and bristles on the masticatory border of
the jaw. It differs from the other species of Catriona in the structure of the
radular tooth and the shape of the penis and penial stylet. The tooth bears 2
major lateral denticles only, with 2 to 4 secondary denticles between the central
and lateral denticles. South African C. columbiana have 2 to 3 large lateral
denticles and have not been observed to possess more than 2 secondary denticles
between the major ones. Most significantly, the penis of C. casha is stout and not
elongate and tapering as in all other species of Catriona (Fig. 16). The penial
stylet forms a small tube projecting from the rounded tip of the penis. The above
differences are considered to be sufficient to warrant separate specific status.
Cuthona speciosa (Macnae, 1954)
Figs 1F, 17-19
Catriona speciosa Macnae, 1954: 4, figs 1-3, pl. 1 (figs 1-3).
Cuthona speciosa (Macnae, 1954) comb. nov.
Material
University of Cape Town, Department of Zoology
CP 818, 10 m depth, Castle Rocks, False Bay (34°14'S 18°29’E), 27 April
1973, 2 specimens
CP 791, intertidal, St James, False Bay (34°06’S 18°27’'E), 30 March 1972,
1 specimen
CP 792, 2 m depth, Clovelly, False Bay (34°08’S 18°26’E), 10 September
1972 lespecimen
CPR 94A, intertidal, Wilderness (34°00’S 22°33'E), 3 February 1973, 2
specimens
Other material
20 m depth, Llandudno (34°01’'S 18°20’E), 15 December 1979, 2 spe-
cimens.
30 m depth, Vulcan Rock, Hout Bay (34°04’S 18°19’E), 20 January 1980, 1
specimen
Distribution
South Africa (Macnae 1954; present study).
External morphology
Live specimens (Fig. 1F) are up to 18 mm in length. The anterior margin
of the foot is very slightly produced into tentacular processes. The stout oral
tentacles are slightly shorter than the smooth, slender rhinophores. The cerata
140 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are smooth and cylindrical and arranged in clearly recognizable rows with 2 to 4
rows per side in the anterior digestive branch. The posterior digestive branch
has up to 7 rows per side. The gonopores are situated ventral to the second and
third ceratal rows of the right side. The acleioproctic anus is situated on the
anterodorsal margin of the right posterior digestive branch. The nephroproct
opens anterior to the anus.
The general body colour is yellow-orange, as are the cephalic tentacles and
rhinophores, which may be decorated with pale pink pigment. The digestive
gland within the cerata is dark brownish-green while the ceratal epithelium 1s
yellow-orange and is covered either with bright luminescent blue or lumine-
scent lilac pigment. In lilac-coloured specimens, the yellow cnidosac, visible in
blue specimens, is obscured by opaque white pigment.
Internal morphology
The jaws (Fig. 17A) are thin and fragile. The masticatory border is
smooth, without denticles. The uniseriate radula (Figs 18-19) has up to 64 teeth
with 4+ to 6 major denticles on each side of the central cusp. 1 or 2 secondary
0.5mm
0,5 mm
Fig. 17. Cuthona speciosa (Macnae, 1954). A. Jaw. B. Reproductive system.
C. Penis showing penial stylet.
SOME SOUTH AFRICAN AEOLIDACEAN NUDIBRANCHIA 14]
denticles may or may not be present between the central and first lateral
denticle and between the first and second lateral denticles. The distribution of
secondary denticles is highly variable within and between radulae.
The reproductive system (Fig. 17B) is similar to that described by Macnae
(1954) but differs in three respects. There is no thin duct separating the penis
from the penial gland; the penial stylet is slightly curved (Fig. 17C) and shorter
than the penis; the prostatic vas deferens does not taper markedly into a
non-prostatic portion.
Natural history
Cuthona speciosa is found on and feeds upon calyptoblastic hydrozoans of
the genus Sertularella.*
Fig. 18. Cuthona speciosa (Macnae, 1954). Scanning electron micro-
graph of radula. Scale: 30 um between squares.
Discussion
Macnae (1954) described Catriona speciosa from two specimens from False
Bay, South Africa. The presence of a non-tapering radula and the absence of a
pre-radular tooth indicate that this species is more properly placed in Cuthona,
comb. nov. The present material agrees closely with that described by Macnae,
but differs in several respects and encompasses a wider range of variation. The
number of ceratal rows in the anterior digestive branch ranges from 2 to 4 and
an increasing number of rows is not correlated with body size. Macnae
described only 3 rows. The specimens described in this study were larger and
* Additional data received while in press.
142 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
more variable in their coloration and also had more radular teeth than pre-
viously described. They also differ from Macnae’s specimens in that the jaws
lacked denticles on the masticatory border. Variability in the general shape and
structure of the radular teeth between specimens collected from different
localities was a notable feature of the present material. Figure 19 illustrates the
variability of this characteristic, which has not been adequately studied in other
nudibranchs. Differences may be noted in the degree of arching of the base of
the tooth, the size of the articulating surfaces, the relative sizes of the lateral
denticles, the number of lateral denticles and the presence and position of the
secondary denticles. In comparison with other specimens, the tooth of the
animal shown in Figure 19D, as well as all other mature teeth in this radula,
were considerably worn with blunt denticles. The two radular teeth which were
still in the process of being formed bore typical elongate, sharp denticles.
Cuthona speciosa is thus more variable than previously described. The
present material is, however, consistent with that described by Macnae (1954).
The consistency of reproductive morphology in material from the present study
suggests that discrepancies between this and Macnae’s material (1954, fig. 3)
are due to observational rather than morphological differences.
Family Embletoniidae
Embletonia gracilis Risbec, 1928
Figs 20-22
Material
South African Museum, Cape Town
SAM-A34874, intertidal, St James, False Bay (34°06’S 18°21’E) 1 January
1980, 1 specimen
SAM-A34875, intertidal, Clovelly, False Bay (34°08’S 18°26'E), 18 Janu-
ary 1980, 1 specimen
SAM-A34876, intertidal, St James, False Bay (34°06’S 18°21’E), 16 Febru-
ary 1980, 2 specimens
SAM-A 34877, intertidal, Clovelly, False Bay (34°08'S 18°26'E), 31 May
1980, 6 specimens
Distribution
New Caledonia (Risbec 1928), Japan (Baba 1959), Hawaii (Gosliner,
1980), Australia (Burn 1966), South Africa (present study).
External morphology
The elongate, slender animals reach a maximum length of 7 mm at
maturity (Fig. 20). The animal is dorsoventrally compressed with the cerata
held close to the body when actively crawling. The oral tentacles have been
modified into a wide bilobed velum. The rhinophores are short and cylindrical.
SOME SOUTH AFRICAN AEOLIDACEAN NUDIBRANCHIA 143
Fig. 19. Radular teeth of Cuthona speciosa (Macnae, 1954). A. False Bay (after Macnae
1954). B. Wilderness. C. Llandudno. D. St James, False Bay. E. Oudekraal.
All specimens except C had blue cerata.
144 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 20. Embletonia gracilis Risbec, 1928. Dorsal view of living animal at
20 X magnification.
The anterior foot corners are simply rounded. The cerata are short and
club-shaped, with four short and rounded cnidosacs on each ceras. When the
animals are disturbed, the cerata elongate and four blunt apices are clearly
visible. The cerata are arranged in 5 to 6 rows with a single ceras per row.
There are 2 ceratal rows per side forming the anterior digestive branches. The
pleuroproctic anus is situated immediately ventral to the notal brim in the
interhepatic space, adjacent to the first ceras of the right posterior digestive
branch. The separate male and female gonopores are located ventrally,
between the first two cerata of the right side.
The living specimens are translucent white with salmon-pink digestive
gland visible in the cerata and within the notum. In some specimens opaque
white spots are present on the notum.
Internal morphology
The jaws (Fig. 21A) are elongate and delicate with a single row of 17
denticles along the slightly projecting masticatory border. The uniseriate radula
contains 70 to 86 teeth. The teeth (Fig. 22) possess 2 to 4 denticles on each side
of the equally prominent central cusp. The oral glands are well developed, as
indicated by Baba and Hamatani (19636) for Embletonia gracilis paucipapillata.
The reproductive system (Fig. 21B) consists of 6 to 8 hermaphroditic
follicles that empty into the saccate ampulla. Distally, the ampulla narrows
considerably and diverges into a short oviduct and a short non-prostatic vas
SOME SOUTH AFRICAN AEOLIDACEAN NUDIBRANCHIA 145
0,25 mm 0.5mm
Fig. 21. Embletonia gracilis Risbec, 1928. A. Jaw. B. Reproductive system.
Fig. 22. Embletonia gracilis Risbec, 1928. Scanning electron
micrograph of ventral view of radula.
Scale: 3 um between squares.
146 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
deferens, which expands into a prostatic portion. There is no distinct penial
papilla or apical stylet. A receptaculum seminis is situated distally and joins the
female gland mass at the female gonopore.
Natural history
Embletonia gracilis is associated with small colonies of intertidal campanu-
larid hydroids, but has not been observed to feed upon them. FE. gracilis lays a
semicircular egg mass consisting of 4 to 19 eggs, with a single egg per capsule.
This species undergoes direct development into a juvenile possessing four
ceratal buds. From deposition of egg mass to hatching took 20 days at 20 °C.
Discussion
The genus Embletonia contains three or possibly four species. Its
placement is questionable; some authorities placing it within the Dendrono-
tacea (Miller 1977) while others (Marcus 1961b; Schmekel 1970) include it
within the Aeolidacea. Marcus (19615) stated that Embletonia is an aeolidacean
genus, as the gonads are situated ventral to the digestive gland ducts. Miller
(1977) stated that the Embletoniidae are more closely related to the Dendrono-
tacea, although he provided no specific reasons. As the present material
possesses ventral gonads, we consider the Embletontidae as aeolids, closely
allied to the Tergipedidae.
The type species of Embletonia, E. pulchra (Alder & Hancock, 1844), is
known only from European waters. This species is characterized by a penis with
a penial stylet, and a well-developed prostate (Marcus. & Marcus 1958).
Embletonia faurei Labbé, 1923, was described solely on the basis of external
morphology, from two specimens collected from Brittany, France. Thompson
& Brown (1976) considered EF. faurei a junior synonym of E. pulchra. E. faurei
has 9 cerata on each side of the animal (Labbé 1923) whereas there are 5 or 6
cerata per side in E. pulchra. The reproductive system of E. faurei was
described by Schmekel (1970) and differs from that of E. pulchra (Marcus &
Marcus 1958) in that a distinct prostatic portion is absent from the vas deferens.
This appears to be a significant difference worthy of specific separation.
There remains some question as to whether the two species with an unarmed
penis, which lacks a penial papilla, E. gracilis Risbec, 1928, and EF. paucipapillata
Baba & Hamatani, 19635, should be regarded as distinct species. Both occur in
Japan (Baba & Hamatani 19635) and differ in their body shape, coloration,
number of ceratal rows and degree of elaboration of the apical ends of their
cerata. The specimens described from New Caledonia (Risbec 1928), Australia
(Burn 1966), and South Africa (present study) are compared with the Japanese
material in Table 5. The above specimens possess features that are intermediate
between the Japanese forms, with the exception that deeply bifid ceratal apices
are unique to specimens of E. paucipapillata from Osaka Bay. Additional
material from other localities is required before a more definitive statement can
be made with regard to the status of E. gracilis and E. paucipapillata.
147
AN NUDIBRANCHIA
SOME SOUTH AFRICAN AEOLIDACE
796] fURIeUIeHT zw equa
dsno je1ju39
JO opis yove UO sajdUap ¢
eye199 pue proy
UO o}14M onbedo ‘purys sAtsesIp
-6S6] eqeg Ulu p—¢ SMOI QQ ULIOJISNY 1IOYS pyiq A[deep S-P OSULIO PIAIA ‘OTM YSIMOTIOA piopjidvdionpd “7
dsno [e1uU99 Jo SUOTISU9}X9
OPIs YOV9 UO S9[dIJUSp p-Z quNyq INO} WIM Duryis BOLIpY YINoS
Apmis Jusseid wut /—-p SMOI98-OL WiOjIsnj ‘eleSsuo]a A][[eUOISsedd0 ‘popuno1 9-S SAT}SOSIP YUId [[Np ‘oyYM JUSONTsueIy SI]1IDAS “FT
SUOISUO}x9 puvys sANsosip yuId [np ‘soyoied eIensny
996; UNG Wu c‘p uMouyun WOJISNy “IOUS yuny]q InoF YIM 9-7 ou14yM onbedo YIIM ouIYM JUSON]SueIy SI1IDAS “TT
dsno ][e1}U99
q£96] lueleUIeEY w eqeg JO Opis YOR UO sofsTJUEp ¢ SUOISUS}X9 ueder
6S6l eqeq wimg SMOI TL JIevouly ‘oJeSuo[o quny[q IMOJ YIM 8-L PUL]S SANSOSIP MOTIOA ‘O}TYM YSIMOTTOA SIIIDAS “FT
dsnod [e13uU99 Jo
Opis YO UO So[dIJUEp p—¢ SUOISUO} XO BIUOpsTeD MONT
876] S9GSIY wus SMOIQ¢ °2 WUIOjIsny ‘oyeSuOlO quNnyY INO; YM L PUL[s SATISOSIP AdIS YIM OPT SIIIDAS “oy
QOUSIOJOY, 9ZI¢ epnpery edeys Apog xode [v1 ¥10_ SMO [bIVIOD UOTVIO[OD suowIseds
‘DIUOJaquig JO so1oeds autos Jo ASojoydiow sAne1edwo0)
¢ FIEv,,
148 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Of the specimens of EF. gracilis previously described, the South African
material most closely agrees with that described from Australia by Burn (1966).
Our material differs from all described specimens of EF. gracilis in that the
apices of the cerata are normally rounded and exhibit the characteristic ‘apical
twigs’ (Baba 1959) only when the animals are disturbed. It should be noted
that, while the anal position of E. gracilis was described as acleioproctic (Baba
& Hamatani, 1963b; Burn 1966), Baba & Hamatani's figure (pl. 17 (fig. 10))
clearly indicates that the anus is situated well below the notum (pleuroproctic)
as in the present material.
Baba (1967) described the genus Embletoniella to include the two species
of Embletoniidae with apical twigs in the cerata and an unarmed penis. Burn
(1973) suggested that Embletoniella be regarded as a subgenus of Embletonia,
at most. In material from this study the short apical twigs can be seen only
when the cerata are fully extended. Embletoniella can be separated from
Embletonia only by its absence of penial armature. This separation seems
unnecessary as the closely allied genus Cuthona contains species with an armed
and unarmed penis (Burn 1973). Therefore, we prefer to regard Embletoniella
Baba, 1967, as a junior subjective synonym of Embletonia Alder & Hancock,
1851, syn. nov.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
We thank Dr Eveline Marcus of the Department of Zoology, University of
Sao Paulo, Brazil, for her helpful suggestions and critical review of the
manuscript and for providing a specimen of Catriona oba. Several staff mem-
bers at the South African Museum greatly aided our efforts in this study: Mr
Billy Liltved and Mrs Bonnie Gosliner provided assistance in the collection of
specimens and preparation of initial drawings and drafts of the manuscript. Mr
Sidney Kannemeyer prepared the final photographic prints, while Mrs Patricia
Eedes typed the final draft of the manuscript. Dr Charles Griffiths of the
University of Cape Town also aided in the collection of specimens and provided
the photographs of Catriona species.
This work was partially funded by a University of Cape Town Staff
Research Grant, awarded in 1973 to R. J. Imrie (now Griffiths).
ABBREVIATIONS
a anus og oral gland
albg albumen gland p penis
amp ampulla pg penial gland
be bursa copulatrix pr prostate
cg cerebral ganglion ps penial stylet
fgm female gland mass rh rhinophore
g gonopore rs receptaculum seminis
memg membrane gland S stomach
mucg mucous gland Vv vagina
n nephroproct vd vas deferens
SOME SOUTH AFRICAN AEOLIDACEAN NUDIBRANCHIA 149
REFERENCES
ALDER, J. & Hancock, A. 1845-1855. Monograph of the British Nudibranch Mollusca.
London: Ray Society.
BaBA, K. 1930. Studies on Japanese nudibranches 3. Venus 2: 117-125.
Basa, K. 1949. Opisthobranchia of Sagami Bay collected by his Majesty the Emperor of Japan.
Tokyo: Iwanami shoten.
Basa, K. 1959. A record of an interesting species, Embletonia gracile Risbec, from Japan
(Nudibranchia-Eolidacea). Publs. Seto mar. biol. Lab. 7: 335-336.
BaBA, K. 1967. Supplementary note on the anatomy of Metaruncina setoensis (Baba, 1954),
(N.G.) (Opisthobranchia-Cephalaspidea). Publs Seto mar.biol.Lab. 15: 185-198.
Basa, K. 1979. Short account of the anatomy of a nudibranchiate mollusk, Aeolidiella
takanosimensis Baba, 1930 from Japan. Veliger 22: 12-18.
Basa, K. & Hamatanl, I. 1963a. A cuthonid, Cuthona alpha n. sp., with a radula of Catriona
type (Nudibranchia-Eolidoidea). Publs. Seto mar. biol. Lab. 11: 339-344.
Basa, K. & Hamatanl, I. 1963b. Anatomy of Embletonia gracilis paucipapillata n. ssp. from
Osaka Bay, Japan. Publs. Seto mar. biol. Lab. 11: 399-402.
BARNARD, K. H. 1927. South African nudibranch Mollusca, with descriptions of new species,
and a note on some specimens from Tristan d’Acunha. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 25: 171-215.
BerGcH, R. 1874. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Aeolidiaden. 2. Verh. zool.-bot. Ges. Wien 24:
395-416.
BeErGH, R. 1875. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Aeolidiaden. 3. Verh. zool.-bot. Ges. Wien. 25:
633-698:
BerGuH, R. 1888a. In: Malacol. Unters. Sect. 2, 3: 755-814.
BERGH, R. 18885. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Aeolidiaden. 9. Verh. zool.-bot. Ges. Wien 38:
673-709.
BerGu, R. 1890. In: Malacol. Unters. Sect. 2, 3: 893-991.
BeErGH, R. 1900. Ergebnisse einer Reise nach dem Pacific (Schaunisland 1896-1897). Die
Opisthobranchier. Zool. Jb. 13: 207-246.
BeErRGH, R. 1905. Die Opisthobranchiata der Siboga Expedition. Siboga Exped. 50: 1-248.
BerGH, R. 1907. The Opisthobranchiata of South Africa. Trans. S. Afr. phil. Soc. 17: 1-144.
Burn, R. 1966. Descriptions of Australian Eolidacea (Mollusca: Opisthobranchia). 3. The
genera Tularia, Embletonia and Austraeolis, with a note on Tergipes pauculas Burn, 1962.
J. malac. Soc. Aust. 9: 25-35.
Burn, R. 1969. A memorial report on the Tom Crawford collection of Victorian Opisthobran-
chia. J. malac. Soc. Aust. 12: 64-106.
Burn, R. 1973. Opisthobranch molluscs from the Australian Sub-Antarctic territories of
Macquarie and Heard Islands. Proc. R. Soc. Vict. 86: 39-46.
CouTuHovy, J. 1838. Descriptions of new species of Mollusca and shells, and remarks on several
Polypi found in Massachusetts Bay. Boston J. nat. Hist. 2: 53-111.
Epmunps, M. 1964. Eolid Mollusca from Jamaica, with descriptions of two new genera and
three new species. Bull. mar. Sci. Gulf Caribbean 14: 1-32.
Epmunps, M. 1968. Eolid Mollusca from Ghana, with further details of west Atlantic species.
Bull. mar. Sci. Gulf Caribbean 18: 203-219.
Epmunps, M. 1969. Opisthobranchiate Mollusca from Tanzania. I. Eolidacea (Eubranchidae
and Aeolidiidae). Proc. malac. Soc. Lond. 38: 451-469.
Exior, C. 1908. Reports on the marine biology of the Sudanese Red Sea. HI. Notes on a
collection of nudibranchs from the Red Sea. J. Linn. Soc. 31: 86-122.
ENGEL, H. 1925. Westindische opisthobranchiate Mollusken. I. Bijdr. Dierk. 24: 33-80.
FERREIRA, A. & BertscH, H. 1975. Anatomical and distributional observations of some
opisthobranchs from the Panamic faunal province. Veliger 17: 323-330.
GOoSLINER, T. 1980. The systematics of the Aeolidacea (Nudibranchia: Mollusca) of the
Hawaiian Islands with the descriptions of two new species. Pacif. Sci. 31: 37-77.
GouLp, A. & BINNEY, W. 1870. Report on the Invertebrata of Massachusetts. Boston: Wright &
Potter.
Kuzirian, A. 1979. Taxonomy and biology of four New England coryphellid nudibranchs
(Gastropoda: Opisthobranchia). J. mollusc. Stud. 45: 239-261.
Lappé, A. 1923. Note préliminaire sur cinq espéces nouvelles d’ Eolidiens de la Station de
Croisic. Bull. Soc. zool. Fr. 48: 265-268.
150 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
MacFarLanb, F. 1909. The opisthobranchiate Mollusca of the Branner—Agassiz expedition to
Brazil. Leland Stanford jr Univ. Publs Univ. Ser. 2: 1-104.
MacFARLAND, F. 1966. Studies of opisthobranchiate mollusks of the Pacific coast of North
America. Mem. Calif. Acad. Sct. 6: 1-546.
Macnae, W. 1954. On some eolidacean nudibranchiate molluscs from South Africa. Ann. Natal
Mus. 13: 1-50.
Marcus. E. 1955.-Opisthobranchia from Brazil. Bol. Fac. Fil., Cien. Let. Univ. S. Paulo,
Brazil (Zool.) 20: 89-261.
Marcus, E. 196la. Opisthobranch mollusks from California. Veliger 3 (suppl.): 1-85.
Marcus. E. 1961b. Opisthobranchia from North Carolina. J. Elisha Mitchell scient. Soc. 77:
141-151.
Marcus. E. & Marcus, E. 1958. Opisthobranchia aus dem Schill von Helgoland. Kieler
Meeresforsch. 14: 91-96.
Marcus. E. & Marcus, E. 1960. Opisthobranchs from American Atlantic warm waters. Bull.
mar. Sci. Gulf, Caribbean 10: 129-203.
Marcus, E. & Marcus, E. 1967. American opisthobranch Mollusks. Stud. trop. Oceanogr.
Miami 6: 1-256.
Marcus. Ev. 1970. On some opisthobranchs from Cananeta. Bolm. Zool. Biol. mar. (no. 1
MS.) 472 20I=228.
Mayr, E. 1969. Principles of systematic zoology. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Mitier. M. 1974. Aeolid nudibranchs (Gastropoda—Opisthobranchia) of the family Glaucidae
from New Zealand waters. Zool. J. Linn. Soc. 53: 31-61.
Mitrer, M. 1977. Aeolid nudibranchs (Gastropoda: Opisthobranchia) of the family Tergipedi-
dae from New Zealand waters. Zool. J. Linn. Soc. 60: 197-222.
OpuHNER, N. 1939. Opisthobranchiate Mollusca from the western and northern coasts of
Norway. Det Kgl. Norske Vidensk. Selsk. Skrift. 1: 1-93.
O°’DonoGHuE, C. 1921. Nudibranchiate Mollusca from the Vancouver Island region. Trans. R.
Can. Inst. 13: 147-209.
O*DonoGHuE, C. 1922. Notes on the nudibranchiate Mollusca from the Vancouver Island
region. 3. Records of species and distribution. Trans. R. Can. Inst. 14: 145-107.
Picton, B. 1980. A new species of Coryphella (Gastropoda: Opisthobranchia) from the British
ISIES. Mr INGti, do AVE NSS).
RisBec, J. 1928. Contribution a Petude de nudibranches Néo-Caledoniens. Faune Colon. fr. 2:
[=328)
RisBec, J. 1956. Nudibranches du Viet-Nam. Mem. Inst. Océanogr. Nhatrang 9: \—34.
ROLLER, R. 1969. Nomenclatural changes for the new species assigned to Cratena by MacFar-
land, 1966. Veliger 11: 921-923.
SCHMEKEL, L. 1968. Vier neue Cuthonidae aus der Mittelmeer (Gastr. Nudibranchia): 7rinche-
sia albopunctata n. sp., Trinchesia mintostriata n. sp.. Trinchesta tlonae n. sp. und Catriona
maua Marcus & Marcus, 1960. Publ. Staz. zool. Napoli 36: 437-457.
SCHMEKEL, L. 1970. Anatomie der genital Organe von Nudibranchiern (Gastropoda
Euthyneura). Publ. Staz. zool. Napoli 38: 120-217.
SPHON, G. 1971. New opisthobranch records for the eastern Pacific. Veliger 13: 368-369.
Tarpy, J. 1969. Etude systematique et biologique sur trois espéces d’Acolidielles de cotes
européenes (Gastropodes Nudibranches). Bull. Inst. océanogr. Monaco 68 (1389): I-40.
THIELE, J. 1925. Gastropoda der Deutschen Tiefsee-Expedition. Pt. 2. Wiss. Ergebn. dt.
Tiefsee-Exped. ‘Valdivia’ 17: 38-382.
Tuompson, T. 1976. Nudibranchs. Neptune, N. J.: T.F.H. Publications.
THomeson, T. & Brown, G. 1976. British opisthobranch molluscs. Synopses of the British
fauna. (New Series). No. 8. London: Academic Press.
VAYSSIERE, A. 1913. Mollusques de la France et des régions voisines. /n: Toulouse ed.
Encylopédie Scientifique 1. Paris: Bibliotheque de Zoologie, Octave Doin et fils.
WILLIAMS, G. & GosLinerR, T. 1979. Two new species of nudibranchiate mollusks from the west
coast of North America, with a revision of the family Cuthonidae. Zool. J. Linn. Soc. 67:
203-223.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc. .
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
- comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
‘not acceptable.
In describing new Species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text _ ,
e.g. *... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; ‘. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’ a
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
T. M. GOSLINER
&
R. J. GRIFFITHS
DESCRIPTION AND REVISION OF SOME
SOUTH AFRICAN AEOLIDACEAN
NUDIBRANCHIA (MOLLUSCA, GASTROPODA)
OF THE SOUTH AFRIC
~~" MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are. not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes .. .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19695; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
- et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BuULLOuUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P. —H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHer, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gen. 74: 627-634.
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, eget masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4):
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacephors Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 84 Band
July 1981 Julie
Part 3 Deel
CRAGIEVARUS KITCHINGI BRINK, 1965:
A SUBJECTIVE JUNIOR SYNONYM OF
DIBOEVODON TETRAGONUS SEELEY, 1894
(REPTILIA, THERAPSIDA)
By
FE GRINE
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
il, AES, S98), HUD, 2S, 8, tos), SUES, 5, 7-9),
6A, t.'.), TAD), & GOD, 7, 1003),
INGA 5, 7, Ct), ISES), WO), Vis BGS), 2DO), 33, 25)
EDITOR/REDAKTRISE
Ione Rudner
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 O11 7
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press; Ptyew etd | Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
CRAGIEVARUS KITCHINGI BRINK, 1965: A SUBJECTIVE JUNIOR
SYNONYM OF DIADEMODON TETRAGONUS SEELEY, 1894
(REPTILIA, THERAPSIDA)
By
F. E. GRINE
South African Museum, Cape Town
(With 11 figures and 2 tables)
[MS. accepted 4 December 1980]
ABSTRACT
The holotype of Cragievarus kitchingi has been re-examined. No other specimen has been
referred to this taxon. The supposed diagnostic features of Cragievarus kitchingi are shown to
be invalid; the type does not display morphology that serves to distinguish it from Diademodon
tetragonus. Therefore, the name Cragievarus kitchingi Brink, 1965, is considered to be a
subjective junior synonym of Diademodon tetragonus Seeley, 1894. The type specimen of
Cragievarus is regarded as a subadult individual of Diademodon tetragonus.
CONTENTS
PAGE
MMtKOGUCHONGW 644. ase oa eee ee 151
Matenalrand methods). s448 40 0n 15)3)
ID CSCHIPHON er Bae. or een 153
IDISENSSIONM Suxshetee fake Se oe ee es 167
GOnClUSTOMS OA eA, VAR Sel ye 168
cknowledgementS= 62004-0545. 168
INGTEHEMCES ee te ee ke 168
INTRODUCTION
The late Early to early Middle Triassic sediments of South Africa have
yielded a large assemblage of moderately advanced, gomphodont cynodonts
(Kitching 1977). The most commonly occurring forms in these deposits are a
relatively homogeneous group of animals that has been placed in the subfamily
Diademodontinae by Hopson & Kitching (1972).
Various diademodontine genera and species have been erected on often
fragmentary remains from the late Early to early Middle Triassic sediments of
South Africa and Zambia. Studies of cranial and dental morphology and
analyses of the geographic and stratigraphic distributions of the diademodontine
fossils have suggested that many, if not all, of the names that have been
established (Table 1) are junior synonyms of Diademodon tetragonus Seeley,
1894 (Hopson 1971; Hopson & Kitching 1972; Kitching 1977; Grine 1977,
1978b). The results of allometric and multivariate statistical analyses of diade-
modontine crania have indicated that the specimens conform to a morphometri-
Sl
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 84(3), 1981: 151-168, 11 figs, 2 tables.
ISyZ
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE |
Cynochampsa laniaria*
Diademodon brachytiara
Diademodon mastacus .
Diademodon browni
Gomphognathus kannemeyeri
Gomphognathus polyphagus .
Gomphognathus dimorphodon
Diademodon entomophonus .
Gomphognathus minor .
Diademodon platyrhinus
Trirachodon browni
Cyclogomphodon platyrhinus
Octagomphus woodi
Proposed synonyms of Diademodon tetragonus Seeley, 1894.
Owen, 1859
Seeley, 1894
Seeley, 1894
Seeley, 1894
Seeley, 1895
Seeley, 1895
Seeley, 1908
Seeley, 1908
Broom, 1911
Broom, 1913
Broom, 1915
Broom, 1919
Broom, 1919
Watson, 1920
Broili & Schroder, 1935
Broili & Schroder, 1935
Broili & Schréder, 1935
Broili & Schroder, 1936
Protacmon brachyrhinus
Gomphognathus grossarthi
Gomphognathus broomi
Gomphognathus haughtoni
Sysphinctostoma smithi
Protacmon reubsameni Broom, 1950
Diademodon parringtoni Brink, 1955
Diademodon laticeps Brink, 1955
Diademodon rhodesiensis Brink, 1963
Cragievarus kitchingi . Brink, 1965
*Application has been made to the International Commission on Zoological Nomenclature
to conserve the name Diademodon tetragonus Seeley, 1894, with application of Articles 32a—b
and 79 of the International Code of Zoological Nomenclature (Grine 1978a).
cally homogeneous group and that these crania represent an ontogenetic growth
series of a single species (Grine & Hahn 1978; Grine, Hahn & Gow 1978; Bradu
& Grine 1979).
Recently, however, Brink (1979) has proposed that the Diademodontinae
comprises four species of Diademodon, viz. D. tetragonus, D. mastacus, D.
grossarthi, and D. rhodesiensis, and an additional two generically separable taxa,
Sysphinctostoma smithi and Cragievarus kitchingi.
The purpose of this paper is to evaluate the supposed diagnostic features and
thus the taxonomic distinctiveness of Cragievarus kitchingi Brink, 1965. Whereas
the species of Diademodon recognized by Brink (1979) are differentiated on
cranial shape and proportions, and whilst Sysphinctostoma smithi is rediagnosed
on supposed dental differences from Diademodon (Brink 1979), the diagnostic
features of Cragievarus kitchingi, as will be shown below, are based on doubtful
information and erroneous interpretations. Because of the peculiar problems
presented by Cragievarus kitchingi, the type and only specimen of that taxon
warrants detailed re-examination. Thus, Cragievarus kitchingi is dealt with here
separately from the other supposed diademodontine taxa. The distinctiveness of
the four Diademodon species recognized by Brink and the taxonomic validity of
Sysphinctostoma smithi will be discussed in a future publication (Grine, in
preps):
CRAGIEVARUS, A SYNONYM OF DIADEMODON 53
MATERIAL AND METHODS
The holotype of Cragievarus kitchingi is in the collection of the Bernard
Price Institute for Palaeontological Research, University of the Witwatersrand,
Johannesburg, and is catalogued under Field Number 3776 and Museum Num-
ber 368. It was described by Brink (1965) and is the only specimen referable to
that taxon (Brink 1979). It consists of an incomplete and rather poorly preserved
skull found by J. W. Kitching in a ‘fossil pocket’ on the farm Cragievar, near
Burgersdorp, Cape Province (Brink 1965; Kitching 1977). This small pocket also
yielded a number of other diademodontine crania (Kitching 1963, 1977) that
were referred originally to Diademodon browni (Brink 1963) and more recently
to D. grossarthi (Brink 1979).
Recent examination of the type of Cragievarus kitchingi revealed a con-
siderable amount of plaster of Paris reconstruction (Figs 3-5). The extent of this
reconstruction was not readily apparent because the plaster had been painted to
match the colour of the actual bone. The author has removed the plaster from
the specimen and has performed some additional preparation, most notably in
the removal of matrix from between the dentary and maxilla. Before any of this
work was initiated, photographs, colour slides, and a silicone rubber mould of
the specimen were taken; in addition, a plastic cast of the fossil, painted to
resemble the specimen prior to cleaning, was made.
The original diagnosis, description and illustrations of the specimen were
based upon the plaster reconstruction of the fossil (Brink 1965). In a later paper
(Brink 1979), additions to the diagnosis of Cragievarus kitchingi and several
quite significant modifications of the illustrative reconstruction of the specimen
were made.
DESCRIPTION
As noted above, the purpose of this paper is to evaluate the supposed
diagnostic features of the type of Cragievarus kitchingi, and as such a complete
description of the specimen is not warranted. Rather, attention will be paid only
to the features that have been stated (Brink 1965, 1979) as being peculiar to this
specimen and as differentiating it from Diademodon. These characters are:
(i) the delicate nature and shape of the temporal arch, (ii) the expansion of
the ascending ramus of the dentary, (iii) the nature of the post-temporal fossa,
(iv) the relative breadth of the braincase, (v) the height of the mid-sagittal
parietal crest, (vi) tooth number, (vii) the length of the maxillary diastema,
(viii) the replacement of the alisphenoid by the quadrate ramus of the pterygoid,
and (ix) the divergence of the quadrate rami of the pterygoid.
Temporal arch
It has been stated that ‘the peculiarity of the skull lies in the fact that it has
the powerful extremely advanced lower jaw structure of a diademodontid. . . .
154 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
In sharp contrast, however, the zygomatic arch is delicate’ (Brink 1965: 97).
Furthermore, the arch of this specimen was considered to be a ‘delicate,
miniature Diademodon-like or Trirachodon-like arch, but it lacks evidence of a
jugal process’ (Brink 1965: 98). More recently, it was concluded that
‘Cragievarus kitchingi comes close to Diademodon, but it is best regarded as not
a synonym because its zygomatic arches are conspicuously different (more
slender, high, and less curved)’ (Brink 1979: 7).
In both the 1965 and 1979 diagnoses of Cragievarus kitchingi, it was stated
that the ‘zygomatic arches [are] conspicuously reduced’ (Brink 1965: 98, 1979:
43). To the later diagnosis was added that there is a ‘weak jugal process (if any)’.
In an illustration of the right lateral side of the skull (Brink 1965) (Fig. 1
herein), a jugal flange is not present and the ventral border of the anterior
portion of the jugal arch is drawn with a solid line, implying that this region is
complete; posteriorly, the jugal-squamosal suture is represented intact with a
suggestion that the posteroventral border of the squamosal is damaged; the
Squamosal crest is reconstructed as possessing a low, foreshortened profile. A
later illustration, however, indicates that there might have been a slight jugal
flange, and the squamosal crest is shown as having had a higher, posteriorly
expanded profile (Brink 1979) (Fig. 2 herein). Here, too, the posteroventral
border of the arch is represented as being relatively shallow but complete.
Comparison of Figures 3 and 4 (herein) indicates that the entire anterior
portion of the temporal arch and the posterior parts of both the superior and
inferior orbital borders are missing; thus, it is impossible to determine the size of
the jugal flange because it is not preserved. In addition, the entire ventral border
of the back of the arch (both the jugal and squamosal contributions) is damaged,
and it is possible that this region extended further downwards for several
millimetres.
The posterior crest of the squamosal is missing and has been illustrated as
such (Brink 1965, 1979). The later reconstruction of this region (Fig. 2 herein) is
considerably different from the earlier interpretation (Fig. 1 herein). Inasmuch
as this part of the squamosal is not present in the original specimen, either (or
neither) of the reconstructions could be correct. With a lack of concrete
evidence indicating the configuration of a specific morphological feature, any
reconstruction of it is hypothetical. It is particularly dangerous to incorporate
such a reconstruction (e.g. the lack of, or the weak development of the jugal
flange) into a taxonomic diagnosis.
The supposedly low degree of curvature, and the supposed slenderness and
relatively delicate nature of the temporal arch of this specimen were considered
to differentiate it from Diademodon (Brink 1965, 1979). The present author
believes that these apparent features are artefacts of the damage that the arch
has suffered. If the arch is extended ventrally in the front with the addition of a
jugal flange and at the back with several millimetres of missing bone, then the
supposedly straight contour and the delicate, slender appearance of the arch
disappear.
CRAGIEVARUS, A SYNONYM OF DIADEMODON (55
Fig. 1. Side view of the holotype of Cragievarus kitchingi as drawn by Brink
(1965: 101, fig. 42).
Fig. 2. Side view of the holotype of Cragievarus kitchingi, adapted from Brink (1979: 44).
Posterior expansion of the dentary
Brink (1965, 1979) stated that this specimen is ‘diademodontid in general
shape and structure, but with dentaries even more powerfully expanded pos-
teriorly. He noted the ‘elaborate development’ of the three portions of the
ascending ramus of the dentary—the coronoid, articular and angular
processes—and observed that ‘the articular process reaches farther into the
articular region and would appear to have had nearly direct contact with the
squamosal’ (Brink 1965: 105).
156 ANNALS OF FHE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The earlier illustration of the dentary (Brink 1965, fig. 42) (Fig. 1 herein)
shows the articular process of the dentary extending posterosuperiorly towards
the squamosal, but in the later drawing (Brink 1979: 44) (Fig. 2 herein) this
process is considerably foreshortened and does not reach even to the level of the
inferior border of the temporal arch.
Examination of the specimen shows that the entire angular region of the
dentary is missing from the right side (Fig. 4), but part of this region is preserved
on the left side and it appears that the reconstruction of this region on the right
is anatomically reasonable (Fig. 3). However, it is on the left side where the
set
Se Mig
age “toy
je. ia Ee : ‘
: ye Sich Le ee gd AP ays je
tt, Sis teats Ll tt ape thi hn. eae
Fig. 3. Right lateral view of the holotype of Cragievarus kitchingi prior to the removal of the
plaster (reconstructed) areas (cf. Figs 1-2, 4). Scale in cm.
Fig. 4. Right lateral view of the holotype of Cragievarus kitchingi after the removal of the
plaster (reconstructed) areas and some of the matrix (cf. Figs 1-3). Scale in cm.
CRAGIEVARUS, A SYNONYM OF DIADEMODON licobih
Fig. 5. Left lateral view of the holotype of Cragievarus kitchingi prior to the removal of the
plaster (reconstructed) areas (cf. Fig. 6). Scale in cm.
Fig. 6. Left lateral view of the holotype of Cragievarus kitchingi after the removal of the
plaster (reconstructed) areas and some of the matrix (cf. Fig. 5). Scale in cm.
158 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
‘powerful expansion’ of the ascending ramus referred to and figured (Brink
1965, 1979) is best illustrated (Fig. 5). But here, too, much of the ascending
ramus of the dentary has been reconstructed in plaster (cf. Figs 5-6). In fact,
most of the left side of the cranium has been reconstructed, there being very
little bone actually preserved.
Close examination of the left side of the specimen revealed an impression in
the matrix of much of the inner surface of the ascending ramus of the dentary.
Most notably, there exists the impression of part of the anterior margin of the
ramus. The course of the anterior margin, as preserved as an impression, is at
considerable variance with the course of this border in the plaster reconstruction
(Fig. 7). The anterior margin of the dentary impression courses superoposterior-
ly, whilst in the reconstruction this border is considerably more vertically
orientated. Over the lower third of the rameal height the plaster anterior margin
is located about 6,0 mm in front of the actual (impression) border, and at a
higher level the plaster margin is nearly 10 mm anterior to the margin of the
impression. The mandibular reconstruction was modelled so that the anterior
rameal margin met this margin as preserved on a piece of the tip of the coronoid
process. However, this superior portion of the ramus is attached to a block of
matrix that has been separated from the rest of the specimen (Fig. 6). There is
no good contact between this block and the rest of the specimen, and it is
evident that the tip of the ramus, as preserved on this piece, is positioned well
out of normal anatomical alignment.
Thus, the ‘powerful’ expansion of the dentary ramus which was utilized in
the diagnosis of Cragievarus kitchingi (Brink 1965, 1979), is based upon a
reconstruction that departs from the original bony contours impressed in the
matrix. Examination of the left and right mandibular rami of this specimen, in so
far as they are preserved, indicates that they are expanded no more than in any
Diademodon dentary of similar size.
Post-temporal foramen
It was originally claimed that ‘a very peculiar aspect of this skull is to be
found in the nature of the post-temporal fossa. On the right side the fossa is to
be seen, on the side of the temporal vacuity, as a small shallow excavation
extending directly inward in the direction of the brain case. On the posterior
face there is only a depression with no sign of an opening. The region is not
distorted to any degree so that an explanation cannot be sought in the fact that
the opening has become closed through compression. The depression is situated
below a distinct ridge extending from the dorsal border of the foramen magnum
laterally and slightly upward, and it would appear as if a very small aperture was
located here though no trace of it can be found’ (Brink 1965: 102).
The next paragraph stated: “To add to this very strange condition the
post-temporal fossa, judging from the indication of it on the right forward side
must have extended sharply laterally as it passed through from the posterior face
CRAGIEVARUS, A SYNONYM OF DIADEMODON 159
eo ;
- ow
PF ss ~
ot tes
Fig. 7. Left side of the holotype of Cragievarus kitchingi showing the difference between the
impression of the anterior border of the ascending ramus and the plaster reconstruction of the
anterior border (white line) (cf. Figs 5-6). Scale in cm.
to the side of the temporal vacuity, but in both Diademodon and Cynognathus it
extends inwards’ (Brink 1965: 102).
The author finds it confusing that in the first of the two paragraphs quoted
above the peculiar lack of a post-temporal foramen in this specimen was
discussed at length, whilst in the second paragraph the peculiar course of the
passage of this foramen was noted. It would appear that, although the openings
of the post-temporal foramen could not be located, it was postulated that it
opened anteriorly at the medial end of the ‘small, shallow excavation’ and
posteriorly in the floor of the fossa bordering the foramen magnum. If this were
the case, then the course of the canal’s passage would be different from the
direction it assumes in Diademodon.
Close examination of the back of this cranium revealed the presence of a
matrix-plugged post-temporal foramen on the right side. The matrix that filled
the foramen was carefully removed, and the foramen opens anteriorly where
Brink (1965) suspected that it might. However, the posterior opening is con-
siderably lateral to and above the level of the floor of the fossa where he
postulated its exit to be (Fig. 8). This is the position normally occupied by this
foramen in Diademodon, and it follows a nearly straight sagittal course as in
Diademodon.
In a recent illustration of the occipital view of this specimen, Brink (1979:
44) indicated post-temporal foramina, and these are located in correct anatom-
ical position, but an explanation of this new interpretation was not offered.
160 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 8. Occipital view of the holotype of Cragievarus kitchingi showing the position of
the right post-temporal foramen. Scale in cm.
Relative width of the braincase
In the original description of Cragievarus kitchingi (Brink 1965: 102), it was
stated that ‘proportionally the breadth across the braincase is greater than that
of Diademodon’. At page 99 of the same paper, the maximum anterior and
posterior breadths across the parietals were recorded as 17 mm and 10 mm
respectively. However, comparable data for Diademodon upon which this
assertion was based were not provided.
In the course of measuring Diademodon specimens for biometrical analysis,
the present author has recorded the breadth of the parietals at the level of the
pineal foramen (in an attempt to standardize this measurement) on a number of
crania (Table 2). This measurement ranges between 6 and 25 mm in
Diademodon; it 1s 14 mm in the type, and only specimen of Cragievarus
kitchingi. The length of the cranium, from the level of a line tangential to the
anterior border of the orbits anteriorly to the level of a line through the occipital
condyles posteriorly, was measured also. This measurement, referred to as
‘pre-orbital basal length’ in previous studies (Grine & Hahn 1978; Grine, Hahn
& Gow 1978; Bradu & Grine 1979), ranges between 21 and 158 mm in the
present Diademodon sample; it is 61 mm in the type of Cragievarus kitchingt.
Comparison of ‘pre-orbital’ cranial length and parietal breadth in the
present Diademodon sample (Fig. 9) indicates that, whilst the skull undergoes
considerable ontogenetic elongation, there is little increase in the breadth of the
brain-case with age. One Diademodon cranium in this sample (BPI.FN. 3773,
one of the four Diademodon crania described by Brink (1963) from the
Cragievar fossil pocket) has a ‘pre-orbital basal length’ which is the same as the
type of Cragievarus kitchingi. The parietal breadth of the latter specimen is only
2 mm greater than that of the former.
CRAGIEVARUS, A SYNONYM OF DIADEMODON 161
TABLE 2
Measurements of cranial length, parietal breadth and indices of relative parietal breadth in
diademodontine specimens of various sizes.
Catalogue no. Length Parietal Index Previous taxonomic designation
breadth
BPI.FN. 3511 . : 5 DN 6 28,57 Diademodon browni
Munich 1936118 . z 32 8 25,00 Sysphinctostoma smithi (T)
BPI,FN.3756 . : ; 36 2 33,33 Diademodon mastacus
BPI.FN. 3771 c , 44 10 22,73 Diademodon sp.
BPI.FN. 3769 ‘ : 52 8 15,39 Diademodon browni
BPIL.FN. 3776 . : : 61 14 22,95 Cragievarus kitchingi (T)
BPI.EN. 3773 5 : 61 12 19,67 Diademodon browni
Camb. T. 435. : 69 10 14,49 ? Protacmon sp.
Munich 1934 VIII 14 72 12 16,67 Gomphognathus ?browni
Camb. T. 462. : : 76 13) 17,11 Protacmon brachyrhinus (T)
SAM — 1332 . : 84 14 16,67 Diademodon mastacus
BMNH R. 3587/3588 ; 84 14 16,67 Gomphognathus minor (T)
BMNH R. 3765/4092 : 86 13 15,12 Diademodon entomophonus (T)
BPLEN. 3758 . : 86 13 15.12 Diademodon browni
Munich 1934 VIII 15 ; O2 13 14,13. Gomphognathus cf. mastacus
WEEK It ~. c . 100 14 14,00 Diademodon sp.
BMNH R.2578 : kos 14 13,59 Diademodon polyphagus
SAM —- 5716 . : . 104 15 14,42 Diademodon sp.
BPI.FN. 4669 . , hos 18 16,67 Diademodon sp.
Munich 1934 VIII 16 - Oy 7 15,60 Gomphognathus cf. mastacus
Munich 1934 VIII 30 > JULI 13 11,71 Gomphognathus cf. mastacus
USNM 23352 . : : tS 18 15,65 Diademodon mastacus
BPI.FEN. 3639 . é 5 118 21 17,80 Diademodon rhodesiensis (T)
Camb. T. 434. : mn 22 14 11,48 | Diademodon ?mastacus
SAM — K. 5222 : : 128 20 15,63 Gomphognathus polyphagus
Munich 1934 VIII 18 » 133 15 11,28 Gomphognathus broomi (T)
Munich 1934 VIII 17 = aw 7 11,97 Gomphognathus grossarthi (T)
Munich 1934 VIII 19 = elias DS) 17,48 Gomphognathus haughtoni (1)
Camb. T. 436. , . 149 7) 11,41 Diademodon laticeps (T)
BPI. FN. 3754 F ~ ISS 23 14,56 Diademodon grossarthi
BPI.FN. = Bernard Price Institute for Palaeontological Research, Johannesburg
Munich = Bayerische Staatssammlung fiir Palaontologie, Miinchen
Camb. = University Museum of Zoology, Cambridge
SAM = South African Museum, Cape Town
BMNH = British Museum (Natural History), London
UCLZ = University College of London, Zoology Dept.
USNM = United States National Museum, Washington
(T) = holotype
An index of relative parietal breadth was calculated for each specimen
according to the simple formula,
_B
= = (100)
where B is the breadth across the parietals and L is the ‘pre-orbital basal’ cranial
length. The indices (Table 2) range between approximately 11,3 and 33,3 per
cent of cranial length. When the index values are plotted as a function of
‘pre-orbital’ cranial length (Fig. 10), it becomes readily apparent that the
162 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Parietal breadth
20 40 60 80. 100 120 140 160
Pre-orbital cranial length
Fig. 9. Parietal breadth plotted as a function of cranial length in Diademodon. + = Cragievarus
kitchingi. Scales in millimetre intervals. Note the slight increase in parietal breadth compared to the
increase in cranial length.
35
= NO N Ww
(On) je) (On) je)
Index of relative parietal breadth
S
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Pre-orbital cranial length
Fig. 10. Relative parietal breadth plotted as a function of cranial length in Diademodon. + =
Cragievarus kitchingi. Ordinate scale in millimetre intervals, absissal scale in percentage intervals.
Note the relatively greater parietal breadth of the smaller (ontogenetically younger) crania.
relative parietal breadth decreases, in an apparently exponential manner, as
cranial length increases. The index of relative parietal width for Cragievarus
kitchingi has a value of 22,95 per cent, which is slightly greater than that shown
by BPI.FN. 3773 (19,67 per cent). But the relative width of the braincase of the
smaller (ontogenetically younger) Diademodon specimens appears to be rather
variable (Fig. 10), and the relative parietal width of Cragievarus kitchingi fits
comfortably into the Diademodon ‘growth velocity’ curve.
CRAGIEVARUS, A SYNONYM OF DIADEMODON 163
In their preliminary study of relative growth in the cranium of Diademodon.
Grine, Hahn & Gow (1978) noted that the variables related directly to the size
of the brain (parietal width) and orbits exhibit definite negative allometry
compared to total cranial length. This phenomenon may be expected in an
ontogenetic growth series, as it is well known that in vertebrates the brain and
eyes of younger (juvenile) individuals are relatively larger than in older (adult)
individuals. Thus, the relatively broad diameter of the braincase of Cragievarus
kitchingi is not abnormal when the specimen is considered in an ontogenetic
context as one of the smaller (younger) Diademodon specimens present in the
currently available sample (see Table 2 and Figs 9-10).
Height of the mid-sagittal parietal crest
In the description of Cragievarus kitchingi, it was stated that, ‘in both
Diademodon and Cynognathus ... the parietals have a greater height at the
level of the prootic than farther forward at the level of the alisphenoid. In the
present specimen the height is greater in front’ (Brink 1965: 102-103). However,
examination of the original specimen reveals that the mid-sagittal crest has been
broken away from the back of the skull to the level that Brink (1965) regarded
as its highest point.
Dental formula
In the original description of the present specimen, it was noted that in the
maxilla ‘there are indications of sockets of two very small evidently conical teeth,
at the front of the postcanine series . . .’ (Brink 1965: 103). According to this 1965
diagnosis, this specimen possesses four incisors, one canine, two conical teeth and
seven molariform teeth on each side of the upper jaw, and three incisors, one
canine, no conical teeth and seven molariform teeth on each side of the lower jaw.
The original illustration (Brink 1965, fig. 32) (Fig. 1 herein) shows the dental
formula diagnosed for this specimen. In the later diagnosis of Cragievarus
kitchingi, the presence of ‘seven “‘molariform” cheek teeth, with indirect evidence
of conical teeth anteriorly, [and] even less evidence of sectorials posteriorly’ was
noted (Brink 1979: 43). However, in the later illustration of this fossil (Brink
1979: 44) (Fig. 2 herein) eight maxillary and eight (? possibly nine) mandibular
molariform teeth are depicted. Even if one allows that the two maxillary conical
teeth were inadvertently represented as a single molariform tooth, this same
allowance cannot be made for the lower jaw, for according to Brink’s (1965) own
diagnosis there are no mandibular conical teeth present.
It is not possible to either substantiate or refute the claim that the specimen
possessed four incisors on either side of the upper jaw (Brink 1965), as the
entire anterior end of the rostrum is missing. While it is conceivable that this
number may be correct, it cannot be demonstrated, and therefore it cannot be
used in a taxonomic diagnosis. Similarly, the anterior end of the mandibular
symphysis is covered in matrix and without its removal the number of incisive
alveoli cannot be determined accurately.
164 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
There is only a single canine on either side of the lower jaw and the broken
alveolus of the left maxiilary canine is preserved. The alveolus and root of the
upper canine became visible after the matrix and plaster that covered them were
removed.
As Brink (1965) noted, there are two alveoli preserved anterior to the first
(preserved) molariform tooth in the right maxilla; this region on the left side is
damaged. Because of the relatively small diameters of these two alveoli, it seems
reasonable to assume, as did Brink, that they contained conical teeth.
On the right side there is a break through the dentary in front of the first
(preserved) molariform tooth (Fig. 4). Immediately anterior to this break there
is a small, circular alveolus. This was not visible previously because the region
was covered in matrix. The relevant portion of the left dentary is missing. It
would appear that the lower jaw supported at least one conical tooth in front of
the molariform series.
Seven maxillary molariform teeth are preserved on the right side, and at
least five mandibular molariform teeth are visible on this side. On the internal
aspect of the right dentary, the crowns of seven mandibular molariform teeth
have been exposed; the lateral aspects of the crowns of the last two teeth are
covered by matrix. On the right exterior the area behind the last visible
molariform teeth is covered by matrix.
On the left side, however, there are eight post-conical teeth in both the
maxilla and mandible. The teeth are visible from the external aspect only, and
some of the crowns have been damaged. The last few teeth were covered by the
plaster used in the cranial and mandibular reconstructions (cf. Figs 5-6).
Although the posterior teeth are damaged, it is evident that the last mandibular
and probably the last maxillary crowns are those of sectorial teeth.
In addition, removal of the plaster from the left side revealed two additional
crowns behind the eighth mandibular tooth. The crowns of these last two teeth,
although damaged, are mesiodistally elongate and buccolingually compressed.
They appear to be sectorial teeth also. Because of their position and orientation
it seems that these last two teeth had probably not yet erupted at the time of
death of this individual.
Thus, according to the evidence provided by the prepared specimen, it
appears that the maxilla contained perhaps two conical teeth, seven molariform
teeth and one sectorial tooth, and that the mandible supported at least one
conical tooth, seven molariform teeth and one sectorial tooth. Also, it is evident
that there are at least two sectorial teeth contained in the dentary behind the
sectorial tooth noted above; it appears that these latter two teeth had not yet
erupted at the time of death.
The postcanine dental formula indicated above may be incorrect in so far as
the numbers of the various postcanine tooth types are concerned, but it has been
pointed out elsewhere (Grine 1977, 1978b; Grine, Hahn & Gow 1978) that in
view of the type of replacement exhibited by Diademodon, postcanine tooth
number is of limited diagnostic importance.
CRAGIEVARUS, A SYNONYM OF DIADEMODON 165
The diagnostic statement that there is ‘indirect evidence of conical teeth
anteriorly, and even less evidence of sectorials posteriorly’ (Brink 1979: 43) is
shown to be erroneous following a re-examination of the type specimen. Whilst
the presence of conical teeth is inferred from alveoli, the actual crowns of the
sectorial teeth are present.
Maxillary diastema
In the earlier description of the present specimen (Brink 1965: 103) it was
stated that, ‘there are indications of sockets of two very small evidently conical
teeth, at the front of the postcanine series, with an unusually extensive diasteme
separating them from the approximate position of the canine. The diasteme is
actually preserved for a distance of fourteen millimetres in which there is no
trace of a socket, even of a tooth long since lost, and this distance is reflected in
the figures, but as there is no sign of the canine on either side, the diasteme may
in fact be longer. It cannot possibly be SHOnier This is a very conspicuous
diagnostic feature of this new genus and species.’
On the right side the maxilla is broken posterior to the level of the canine.
The distance between the mesial edge of the first molariform tooth to the edge
of this break measures approximately 10,5 mm; and the distance between the
mesial edge of the anterior ‘conical’ socket and the break measures some 7,0
mm. The distance between the mesial face of the first molariform tooth and the
mesial edge of the first ‘conical’ socket measures about 3,5 mm.
As noted previously, the left canine socket and the damaged root which it
contains have been exposed. The distance on this side between the mesial face
of the first molariform tooth and the distal edge of the canine socket measures
some 14,5 mm. The sockets of the left conical teeth have been damaged, but if
one allows that the combined mesiodistal dimension of these teeth was the same
as on the opposite side, then 3,5 mm may be subtracted from the above figure of
14,5 mm. The result is that the diastema separating the canine from the first
conical tooth is closer to 11,0 mm than 14,0 mm; the distance between the first
molariform tooth and the canine is about 14,0 mm.
In the earlier illustration of this specimen (Fig. 2 herein) the length of the
diastema that is shown is 3,5 mm (Brink 1979: 44); the figure is reduced by half
from actual size, and if the distance depicted is multiplied by two, the resultant
length of the diastema is only 7,0 mm.
A diastema of some 11,0 mm (as determined by the present author) is not
‘unusually extensive’, in fact, neither is one of 14,0 mm for a Diademodon
cranium of similar size.
Replacement of alisphenoid by the quadrate ramus of the pterygoid
Brink (1965: 105) noted that in the type of Cragievarus kitchingi ‘the
alisphenoid of the right side is exposed over its dorsal region and would appear
to be typically diademodontid. Below, it definitely interferes with the pterygoid
extension to the quadrate, but it seems as if it does not reach as far laterally.’
166 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
He also noted that, ‘although there is clear interference on the part of the
alisphenoids farther back, it would appear that the pterygoids themselves still
reach the quadrates, as is characteristic of Protacmon’.
In a later paper it was noted that, ‘from a very poor specimen it is
interpreted in the illustrations that the pterygoids reach back to the quadrates, in
which case Cragievarus is well separated from Diademodon. Watson (1920)
created the genus Protacmon on the strength of a similar interpretation, and this
is now regarded as a misinterpretation, and this may apply also to Cragievarus’
(Brink 1979: 7).
The quadrate processes, whether they are formed by the alisphenoids or the
pterygoids, are very poorly preserved. Both are distorted, they are covered with
numerous cracks and a considerable amount of surface bone has been lost.
Because of these factors the presence of a definite pterygo-alisphenoid suture
could not be located. By the same token, the presence of this suture cannot be
ruled out. The bone of this region is too poorly preserved to permit a definite
confirmation or refutation of the earlier claim (Brink 1965), which Brink (1979:
7) later noted may be a misinterpretation.
Divergence of the quadrate rami of the pterygoid
In the original description (Brink 1965) it was noted that the quadrate rami
of the pterygoid begin to diverge posterolaterally farther forward in Cragievarus
kitchingi than is typical of Diademodon. This feature was added to the re-
diagnosis of the former taxon (Brink 1979: 7).
The level at which the quadrate processes diverge is variable in Diademo-
don, and it appears to be related, to a certain extent, to cranial size. Even in
crania of similar size there seems to be a certain amount of individual variation.
Some idea of the amount of variation may be gained from an examination of
Brink’s (1979) illustrations of different Diademodon crania.
The outlines of the quadrate rami of Cragievarus kitchingi and four Diade-
modon specimens of similar size are presented in Figure 11. These outlines are
adapted from Brink’s (1979) drawings of the specimens and they serve to
indicate the type of variation encountered.
Whilst the quadrate rami of Cragievarus kitchingi diverge somewhat further
forward than in some Diademodon specimens (e.g. Fig. 11A—B) their level of
divergence is comparable to that shown by other Diademodon specimens (e.g.
Fig. 11C-D).
JO IK A, a
Fig. 11. Schematic outlines of diademodontine cranial bases to show the variation in the level of
divergence of the quadrate rami. Specimens of similar cranial size. A—D. Diademodon. E. Cragievar-
us. A. Munich 1934 VHI 18. B. BPI.FN. 3769. C. BPI.FN. 3773. D. Camb. T. 462. All modified
from Brink (1979). See text for explanation.
CRAGIEVARUS. A SYNONYM OF DIADEMODON 167
DISCUSSION
Cragievarus kitchingi was erected on the basis of an incomplete and poorly
preserved skull of a gomphodont cynodont. In their taxonomic revision of the
cynodonts, Hopson & Kitching (1972) proposed that Cragievarus kitchingi is a
junior synonym of Diademodon tetragonus. Because of its incompleteness, the
type of Cragievarus kitchingi was not included in the biometrical analyses of
diademodontine crania (Grine & Hahn 1978; Grine, Hahn & Gow 1978: Bradu
& Grine 1979). Recently, Brink (1979) has ‘reinstated’ Cragievarus kitchingi as a
valid taxon within the Diademodontinae.
An examination of the type of Cragievarus kitchingi—no other specimen
has been referred to this taxon (Brink 1979)—has revealed that most of its
supposed diagnostic features are based upon (1) hypothetical plaster reconstruc-
tion (e.g. the lack of the jugal flange and the slight curvature of the temporal
arch), (ii) the misinterpretation of damage for ‘true’ anatomical features (e.g.
the forward height of the mid-sagittal crest and the foreshortened postero-
inferior margin of the temporal arch), (iii) inaccurate plaster reconstruction (e.g.
the powerful expansion of the ascending ramus of the dentary), (iv) incomplete
preparation (e.g. the lack or supposed disposition of the post-temporal foramen,
the lack of mandibular conical teeth and the length of the maxillary diastema),
and (v) the obliteration of features by plaster (e.g. the lack of posterior sectorial
teeth).
Other supposedly diagnostic characters (e.g. the relative width of the
braincase and the level at which the quadrate rami diverge) have been shown
here to be invalid when the size of the type specimen and the degree of
variability of these features in Diademodon are considered. Another supposedly
diagnostic feature of Cragievarus kitchingi, the replacement of the alisphenoid
by the quadrate ramus of the pterygoid, can be neither substantiated nor refuted
because of the poor preservation of the region. The validity of this last character
has been questioned also by Brink (1979).
Furthermore, it has been shown upon removal of the plaster and further
preparation that the specimen evinces no morphology by which it can be
distinguished from Diademodon.
This specimen was recovered from the same fossil ‘pocket’ that yielded a
number of Diademodon crania (Brink 1963; Kitching 1963). Kitching (1977) has
stated that he believes these closely associated diademodontine specimens to be
conspecific, and that the type of Cragievarus kitchingi represents a ‘distorted
growth stage’ of Diademodon tetragonus. It is perhaps significant that whilst
there are well over 100 available diademondontine skulls, crania, and mandibles
from the South African Cynognathus Zone (= Diademodon—Kannemeyeria
Assemblage Zone), neither Brink (1979) nor any other worker has been able to
assign any of these remains, other than the holotype, to Cragievarus kitchingt.
168 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
CONCLUSIONS
The supposed diagnostic features of Cragievarus kitchingi, as preserved on
the type and only specimen of this taxon, have been re-examined and shown to
be invalid. The type displays no morphology by which it can be distinguished
from Diademodon. As a result, the name Cragievarus kitchingi Brink, 1965, is
considered to be a subjective junior synonym of Diademodon tetragonus Seeley,
1894.
Kitching’s (1977) proposal that this specimen is a ‘juvenile’ individual of
Diademodon tetragonus is supported.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I thank the generous offices of the Bernard Price Institute for
Palaeontological Research, University of the Witwatersrand, Johannesburg, for
permission to prepare and describe the specimen. I thank various colleagues for
reading and constructively criticizing this paper.
REFERENCES
Brabu, D. & GrRing, F. E. 1979. Multivariate analysis of diademodontine crania from South
Africa and Zambia. S.Afr. J. Sci. 75: 441-448.
BRINK, A. S. 1963. Notes on some new Diademodon specimens in the collection of the Bernard
Price Institute. Palaeont. afr. 8: 97-111.
BRINK, A. S. 1965. A new gomphodont cynodont from the Cynognathus Zone of South Africa.
Palaeont. afr. 9: 97-105.
Brink, A. S. 1979. Genera and species of the Diademodontinae. Bull. geol. Surv. S. Afr. 65:
1-50.
GrINE, F. E. 1977. Postcanine tooth function and jaw movement in the gomphodont cynodont
Diademodon (Reptilia; Therapsida). Palaeont. afr. 20: 123-135.
GRINE, F. E. 1978a. Diademodon Seeley, 1894 and Diademodon tetragonus Seeley, 1894
(Reptilia): proposed conservation. Bull. zool. Nomenclature 35: 2.
GrINnE F. E. 19786. Implications of growth and cranial variation in the mammal-like reptile
Diademodon. S.Afr. zool. Soc., Symposium on Systematics, Pretoria, Sept. 12-13. Paper 6
Session 1. (Duplicated.)
GrinE, F. E. & Haun, B. D. 1978. Allometric growth in the Diademodontinae (Reptilia;
Therapsida): a preliminary report. Palaeont. afr. 21: 161-166.
GrinE, F. E., Hann, B. D. & Gow, C. E. 1978. Aspects of relative growth and variability in
Diademodon (Reptilia; Therapsida). S.Afr. J. Sci. 75: 441-448.
Hopson, J. A. 1971. Postcanine replacement in the gomphodont cynodont Diademodon. In:
KERMACK, D. M. & KERMackK, K. A. eds. Early mammals. Zool. J. Linn. Soc. 50 (suppl.
1): 1-21.
Hopson, J. A. & Kitcnine, J. W. 1972. A revised classification of the cynodonts (Reptilia;
Therapsida). Palaeont. afr. 14: 71-85.
KITCHING, J. W. 1963. Notes on some fossil pockets and bone beds in the Cynognathus-Zone in
the Burghersdorp and Lady Frere districts. Palaeont. afr. 8: 97-111.
KiTCHING, J. W. 1977. The distribution of the Karroo vertebrate fauna. Mem. Bernard Price
Inst. Palaeont. Res. 1: 1-131.
SEELEY, H. G. 1894. Researches on the structure, organisation and classification of the fossil
Reptilia. Pt. 9, Section 3. On Diademodon. Phil. Trans. R. Soc. (B) 185: 1029-1041.
Watson, D. M. S. 1920. On the Cynodontia. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (9) 6: 506-524.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., Syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largiliierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
“semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid- tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
b]
e.g. “... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; ‘. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
' (b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
F. E> GRENE
CRAGIEVARUS KITCHINGI BRINK, 1965:
A SUBJECTIVE JUNIOR SYNONYM OF
DIADEMODON TETRAGONUS SEELEY, 1894
(REPTILIA, THERAPSIDA)
ISSN 0303-2515
OF THE S SOUTH AFRICAN |
MUSEUM
CAPE ‘TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction 3
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are. not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes .. .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19696; Jones 1971)’
“As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
- et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.—H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FIscHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 84 Band
July 1981 Julie
Part 4 Deel
A NEW COMPOSITE JUVENILE SPECIMEN OF
AUSTRALOPITHECUS AFRICANUS
(MAMMALIA, PRIMATES) FROM MEMBER 4
STERKFONTEIN FORMATION, TRANSVAAL
By
Page 6G RINE
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
We Ges, S29), HODES, 3, tas), SCS, 3, ED),
6(1, t--p.i.), 7(1-4), 8, 9(1-2, 7), 10(1-3),
1112, 547, tp.) 5(G_5), 240), 27, 313) 2G) esses)
EDITOR/REDAKTRISE
Ione Rudner
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 012 5
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg. Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
A NEW COMPOSITE JUVENILE SPECIMEN OF AUSTRALOPITHECUS
AFRICANUS (MAMMALIA, PRIMATES) FROM MEMBER 4,
STERKFONTEIN FORMATION, TRANSVAAL
By
F. E. GRINE
South African Museum, Cape Town
(With 14 figures)
[MS. accepted 11 December 1980]
ABSTRACT
Two maxillae from the Sterkfontein fossil hominid site have been prepared. The left (Sts
70) and right (Sts 69) maxillae belong to a single juvenile individual. They occlude with the
previously described ‘gracile’ australopithecine mandible (Sts 24). It is proposed that these
three specimens, which are described here in detail, comprise a single juvenile individual. This
composite specimen represents the most complete maxilla and occluding set of deciduous teeth
of a juvenile australopithecine from South Africa, with the exception of the holotype of
Australopithecus africanus Dart, 1925.
CONTENTS
PAGE
NIGTERO CUI HOM re ee te sare a tee Bete ee le 169
Matenaleandideseniptions. 42-5240. 400e4 2 saosaeee 170
SPECIMEN SISIOO sa ee Ross eatin cole vate 170
Wiad tie orcs. aun ane hee ee 170
Deciauousidentitionmenne wae eee 73}
IPSIaMANETAE GISMUTTOIN, oc aancocccaenvccannc Wie)
SPECIMCTIES TSU Pannen eee econo ts ee 178
Vilcivccr lle eee Le ae ome eee ts Mente Sete, 179
Deciduousdentitione oe eee ae ee 179
Rertmancntad entitOnmene eee eee 180
Specimens Sts 69/Sts 70 composite.............. 184
Se ClIMeM: StS) 24 tame ok he he org oa een 185
Deciduous dentition ae eee ae 188
PSTN CIEIMUTGIOMN . . ou ote ccococecucocuc 195
Specimens Sts 24/Sts 69/Sts 70 composite ........ 200
YMCKMOWIEGCCMENtG se ens eg eeS alee el ont fee 200
RN GTE HCMC C Steet ee ee oie ete ye ete oe en Et Brine 201
INTRODUCTION
On 17 August 1936, Robert Broom recovered the first remains of an adult
australopithecine at Sterkfontein (Broom 1936a, 1936b). Since then, excavations
by Broom and Robinson over the periods 1936-1939 and 1947-1949, by Brain in
1956, by Robinson over 1957 and 1958, and by Tobias and Hughes from 1966 to
the present have recovered a large number of remains of the ‘gracile’ australo-
169
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 84 (4), 1981: 169-201, 14 figs.
170 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
pithecine, Australopithecus africanus, from the fossiliferous deposits of Sterkfon-
tein. To date, the australopithecine fossils have derived solely from the lower
breccia of the type site (Robinson 1952), or Member 4 sediments (Partridge 1978).
Although there are a relatively large number of adult australopithecine
remains from Sterkfontein, the jaws and deciduous teeth of only eleven imma-
ture individuals have been recovered. Eight of these were found by Broom and
Robinson and are housed in the collection of the Transvaal Museum (Sts 2, Sts
18, Sts 24, Sts 50/TM 1516, Sts 56, Sts 59, Sts 62 and Sts 67), the remaining three
were discovered by Hughes and these are housed in the Department of Ana-
tomy, University of the Witwatersrand Medical School (Stw 59, Stw 62 and Stw
67). None of these specimens consists of both mandibular and maxillary denti-
tions.
Recent work by the author on the Sterkfontein hominids revealed two
specimens in the Transvaal Museum (Sts 69 and Sts 70) which required prepara-
tion and reconstruction. When cleaned, the two were found to represent the left
and right maxillae and dentitions of a single juvenile individual together with the
mandible and dentition of Sts 24. Together, these three specimens constitute the
most complete occluding set of deciduous teeth of a single early hominid
individual from South Africa, with the exception of the holotype of A. africanus
from Taung.
The purpose of this paper is to describe in detail the gnathic parts and the
dentition presented by the composite specimen, Sts 24/69/70. A comparative
study of the dental morphology of this specimen will be presented in a future
publication dealing with the dentitions of the South African australopithecines
(Grine in prep.).
MATERIAL AND DESCRIPTIONS
SPECIMEN Sts 69
This specimen was recovered from the Member 4 breccia in 1949 by J. T.
Robinson. The description on the catalogue card reads: ‘Fragmentary maxilla
containing some teeth; 3 pieces.’
Prior to cleaning and reconstruction, the specimen consisted of three
separate pieces of breccia with cross-sections of parts of the maxillary dentition
exposed (Fig. 1). It was found that the three pieces fit together comfortably.
After they were joined and the surrounding matrix was cleaned away, a
reasonably well-preserved right maxilla with the dm', dm? and M' was exposed
(Fig. 2). Also partially exposed are the crowns of the developing M? and C;
small parts of the P°’ and P* are visible.
Maxilla (Figs 2-3)
The right maxilla is preserved from a point just behind the lateral wall of
the socket of the di? anteriorly. Most of the lateral surface is intact, including
much of the zygomatic process. The posterior surface of the maxillary tuberosity
NEW JUVENILE AUSTRALOPITHECUS FROM STERKFONTEIN 171
Fig. 1. Sts 69 prior to preparation and reconstruction. All three pieces of
breccia contain fragments of dentition and maxillary bone. Scale in cm.
Fig. 2. Lateral view of Sts 69 after preparation. Note alveolar resorption and the
separation of the tooth crowns. Scale in cm.
172 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 3. Occlusal view of Sts 69 (left) and Sts 70 (right) in approximate anatomical alignment.
Scale in cm.
is preserved superiorly, but inferiorly the bone has been broken away. Several
pieces of bone have been lost from the lateral surface above the dm’, and a part
of the buccal surface of the P’ germ is visible in one of these areas. The
zygomatic process is broken away laterally so that the zygomatic bone is not
present, and the exposed end of this process has been crushed slightly with a
large piece of the anterior face displaced forwards. A large piece of bone has
been lost from the lateral surface over the distobuccal root of the M’. The
medial, or internal surface has been severely damaged, and only a very small
part of the horizontal process of the maxilla remains. Small, isolated parts of the
lingual surface of the alveolar process remain intact. The crypts of the unerupted
central and lateral permanent incisors are partially preserved. Part of the
permanent canine germ and portions of the lingual surfaces of the premolar
germs are exposed lingually. The matrix-filled socket of the d© is preserved
intact, and posteriorly a small part of the occlusal surface of the developing M° is
visible. The dm', dm’, and M! are well preserved. Diagenetic pressures have
distorted the alveolar process slightly, so that the crowns of the deciduous and
first permanent molars have been separated somewhat. Interproximal contact
facets are present between these molars, but, as preserved, the crowns of the
dm‘ and dm? are separated by about 1,3 mm and the crowns of the dm? and M!
by some 1,5 mm.
NEW JUVENILE AUSTRALOPITHECUS FROM STERKFONTEIN iis
Viewed from the lateral aspect, the alveolar margin is very slightly convex
downwards anteroposteriorly. The margin appears to have undergone some
resorption as portions of the buccal roots of the deciduous molars are visible.
The anterior surface of the zygomatic process arises at a level coincident
with the mesiobuccal root of dm’. The lowest point of the root of the process
arises above the distal edge of the dm* crown some 5 or 6 mm superior to the
alveolar margin. The anterior surface of the zygomatic process slopes
posterolaterally and it is gently concave medio-laterally. Its posterior surface
slopes anterolaterally, but at its preserved lateral extent this face turns sharply
posteriorly. The inferior surface of the zygomatic process slopes superiorly and
laterally so that this face projects inferolaterally; it follows a broad, gentle curve
so that no inframalar notch is present. The root of the zygomatic process is
moderately robust.
The infraorbital foramen ts situated at the junction of the zygomatic process
and the lateral surface of the maxilla some 18,5 mm superior to the alveolar
margin at the level of the mesiobuccal root of the dm’. Anterior to, and slightly
below the infraorbital foramen the lateral surface of the maxilla shows a faint,
nearly vertical bony ridge. This elevation descends on to the slight bulge formed
by the developing P° crown. This ridge and the anterior surface of the zygomatic
process define respectively the anterior and posterior boundaries of the shallow
canine fossa, which is continuous with the sulcus below the infraorbital foramen.
The canine jugum is weak.
Viewed inferiorly, the lateral surface of the maxilla curves gently forward
and medially from the mesiobuccal root of the dm’. The anterior wall of the d¢
socket is separated from the distal wall of the di* socket by some 3,3 mm of
bone. It is evident that the deciduous incisors were situated at a level anterior to
the d©. The external surface of the maxilla courses anteromedially from the
canine socket towards the incisal region. Thus, the lateral alveolar surface
follows an even, and smoothly rounded contour from the dm! to the incisor
sockets.
Deciduous dentition (Figs 2-3).
Maxillary first deciduous molar
The dm! is well preserved. The crown is very nearly complete, with some
enamel loss to its lingual surface and a number of fine cracks covering the lingual
half of the occlusal surface.
Viewed occlusally, the crown is square in outline; this arrangement is
disturbed slightly by the presence of a prominent swelling over the mesiobuccal
aspect of the crown. Although the lingual half of the occlusal surface has been
reduced to a large dentine basin, it is apparent from the symmetry of the crown
that all four principal cusps were present and it seems that all were well
developed. The protocone is judged to have been the largest cusp. The paracone
is larger than the metacone. The relative size of the hypocone cannot be
ascertained.
174 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Occlusal wear is heavy. The entire lingual half of the crown has been
reduced to a large, buccolingually concave dentine basin. The mesial, distal, and
lingual sides of this exposure are bordered by a thin enamel rim. The dentine
exposure is demarcated buccally by a relatively straight longitudinal line which
transects the paracone and metacone. The paracone and metacone are worn so
that no buccal demarcation between them is visible. Two rather distinct planes
of wear are presented on the buccal side of the occlusal surface; these planes are
separated along the main crest of the metacone. The mesial plane is the larger,
and it slopes mesiolingually from the metacone across the paracone. The distal
plane slopes rather strongly distolingually from the metacone across the distal
marginal ridge. A small circular patch of dentine is exposed on the tip of the
paracone and a smaller pit is exposed on the tip of the metacone.
Interproximal attrition appears to have been moderate mesially with the d°,
and slight to moderate distally with the dm’. A broad (2,3 mm buccolingual; 1,7
mm high), concave, contact facet is present on the mesial surface. The facet is
more strongly concave at its buccal extent, and it is situated over the upper half
of the face (as preserved); its lingual border is situated approximately in the
middle of the mesial surface. The mesial facet thus extends over the buccal part
of this face. The distal surface presents a broad (3,9 mm buccolingual), flattened
and rectangular-shaped facet. This facet is situated slightly more towards the
lingual than the buccal side of the distal surface.
Occlusally, it is apparent that a small to moderate sized mesiostyle
(=parastyle) was present mesial to the paracone. A shallow, narrow groove
separates the paracone from remnants of the mesiostyle occlusally. The mesial
marginal ridge is moderately thick and it courses on to the summit of the
mesiostyle. The fovea anterior is represented by a relatively shallow, wedge-
shaped transverse groove; it is broader buccally but narrows lingually to a thin
groove where it ends approximately one-third of the way across the crown. The
fovea is enclosed distally by the main crest of the paracone. It appears that a
small distostyle (=metastyle) was present distal to the metacone. This region is
worn, however, and the only indication of this accessory cuspule is a slight
swelling of the buccal surface at the distal extremity of the crown. The distal
marginal ridge, though worn, appears to have been somewhat thicker than the
mesial marginal ridge; it is continuous up on to the distostyle. The buccal end of
the fovea posterior, or talon basin, is represented by a narrow transverse
groove.
Because of wear and damage there is no trace of the lingual developmental
groove, if one were present originally. Also, the region of the mesiolingual face
of the protocone where the Carabelli trait is usually expressed has been
obliterated by wear.
The buccal surface is rather vertical, with a slight cervical enamel promi-
nence present at the base of the metacone. The cervical enamel line extends
considerably further over the mesiobuccal root than over the distobuccal root.
The cervical enamel prominence above the paracone is extremely well de-
NEW JUVENILE AUSTRALOPITHECUS FROM STERKFONTEIN 7S
veloped, such that a rather large tuberculum molare is presented. The tubercu-
lum molare projects both cervically and laterally as a bulbous swelling. A
moderately thick crest of enamel courses vertically from the mesiostyle occlusal-
ly to blend into the lower part of the mesial end of the tuberculum molare. This
crest is demarcated behind by a moderately deep, broad, vertical groove running
from between the paracone and mesiostyle to the tuberculum molare. The distal
half of the buccal surface possesses a large, moderately deep, V-shaped depres-
sion. The anterior border of this depression runs distocervically from just behind
the tip of the paracone to a point some 2,3 mm from the cervical margin over the
distobuccal root. The posterior border courses from this point to a level just
distal to the tip of the metacone. The floor of this depression is flat.
The principal dimensions of the crown are as follows:
MD diameter BL diameter BL diameter
(as measured) (as measured) (incl. tuberculum molare)
RGM ea oe 8,5 mm 9.2 mm 9.6 mm
The radicular system comprises three separate roots—two buccal and one
lingual. The buccal root neck is extremely low. The buccal roots are mesiodistal-
ly compressed, the mesiodistal diameters at the cervical margin being 2,9 mm
and 2,6 mm for the mesiobuccal and distobuccal roots respectively. They are
buccolingually elongate. The two roots diverge at a considerable angle (approx-
imately 45°). The lingual root appears to be the most robust and it courses
strongly lingually away from the crown.
Maxillary second deciduous molar
The right dm? is complete and well preserved. Part of the lingual root
together with the adjacent alveolar bone has been broken away. A thin,
calcite-filled crack runs vertically from the cervical margin across the lingual
surface between the protocone and hypocone, and continues over on to the
occlusal surface, in the same plane, across about half of the crown.
Viewed occlusally, the crown is very nearly square in outline. The distal
border is slightly convex buccolingually. All four principal cusps are present and
well developed. The protocone is the largest cusp by a considerable margin. The
paracone, metacone and hypocone are nearly equal in size.
Occlusal wear is moderate. Wear is heavier lingually, with the protocone
and hypocone considerably reduced in height relative to the paracone and
metacone. The protocone has suffered the heaviest wear. A large, mesiodistally
elongate and buccolingually concave dentine exposure is present on the tip of
this cusp. The lingual side of the protocone bears two bevelled enamel facets
separated along a transverse crest. The anterior facet slopes sharply mesioling-
ually and the posterior facet slopes sharply distolingually. The hypocone shows a
large, slightly convex enamel facet that slopes mesiolingually. A moderately
large, circular and concave area of dentine is exposed near the tip of this cusp.
The paracone is slightly worn with an enamel facet on the mesiolingual slope of
this cusp. The metacone is the least worn of all the cusps, and it shows only faint
176 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
enamel wear. Like the dm’, this tooth displays considerable disparity in the
degree of occlusal wear between the buccal and lingual sides of the crown.
Mesial interproximal contact is judged to have been slight to perhaps
moderate in degree; a moderately large, flattened rectangular facet is present in
the middle of this face. Contact distally with the M' appears to have been very
slight—the mesial surface of the latter tooth possesses a moderate-sized, circular
and faintly attrited facet.
Occlusally, there is no evidence of the presence of any accessory cuspules.
The mesial marginal ridge has been slightly damaged adjacent to the occlusal
border midway along the mesial face. It is worn, but appears to have been
moderately thick. There is no trace of a fovea anterior. The distal trigon crest
(=crista obliqua) is moderately well developed. It is rather thick and, though
worn, it appears to have been continuous between the protocone and metacone.
The distal marginal ridge is moderately thick but very low. It is thicker and
higher lingually, where it arises from the distobuccal aspect of the hypocone.
The ridge slopes cervically and becomes progressively thinner and lower as it
proceeds buccally. The distal marginal ridge is at its lowest where it meets the
distal surface of the base of the metacone, and at this point it is more shelf-like
than ridge-like in form. The fovea posterior, or talon basin, is represented by a
moderately deep but narrow and short transverse groove. It is restricted to the
buccal half of the crown, and it drains distobuccally behind the metacone. At the
base of the hypocone the lingual end of the groove turns sharply mesially where
it continues between the metacone and hypocone. Although the lingual groove
has been obliterated by wear, it is judged to have been continuous with the
mesial limb of the fovea posterior.
The height of the lingual surface has been considerably reduced by wear. It
is slightly convex occlusocervically with a faint cervical enamel prominence
present. The mesiolingual surface of the protocone has been worn beyond the
level at which the Carabelli trait is usually expressed, and, therefore, the
presence or absence of this feature cannot be ascertained.
The buccal surface is rather flat and vertical occlusocervically; only a very
slight cervical enamel prominence is present. The cervical line is horizontal. The
buccal groove is represented by a short, rather narrow cleft. This surface
presents no evidence of hypoplastic or perikymatous enamel.
The principal dimensions of the crown are as follows:
MD diameter BL diameter
(as measured) (as measured)
Rdm 2" 10,3 mm 10,8 mm
The radicular system consists of three separate roots—two buccal and one
lingual—arranged very similarly to the roots of the dm’. The root neck is very
low buccally. The lingual root appears to have followed a somewhat more
vertical course than its counterpart on the dm’. The mesiodistal dimensions of
the mesiobuccal and distobuccal roots at the cervical margin are 3,1 mm and 2,9
mm respectively.
NEW JUVENILE AUSTRALOPITHECUS FROM STERKFONTEIN 177
Permanent dentition (Figs 2-3)
Maxillary first permanent molar
The crown and roots of the right M' are preserved. The crown is relatively
complete and well preserved. Large chips of enamel have been broken away
from the buccal side of the mesial face and from the cervical region of the
distolingual corner. The buccal surface has suffered some slight cracking.
Viewed occlusally, the crown is square in outline. All four principal cusps
are present and well developed. The protocone is the largest cusp by a
considerable margin. The paracone is slightly larger than the metacone, the
latter being nearly equal in size to the hypocone.
Occlusal wear is very mild. The protocone and the hypocone show faint
enamel faceting; on the former this is restricted to the distal and distolingual
sides of the cusp, whilst the hypocone shows a small facet on its apex. The
mesial surface shows a moderate-sized, very lightly attrited interproximal con-
tact facet. It is evident that this tooth had reached partial occlusal contact just
prior to the time of death.
Although the mesiobuccal corner has been damaged, it appears that no
mesiostyle was present. There is no development of accessory cuspules on the
crown. The mesial marginal ridge is moderately thick but low, and it is incised in
its middle by a shallow, broad groove. The fovea anterior is represented by a
moderately deep, rather broad transverse groove situated symmetrically in the
middle of the mesial part of the crown. It is bounded behind by a thick and high
transverse crest formed by ridges from the paracone and protocone. This crest is
much higher than the mesial marginal ridge. The ridges that form the transverse
crest are separated by a very narrow groove—the crest from the paracone is
slightly longer than that from the protocone. The trigon basin is deep and wide,
and the sides of the cusps slope gently towards the bottom of the basin. The
distal trigon crest is of moderate height and thickness. A shallow, narrow groove
courses over its summit. The form of the distal marginal ridge resembles that
shown by the dm”. It is moderately thick but low, and it is continuous on to the
distobuccal aspect of the hypocone lingually, but as the ridge courses buccally it
becomes lower. It reaches only the bottom of the distal side of the metacone.
The talon basin is represented by a relatively deep and broad transverse groove
which is continuous with the groove separating the hypocone and metacone and
the hypocone and protocone.
The lingual surface is slightly convex occlusocervically, especially over the
cervical third of its height, and a moderately developed cervical enamel promin-
ence is present. The lingual groove is deep, but it is rather narrow over the
cervical portion of its length. It courses vertically for about two-thirds of the
crown height where it ends abruptly. The mesiolingual and lingual aspects of the
protocone display a series of grooves and enamel protuberances that represent
the Carabelli trait. The mesiolingual aspect of the protocone presents a relative-
ly deep, 2 mm long, horizontal groove which is bounded by a thin enamel ridge.
178 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The ridge is incised by a narrow groove. There is a disparity between the planes
occupied by the surface of the protocone above and the mesiolingual surface of
the crown below this horizontal groove. A second groove is etched into the
lingual surface; this groove, which is obliquely orientated, courses distocervically
to mesio-occlusally, is some 1,8 mm long, and at its uppermost end it is
separated from the distal end of the horizontal groove by about 1,5 mm of
enamel. The surface of the crown cervical of this series of grooves is somewhat
more expanded than the surface of the protocone above the groove.
The buccal surface is nearly flat and vertical occlusocervically. There is no
indication of a cervical enamel prominence on this face. The buccal groove is
very shallow and rather narrow; it extends vertically over about three-quarters
of the crown height. There is no evidence of hypoplastic or perikymatous
enamel on any of the crown surfaces.
The radicular system is obscured for the most part, but it appears to consist
of three separate roots. The lingual root displays a marked longitudinal groove
in its middle; this root may comprise two separate canals.
The principal dimensions of the crown are as follows:
MD diameter BL diameter
(as measured) (as measured)
RUM gee eae a 13.1 mm 13,8 mm
SPECIMEN Sts 70)
This specimen was discovered by J. T. Robinson in the Member 4 breccia in
1949. The description on the catalogue card reads: ‘Incomplete and crushed
maxilla containing some of the milk dentition and well-formed but unerupted
anterior permanent teeth.’
Prior to cleaning and reconstruction, the specimen consisted of three
separate pieces of breccia containing parts of a poorly preserved maxilla and
deciduous dentition (Fig. 4). The permanent central and lateral incisors were
found in a separate box in the collection which was labelled as containing
Fig. 4. Sts 70 prior to preparation and reconstruction. Scale in cm.
NEW JUVENILE AUSTRALOPITHECUS FROM STERKFONTEIN 179
unidentified bone fragments. It was discovered that one of the pieces of breccia
contained half of the crown of a right permanent maxillary canine and this fitted
perfectly on to part of the RC crown contained in the maxilla of Sts 69.
However, this did not provide unequivocal evidence for the association of Sts 69
and Sts 70 because the piece might have been placed erroneously in the box
containing the Sts 70 specimen. One of the pieces of breccia contained the
buccal half of the crown of the Ldm!; this was removed and fitted to the
remainder of the tooth. The medial surface of the maxilla fragment was very
badly eroded, and it was decided to sacrifice this part of the bone in order to
extract the crowns of the developing LP* and LP’.
Final preparation revealed a very badly fragmented and incomplete left
maxilla containing the damaged Ld°, Ldm' and Ldm? (Fig. 3).
Maxilla (Fig. 3)
The bone is very incomplete and comprises two pieces. The anterior of the
two consists of a small piece of the anterolateral surface above the root of the
deciduous canine, a small part of the lingual alveolar surface anterior to the dm!
and medial to the d©. This piece contains part of the crypt for the developing I’
and a portion of the distal alveolar wall of the di* root. The larger piece shows
the inferior root of the zygomatic process; it is broken anteriorly vertically above
the middle of the dm* and it ends posteriorly opposite the alveolus of the
distobuccal root of the M'. A moderately large piece of what appears to be the
horizontal palatal process of the maxilla is attached to the posterior piece of the
maxilla by a bridge of breccia. The maxilla is too incomplete to warrant an
anatomical description.
Deciduous dentition (Fig. 3)
Maxillary deciduous canine
A small part of the crown and the broken, exposed root of the left d© are
present. The crown consists only of the distolingual cervical corner. The occlusal
aspect of the preserved portion of the crown is worn with a rather strong
distolingual bevel; the most distal part shows a dentine exposure.
The root is single and straight. It is evident that the root had a compressed
ovoid outline in cross-section, with the broadest axis mesiodistal. The buccal
surface possesses a slight vertical groove.
It is not possible to obtain measurements of either the crown or the root.
Maxillary first deciduous molar
The damaged, incomplete crown and part of the radicular system of the left
dm! are preserved. A large section of the lingual part of the occlusal surface and
both the mesial and distal crown surfaces are damaged and/or missing. The
lingual root remains intact but the two buccal radiculae are missing.
The degree, extent and the finer details of occlusal wear are identical to
those shown by the Rdm! of Sts 69. The occlusal morphology of this crown, as
180 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
preserved, is identical to that displayed by the homologous tooth of Sts 69.
Buccally, the tuwberculum molare appears to be slightly more swollen and
accentuated than that on the dm’ of Sts 69, and the V-shaped depression on the
buccal surface is somewhat smaller here than on the other tooth. The lingual
root is similar in size and orientation to that of Sts 69.
The principal dimensions of the crown are as follows:
MD diameter BL diameter BL diameter
(as measured) (as measured) = (incl. tuberculum molare)
Lom eee 8,6 mm 9.0 mm 9.3 mm
Maxillary second deciduous molar
The damaged, incomplete crown and the severely damaged radicular system
of the left dm? are present.
The buccal side of the mesial surface as well the occlusal surface of the
paracone have suffered slight enamel loss. A relatively wide crack runs obliquely
across the metacone on to the distobuccal corner with some slight displacement
of the adjacent enamel. Another crack runs across the protocone, hypocone and
the distolingual corner of the crown. This crack is narrow but some enamel has
been lost from along its borders.
The degree, extent and finer details of occlusal wear shown by this tooth are
identical to those evinced by the Rdm* of Sts 69. Also, the morphological details
of the occlusal, buccal and lingual surfaces are essentially mirrored by the dm? of
Sts 69.
The principal dimensions of the crown are estimated as follows:
MD diameter BL diameter
(estimated) (estimated)
Ldinieecce cee. 10,2 mm 11,2 mm
Permanent dentition (Fig. 5)
Maxillary central permanent incisor
The isolated crowns of both the left and right Is are present. The crown of
the left tooth is the more complete of the two. The mesial and distal halves of
the LI’ crown have been displaced slightly along a straight vertical crack through
the middle of the tooth. The mesial half of the lingual cervical margin has
suffered from loss of enamel. The root is only partially developed on the mesial
and distal aspects of the crown. The right crown has been broken along an
irregular, oblique plane from the middle of the buccal surface to the cervical
margin of the lingual surface. The mesial side of the remaining part of the crown
is separated slightly from the rest of the tooth by a slightly curved vertical crack.
The mesial corner of the incisal edge is rather sharply angulated, whilst the
distal one is more smoothly curved. The incisal edge of the right crown has a
single, small mammelon in its middle with the edges mesial and distal to it flat
and horizontal. The lingual aspect of this edge shows several very faint vertical
grooves. The incisal edge of the left crown, however, shows some four small
mammelons from the mesial edge to the middle; the distal half of this edge is
rather flat and horizontal in disposition.
NEW JUVENILE AUSTRALOPITHECUS FROM STERKFONTEIN 181
Fig. 5. Permanent dentition associated with Sts 70. Scale in cm.
The labial surface is slightly convex incisocervically over its incisal half; the
cervical portion is rather flat and vertically inclined. There is no cervical enamel
prominence present. A number of faint, irregular vertical grooves cover most of
the labial surface. Viewed from the labial aspect, the crown is nearly rectangular
in outline. Its height is greater than its mesiodistal diameter. The cervical region
is only slightly tapered, so that the mesiodistal diameter at the incisal margin is
just slightly greater than that cervically.
Lingually, the mesial marginal ridge is faintly developed, and this only over
the incisal third of the crown. The distal marginal ridge is slightly thicker and
shows more relief than the mesial marginal ridge. Approximately at mid-crown
height the distal marginal ridge blends imperceptibly into the basal or gingival
swelling. This prominence is rather well developed, and although it is sym-
metrical, the distal portion is somewhat more swollen than the mesial end. Two
central vertical ridges arise from the basal prominence. The mesial of these
ridges is thin and low and the distal, which arises from the more swollen part of
the basal prominence, is somewhat better developed and longer than the mesial.
On the left crown the mesial of the two central ridges is represented by two, thin
parallel crests; and the distal ridge is better developed than on the left tooth.
The lingual surface is slightly concave mesiodistally and moderately concave
incisocervically.
The principal dimensions of the crowns are as follows:
MD diameter BL diameter Height
(as measured) (as measured) (as measured)
| es Mee at alae 10,0 mm — =
FU ek Oe RA oh 10,0 mm 8,5 mm 14,4 mm
182 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Maxillary lateral permanent incisor
The isolated crowns of the left and right I’’s are present. The crown of the
left tooth is well preserved and very nearly complete, but it has suffered some
slight damage to the lingual cervical margin. A small piece of alveolar bone is
attached to the base of the mesial surface of this crown. The right tooth is more
damaged than the left. A small chip of enamel has been lost from the incisal
edge and a large, wedge-shaped section of the crown has broken away from the
lingual surface. The cervical enamel margin has been damaged round the entire
periphery of the crown. A small piece of alveolar bone is attached to the base of
the distal surface of this tooth. Neither tooth possesses any trace of the root.
The mesial end of the incisal edge is somewhat rounded, but it is consider-
ably sharper in appearance than the distal end, which exhibits a long, gentle
curvature. The incisal edge is notched slightly mesial to its middle, and the
mesial portion is both shorter mesiodistally and higher than the distal part. A
single, faint mammelon is developed at the distal end of the incisal notch.
The labial surface is only faintly convex incisocervically. Viewed from the
labial aspect, the crown is somewhat rectangular in outline—its height exceeds
its mesiodistal diameter. The cervical portion of the crown is slightly narrower
mesiodistally than the incisal part. The labial surface displays several faint,
irregular vertical grooves. Along the mesial border of this face, a faint vertical
ridge courses incisally for most of the crown height from the cervical region.
Lingually, the mesial and distal marginal ridges are moderately well de-
veloped. They are narrow and low incisally, where they blend into the lingual
surface some 2 or 3 mm short of the incisal edge. The ridges become progres-
sively thicker and higher as they course cervically. The cervical swelling or
prominence is damaged. The mesial and distal marginal ridges follow a conver-
gent course cervically where they are separated by a relatively deep but narrow
groove. It is not possible to determine whether these ridges remained separate
up to the cervical line or whether they joined to form a single basal prominence.
No median ridge development is present. The lingual surface is rather flat
incisocervically and slightly concave mesiodistally.
The principal dimensions of the crowns are as follows:
MD diameter BL diameter Height
(as measured) (estimated)
IG A ee 6,5 mm == 10,0 mm
RIA eee eee 6,9 mm — —
Maxillary anterior premolar
The isolated crown of the left P* is present. The specimen is represented by
an apparently incompletely developed crown with slight damage to parts of the
cervical margin. Root development had not been initiated at the time of death.
However, it is apparent that the crown was almost fully developed; perhaps
some enamel would have been added to the buccal and lingual cervical margins.
Viewed from the occlusal aspect, the crown is ovorectangular in outline,
with the buccal and lingual sides rounded and the buccolingual axis longer than
NEW JUVENILE AUSTRALOPITHECUS FROM STERKFONTEIN 183
the mesiodistal. The two principal cusps are present. The buccal cusp is
considerably larger than the lingual. The apex of the buccal cusp is situated
approximately midway between the mesial and distal ends of the crown, the
mesial slope of this cusp is sharp whilst its distal aspect is more inflated in
appearance. The lingual cusp is lower and areally smaller than the buccal cusp,
and it is situated mesial to the mid-crown transverse axis which bisects the buccal
cusp. The shorter mesial part of the lingual cusp is rather sharp, and its distal
aspect is thickened.
The mesial marginal ridge is extremely low. It is higher and slightly thicker
lingually where it arises from the tip of the lingual cusp. It loses height as it
courses bucally till it meets the base of the buccal cusp, where it is represented
by a flat shelf. The fovea anterior is represented by a broad, flattened surface
which is bounded posteriorly across its buccal half by a well-developed crest
from the buccal cusp.
Two well-developed crests from the buccal cusp, and a single, moderately
well-developed ridge from the lingual cusp are separated by a deep but narrow
longitudinal groove which traverses the mid-crown longitudinal axis.
The distal marginal ridge is thick at its buccal and lingual extremes, but is
low and relatively thin in its middle. Where the ridge joins the lingual cusp a
short, thick crest courses buccally. Distal to the buccal cusp, the distal marginal
ridge supports a short, mesiolingually directed crest. The fovea posterior, which
is larger than the fovea anterior, is represented by a relatively deep basin.
The lingual surface is slightly convex occlusocervically, and it is well
rounded mesiodistally.
The buccal surface is flat occlusocervically, the cervical portion being lateral
to the occlusal part of this face. The mesial and distal aspects of the buccal face
are indented by rather deep vertical grooves. The mesial groove is broader
occlusally, and cervically it narrows to a relatively deep cleft; it ends abruptly
just above the cervical enamel margin. The distal groove is longer than the
mesial one, and it courses vertically from the posterior aspect of the buccal cusp
to near the cervical margin. It is bounded behind by a prominent vertical enamel
crest.
The principal dimensions of the crown are as follows:
MD diameter BL diameter
(as measured) (as measured)
10) 22 ee ee see 9,1 mm 12,4 mm
Maxillary posterior premolar
The badly damaged and incomplete, immature crown of the left P* is
present. Only the occlusal portion of the buccal cusp and the mesio-occlusal part
of the lingual cusp are present. The distolingual quadrant of the crown has been
badly distorted and damaged. No trace of any radicular formation, if any were
present at the time of death, is presented.
It is evident that the buccal cusp is considerably larger, both areally and in
height, than the lingual cusp. The buccal cusp appears to be situated so that its
184 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
tip is coincident with the mid-crown transverse axis of the crown. The lingual
cusp is situated mesial to the buccal cusp, in the mesiolingual quadrant of the
crown. A moderate-sized, incompletely separate cuspule occupies the mesial
border of the buccal cusp. The mesial marginal ridge is like that of the P® in
form; it rises high on to the lingual cusp but ends at the base of the buccal cusp
(more particularly, at the base of the mesiobuccal cuspule). The fovea anterior is
represented only by a broad, flattened and buccally sloping shelf. It is bounded
distally by crests from the buccal and lingual cusps. These crests are separated in
the middle of the crown by a deep, narrow longitudinal groove.
The buccal surface, as preserved, presents the tip of what appears to have
been a moderately well-developed mesial enamel ridge. The ridge arises occlu-
sally as a relatively thin crest opposite the junction between the buccal cusp and
the mesiostyle. After a short distance the crest broadens considerably; it is
demarcated mesially by a V-shaped depression and distally by a moderately
deep groove. There is no evidence of the presence of a distal buccal groove.
Because of damage, no measurement of the dimensions of this tooth can be
recorded.
SPECIMENS Sts 69/Sts 70 COMPOSITE (Figs 3, 6-7)
The left and right maxillae, Sts 69 and Sts 70, and their associated teeth are
considered to belong to the same individual for several reasons. Firstly, as
mentioned above, the fragment of the permanent canine associated originally
with Sts 70 was found to fit perfectly the RC crown contained in the Sts 69
maxilla. Secondly, there is very close correspondence of the morphological
features of the dm! and dm? of the two specimens (Figs 3, 7), and the
dimensions of these teeth are nearly identical. Thirdly, the degree, extent and
details of the patterns of occlusal wear between the deciduous molars in the two
maxillae are identical. Fourthly, the right permanent central and lateral incisors
associated originally with Sts 70 fit snugly into the remnants of the corresponding
crypts in Sts 69 (Fig. 6). More particularly, the small piece of alveolar bone
attached to the RI* crown corresponds in size and outline to an area of bone
Fig. 6. Medial view of Sts 70 (left) and Sts 69 (right) with the permanent
incisors placed in their crypts. Scale in cm.
NEW JUVENILE AUSTRALOPITHECUS FROM STERKFONTEIN 185
that is missing from the lateral wall of the lateral permanent incisor crypt in the
Sts 69 maxilla. Finally, the state of preservation and the coloration of the enamel
of the deciduous molars (and permanent incisors) contained by the two
specimens are very much alike.
The two reconstructed maxillae with the permanent incisors placed in their
crypts are shown in Figure 7 in near anatomical position.
SPECIMEN STs 24
This specimen was recovered from the lower, or Member 4, breccia by Broom
and Robinson on 11 March 1948. It consists of the badly damaged alveolar portion
of a mandibular corpus with the left deciduous incisors, the left and right deciduous
canines and first molars, the right second deciduous molar and the right first
permanent molar (Fig. 8). Broom & Robinson (1950) extracted the developing
crowns of the right permanent central incisor, the right and left lateral permanent
incisors and the right anterior premolar from the mandible.
Additional preparation was performed on this specimen in order to expose
the lingual aspects of the deciduous and permanent molars and the right
mandibular corpus, and the alveolus of the Rd. (Fig. 9). In addition, the crown
of the LP; and the damaged, incomplete crown of the RP, were removed from
the bottom of the mandible.
The deciduous and permanent teeth contained in this mandible have been
briefly described and figured by Broom & Robinson (1950) and Robinson
Fig. 7. Occlusal view of the Sts 69/Sts 70 composite with permanent incisors in their crypts.
Arranged in approximate anatomical position. Specimen now catalogued as Sts 24a.
Scale in cm.
186 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 8. Occlusal view of Sts 24 prior to further cleaning.
Scale in cm.
Fig. 9. Occlusal view of Sts 24 after further cleaning.
Scale in cm.
NEW JUVENILE AUSTRALOPITHECUS FROM STERKFONTEIN 187
(1956). The following is a list of descriptive text pages and figures of these teeth
in the aforementioned publications.
Broom & RoBINSON (1950)
Descriptive text
specimen page
Mandible 42
di, 50
di, 5
de 51
dm, 51-54
dm, 54-55
I, 42
IL, 43
P, 43-45
M, 45
Illustrations
specimen figure page
di, buccal view ISA 42
di, buccal view 1SB 42
dc. buccal view 15C 42
di,;—d, anterolateral view plate 3 (fig. 14)
dm, buccal view Se 42
dm, buccal view 1SK 42
dm,—M, occlusal view HC 50
dm,—M, occlusal view plate 4 (fig 18)
I, buccal view 15D 42
I, lingual view ISE 42
I, mesial view 15F 42
I, buccal view 15G 42
I, lingual view 15H 42
I, distal view 15I 42
P, buccal view 15M 42
P; distal view 15N 42
P; occlusal view 150 42
M, buccal view 15J 42
ROBINSON (1956)
Descriptive text
specimen page
di, 130
di, 130
de 132-133
dm, 136-137
dm, 141-142
I, 36
I, 37-38
M, 104-106
Illustrations
specimen figure page
dm, buccal view 39b 136
dm, occlusal view 38b 135
I, lingual view 10b 38
I, lingual view 10c 38
M, occlusal view 30b 105
Although these teeth have been described briefly and illustrated elsewhere,
they will be described in detail and figured here for completeness.
188 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Deciduous dentition (Figs 9-12)
Mandibular central deciduous incisor
The worn crown and intact root of the left di, are present. The lingual
surface of the tooth is covered by matrix.
The incisal edge is moderately worn with a slight mesiolingual slope. This
edge shows a large dentine exposure which is rimmed by a thin enamel wall. The
height of the crown appears to have been reduced considerably by wear. The
labial surface is very faintly convex incisocervically, there being no cervical
enamel prominence at all. This surface is smooth, and the cervical portion of the
crown appears to have been tapered so that the mesiodistal diameter of the
incisal edge would have been greater than that at the incisal margin.
Broom & Robinson (1950) recorded the mesiodistal diameter of the extant
crown as 4,1 mm; Robinson (1956) measured it as 4,2 mm and estimated that
this dimension of the unworn crown would have been about 4,7 mm. The height
of the crown was recorded as 4,0 mm by Broom & Robinson (1950) and as 3,4
mm by Robinson (1956). The dimensions of the crown, as recorded by the
present author, are as follows:
MD diameter MDdiameter BL diameter Height Height
(as measured) (est. original) (as measured) (est. original)
GN data o%.8 & 4,2 mm 4,4 mm — 3,7 mm yy
The root is elongate and appears rather large relative to the size of the
crown. It courses straight downward for most of its length, with the apical third
tapering and sloped slightly mesially. The root is some 20,8 mm long and it
measures mesiodistally some 3,0 mm at the cervical margin.
Mandibular lateral deciduous incisor
The badly damaged crown and the complete root of the left di, are
preserved. The Rdi, is represented only by a small part of the lingual enamel
surface and a broken root which is embedded in its socket.
When cleaned originally, the crown of the left incisor was ‘perfectly
preserved except that the top of the crown is a little worn (Broom & Robinson
1950: 51). Later, Robinson (1956: 130) recorded that the ‘crowns of the lateral
incisors are too damaged for either measurement or description’.
At present, the crown of the Ldi, is missing a large chip of enamel from the
mesiolabial aspect and the entire upper portion has been broken away along a
plane that slopes steeply cervically from mesial to distal. The root is complete,
but only the mesiolabial aspect is exposed.
Fortunately, the labial aspect of the complete crown was illustrated in a
drawing by Broom (Broom & Robinson 1950, fig. 15B) and in a photograph
(Broom & Robinson 1950, plate 3 (fig. 14)). It is evident from these figures that
the crown had a somewhat rectangular outline, and it appears that wear was
moderate. The incisal edge was somewhat convex, with a short mesially sloping
part and a longer and more steeply sloping distal bevel. It is evident also that a
faint to slightly developed enamel crest rose vertically from the cervical margin
NEW JUVENILE AUSTRALOPITHECUS FROM STERKFONTEIN 189
Fig. 11. Lingual view of Rd, of Sts 24. Scale in cm.
Fig. 12. Buccal view of right deciduous and first permanent molar of Sts 24. Scale in cm.
190 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 13. Isolated permanent teeth of Sts 24. Scale in cm.
along the distal end of the labial face to the incisal edge. The buccal face is
nearly flat and vertical incisocervically, and a cervical enamel prominence is not
present.
The crown appears to have been considerably larger than that of the di,.
Although no measurements can be recorded for the crown, Broom & Robinson
(1950) determined the mesiodistal diameter as being 5,5 mm and the height
(worn) as 6,7 mm. Because of damage, no measurements of the crown can be
made now.
The root is moderately robust, elongate and straight. The length of the root
measures some 11,2 mm, and its mesiodistal diameter at the cervical margin is
approximately 3,5 mm.
Mandibular deciduous canine
Both the left and right deciduous canines are represented. The left de is
represented by a damaged crown and the Rd, consists of a damaged crown and
root. The crown of the Ld. is preserved in anatomical position, whilst the Rd,
has been dislodged from its alveolus—the crown and the upper half of the root
are isolated, and the lower half of the root is attached by its lingual aspect to
matrix.
Originally, the crown of the Ldc was ‘perfect except for a little wearing’
(Broom & Robinson 1950: 51). The buccal view of the Ld, is illustrated in a
drawing by Broom (Broom & Robinson 1950, fig. 15C) and in a photograph
(Broom & Robinson 1956, plate 3 (fig. 14)). Inasmuch as Robinson (1956)
recorded the dimensions of this tooth, it would appear that it was complete until
that date at least. However, at present the distolingual quadrant of the crown is
NEW JUVENILE AUSTRALOPITHECUS FROM STERKFONTEIN 191
Fig. 14. Lateral view of occlusal relationship between Sts 69 and Sts 24. Note that
the upper molars have been separated by postmortem diagenetic pressure, whilst
the mandibular teeth are still in approximal contact. Scale in cm.
missing. It has been cracked round its entire periphery near the cervical margin
with some loss of enamel (Fig. 10). The crown of the Rd, is nearly complete
except for a vertical strip of enamel over the mesial half of the buccal surface. It
has a longitudinal crack through the tip.
Viewed from the buccal aspect, the crown is somewhat diamond-shaped
with a high, central cuspal tip and the mesial and distal ends surmounted by
smaller accessory cuspulids. The mesial cuspulid is situated higher than the distal
cuspulid. The buccal face is moderately to markedly convex mesiodistally, but it
is rather flat occlusocervically except for the upper fifth of the crown, which is
slightly curved. A cervical enamel prominence is not present. The buccal face
mesial to the central cusp shows a faint V-shaped depression which is bounded
anteriorly by a very slight enamel ridge which courses nearly vertically along the
mesial edge of this surface. Occlusally, this ridge is continuous with the mesial
cuspulid. A larger depression is situated distal to the main cusp, and this hollow
is bounded distally by a slight enamel crest which courses obliquely upwards
from the cervical margin to blend into the distal cuspulid. A narrow, vertical
strip of hypoplastic enamel is present on the right crown.
192 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Occlusal wear is slight in degree—it is very slightly heavier on the right
crown. The tip has been reduced somewhat in height, and it shows a well-
developed enamel facet with a strong lingual slope. A small patch of dentine is
exposed on the lingual aspect of the tip of the Rdc¢, whilst there is barely a trace
of dentine exposure on the left crown. A flattened enamel facet with a strong
lingual slope is present along the lingual aspect of the mesio-occlusal edge from
the tip to the mesial cuspulid. The cuspulid has been more heavily worn (and it
is slightly damaged) on the right crown. From the tip, a broad, somewhat
concave enamel facet runs down the distal side of the central cusp on to the
distal cuspulid, where the facet is somewhat more horizontally disposed. The
distal enamel facet slopes neither lingually nor buccally.
Lingually, a moderately well-developed cervical swelling is present. This
swelling is skewed distally, i.e. it is considerably more prominent over the distal
half of the lingual face than over the mesial (Fig. 11). A very faint cervical
enamel prominence is developed over the distal moiety. The mesial marginal
ridge is of moderate thickness and height, but it is short. It courses down from
the mesial cuspulid (where it is most strongly developed) to blend imperceptibly
into the mesial part of the lingual face. The distal marginal ridge is somewhat
more strongly expressed than the mesial, and it courses from the distal cuspulid
to the cervical swelling. A moderately deep depression is situated between the
median and mesial marginal ridges. The depression between the median and
distal marginal ridges is considerably deeper than the mesial groove.
The dimensions of the lower canine (side unstated) were given by Broom &
Robinson (1950) as: MD, 7,0 mm; height, 7,8 mm; estimated original height, 8,5
mm. Robinson (1956) recorded the following measurements for the two crowns:
left: MD, 6,4 mm; BL, 5,6 mm; height, approximately 7,6 mm; right: MD, 6,3
mm; BL, 5,6 mm; height, approximately 6,6 mm. He estimated the original
height for both crowns as about 8,0 mm.
The following measurements were recorded for these two specimens by the
present author:
MD diameter BL diameter Height Height
(as measured) (as measured) (as measured) (est. original)
| We Pee eas a 3 ois = = 7,6 mm 7,8 mm
Rds wear ee 6,4 mm 5,7 mm 6,8 mm 7,7 mm
Mandibular first deciduous molar
The right and left first deciduous molars are represented. The right crown is
complete and well preserved; the crown of the left tooth is nearly complete, with
slight damage to the buccal surface.
Viewed from the occlusal aspect, the crown has a somewhat irregular,
ovorectangular outline (Figs 8-9). Although the crown is worn, it is evident that
at least four principal cusps are present. The protoconid appears to be the
largest cusp by a considerable margin. The metaconid is well developed. The
hypoconid is rather heavily worn, but it appears to have been well developed
also, and probably about the same size as the metaconid. The entoconid, which
NEW JUVENILE AUSTRALOPITHECUS FROM STERKFONTEIN 193
is worn also, is judged to have been somewhat reduced in size and is most
certainly the smallest of the four cusps. Wear has obliterated all occlusal detail
on the distal and especially distobuccal parts of the crown, and it is, therefore,
not possibile to ascertain with certainty whether a hypoconulid was present. The
general appearance of this region of the crown indicates that a hypoconulid was
probably not present, or, if present, it would have been extremely small.
Occlusal wear is moderate to heavy in degree. The left tooth is slightly more
heavily worn than the right. Cuspal height has been considerably reduced, and,
in general, the occlusal surface shows a distobucally directed wear bevel. The
protoconid shows a nearly flat, slightly buccally sloping wear face. A large,
longitudinally elongate, ovoid dentine patch is exposed on the protoconid. The
mesial end of the protoconid shows a small enamel facet (and a small dentine
pit) which slopes slightly mesiobuccally. The distal end of the protoconid dentine
patch is confluent with a very large hypoconid dentine exposure via a narrow
isthmus; on the left crown this bridge is slightly broader. The hypoconid is
covered entirely by a large, deeply concave dentine basin. This exposure is
nearly triangular in shape and it continues distolingually across the crown on to
the entoconid. The metaconid is the least heavily worn cusp. On the right tooth
it shows a flattened enamel facet which slopes distobuccally, and on the left
crown a moderate-sized dentine patch is exposed on a larger facet of similar
disposition. The talonid has been reduced to a nearly flat plane, interrupted only
by the dentine exposures.
Interproximal wear mesially appears to have been very slight, with only a
tiny facet presented near the occlusal margin of this surface. Contact with the
dm, distally is moderate, with a very broad, flattened plane of wear.
The mesial marginal ridge is represented by a moderately thick but low
enamel crest which courses downward distolingually from the mesial end of the
protoconid. The distal extremity of this ridge is considerably lower than its
buccal origin, and the distolingual end is separated from the base of the mesial
face of the metaconid by a narrow groove. The fovea anterior is represented by
a Y-shaped groove that is both narrow and shallow. The two tines of the Y abut
the lingual face of the protoconid, whilst the stem of the Y is represented by a
groove between the mesial marginal ridge and the base of the protoconid. The
fovea anterior is situated on the mesiolingual part of the crown, it slopes and
drains lingually, and it is bounded distally by the bases of the protoconid and
metaconid. It appears that these two cusps were connected by a moderately high
and thick transverse ridge, the distal trigonid crest, which was incised by a
shallow but broad groove. The floor of this groove, however, is considerably
higher than the floor of the anterior fovea.
The lingual surface is slightly to moderately convex occlusocervically, at
least over the metaconid, and a cervical enamel prominence is not present. The
lingual groove is restricted to the occlusal surface where it is well developed, but
the lingual face is interrupted between the metaconid and entoconid.
The buccal surface comprises two rather distinct faces—those of the pro-
194 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
toconid and hypoconid. The hypoconid surface appears to be slightly convex
occlusocervically, with no development of a cervical enamel prominence. The
buccal face of the protoconid is considerably larger than that of the hypoconid,
and it courses downward for a considerable distance beyond the level of the
hypoconidal cervical line (Fig. 12). The cervical enamel margin below the
protoconid continues down over the mesiobuccal aspect of the mesial root plate
below the level of the radicular bifurcation, and this margin is convex down-
ward. Also, the cervical portion of the protoconid face projects laterally beyond
the level of the hypoconid surface. A moderately well-developed cervical enamel
prominence is present below the protoconid. The upper part of this surface is
rather flat, sloping outwards as it courses downward. The buccal groove is
represented by a small, shallow depression near the occlusal margin, between
the protoconid and hypoconid.
Although little of the radicular system is exposed, it is evident that it is
comprised of divergent mesial and distal root plates.
Broom & Robinson (1950) recorded the dimensions of the dm, crown of Sts
24 as measuring: MD, 8,2 mm; BL, 7,3 mm. Robinson (1956) measured the
mesiodistal and buccolingual dimensions of the right crown as 8,2 mm and 6,9
mm respectively. The left crown is, as mentioned above, slightly damaged,
whilst the right tooth is complete. The dimensions of these specimens, as
determined by the present author, are as follows:
MD diameter MD diameter BL diam. trigonid BL diam. talonid
(as measured) (est. original) (as measured) (as measured)
[eda 8,3 mm 8,5 mm (7,3) mm (6,9) mm
JRGlTin S56 54 8,2 mm 8,4 mm 7,2 mm 6,9 mm
Mandibular second deciduous molar
The well-preserved and very nearly complete crown of the right second
deciduous molar is present. The only damage that this tooth has suffered is the
loss of enamel (a moderately large chip) from the buccal surface of the
protoconid.
Viewed from the occlusal aspect, the crown is nearly rectangular in outline;
the distobuccal corner is angled somewhat by virtue of the placement of the
hypoconulid. All five principal cusps are present and well developed. Occlusal
wear is moderate, and it has reduced the cusps in height so that their relative
sizes are somewhat obscured. It appears that the metaconid was the largest cusp,
followed in decreasing order of size by the protoconid, hypoconid, entoconid,
and hypoconulid.
Occlusal wear has reduced the buccal cusps to a nearly flat, horizontal
plane, whilst the metaconid and entoconid retain fairly high, sharp tips. Wear is
heaviest on the mesiobuccal quadrant of the crown, where the protoconid has
been reduced to a large, ovoid and rather deeply concave dentine exposure. The
mesial end of the occlusal surface has been worn flat and a very narrow,
transverse dentine strip here is continuous with the protoconid dentine expo-
sure. The hypoconid displays a somewhat smaller, ovoid and concave patch of
NEW JUVENILE AUSTRALOPITHECUS FROM STERKFONTEIN 195
dentine. The hypoconulid has been reduced to a low, rounded hump with a
small dentine pit on its tip. The entoconid shows a large, concave enamel facet.
The metaconid, which is the least heavily worn of all, shows two enamel facets.
Neither lingual cusp shows any dentine exposure.
Interproximal contact mesially with the dm, is, as mentioned above, moder-
ate. A small, flattened distal facet indicates slight interproximal contact with the
first permanent molar.
Although occlusal wear has obliterated much of the morphological detail, it
is evident that a broad metaconid—hypoconid contact is present. The metaconid
extends distally beyond the level of the protoconid, thus, the mesiobuccal
groove is situated mesiad of the level of the lingual groove. The primary fissure
pattern is arranged in a rather symmetrical Y-shaped configuration. The distal
marginal ridge appears to have been relatively narrow. It is low and deeply
incised in its middle. The fovea posterior is represented by a small pit which is
bounded mesially by the postentocristid, which is higher (even though worn)
than the distal marginal ridge.
The lingual surface is very slightly convex occlusocervically, and a cervical
enamel prominence is not present. The lingual groove is very short and narrow.
The buccal surface is, at least over the remaining cervical portion of its
height, slightly more convex occlusocervically than the lingual face. The
mesiobuccal groove is represented by a shallow, narrow and vertical fissure
which ends rather abruptly a few millimetres above the cervical margin. The
distobuccal groove is considerably less well developed than the mesiobuccal, and
it is represented by a short, shallow depression. Numerous, very tiny hypoplastic
pits cover much of the buccal surface of the hypoconid.
The principal measurements of this crown were determined by Broom &
Robinson (1950) as: MD, 10,8 mm; BL talonid, 9,0 mm. Robinson (1956)
measured the same dimensions of the specimen as: MD, 10,7 mm; BL talonid,
9,0 mm. The present author has recorded the following measurements for this
tooth:
MD diameter MD diameter BL diam. trigonid BL diam. talonid
(as measured) (est. original) (as measured) (as measured)
NGI 10,8 mm 10,9 mm 8,8 mm 9.0 mm
Permanent dentition (Figs 8-9, 12-13)
Mandibular central permanent incisor
The complete, well-preserved crown and a short segment of the root of the
unerupted right I, are present. A bit of enamel has been damaged on the
distocervical aspect of the buccal face and along the distal cervical margin.
The mesial and distal corners of the incisal edge are rather sharply angu-
lated, and both of these extremities are surmounted by moderately large, sharp
mammelons. The incisal edge is horizontal. It supports some five mammelons, of
which the two end and the median, or central, are moderately large, whilst the
other two are slightly smaller.
196 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Viewed from the labial aspect, the crown has a tapered outline with the
mesiodistal width considerably greater at the incisal edge at than the cervical
margin. The labial surface is slightly convex incisocervically, and it appears that
no cervical enamel prominence is present. The upper two-thirds of the labial
face is covered by numerous faint perikymatous lines.
Lingually, there is a moderately well-developed, centrally or symmetrically
situated basal swelling. This swelling does not support a tubercular structure.
The mesial and distal margin ridges are faintly developed over the incisal third
of this face, and a median ridge is not present. The lingual face is moderately
concave incisocervically but flattened mesiodistally.
Broom & Robinson (1950) recorded the following measurements of the
crown: MD, 6,2 mm; BL, 6,3 mm; height, 11,8 mm. Robinson (1956) obtained
the following measurements: MD, 6,3 mm; BL, 6,1 mm; height, 11,7 mm. The
present author has determined the measurements of this crown as:
MD diameter BL diameter Height
(as measured) (as measured) (as measured)
Ria eek ee 6,2 mm 6,1 mm 11,6 mm
Mandibular lateral permanent incisor
The nearly complete crowns of both the left and right teeth are preserved.
A short segment of developing root is attached to both crowns.
The right tooth is cracked along a plane which transects the lingual cervical
margin and cuts through the cervical third of the buccal face, and a relatively
large chip of enamel has broken away from the labial surface at the level of this
crack. The left crown is complete and undamaged.
The mesial corner of the incisal edge is considerably higher than the distal.
The mesial end is very slightly rounded and it is surmounted by a rather large
mammelon. A relatively deep cleft at the distal end of this mammelon separates
it from a very large, mesiodistally elongate central mammelon which dominates
the incisal edge. The central mammelon is highest mesially and it slopes
downward to its distal end where a sharp groove separates it from a moderately
sized mammelon at the distal extremity of the incisal edge.
The labial surface is very slightly convex incisocervically. A cervical enamel
prominence is not present. Viewed from this aspect, the crown is tapered in
outline, with the mesiodistal diameter greater incisally than cervically. On the
left crown, a slightly elevated, moderately thick crest of enamel runs up the
distal edge of the labial face from approximately 4,0 mm above the cervical line
to just below the distal mammelon.Both the upper and lower extremities of this
ridge blend gradually into the labial face. On the right crown the same ridge is
only very faintly demarcated.
Lingually, a rather prominent basal swelling is present, and there is no
cervical enamel prominence. The basal swelling is centrally or symmetrically
situated and it does not support a tubercular structure. The mesial marginal
ridge is only slightly developed, and it runs downward from the mesial mamme-
lon and terminates just above the basal swelling. The distal marginal ridge is
NEW JUVENILE AUSTRALOPITHECUS FROM STERKFONTEIN 197
somewhat more elevated and thicker than the mesial, and it courses from the
distal mammelon and terminates just above the basal swelling. The lingual
surface is moderately concave incisocervically, but relatively flat mesiodistally.
Broom & Robinson (1950) recorded the following measurements for this
tooth (side not stated): MD, 7,3 mm; height, 13,0 mm. Robinson (1956)
reported the dimensions of this tooth (side not stated) as: MD, 7,3 mm; BL, 6,8
mm; height, 13,0 mm. The principal dimensions of these crowns, as recorded by
the present author, are as follows:
MD diameter BL diameter Height
(as measured) (as measured) (as measured)
1 yeh hom eercecese 7,4 mm 7,0 mm 12,6 mm
Reese uss 7-S>mim 7,0 mm 12,5 mm
Mandibular anterior premolar
The nearly complete, well-preserved crowns of both the left and right P;’s
are present. In both cases the cervical margins lingually (LP3) and mesiolingually
(RP3) have suffered post-mortem damage. This damage is somewhat more
severe on the right crown. The buccal cervical margins of the crowns appear to
be incompletely formed—tt is judged that only a short segment of enamel would
have been deposited here—but otherwise the crowns are evidently completely
formed. In fact, a short segment of root is present along the distal aspect of the
left tooth. The two crowns are nearly identical in morphological detail. Broom
& Robinson (1950: 44) provided a very brief description of this tooth, but
Robinson (1956) considered it to be incompletely developed and therefore did
not include it in his sample of Sterkfontein premolars.
Viewed from the occlusal aspect, the crown is somewhat trapezoid in
outline. The buccal side of the crown is considerably longer mesiodistally than
the lingual side, and whilst the distal edge follows a nearly straight transverse
course, the mesial border slopes distally from buccal to lingual. The crown is
dominated by a very large buccal cusp and a considerably smaller lingual cusp.
The buccal cusp extends from the front of the crown nearly to the distal
end, where it is separated by a deep cleft from a moderately well-developed
distostylid at the buccal extremity of the distal marginal ridge. The tip of the
main buccal cusp is situated approximately midway between the mesial and
distal sides of the crown, and relatively sharp crests course mesially and distally
from its summit. A well-developed bifurcating crest runs distolingually from the
tip of the buccal cusp.
The lingual cusp is somewhat lower and much smaller in area than the
buccal cusp. It is situated on the mesiolingual quadrant of the crown and its tip is
displaced mesial to the mid-crown transverse axis which bisects the buccal cusp.
A moderately thick cingulum surrounds the distolingual aspect of the base of the
lingual cusp. This cingulum arises from the lingual aspect of the lingual cusp’s tip
and slopes downward to form a low, broad shelf. A slight median ridge, which
drops swiftly, and a sharp distal crest course from the tip of the lingual cusp.
198 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
A small accessory cuspulid is present at the mesial end of the buccal cusp.
This cuspulid is incompletely separated from the main buccal cusp and it
represents the buccal extremity of the mesial marginal ridge. The mesial
marginal ridge comprises a buccal part from the mesial accessory cuspulid and a
lingual part from the lingual cusp; these crests course downward and converge at
the middle of the mesial aspect of the crown, where the mesial marginal ridge is
the same height as the floor of the fovea anterior.
The fovea anterior is represented by a moderately large basin which is
completely enclosed distally by a transverse ridge formed by the crests from the
buccal and lingual cusps. This ridge is shallowly incised in its middle by a narrow
groove.
The distal marginal ridge, which is moderately thick, descends from the tip
of the distostylid to the distal side of the base of the lingual cusp. At its lingual
extremity the ridge supports a small cuspulid. The ridge continues round the
distolingual side of the lingual cusp as a cingulum. The fovea posterior, which is
completely enclosed by the distal marginal ridge and the median transverse
ridge, is represented by a relatively large, deep basin.
The lingual surfaces on both crowns are damaged. The buccal surface, in so
far as it is developed, is rather flat, sloping outwards occlusocervically. The
mesial portion of this face shows a shallow depression bounded mesially by a
slight, vertical enamel crest which ends occlusally in the mesial accessory
cuspulid. Distally, a moderately expressed vertical ridge rises to the distal
cuspulid. This ridge is separated by a relatively deep groove from the remainder
of the buccal surface.
Broom & Robinson (1950) recorded the mesiodistal diameter of the crown
as 9,4 mm and the incompletely developed buccolingual diameter as 10,1 mm.
Further development would have added enamel to the buccal and lingual
cervical margins, but the mesiodistal dimension would probably have been
unaffected. The dimensions of these two crowns, as determined by the present
author, are as follows:
MD diameter BL diameter BL diameter
(as measured) (as measured) (est. complete)
|) Cedi a val Rise = 9.4 mm 10,1 mm Y
RP ee ae 9,3 mm 10,0 mm ?
Mandibular posterior premolar
The immature and incomplete crown of the right P, is present. As pre-
served, the crown consists only of part of the buccal and lingual cusps and the
fovea anterior. It is evident that the buccal cusp is larger than the lingual, which
is situated mesiad of the mid-crown transverse axis which bisects the buccal
cusp. An incipient mesiobuccal accessory cuspulid is present at the mesial
extremity of the buccal cusp. The mesial marginal ridge is very low; it forms a
shelf-like extension of the floor of the fovea anterior.
It is not possible to record any useful measurements for this specimen.
NEW JUVENILE AUSTRALOPITHECUS FROM STERKFONTEIN 199
Mandibular first permanent molar
The complete, well-preserved crown and part of the radicular system of the
right M, are present.
Viewed from the occlusal aspect, the crown is nearly rectangular in outline.
All five principal cusps are present and well developed. The metaconid is judged
to be the largest cusp, followed very closely in size by the protoconid. The
hypoconid and entoconid, which are nearly equal in size, are slightly smaller
than the trigonid cusps, and the hypoconulid is the smallest cusp.
It is evident that this tooth had just reached occlusal contact with the M! at
the time of death. Occlusal wear is restricted to a slight, flattened facet on the tip
and mesial aspect of the protoconid.
The mesial marginal ridge is extremely low and for most of its length it is no
higher than the floor of the fovea anterior. Several very small cuspulids are
present in the middle of the mesial aspect of the fovea. The fovea is represented
by a relatively large, flat depression bounded distally by a rather thin, low
transverse crest between the metaconid and protoconid. This crest is deeply
incised by a very narrow groove.
A moderately broad metaconid—hypoconid contact is present. The lingual
groove is situated slightly distal of the level of the mesiobuccal groove, and thus
the Y pattern formed by the main occlusal fissures is not symmetrically disposed.
The distal marginal ridge is very poorly developed. It is represented by a
slight crest from the tip of the hypoconulid which courses cervically over the
distal surface of the crown. The fovea posterior is represented by a small pit
which continues over on to the distal surface of the crown as a short, narrow
vertical groove. The postentocristid is low but moderately thick; it is incised by a
deep and narrow groove.
The main crests of the metaconid, entoconid and hypoconid bifurcate or
trifurcate, imparting a slightly crenulate appearance to the occlusal surface.
The lingual surface is rather flat and is nearly vertical occlusocervically. The
lingual groove is narrow, and extends vertically over about half the height of the
crown. A cervical enamel prominence is not present.
The buccal surface is slightly convex occlusocervically, especially over the
upper half of its height. A very slight cervical enamel prominence is apparent.
The mesiobuccal groove is deep and courses vertically over about two-thirds of
the crown height. It ends abruptly. The distobuccal groove is deep; it is rather
broad but shorter than the mesiobuccal groove. The distobuccal groove also
ends abruptly. A flattened area is present on the buccal aspect of the protoco-
nid, and this region is bounded below by a flat enamel shelf. No evidence of
perikymatous or hypoplastic enamel is shown by either the buccal or the lingual
surfaces.
Broom & Robinson (1950) recorded the dimensions of this crown as: MD,
13,3 mm; BL, 11,3 mm. Robinson (1956) measured it as being: MD, 13,1 mm;
BL, 11,2 mm. The principal measurements of this tooth, as measured by the
present author, are as follows:
200 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
MD diameter BL diam. trigonid BL diam. talonid
(as measured) (as measured) (as measured)
RM ee 13,3 mm 11,3 mm Ai 2a
SPECIMENS Sts 24/69/70 COMPOSITE
The reasons for associating the Sts 69 and 70 maxilla have been discussed.
Equally strong evidence exists for associating these two specimens with the
mandible and dentition represented by Sts 24. Firstly, the state of preservation,
the colour, and the staining of the enamel of the teeth contained in the maxillary
and mandibular specimens are very similar. Secondly, the developmental status
and eruption of the permanent teeth in these specimens are compatible with
their having derived from a single individual. Thirdly, the general occlusion of
the deciduous and first permanent molars of the Sts 69 and Sts 24 specimens is
very good (Fig. 14). The two upper and two lower deciduous molars do not
afford a simultaneous precise fit because the maxillary molars have been spread
apart through diagenetic deformation, whilst the lower molars still remain in
approximal contact. However, the occlusal relationships between the individual
molars are excellent. Finally, the degree, pattern and details of occlusal wear
between the corresponding upper and lower molars are too close for this to be a
chance association.
Besides adding several well-preserved and complete deciduous and perma-
nent teeth to the collection from Sterkfontein, this specimen provides the most
complete maxilla of an australopithecine child from South Africa, save for the
Taung skull. Finally, this composite specimen represents the only associated and
occluding maxillary and mandibular cheek teeth of a ‘gracile’ australopithecine
child from Sterkfontein. In fact, this specimen provides the most complete
associated gnathic and dental remains of a juvenile australopithecine from South
Africa, apart from the Taung skull.
The mandibular specimen and its associated teeth retain its original cata-
logue number, Sts 24, whilst the numbers of the two maxillary fragments (Sts 69
and Sts 70) and their associated teeth have been changed—together they are
now referred to as Sts 24a.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I am grateful to Drs C. K. Brain and E. S. Vrba for permission to further
prepare and describe specimens in their care. This paper benefited from the
comments and advice of Drs T. D. White and B. A. Wood. Mr A. R. Hughes
and Mr H. Thackwray assisted with photography. This work was supported by a
grant from the Senate Research Committee, University of the Witwatersrand.
NEW JUVENILE AUSTRALOPITHECUS FROM STERKFONTEIN 201
REFERENCES
Broom, R. 1936a. The dentition of Australopithecus. Nature 138:719.
Broom, R. 1936b. A new fossil anthropoid skull from South Africa. Nature 138: 486-488.
Broom, R. & Rosinson, J. T. 1950. Further evidence of the structure of the Sterkfontein
ape-man Plesianthropus. In: BRooM, R., Rosinson, J. T. & ScHEPERS, G. W. H.
Sterkfontein ape-man Plesianthropus. Mem. Transvaal Mus. 4: 1-83.
PARTRIDGE, T. C. 1978. Re-appraisal of lithostratigraphy of Sterkfontein hominid site. Nature
275: 282-287.
Rosinson, J. T. 1952. The australopithecine-bearing deposits of the Sterkfontein area. Ann.
Transvaal Mus. 22: 1-19.
Rosinson, J. T. 1956. The dentition of the Australopithecinae. Mem. Transvaal Mus. 9: 1-179.
i
aa)
- Pate der Bie ers
ia ba) — UE
Tear! Ett ,
gt
9 nm
=
i «@ PJ
, bs t 7
2 F - * 1
‘ yf F
+ § > ii
4 Ws
x wed “
Z m
£
5
ee ca faa
; - —
~ oe a
Re ar =: -) C
{
1
7 Wim *
;
4
é
i
| is
4
i
, ai
am:
Lg
Be ;
ae
‘ =
5
C
2
i
¢
j
cE
iy
2
y r
‘ J
i
3
a
‘
’
!
Sp i | - : Pe! !
9 ; ss ‘ i re J a. i a re “ .
19 @% ,
J
‘A
_
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific namé must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-1S5SA
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largiliierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
“semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, One specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid- tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. ‘Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
9
e.g. *... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
’ (b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but. A. L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
F. E. GRINE
A NEW COMPOSITE JUVENILE SPECIMEN OF
AUSTRALOPITHECUS AFRICANUS
(MAMMALIA, PRIMATES) FROM MEMBER 4,
STERKFONTEIN FORMATION, TRANSVAAL
ISSN 0303-2515
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
a aeSEUM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the lisi at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
“As described (Smith 1969a, 19695; Jones 1971)’
“As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
“As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
Scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.-H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FISCHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634. \
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konun, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 84 Band
July 1981 Julie
Part 5 Deel
Tan S
A/ayi NOV pen
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF
ROBERTIA BROOMIANA, AN EARLY
DICYNODONT (REPTILIA, THERAPSIDA)
FROM THE SOUTH AFRICAN KAROO
By
G. M. KING
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
il, ACES, SS), ALD, 4=5, 8, tans), SUS, 5, 7D),
AG tos), HD), 8, CUD3D, 1003),
ICED, 57), sant), 15-5), DAD), 27, BIS), 2G), 38, 25D)
EDITOR/REDAKTRISE
Ione Rudner
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 014 1
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF ROBERTIA BROOMIANA, AN
EARLY DICYNODONT (REPTILIA, THERAPSIDA) FROM THE SOUTH °
AFRICAN KAROO
By
G. M. KING
Department of Zoology and University Museum, Oxford
(With I5 figures)
[MS. accepted 6 January 1981]
ABSTRACT
The postcranial skeleton is described. Some comparison with later dicynodonts is made.
Where possible the muscles of the pectoral and pelvic girdles are reconstructed. The
forelimb took up a sprawling position relative to the body. The biceps, brachialis, coraco-
brachialis and pectoralis muscles were all well developed as adductors. Limb extension by the
powerful triceps was probably an important contribution to the otherwise short stride. The
supracoracoideus probably inserted on the medial side of the scapula, passing beneath the
everted acromion process. It is argued that development of the acromion process might have
been in relation to the use of the clavicle as a movable rod, rather than an inflexible brace, in
the girdle.
The femur took up a sprawling position in the body. The main retractor muscle was the
iliofemoralis. The position of the head of the femur on the anteromedial extremity of the bone
is seen as an adaptation for lengthening the stride of the hind limb. The ilium is not produced
far anteriorly as in later dicynodonts, and the trochanter major is not well developed. It ts
postulated that in later dicynodonts the further development of the trochanter major and the
iliofemoralis was to produce long axis rotation in the stride.
In the vertebral column flexibility in a lateral plane was provided for by the flattened
zygapophyses.
It is suggested that Robertia was a lizard-like animal, possibly partly insectivorous.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Hino GUCHOMe wen hierar Cr eee GM snc a as 203
INUGNISTTE PTs me rare ciel ee ca ane Sa UR Ree a 206
Description and functional anatomy .......... 207
JFOrelinnlo ancl eciorall Gule, . o> acdes eves 207
DISCUSSION Rat. wc re ent lae ee or 212
Jaliing! Ino aime! OSlwie BUGS oo occa coronene ANS
DISCUSSION rae 9h remarry ee heen: 218
Asciale SK ClELOM saa kee ore et AR ee 223
SUMMARY BOG! COMEMWSIOMS .ooss0c020 90.0540 228
INCisnOwledeemenisim «canna. a. cue ee oer 228
SUES CES a alg Seater Male Riese sae aoe ea ee 228
ADD RE VIAUIOMS trieuy ee ee ee hc cue ate et LEY)
INTRODUCTION
The dicynodonts, a group of herbivorous mammal-like reptiles, probably
arose at some time in the Lower Permian. After a period of considerable success
in terms of both species number and diversity, most forms became extinct at the
203
AMM, Sha Billie WAU. CEI (D)y WINE AUSSI NS) safS:
204 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
end of the Permian. Only one major lineage survived into the Triassic, under-
going a small adaptive radiation.
The earliest member of the Dicynodontia (sensu Romer 1966) is Eodicyno-
don oosthuizeni (Barry 1974), reputedly from Ecca beds of South Africa. These
beds lie at the base of the fossil-bearing Beaufort Series of the South African
Karoo sediments, and are generally considered to be non-fossiliferous. Before
the discovery of Eodicynodon the earliest dicynodonts were known from the
lowermost zone of the Beaufort Series, the Tapinocephalus Zone. There is some
dispute over the exact age of Eodicynodon (A. W. Keyser 1978 pers. comm.),
but it seems that even if it is actually a Tapinocephalus Zone form, it is from a
lower level in that zone than any other fossil.
Eodicynodon retains several primitive features relative to other dicyno-
donts: the secondary palate is short, the premaxillae are paired, the vomers are
paired, there is a lateral pterygoid flange. No postcranial remains have been
recovered.
Several genera of dicynodonts have been described from the higher levels of
the Tapinocephalus Zone in South Africa. Even at this early stage the dicyno-
donts had diversified, although remaining small and being characterized by the
possession of postcanine teeth. It is likely that of the nine or so genera described
in the literature as Tapinocephalus Zone forms, probably about five are actually
valid. Work in progress by Cluver & King attempts to establish these groups.
One of the groups is founded on Robertia broomiana (Boonstra 1948; Toerien
1953) and contains Tapinocephalus Zone forms having a few small postcanine
teeth, a notched palatal rim with a maxillary blade posterior to the notch and a
lateral dentary shelf which tends to occlude the intra-mandibular fossa. This
group contains the only specimens of Tapinocephalus Zone postcranial material
which can be assigned to a genus and species, being found in association with
cranial material.
The material in question (SAM-11885) is that referred to by Boonstra
(1966) as ‘Endothiodontid. A number of fairly complete skeletons. Michau’s
Request, Beaufort West. Low Tapinocephalus Zone. Femur, lower forelimb
and lower hind limb are figured. The skulls included in SAM-—11885 have the
following features in common with the type of Robertia broomiana: postcanine
teeth (Fig. 1:t), the maxillary notch (Fig. 1: n), the lateral dentary shelf (Fig. 1:
ds), and reduced palatines (Fig. 1: pal). (In all figures a broken line indicates
the reconstruction of a damaged area, unless otherwise specified.) They are here
assigned to that genus and species.
A complete description and detailed discussion of the postcranial skeleton
of Robertia is warranted since it represents the earliest dicynodont postcranial
material known. Previous descriptions of postcranial skeleton (excluding Boon-
stra 1966) have been concerned with later fossils, for example Kingoria (Cox
1959), Cistecephalus (Cluver 1978), Kawingasaurus (Cox 1972), Dicynodon
trigonocephalus (King 1981), Tetragonias (Cruickshank 1967), Kannemeyeria
(Pearson 1924) and Placerias (Camp & Welles 1956). Various aspects of the
SKELETON OF AN EARLY DICYNODONT 205
Fig. 1. Robertia broomiana, skull and lower jaw. A. Skull dorsal. B. Skull palatal.
C. Skull lateral. D. Lower jaw lateral. (Reconstructed from casts 1 and 2.)
(For abbreviations see p. 229.)
skeleton of such dicynodonts are extremely specialized when compared to other
therapsids (see also Parrington 1955) and it is hoped that study of an early form
may shed light on the processes and pathways which brought about these
specializations. Information on their postcranial anatomy may also help in the
interpretation of the kinds of habitats which these early forms occupied and
indicate why the dicynodonts did not apparently radiate explosively until later
on in the Cistecephalus Zone.
206 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
MATERIAL
The material consists of twelve latex casts in the South African Museum,
Cape Town (SAM-11885). The original bones had been dissolved out of the
intractable matrix by using a strong acid, so that the resulting casts are positive
impressions. The preservation of the bones was in parts excellent, and the casts
represent the bone detail very well. At least three partial skeletons were present
in several blocks of matrix. There is very little variation between the skeletons,
making it entirely reasonable that they represent one species. There are several
runs of articulated vertebrae, and several associated girdles with limb bones.
The distribution of skeletal elements in the various casts is as follows:
Cast 1. Partial skull and lower jaw. Radius, ulna and manus.
Cast 2. Skull and lower jaw in palatal view. Neck vertebrae.
Cast 3. Lower jaw. Scapula, humerus, radius and ulna, carpals. Dorsal
aspect of a sequence of vertebrae. Ribs.
Cast 4. Humerus, interclavicle, partial clavicles.
Cast 5. Two scapulae, partial coracoid and precoracoid. Humerus. Disarticu-
lated vertebrae and ribs.
Cast 6. Sequence of mid-dorsal ribs and vertebrae.
Cast 7. Femur (1), fibula, incomplete pes. Tail vertebrae, right and left ilium
and pubo-ischiadic plate, two incomplete sacral vertebrae. Femur
@)
Cast 8. Proximal end of femur and dorsal edge of ilium which are counter-
parts of femur (2) and left ilium of cast 7. Run of vertebrae and ribs.
Cast 9. Femur, pes, fibula and tail vertebrae which are counterparts of femur
(1), fibula, pes and tail vertebrae of cast 7.
Cast 10. Clavicle, a sequence of vertebrae and some ribs. Distal end of a
humerus; radius and ulna, carpals.
Cast 11. | Humerus, radius and ulna, carpals which are counterparts of cast 10.
Cast 12. Disarticulated ribs. Partial scapula and coracoid. Sternum. Humerus
(3) and radius and ulna. Humerus (4) in dorsal view.
Two other dicynodonts have been used for comparative purposes. One is a
medium-sized Daptocephalus Zone (sensu Kitching 1977) dicynodont, Dicyno-
don trigonocephalus (King 1981) which has a virtually complete postcranial
skeleton. The other (TSK 83, a specimen from T. S. Kemp’s collection housed
in the Oxford University Museum) is a collection of several partly-disarticulated
small skeletons from the Daptocephalus zone of Zambia (Madumabisa Mud-
stones horizon). These conform to Cluver & Hotton’s (1981) definition of
Dicynodon, having a dorsal dentary sulcus, no lateral dentary shelf, an unnotch-
ed maxillary rim, and dentary tables. The specimens may be immature indi-
viduals, being small, having unerupted tusks, and open sutures.
In the following description and analysis the positions of the origins and
insertions of muscles have been reconstructed with reference to Romer (1922).
The possibilities of movement of the limbs were investigated by manipulating
plasticine models of the bones.
SKELETON OF AN EARLY DICYNODONT 207
DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTIONAL ANATOMY
FORELIMB AND PECTORAL GIRDLE
Four well-preserved scapulae are present (Fig. 2). The dorsal blade is rather
narrow. It curves medially and its lateral surface is concave anteroposteriorly.
The anterior edge is thick and drawn up into a prominent ridge facing laterally
(Fig. 2: r). The ridge continues ventrally into the acromion process (Fig. 2: ac p)
which is large and strongly everted. The medial side of the acromion process and
the body of the scapula adjoining it are hollowed out into a shallow fossa (Fig. 2:
s fo). The anterior edge of the scapula just below the acromion process is
smooth and this, together with the eversion of the process, would allow the
supracoracoideus muscle to pass on to the medial side of the scapula and attach
into the shallow fossa there. The medial surface of the scapula is strongly convex
anteroposteriorly and drawn up into a ridge at the height of the convexity (Fig.
2: mr). This may mark the division between the origins of the supracoracoideus
and subscapularis muscles. Since the ventral part of the scapula blade is so
slender, neither of these muscles could have had an extensive origin here.
1
cor (ete
Fig. 2. Robertia broomiana, shoulder girdle. A. Lateral. B. Medial.
(Reconstructed from casts 5 and 12.)
Below the acromion process the scapula fans out to form the articulation
with the coracoid, and the glenoid. The scapula glenoid facet (Fig. 2: gl fa) is
approximately circular. It faces downward, backward and slightly outward if the
blade of the scapula is tilted slightly forward (Fig. 2). The facet is shallowly
concave dorsoventrally and convex anteroposteriorly. The coracoid is well
preserved only in medial view but the glenoid facet (Fig. 2: c fa) appears to face
backward and upward. The precoracoid appears to be of the usual dicynodont
conformation but it is badly preserved and the precoracoid foramen is not
evident.
208 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Much of the interclavicle (Fig. 3b) is preserved. It is a rectangular sheet of
bone drawn up into a low boss in the midline of the ventral surface (Fig. 3B: b).
On either side of the boss the surface may be hollowed out into a very shallow
and indistinct fossa, presumably for the attachment of the pectoralis muscles. In
one specimen the proximal ends of the clavicles are preserved in situ on the
interclavicle (see Fig. 3B). The proximal end of the clavicle is flattened and
spoon-shaped, bearing a distinct ridge (Fig. 3B: r) which continues on to the
Fig. 3. Robertia broomiana, clavicle, interclavicle and sternum. A. Clavicle anterior.
B. Clavicles and interclavicle ventral. C. Sternum ventral. D. Diagram to show the
relative orientations of the elements of the girdle (explained further in the text),
anterior. (Reconstructed from casts 4, 10, and 12).
shaft of the bone. The distal end is also expanded, in a direction at right angles
to the expansion of the proximal end. The distal end is approximately triangular
(Fig. 3A: d e), very extensive and rather robust.
Much of the sternum is present, though poorly preserved (Fig. 3C). It
would seem to take the form of an oval plate which tapers slightly towards its
posterior end. It bears a slight median ridge. The bone surface is uneven in
texture, bearing irregular striations. The posterior and anterior edges are
somewhat thickened. Other edges are not sufficiently well preserved to deter-
mine thickness, or whether rib articulations were present.
The humerus (Fig. 4) is well preserved. The distal and proximal ends of the
bone are expanded in typical dicynodont fashion. The head (Fig. 4: hd) faces
SKELETON OF AN EARLY DICYNODONT 209
medially and somewhat dorsally but is not pronounced. Anterior to the head the
bone is drawn into the deltopectoral crest (Fig. 4: d p c). Presumably the
deltoideus muscle inserted mainly on the dorsal surface of the crest, while the
pectoralis muscles inserted on the rugose ventral surface (Fig. 4: v s). On the
dorsal surface the crest is marked off abruptly from the shaft of the bone by a
pronounced ridge (Fig. 4C: r) posterior to which is a triangular fossa (Fig.
4C: t fo). The dorsal surface is, therefore, quite unlike that of Dicynodon
trigonocephalus (Fig. 4D) where there is no such fossa in the middle of the bone.
Instead, in D. trigonocephalus there are a shallow fossa on the posterior margin
of the bone and a strong tubercle (Fig. 4D: tub) which have been interpreted as
A hd
1cm
Ld
icm
Fig. 4. Robertia broomiana, \eft humerus. A. Proximal ventral. B. Distal ventral.
C. Proximal dorsal. D. Humerus of Dicynodon trigonocephalus in proximal dorsal view.
(A reconstructed from cast 4; B reconstructed from cast 5; C reconstructed from cast 12,
humerus 4.)
210 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
the attachment site of the triceps (King 1981). No tubercle is present on the
humerus of Robertia and the attachment of the triceps humeralis lateralis is here
taken to be in the extensive triangular fossa. Two small swellings are found on
the posterior edge of the bone, one near the head of the bone which encroaches
on the dorsal surface (Fig. 4C: sm sw), and the other more distal (Fig. 4C: | d).
These may represent the insertions of the subscapularis and latissimus dorsi,
respectively.
The ventral surface of the proximal end is excavated into a shallow but
extensive fossa (Fig. 4A-B: s fo) between the deltopectoral crest and the
posterior margin. This probably represents the insertion of the coracobrachialis
muscle. Posterior and distal to this fossa is a marked protuberance (Fig.
4A: pro) possibly indicating the coracobrachialis longus insertion. The post-
eromedial corner of the posterior margin of the ventral surface is also rather
swollen and striated (Fig 4A: sw). This may mark the encroachment on the
ventral surface of the insertion of the subscapularis muscle.
The distal ventral surface bears an entepicondylar foramen (Fig. 4A—B: ent f).
In addition, several humeri also show evidence of the ectepicondylar foramen
(Fig. 4C: ect f). In dorsal view a notch leading from the anterodorsal surface to
the ventral surface can be seen. The notch is continued either side by a groove
running from the dorsal surface in a ventral, anterior, and distal direction.
The facets for articulation of the radius and ulna (Fig. 4A: rad fa, ul fa) are
largely ventral. Anterior to these facets is a deep and well-defined fossa (Fig.
4A-B: d fo). This may indicate the site of insertion of ligamentous connections
to the lower limb.
The position of the brachialis inferior is shown quite clearly on several
specimens, being delimited by the pronounced dorsal ridge which separates the
triceps lateralis fossa from the deltopectoral crest. The brachialis origin presum-
ably starts on the ventral distal surface anterior to the entepicondylar foramen.
It passes proximally and dorsally on to the body of the deltopectoral crest to lie
posterior to the deltoideus insertion. The whole of the area of origin described
forms a smooth and continuous trough (Fig. 4B: tr).
On the dorsal surface a fossa (Fig. 4C: r fo) is present near the posterior
margin of the bone. The surface of the fossa is rough and the posterior and distal
edges of the bone are deeply striated. This would be a reasonable position for
the origin of the triceps humeralis medialis.
The radius and the ulna are shown in Figure 5. In the following description
it is assumed that the bones are oriented at right angles to the humerus. Each is
a slender element approximately three-quarters the length of the humerus. The
ulna bears a weak olecranon process (Fig. 5B—C: o p). The anterior surface of
this bone is excavated into an extensive fossa proximally (Fig. 5B: pr fo). The
medial edge of this is continued ventrally as a pronounced ridge (Fig. 5B: r)
forming the medial edge of the bone over most of its length, but turning on to
the anterior surface far ventrally. The proximal fossa extending down from the
olecranon process was presumably for the triceps insertion, while the long ridge
SKELETON OF AN EARLY DICYNODONT Dll
1cm
SSS
Fig. 5. Robertia broomiana, right radius and ulna. A. Radius anterior. B. Ulna anterior.
C. Ulna posterior. D. Radius posterior. (Reconstructed from cast 3.)
probably took the biceps insertion. The posterior surface of the ulna also bears a
marked excavation proximally (Fig. 5C: m fo), possibly the insertion of an ulnar
flexor from the entepicondyle.
The distal end of the ulna is approximately oval, concave anteroposteriorly
and convex mediolaterally. The distal end of the radius is greater in area and
flatter.
The radius itself bears a distinct elongate fossa (Fig. 5A: e fo) on its anterior
distal surface. A low ridge runs along the anterior surface from the proximal
lateral to the distal medial corner (Fig. 5A: 1 r). This probably was the site of
insertion of the brachialis inferior. A much shorter ridge runs along the posterior
surface of the distal end (Fig. 5D: sr).
The forefoot is well represented but not complete. Figure 6 shows a
reconstruction based on all the specimens preserved. Of the carpus an ulnare, a
radiale and an intermedium can be identified. A small bone near to the radius of
one specimen may represent a pisiform. The best-preserved carpus shows three
more distinct bones, two of which are probably centralia, but it is difficult to be
certain. One of the elements (Fig. 6: ce?) is rather large and may indicate fusion
of two centralia.
Metacarpals I to V are present. They are elongate bones, very slightly
flattened dorsoventrally. Number I is significantly smaller than the others. No
complete digit V is present but all others are, and the phalangeal formula is
2—3-3-3-(?3). No reduced or fused phalanges are apparent. Each terminal
phalanx is a blunt claw, displaying a pronounced boss on its plantar surface (Fig.
6B: b). The phalanges in each digit increase in size proximally. The phalanges of
digit III are the longest, indicating that the hand might have been approaching a
symmetrical condition.
The hand gives the impression of being long-fingered and flexible. In one
specimen the metacarpal and phalanges of the longest finger together are as long
212 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
1cm
ream ea hee FS)
Fig. 6. Robertia broomiana, right forefoot. A. Dorsal. B. Plantar. (Reconstructed from casts
ieB sandals)
as the radius. Such a large hand might have acted simply as a platform to
support and stabilize the body, but, although long, the hand is not particularly
broad. The stout claws may rather suggest a tearing or scratching function.
Discussion
The above morphological and anatomical considerations, when subjected to
a functional analysis, indicate that the forelimb took up a primitive sprawling
position relative to the body, and that, on the whole, the muscle pattern of the
forelimb and girdle was conservative. However, many of the specialized features
of later dicynodonts are already present in the Tapinocephalus Zone form.
The orientation of the glenoid depends on how the scapula is oriented in the
body. This is difficult to deduce in a disarticulated skeleton, but one clue is the
position and direction of the clavicle and interclavicle. The shaft of the clavicle
leaves the interclavicle in the midline, either horizontally or at a very small angle
(Fig. 3D). The distal part of the clavicle then turns backward (about 40°) while
expanding dorsally. The posterodistal edge of the bone is a smooth arc con-
gruent with the arc of the scapula anterior edge above the acromion process.
Because of the orientation just described, the clavicle arc is positioned sloping
slightly forward in the body and therefore the scapula edge must do the same.
The overall orientation of the scapula is, therefore, with the blade sloping
forward at an angle of approximately 60° to the horizontal, and curving dor-
somedially. The glenoid facet will then face mostly laterally and also posteriorly.
When the humerus is articulated in the glenoid it takes up a sprawling position.
An erect or semi-erect position is not possible because the head of the bone is
mainly dorsal and in the middle of the proximal end. In the sprawling
SKELETON OF AN EARLY DICYNODONT 23
position a rather limited protraction—retraction arc is possible before the head is
disarticulated or before the deltopectoral crest touches the girdle. For the latter
reason, also little long axis rotation is possible. Elevation and adduction of the
distal end of the bone does seem to be possible.
The facets on the humerus for articulation with the radius and ulna are
almost completely ventral, indicating that the antebrachium was positioned at
right angles to the humerus as would be expected in a sprawling-gaited animal.
With the forelimb so positioned, there is a tendency for the animal’s body
to collapse through the girdle under the action of gravity unless strong postural
muscles are present. Such muscles can prevent collapse only if the angle between
the two elements that are collapsing is increasing, as then shortening of a muscle
can restore the former relationship of the two elements. Therefore, in a
sprawling-gaited animal the postural muscles important in preventing collapse
are the ventral adducting muscles, the biceps, brachialis, coracobrachialis and
pectoralis. The sites of attachment in Robertia show that these muscles were all
very well developed (Fig. 7A, C—E). The triceps does not have this kind of
postural function, neither do the dorsal muscles such as the deltoideus, supracor-
acoideus or subscapularis. The supracoracoideus would have protracted the
limb, the deltoideus elevating it. The latissimus dorsi presumably played a part
in retracting the limb, helped by the subscapularis. This last muscle might have
caused some long axis rotation if its insertion had spread to the ventral or even
posterior surface of the scapula. A small amount of rotation is permitted by the
joint and would have the effect of forcing the antebrachium backward. This is
important since the powerful triceps muscle could then extend the limb forcing
the body forwards. This could have been an important contribution to the
otherwise short stride.
The eversion of the acromion process and medial origin of the supracor-
acoideus are specializations of dicynodonts unknown in the other non-cynodont
mammal-like reptiles. As seen, they are already present even in primitive
dicynodonts. The advantage of such an arrangement is not immediately obvious.
In other reptiles the supracoracoideus and scapulohumeralis attach to the
precoracoid and anteroventral part of the scapula. The latter is much more
extensive anteroposteriorly than in dicynodonts, and therefore ensures an
adequate fibre length of the supracoracoideus. In moving the origin of the
muscle on to the medial side of the scapula in dicynodonts, the length of the
muscle is not greatly increased since the part of the scapula anterior to the
glenoid has been reduced in length. Neither is the direction of the movement
produced by the muscle significantly different. The prime selective pressure for
development and eversion of the acromion process was probably not then to
produce a supracoracoideus which was longer or acted in a different direction.
Indeed, there must have been a time immediately before the muscle passed on
to the medial side when the anterior part of the scapula had been cut back,
producing the incipient acromion process and actually reducing both the area
and fibre length of the supracoracoideus.
214 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 7. Robertia broomiana, a reconstruction of the pelvic and pectoral musculature. A. The
approximate postulated lines of the muscles of the pectoral girdle. B. The approximate
postulated lines of the muscles of the pelvic girdle. C-E. Insertions of muscles on the humerus.
F—-G. Insertions of the muscles on the femur. (In A—B a broken line indicates muscle behind a
bone; in C-G a broken outline and stippling indicates the approximate insertional area.)
SKELETON OF AN EARLY DICYNODONT DAS)
The acromion process might instead have developed to provide a firmer
attachment for the clavicle. However, in the dicynodont shoulder girdle there is
less contact between the acromion and the clavicle compared to the pelycosaur
condition. Instead the clavicle may be tending to act more as a rod about which
the interclavicle and scapula may pivot, rather than a static brace for the girdle.
This would seem likely since intra-girdle movements causing rotation of the
glenoid may occur in Dicynodon trigonocephalus (King 1981). Also, the transi-
tion from the pelycosaur screw-shaped glenoid producing a rigidly-defined
movement pattern of the humerus (Jenkins 1971) to the open notch-shaped
glenoid in therapsids may indicate increased flexibility of the limb. This may be
associated with the need for prey capture or traversing uneven terrain or even
social behaviour. A less rigid girdle would facilitate such movements as well as
possibly increase the stride by allowing a longer excursion of the humerus (King
IGS).
In order for the clavicle to act as a rod connecting the interclavicle and
scapula, its contacts with them must be reduced to pivoting points. This would
initially involve reduction of the anteroventral area of the scapula, leaving the
clavicle contact (acromion process) standing proud. At this stage the origin of
the supracoracoideus would be diminishing since it cannot extend over the
lateral surface of the scapula which 1s occupied by the deltoideus, and it cannot
yet reach the medial surface. At this stage perhaps its role was augmented by the
deltoideus and latissimus dorsi. If the acromion process were now everted, for
example to increase the length of the clavicle, the supracoracoideus would gain
access to the medial side of the scapula, and relieved of the supracoracoideus
origin, the anteroventral part of the scapula could be reduced further. It is
possible, though, that the supracoracoideus did not play an over-important part
in limb movement again, since the latissimus dorsi is probably a more powerful
retractor and the deltoideus a better elevator.
HIND LIMB AND PELVIC GIRDLE
The femur (Fig. 8A—B) is a gently S-shaped bone with a distinct shaft. The
head is on the anterior margin of the proximal end and 1s more extensive on the
dorsal surface. There is no neck separating the head from the rest of the bone.
Ventrally (assuming the femur to be in a position at right angles to the
acetabulum) the bone bears a large triangular fossa on its proximal half (Fig.
8A: t fo) which is presumably the insertion of the pubo-ischio-femoralis externus
muscle. The anterior boundary of this fossa is a low ridge (Fig. 8A: | r) which
bears a rugose striated area just distal to the head (Fig. 8A: r a). This may
possibly represent the remains of the internal trochanter seen in pelycosaurs and
other therapsids but otherwise absent from dicynodonts. The posterior boundary
of the triangular fossa is not as pronounced as the anterior, but a flat ridge (Fig.
8A: f r) is developed which continues on to the shaft of the bone in an
anterolateral direction, probably marking the insertion of the ventral adductor
muscles. The ridge terminates just proximal to a deep, oval fossa (Fig. 8A: o fo)
216 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
1 cm IV
E-H
Fig. 8. Robertia broomiana, \eft femur, fibula and hind foot. A. Femur ventral. B. Femur
dorsal. C. Fibula posterior. D. Fibula anterior. E. Pes plantar. F. Pes dorsal. G. Tarsal(?)
dorsal. H. Tarsal(?) posterior. (Reconstructed from casts 7 and 9.)
occupying the distal part of the ventral surface, indicating the attachment of the
gastrocnemius muscle. The trochanter major (Fig. 8A—B: t m) is not at all
prominent and is not cut off sharply from the shaft of the bone distally as is the
case in Dicynodon trigonocephalus. No fourth trochanter is visible.
The dorsal surface of the bone bears a prominent patch of striations (Fig.
8B: str) on its anterior margin just distal to the head. This is a likely insertion for
the pubo-ischio-femoralis internus muscle. Posterior, to this area the femur is
excavated into an elongate fossa which extends well down the bone towards the
constricted middle portion (Fig. 8B: e fo). This is probably the extensive origin
of the femorotibialis muscle. Posterior to this fossa the edge of the bone is
thickened and striated as it is on the ventral surface. Presumably the iliofemor-
SKELETON OF AN EARLY DICYNODONT PAG
alis muscle inserted here, mainly dorsally but also conceivably posteriorly and
ventrally.
Only one hind limb epipodial is present. It is identified as the left fibula
(Fig. 8C—D). It is a slender bone approximately three-quarters of the length of
the femur. The bone is almost straight, the medial edge being only slightly
concave. The posterior surface bears two shallow fossae, one in the proximal
and the other in the distal half of the bone (Fig. 8C: fo).
Of the pes digits III and IV are complete, V and II are incomplete and I is
missing (Fig. 8E—F). Metatarsals II to V are present. One element only of the
tarsus 1s preserved, a small disc-shaped bone (Fig. 8G—H). As in the hand, the
metatarsals decrease in size from digit V to digit Il. The phalanges decrease in
size within a digit distally. The terminal phalanx is a claw, more rounded than
that of the hand and bearing a distinct ridge dorsally (Fig. SE: r). Ventrally the
claw bears a boss (Fig. 8F: b) near both its anterior and posterior margins. The
area in between is excavated into two small deep fossae (Fig. 8F: d fo).
Most of the ilium is preserved. It is a fan-shaped plate of bone as in most
dicynodonts but is expanded anteriorly only to a small degree (Fig. 9). On the
anterior margin of the lateral surface it is possible that there is a slight
hollowing-out of the bone surface (Fig. 9B: h) distinct from that occupying most
of the rest of the lateral surface (Fig. 9B: la fo). The anterior excavation may
represent the origin of the iliotibialis muscle, while much of the rest of the bone
surface would be occupied by the origin of the iliofemoralis muscle.
Fig. 9. Robertia broomiana, right ilium and pubo-ischiadic plate.
A. Medial. B. Lateral. (Reconstructed from casts 7, 8, and 9.)
218 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 10. A comparison of the pelvic girdles of some dicynodonts. A. Robertia
broomiana. B. T. S. Kemp Collection, Oxford University Museum 83. C. Dicynodon
trigonocephalus. (B and C reduced to the same width across the ilium-pubo-ischiadic
plate symphysis as A.)
The posterior part of the ilium of this specimen is more damaged, but this
region of the bone does appear to be quite well developed (Fig. 10).
The medial surface of the ilium shows one clear sacral rib facet (Fig. 9A: r
fa). Others are indistinct.
The fused pubis and ischium form a flattish square plate, drawn out into a
stout process at its posteroventral corner. The anterior margin is thickened and
bears a small swelling (Fig. 9B: sw) ventrally which constitutes the pubic
tubercle. More dorsally, the ischiadic contribution to the acetabulum is found.
The acetabulum tends to be occluded by the dorsal margin (formed by the ilium)
which faces somewhat ventrolaterally. The ventral margin of the acetabulum
faces dorsolaterally. The ilium and pubo-ischiadic plate appear to contribute
equally to the acetabulum which is situated on the anterior margin of the girdle
(Fig. 9B: ac).
A fairly large obturator foramen occupies the middle of the pubo-ischiadic
plate. On the medial surface the posterior edge of the foramen is drawn up into
a sharp ridge (Fig. 9A: r). Posterior to this ridge is a rugose area, probably the
site of the origin of the ischiotrochantericus (Fig. 9A: i-t). Anterior and ventral
to the obturator foramen the vental surface bears a distinct area of striations
aligned anterodorsally. This patch of striations does not reach the ventral edge
of the plate. It presumably marks the origin of the pubo-ischio-femoralis
internus (Fig. 9A: pif i).
Discussion
As far as can be determined, the femur took up a sprawling position in the
acetabulum. The head of the femur is pronounced dorsally and not set off from
the rest of the bone at all, and in an erect or even semi-erect position would not
contact the articulatory surface. A very substantial building up of the head in
SKELETON OF AN EARLY DICYNODONT 219
cartilage would be necessary to achieve this. In a sprawling position the
dorsally-facing head comes into contact with the ventrally-facing dorsal margin
of the acetabulum. Also, the condyles on the femur for articulation with the
tibia and fibula are ventrally-facing, suggesting that the crus was at right angles
to the femur, in turn implying that this was perpendicular to the acetabulum.
The muscle configuration of the hind limb (Fig. 7B, F-G) would seem to
support this conclusion, since, judging from their areas of attachment, muscles
such as the pubo-ischio-femoralis externus, ventral adductor, femorotibialis and
gastrocnemius were all well developed. The former two muscles would certainly
have had a postural function. The latter two, although concerned with flexing
the limb, would also have been important posturally.
However, the position of the head on the anteromedial extremity of the
femur does suggest in-turning of the bone implicated in the change from a
sprawling to a more erect limb position. If the femur of Robertia is compared
with that of a pelycosaur such as Dimetrodon, however, it can be seen that the
head of Robertia is not so much in-turned but rather that the posteromedial part
of the articulatory surface has been reduced (Fig. 11). Also, the articulatory
surface of the femur of Robertia has become more rounded and bulbous and
concentrated on the dorsal side. The obvious consequence of these changes in a
sprawling-gaited animal would be to allow a longer protraction-retraction arc
before the posterior margin of the femur touched the border of the acetabulum
and before contact of the femur head and the acetabulum was lost. In particular,
A B C D
3cm 1 cm
(ey aS
Fig. 11. A comparison of the femora of Dimetrodon and Robertia reduced to the
same approximate length (Dimetrodon after Romer 1922). A. Dimetrodon, right
femur ventral. B. Dimetrodon, right femur dorsal. C. Robertia, right femur
ventral. D. Robertia, right femur dorsal. (The articulatory surface of the
proximal end is stippled.)
220 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
the positioning of the head on the anterior extremity of the femur allows a great
degree of protraction since there is no part of the femur anterior to the head to
touch the girdle. Jenkins (1971) notes that in Dimetrodon during no part of the
stride could the femur be directed more anteriorly than medially because of the
shape of the head of the femur. The anterior position of the head in Robertia
can, therefore, be seen as an adaptation to extensive protraction as a way of
lengthening the stride.
However, although retaining a sprawling gait, there is no sign in Robertia of
a powerful caudifemoralis acting as a retractor. Instead the iliofemoralis must
have had this role. With the femur in a sprawling position the iliofemoralis can
act as a retractor only if its origin is on the posterior part of the ilium. If its
origin is more anterior, then the insertion must be posterior to the point of
rotation of the femur in the acetabulum, that is, on a pronounced trochanter
major. In Robertia there is no such pronounced trochanter major, so even a far
anterior origin would not allow the iliofemoralis to act as a retractor, and, in
fact, it is seen that the ilium is not expanded far anteriorly, and quite possibly
the anterior margin was occupied by the iliotibialis in any case. In Robertia
probably the farthest anterior that the iliofemoralis fibres insert is over the
acetabulum. These fibres would only retract the femur from a midstride posi-
tion. When the femur was fully protracted, posteriorly-originating fibres would
be necessary to initiate retraction. The posterior extension of the ilium was,
therefore, necessary to provide adequate origin for this part of the iliofemoralis.
However, this does not explain why the. iliofemoralis took over from the
caudifemoralis as a retractor muscle. Possibly as the excursion of the femur
became greater, especially the point to which it could be protracted, then the
fibres of the caudifemoralis might have been too short to allow the increased
degree of protraction. This problem does not face the iliofemoralis, since,
whether the limb is protracted or retracted, the length between the origin and
insertion of the iliofemoralis does not change a great deal because its origin is
above the femur rather than far posterior to it.
If the iliofemoralis, by gaining a more posterior insertion on the femur,
could function equally well as the caudifemoralis as a retractor, then the further
evolution of the iliofemoralis may be favoured for another reason. If the
insertion migrated on to the posterior edge of the femur, or better still, on to the
ventral margin of the posterior edge, then the muscle could also cause long axis
rotation. This would be in an anti-clockwise direction on the left-hand side,
forcing the crus backwards. The powerful extensor muscles (femorotibialis)
could then extend the limb, imparting a forward thrust to the body. This would
be a significant contribution to the overall locomotory thrust developed.
This development of long axis rotation might have been very important
since, in later dicynodonts when a larger trochanter major is developed, retrac-
tion becomes more limited because the trochanter touches the acetabulum.
However, by this time long axis rotation is well established in the limb move-
ment and contributes greatly to the stride.
SKELETON OF AN EARLY DICYNODONT OM
The above arguments imply that reduction of the length of the tail occurred
concomitantly with the reorganization of the iliofemoralis muscle and was a
rather passive process: as the iliofemoralis became the main retractor muscle,
the caudifemoralis was no longer needed and therefore its origin (the caudal
vertebrae) could be reduced. However, an alternative view, that reduction of
the tail was actively selected for and that reorganization of the iliofemoralis
followed as a consequence of this, is also possible. In this case one would need
to postulate a selective pressure for tail-shortening. Geist (1972) suggests that
tail-shortening would be favoured in therapsids that lived in cool environments
as a means of reducing heat loss. A shorter tail and other appendages would
help the animal to approximate to a sphere, giving the most advantageous
surface area : volume ratio. Geist argues that having reduced heat loss, such
therapsids could maintain a fairly high body temperature without the need to
consume vast quantities of food. To be most successful these adaptations would
be coupled to large size, and Geist cites Kannemeyeria as an example of such a
homeotherm.
Geist attempts to demonstrate the change in surface area brought about in a
hypothetical animal when the length of its tail is reduced by half, keeping the
total mass of the body constant. A similar exercise can be carried out with
Robertia, first allowing a tail 10 cm long (which is approximately two-thirds body
length) and then allowing a tail length of 4 cm (which is the approximate actual
length of the tail). The surface area: volume ratios obtained are very approxi-
mate since Geist’s method reduces the form of the animal to a right regular
conical head, a cylindrical body, and a conical tail. The ratios obtained for
Robertia are, with the long tail 0,775, and with the short (actual) tail 0,665. The
change in the ratio is 14,21 per cent. This is obviously a substantial change and
would be significant to the animal’s temperature control system. However, to
achieve this the volume of the tail (presumably mostly muscle) has been reduced
by 80 per cent. it is difficult to envisage such a reduction occurring in one
evolutionary event since it will have great repercussions on the reptilian mode of
locomotion. However, if the reduction occurred gradually, it is difficult to see
the advantage in terms of thermoregulation that the incipient stages would
bring. In conclusion, then, although tail reduction may benefit an animal by
reducing its surface area once a short tail was fully evolved, it is difficult to
imagine this as a prime selective pressure.
It is possible, instead, to visualize tail reduction as part of a suite of
characters which enable an animal to become more manoeuvrable during
locomotion, as discussed in connection with the forelimb. This increased man-
oeuvrability may not only be advantageous at high speeds, but also at low speeds
over uneven terrain. It would then assume great importance for small animals to
whom even small discontinuities in the terrain pose large problems of manoeuv-
rability.
One stage in producing this manoeuvrability would be reduction of lateral
undulation in the locomotory pattern. Although Robertia still seems to retain
222 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
the possibility of lateral flexibility (see page 226), later dicynodonts such as
Dicynodon trigonocephalus (King 1981) do not. Kemp (1980) has indicated the
possible advantages of an animal possessing a rigid vertebral column:
1. During fast locomotion, momentum would be maintained if the animal
followed a linear path. Lateral deviation from this path by parts of the body
would cause a loss of momentum.
2. If the hind limb produces most of the significant locomotory thrust, then
the whole of the locomotory forces applied to the animal pass forward along the
spinal column. Any slight distortion of the vertebral column then leads to a large
bending moment, tending to cause collapse of the animal between fore and hind
limbs.
It has been shown earlier (page 213) that most of the muscles of the pectoral
girdle in Robertia had a postural function and it is possible, therefore, that the
forelimb produced a much weaker locomotory thrust than the hind limb. Both of
the advantages listed above might then have applied to Robertia. Furthermore,
during lateral undulation the head would be moving continually from side to
side. This may be a grave disadvantage for an animal feeding on small inverte-
brates which it may need to catch while running. Both Cruickshank (1980 pers.
comm.) and Cluver (1978) have suggested that small dicynodonts might have
included terrestrial invertebrates in their diet, and therefore the ability to both
sight and catch prey effectively might have been a factor in keeping the path of
the head as straight as possible during locomotion.
Manoeuvrable animals sacrifice some stability for agility. Instead of relying
on body proportions and size for stability, they tend to rely on postural changes
brought about by neuromuscular control to counteract overbalancing forces. If a
loose inverse relationship between stability and manoeuvrability is assumed,
then it is possible that loss or reduction of a tail may increase manoeuvrability by
decreasing stability. The tail could act as a stabilizing organ in the following way:
an animal relying on lateral undulation in its locomotory pattern faces a problem
of instability; as the animal flexes its body the limb on the convex side of the
flexure will be off the ground, in the act of completing the recovery stroke;
because of the body flexure the triangle formed by the other three anchored legs
may be so placed that there is a possibility of the animal’s centre of gravity
falling outside the triangle; it would, therefore, tend to collapse in the direction
of the unanchored leg; this tendency could be counteracted by a fairly massive
tail flexed in the same direction as the head, that is, away from the unanchored
leg. Now, if the possibility of lateral undulation is lost, as in the later dicyno-
donts, then the tail is not needed as a balancing organ. In fact, if increased
manoeuvrability is being selected, then a large tail with a large moment of
inertia is actually undesirable.
A third stage in increasing manoeuvrability would be to accentuate the
problem of instability outlined above by decreasing the triangular area formed
by the anchored leg. One way of doing this is by altering the stance of the animal
from a sprawling mode to one where the legs are pulled in underneath
SKELETON OF AN EARLY DICYNODONT Lae
the body. At the expense of stability the animal can bank and turn rapidly if
necessary.
There is probably no fixed order in which these stages should appear in
therapsid evolution. They must to some extent appear together. In Robertia
lateral undulation has not been eliminated nor are the legs turned in under the
body, but the tail is shortened. In later dicynodonts such as Dicynodon trigo-
nocephalus, the tail is short, lateral undulation has been reduced and the hind
limbs are pulled in somewhat. Such a suite of characters may be widespread in
the mammal-like reptiles.
AXIAL SKELETON
Various sequences of vertebrae and ribs are present in the specimens. None
is complete from neck to tail, however, so the total number of vertebrae in the
column is uncertain. The pre-sacral number is probably approximately twenty-
six. Two sacral vertebrae are preserved and eleven caudal.
The atlas and axis vertebrae are damaged but appear to have the same
forms as that described in Dicynodon trigonocephalus (King 1981). The neck
vertebrae following (Fig. 12A) have slightly shorter neural spines than sub-
sequent vertebrae and show the distinctive facets for the double-headed ribs
(Fig. 12A: r fa), one on the centrum and the other on the transverse process.
Proceeding from vertebra 4 to vertebra 7, it is seen that the centrum facet
gradually increases in area and migrates dorsally on the centrum. Gradually the
transverse process facet is lost, the sole articulatory facet being the elongate
centrum facet as on vertebra 15 (Fig. 12B). The point at which the two heads of
the rib coalesce is not known in this case. It is usually about vertebra 9 or 10. As
in other dicynodont specimens, the ribs of vertebra 8 and 9 are particularly
robust and bear a pronounced fossa on the midline of the posterior surface (Fig.
13D: p fo). The fossa between the two heads on the posterior surface is also very
pronounced (Fig. 13D: h fo).
In the posterior dorsal vertebrae the rib facet begins to decrease in area,
and migrates upwards towards the transverse process (Fig. 12C: r fa). The ribs
associated with these vertebrae are also much less robust. After the particularly
robust ribs of the shoulder region, there is a trend towards lighter but long ribs
in the dorsal region (Fig. 13E). However, these begin to decrease in length at
about vertebra 21 and are much reduced by vertebra 26 (Fig. 13F).
Several of the mid-dorsal and thoracic ribs are complete, though broken.
Viewed posteriorly or anteriorly, the rib is a smooth arc of a circle of very long
radius. There is no sudden change in the radius of curvature. Viewed dorsally,
the ribs have a distinct backward as well as downward curvature. Because the
ribs of the thoracic and lumbar regions of the spinal column are so long (almost
twice the length of the epipodial) and rather straight, they must have been
orientated backward in the body at a considerable angle (Fig. 15). Even so, the
thorax and abdomen were probably only just clear of the ground in the normal
stance. The cross-section of the thorax would have been almost circular.
DA ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
11cm
1cm
r fa 11cm
Fig. 12. Robertia broomiana, vertebrae. A. Vertebrae 4 to 7 lateral.
B. Vertebra 15 lateral. C. Vertebrae 21 to 24 lateral. D. Second? sacral verte-
bra ventral. E. Third? sacral vertebra ventral. (A reconstructed from cast 5;
B reconstructed from cast 6; C reconstructed from cast 8; D-E reconstructed
from cast 7.)
SKELETON OF AN EARLY DICYNODONT 225
0°55 cm
Fig. 13. Robertia broomiana, ribs. A. Rib 2 or 3 posterior. B. Rib (probably 6)
posterior. C. Rib (probably 6) anterior. D. Rib (probably 8) posterior. E. Mid-dorsal
rib anterior. F. Last presacral rib anterior. (A-C reconstructed from cast 5; D
reconstructed from cast 3; E reconstructed from cast 6; F reconstructed from cast 8.)
226 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
wnt
ng
Se
Fig. 14. Robertia broomiana, caudal vertebrae. A. Dorsal.
B. Ventral. (Reconstructed from casts 7 and 9.)
The zygapophyses of the pre-sacral vertebrae do not show much morpholo-
gical change along the column. The anterior zygapophyses tend to be shallow
and wide, forming articulations with the posterior zygapophyses which are
almost horizontal. Presumably these allowed extensive side-to-side movements
of the vertebrae, so that in a horizontal plane the vertebral column was very
flexible. This flexibility and the long, slender body must have made Robertia
appear quite lizard-like. The limb proportions of a small lizard such as Lacerta
ocellata are also similar to Robertia’s including the slightly longer dimensions of
the hind limb compared to the forelimb. Unlike Lacerta, however, the forelimb
of Robertia is very robust.
The neural spines of the pre-sacral vertebrae do not slope backward to any
great degree and are quite short, being less than the height of the centrum.
Two sacral vertebrae are preserved but presumably more were present in
life (Fig. 12D-E). It does not seem likely that more than three were present in
life though, judging from the length of the ilium and the length of the sacral ribs.
Of the two vertebrae preserved, the ribs are much more expanded on the
anterior, and it is possible that they represent the second and third sacral
vertebrae, respectively.
The tail is reasonably well preserved (Fig. 14). The first two caudal
vertebrae have no ribs attached to them. The next four vertebrae have fused ribs
which gradually diminish in size along the column. Traces of haemal arch facets
(Fig. 14B: h fa) can be seen on these vertebrae. The last five vertebrae are
isi}
SKELETON OF AN EARLY DICYNODONT
Tt ter ee en
tt
“UOJIJOYS IIMUS 9Y} JO UOTJONIJSUODII B ‘DUDIWIOOIG DIJAAGOY “CGT ‘314
aI
WD |
228 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
cuboids of bone with few distinguishing features preserved. The tail is thus
short, approximately one-eighth body length, and, judging from the limited area
for muscle attachment, also lightly built.
SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
The postcranial skeleton of Robertia broomiana shows a mixture of ad-
vanced and primitive characters which may be expected of an early (Tapi-
nocephalus zone) dicynodont. The specialized characters of dicynodonts include
the production and eversion of the acromion process; the reduction of the
pre-glenoid area of the scapula; the medial origin of the supracoracoideus
muscle; the posterior and anterior extension of the ilium; the reduced
caudifemoralis muscle and the role of the iliofemoralis as the limb retractor;
reduction of the fourth trochanter; absence of an internal trochanter; anterior
position of the head of the femur; the short tail; the large thorax and abdomen;
and the digital formula. Many of these characters are as fully developed in
Robertia as they are in much later dicynodonts. The lack of elaboration of the
iliofemoralis is an exception to this.
Features of Robertia which appear to be primitive for therapsids generally
include the sprawling position of the forelimb; extensive postural musculature
and musculature associated with forelimb extension; the remnant of an ectepi-
condylar foramen; the small trochanter major; the small extension of the
anterior edge of the illum; large hind limb postural muscles; the small number of
sacral ribs; the sprawling position of the femur; the flexible spine.
Robertia was a small, probably rather active animal, a little like modern
lizards. Although an analysis of the skull is necessary before any conclusions can
be drawn, it is not impossible that Robertia not only fed on softer plant matter
but also on small invertebrates, when the teeth may have played a part in food
capture or processing
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
It is a pleasure to thank Dr M. A. Cluver of the South African Museum not
only for providing the specimens but also for much stimulating discussion about
them. Mr Neville Eden of the same Museum made the excellent casts of the
material for which I am very grateful. My thanks are also offered to Dr T. S.
Kemp for useful discussion of the manuscript and specimens.
I wish to thank the Sir Henry Strakosch Memorial Trust for making possible
a visit to South Africa, and St Hilda’s College, Oxford for continued support.
REFERENCES
Barry, T. H. 1974. A new dicynodont ancestor from the Upper Ecca (Lower Middle Permian)
of South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 64: 117-136.
Boonstra, L. D. 1948. On the anomodont reptiles from the Tapinocephalus zone of the Karroo
System. In; ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AFRICA. Robert Broom Commemorative
Volume: 57-64. Cape Town: Royal Society of South Africa (Special Publications).
SKELETON OF AN EARLY DICYNODONT 229
Boonstra, L. D. 1966. The girdles and limbs of the Dicynodontia of the Tapinocephalus Zone.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 50: 1-11.
Camp, C. L. & WELLES, S. P. 1956. Triassic dicynodont reptiles. Part 1. The North American
genus Placerias. Mem. Univ. calif. 13: 225-304.
CLuver, M. A. 1978. The skeleton of the mammal-like reptile Cistecephalus with evidence for a
fossorial mode of life. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 76: 213-246.
Ciuver, M. A. & Horton, N. 1981. The genus Diictodon and its bearing on the classification of
the dicynodonts (Reptilia, Therapsida). Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 83: 99-146.
Cox, C. B. 1959. On the anatomy of a new dicynodont genus with evidence of the position of
the tympanum. Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 132: 321-367.
Cox, C. B. 1972. A new digging dicynodont from the Upper Permian of Tanzania. Jn: JoysEy,
K. A. & Kemp, T. S. eds. Studies in Vertebrate evolution: 173-189. Edinburgh: Oliver &
Boyd.
CRUICKSHANK, A. R. I. 1967. A new dicynodont genus from the Manda formation of Tanzania
(Tanganyika). J. Zool. Lond. 153: 163-208.
Geist, V. 1972. An ecological and behavioural explanation of mammalian characteristics, and
their implication to therapsid evolution. Z. Sdugetierkunde 37: 1-15.
JENKINS, F. A. 1971. The postcranial skeleton of African cynodonts. Bull. Peabody Mus. nat.
Hist. 36: 1-216.
Kemp, T. S. 1980. Aspects of the structure and functional anatomy of the Middle Triassic
cynodont Luangwa. J. Zool. Lond. 191: 193-239.
Kine, G. M. 1981. The functional anatomy of a Permian dicynodont. Phil. Trans. R. Soc. (B)
291: 243-322.
KitcHING, J. W. 1977. The distribution of the Karroo vertebrate fauna. Mem. Bernard Price
Inst. palaeont. Res. 1: 1-131.
PARRINGTON, F. R. 1955. The evolution of the mammalian femur. Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 137:
285-298.
PEARSON, H. S. 1924. A dicynodont reptile reconstructed. Proc. zool. Soc. Lond. 1924:
827-855.
Romer, A. S. 1922 The locomotor apparatus of certain primitive and mammal-like reptiles.
Bull. Am. Mus. nat. Hist. 46: 517-606.
Romer, A. S. 1966. Vertebrate Paleontology. 3rd ed. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
TOERIEN, M. J. 1953. The evolution of the palate in South African anomodontia and its
classificatory significance. Palaeont. afr. 1: 49-117.
ABBREVIATIONS
ac acetabulum
ac p acromion process
add adductor muscles
lo) boss
br brachialis muscles
cb coracobrachialis muscle
cb | coracobrachialis longus muscle
ce? possible centrale
c fa coracoid facet of the glenoid
cl clavicle
cor coracoid
d dentary
de distal end of the clavicle
del deltoideus muscles
d fo deep fossa
dpe _ deltopectoral crest
ds dentary shelf
ectf extepicondylar foramen
© 1© elongate fossa
entf entepicondylar foramen
fo fossa
it i flat ridge
ft femorotibialis muscle
t fo
thl
thm
tm
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
gastrocnemius muscle
scapula facet of the glenoid
hollowing out of the ium
head
haemal arch facet
fossa between the heads of a rib
interclavicle
iliofemoralis muscle
ilium
intermedium
ischium
origin of the ischiotrochantericus muscle
fossa on the lateral surface of the ilium
attachment of the latissimus dorsi muscle
low ridge
marked fossa
medial ridge
maxilla
notch
oval fossa
olecranon process
parietal
palatine
precoracoid
pectoralis muscles
fossa on the posterior surface of a rib
pisiform
pubo-ischio-femoralis externus muscle
pubo-ischio-femoralis internus muscle
premaxilla
postfrontal
preparietal
proximal fossa
protuberance
pterygoid
pubis
quadrate
radius
ridge
radiale
rugose area
radial facet on the humerus
rib facet
rugose fossa
subscapularis muscle
scapula
supracoracoideus muscle
shallow fossa
scapulohumeralis muscle
small swelling
Ssquamosal
short ridge
striations
swelling
teeth
triangular fossa
triceps humeralis lateralis muscle.
triceps humeralis medialis muscle
trochanter major
SKELETON OF AN EARLY DICYNODONT P31
tr trough
tub tubercle
u ulna
ul fa ulnar facet on the humerus
Vv vertebra
VS ventral surface of the deltopectoral crest
I-V digit numbers
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name ‘(and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8—9.
Note punctuation in the above exampie:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
“not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. ‘... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. .. in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A. L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
G. M. KING
THE POSTCRANIAL SKELETON OF
ROBERTIA BROOMIANA, AN EARLY
DICYNODONT (REPTILIA, THERAPSIDA)
FROM THE SOUTH AFRICAN KAROO
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN >
_ 2 SELIM
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction Z
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered -
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible tc a size not exceeding 12 < 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes .. .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
“As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
“As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
“As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
- et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.—H,. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FISCHER, P.-H.., Duval, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634,
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 84 Band
July 1981 Julie
Part 6 Deel
UNGULATE MORTALITY AND SEDIMENTARY
FACIES IN THE LATE TERTIARY
VARSWATER FORMATION, LANGEBAANWEG,
SOUTH AFRICA
By
RG Kee EN
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
il, DUES, S48), SAW, 4-5, 8. tapi), SAB, 5, 7-9),
GGL, tad), ICA), & 90-2, 1), 100-3).
IED, 5, J, tor), ICS), 240), 27, ZiG3)}, 226), 23, 45)
EDITOR/REDAKTRISE
fone Rudner
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 013 3
[
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
Press,. Pty: tdi: Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
[he Rustica
UNGULATE MORTALITY AND SEDIMENTARY FACIES IN THE LATE
TERTIARY VARSWATER FORMATION, LANGEBAANWEG,
SOUTH AFRICA
By
RICHARD G. KLEIN
Department of Anthropology, University of Chicago
(With 7 figures and 3 tables)
[MS. accepted 15 January 1981]
ABSTRACT
Dental crown heights are used to establish mortality profiles for the giraffids Sivatherium
hendeyi and Giraffa sp., the bovids Mesembriportax acrae and Simatherium demissum, and the
rhinoceros Ceratotherium praecox from the early Pliocene Varswater Formation. The giraffid
mortality profiles exhibit classic ‘catastrophic’ shapes, in which progressively older age classes
contain progressively fewer individuals, similar to the age structure of a live population of large
mammals. This suggests that the giraffids died from a cause that does not select with respect to
age. Since the giraffid remains come from an ancient river channel, the most probable cause is
drowning during flood periods. Giraffid bones far outnumber those of other species in the
channel fill, suggesting that the giraffids were particularly prone to drowning, probably because
their feeding habits tied them to the proximity of the river even during flood intervals. The
mortality profiles of the other species all exhibit ‘attritional’ shapes, in which prime-age adults
are seriously under-represented relative to their probable live abundance. For the rhinoceros
and a portion of the M. acrae individuals, the remains of which accumulated subaerially on the
estuarine floodplain adjacent to the river channel, the implication is that death was due mainly
to predation, accidents, endemic disease, and other mortality factors that disproportionately
affect the very young and the old. For the remainder of the M. acrae individuals and for S.
demissum, the remains of which came from the same channel fill as the giraffid bones, it seems
likely that death by attritional causes was followed by secondary incorporation of bones in the
river channel.
CONTENTS
PAGE
siihewaneebaanwee fossilksitemae. are ee ne Rs ee eee es Mee,
Materials and methods for constructing age (= mortality) profiles........... Dei
iiieamortality profiles‘and theirimplications ~-).5-..-2:-2-8 5: -scs0cses 45 243
SummlanyganadscOnclusiOnSey..1e.. ie Selatan Ae aS Seeds me Grae Atlas oS juss
PREKMOMICASEINEIIES Meese ete SNR ee are i Sitan Se eis e ekds chats Stuee es MS
INCICRCMEC Steet Ware yaar nt Pn oid as ae Mas nkes i etenetode: eoe 253
THE LANGEBAANWEG FOSSIL SITE
The occurrence of vertebrate fossils exposed by open-cast phosphate mining
at Langebaanweg (18°9’E 32°58’S) (Fig. 1) was first reported in 1958 (Singer &
Hooijer 1958; Singer 1961). Research since then, supervised mainly by Q. B.
Hendey of the South African Museum, has led to a vast accumulation of
specimens, making Langebaanweg one of the most prolific sources, if not the
233
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 84(6), 1981: 233-254, 7 figs, 3 tables.
234 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
G
@
LANGEBAANWEG
“CAPE TOWN
Fig. 1. The approximate location of Langebaanweg.
UNGULATE MORTALITY IN THE VARSWATER FORMATION 235
most prolific source, of late Tertiary vertebrate fossils anywhere in the world.
Hendey (1970a, 19706, 1972a, 1973, 1974, 1976a, 1981; Hendey & Deacon 1977)
has published periodic overviews of the site, as well as descriptions and analyses
of the carnivore taxa represented in the deposits (Hendey 1972b, 1974, 1977,
1978a, 1978b, 1980; Hendey & Repenning 1972; De Muizon & Hendey 1980).
Specialist reports have also appeared on the invertebrates (Kensley 1972, 1977;
Tankard 1975), penguins (Spheniscidae) (G. Simpson 1971, 1975, 1979), other
birds (Rich 1980), micromammals (Pocock 1976), proboscideans (Maglio &
Hendey 1970; Maglio 1973: 51 ff.), perissodactyls (Boné & Singer 1965; Hooijer
1972, 1976), peccary (Tayassuidae) (Hendey 1976b), giraffids (Harris 1976), and
bovids (Gentry 1974, 1980).
By far the most important source of fossils at Langebaanweg has been the
Open-cast phosphate mine known as the New Varswater Quarry or, more
informally, as ‘E’ Quarry, whose sedimentary sequence has been discussed by
Bishop (1980), Butzer (1973), Dingle et al. (1979), and Hendey (various review
papers cited above, especially 1981). The lowermost unit exposed in ‘E’ Quarry
consists of phosphatic pebbles and cobbles in an unconsolidated sand matrix.
Both invertebrate and vertebrate fossils are relatively abundant, while marine
taxa predominate very heavily. The deposit is clearly of marine origin and was
formed when the Atlantic coast, presently located 13 km to the west, intersected
the area exposed by the quarry.
Nonconformably overlying the marine unit are the deposits which have
provided the vast majority of terrestrial fossils from ‘E’ Quarry, including all
those discussed here. These deposits, assigned to the Varswater Formation,
comprise two principal units, referred to by Hendey as the Quartzose Sand
Member (older) and Pelletal Phosphorite Member (younger).
The Quartzose Sand Member (QSM) consists primarily of fine-grained,
non-phosphatic, white quartz sands reaching a thickness of up to 2 m. Lateral
gradation into salt marsh and tidal mudflat sediments indicates that the sands
were laid down on the estuarine floodplain of a river that probably entered the
sea to the south-west of ‘E’ Quarry. The sands and associated facies contain
both vertebrate and invertebrate fossils, but terrestrial vertebrates predominate.
Abraded bones are rare, while partial, semi-articulated skeletons are common.
Post-mortem fluvial disturbance of skeletons is believed to be minimal; scaven-
gers and other biological agents were probably responsible for most bone
disarticulation, displacement, and destruction.
The Pelletal Phosphorite Member (PPM) consists of up to 20 m of relatively
coarse, generally well-sorted sands incorporating a variable quantity of phos-
phate pellets. Commercial exploitation centres on these deposits. Fossils are
sparse through much of the deposit, but very substantial concentrations occur in
the subunits named Beds 3aS and 3aN, which represent successively more
northerly channel fills of the same river that was responsible for deposition of
the Quartzose Sand Member. Vertebrate fossils predominate heavily, and
terrestrial forms are best represented. In contrast to the situation in the QSM, in
236 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
the PPM abraded bones are common, and partial, semi-articulated skeletons are
virtually unknown. The majority of bones are believed to have been deposited
by the ancient river on bars within its channel.
There are no materials suitable for radiometric age determination at Lange-
baanweg, but it is possible to estimate the age of the deposits by comparing the
taxa they contain to taxa found in dated contexts elsewhere (especially in east
Africa) and by a consideration of the global sea-level and climatic events that
are reflected in the Langebaanweg geologic sequence. On this basis, Hendey
(1981) has concluded that the marine unit at the base of the sequence is
probably of middle to late Miocene age, while the QSM and PPM are probably
about 5 million years old, or early Pliocene as the term is presently defined.
The river, which was primarily responsible for the deposition of the QSM
and PPM sediments, was almost certainly the precursor of the modern Great
Berg, which now flows into the sea 20 km north of Langebaanweg from an origin
in the mountains of the south-western Cape 70 km and more to the east (Fig. 1).
In a broad sense, the channel and estuarine floodplain of the Great Berg provide
analogues for the depositional environment of the QSM and PPM, although the
QSM and PPM fossil assemblages point to a very different climatic and biotic
setting than the historic one. Perhaps most striking is the presence of giraffids,
which are particularly abundant in the PPM. Giraffids were totally absent in the
historic fauna of the region, reflecting the historic absence of suitable browse
trees. Tree growth in early Pliocene times was probably promoted by higher
annual rainfall (the historic average near Langebaanweg is about 250 mm/a),
perhaps combined with a different seasonal distribution of rainfall (presently
confined almost entirely to the winter months). Greater rainfall may be more
directly inferred from the QSM and PPM sediments, which indicate that the
ancient river carried substantially more water than the historic Great Berg, at
least seasonally.
Although essentially the same mammalian taxa are represented in both the
QSM and the PPM, their relative abundance varies dramatically between the
two units.Generally speaking, there is a tendency for several species to be
subequally represented in the QSM, with no single species dominating over-
whelmingly. In contrast, in the PPM, alcelaphine antelopes (Damalacra spp) and
giraffids (Giraffa sp. and especially Sivatherium hendeyi) are superabundant v.
other species. Within the PPM, alcelaphines dominate heavily in Bed 3aS and
giraffids in 3aN. Since Beds 3aS and 3aN were deposited under similar circum-
stances—both are primarily channel fills of the proto-Great Berg—the difference
in their fossil contents may reflect vegetational change, from more open vegeta-
tion in 3aS (dominated by grazing alcelaphines) to more closed (wooded)
vegetation in 3aN (dominated by browsing giraffids). Vegetational change may
also account for the superabundance of alcelaphines and giraffids in the PPM v.
the QSM, but it seems equally possible that the alcelaphines and giraffids are so
common because they were much more likely to drown than other species and
thus had a far higher probability of becoming incorporated in channel sediments.
UNGULATE MORTALITY IN THE VARSWATER FORMATION 237
The implication would probably be that the alcelaphines and giraffids were more
inclined than other species to remain near the river for feeding (?the giraffids) or
to attempt crossings (?the alcelaphines) during periods of (?seasonally) high flow.
Flooding as a cause of death tends to select its victims without regard for
age. Therefore, if the alcelaphines and giraffids are superabundant in the Bed
3aS and 3aN channel fills, at least in part because these species were especially
prone to drowning during flood periods, analysis of their remains may be
expected to produce age (= mortality) profiles in which the age structure of the
original live populations is closely mirrored. In contrast, if animals represented
in the QSM died primarily from predation, endemic disease, accidents, etc. on
the ancient floodplain, analysis of their remains should produce age profiles in
which those classes most prone to death by predation, etc.—the very young and
the old—are disproportionately well represented compared to their initial live
abundance. Mortality profiles reflecting death from an agency such as flooding
that is non-selective with respect to age are sometimes called ‘catastrophic’,
while profiles reflecting death from predation, accidents, endemic disease, and
other causes that disproportionately affect the very young and the old are
sometimes called ‘attritional’ (Voorhies 1969, with references).
This paper presents mortality profiles for some pertinent QSM and PPM
ungulate species in order to help determine whether differences in relative
taxonomic abundance between the units reflect vegetational change or the
difference in depositional facies. More generally, the mortality profiles are
obviously relevant for reconstructing the ancient Langebaanweg environment, as
well as the behaviour of its inhabitants. Finally, the profiles may be compared to
to those from other sites, for example those where bones were accumulated by
people, to help explain the nature of ungulate mortality there.
MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR CONSTRUCTING AGE
(= MORTALITY) PROFILES
In general, teeth monitor advancing age more closely than any other
element in mammals. At Langebaanweg, as in most fossil assemblages, they are
also among the easiest elements to identify taxonomically, and they are also
relatively abundant because of their durability. These are the reasons that teeth
were chosen to construct age profiles for various QSM and PPM taxa.
The taxa to be analysed were selected partly for their absolute abundance in
the QSM or the PPM and partly for their suitability to age determination by the
method discussed below. The rhinoceros, Ceratotherium praecox, and the bos-
elaphine antelope, Mesembriportax acrae, were the most suitable species in the
QSM, while the giraffids, Sivatherium hendeyi and Giraffa sp., the buffalo,
Simatherium demissum, and the boselaphine, M. acrae, all as represented in Bed
3aN, were the most suitable examples in the PPM.
The Giraffa sample almost certainly includes some teeth from the dentally
very similar Palaeotragus cf. germaini, an okapi-like giraffid represented by
238 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ossicones in Bed 3aN. However, the relative rarity of the ossicones, combined
with the homogeneity of the Giraffa dental samples, as reflected in relatively
small coefficients of variation (Table 1), suggests that ‘contamination’ by
Palaeotragus is probably very limited.
A more serious possibility of taxonomic mixture exists in the Bed 3aN
boselaphine sample, in which the coefficients of variation are very large (Table
1), confirming a visual impression of substantial size variability. On average, the
Bed 3aN boselaphine teeth are significantly larger than their QSM counterparts
(Fig. 6 and Table 1), and it is possible that the 3aN sample reflects a rapid trend
TABLE 1
Sample size (N), mean (x). standard deviation (s), and coefficient of variation (V = 100s/x)
for measurements of basal breadth and unworn crown height on selected teeth of Ceratotherium
praecox, Sivatherium hendeyi, Giraffa sp., Simatherium demissum, and Mesembriportax acrae
in the Quartzose Sand Member and Bed 3aN of the Pelletal Phosphorite Member, ‘E’ Quarry,
Langebaanweg. The measurements are defined in Figures 2 to 6 and presented in millimetres.
G. Simpson ef al. (1960) suggest that biologically homogeneous samples generally exhibit
coefficients of variation that are less than 10. A coefficient of more than 10 may indicate that
a sample includes specimens from more than one species. The data presented below suggest
that species admixture may be a problem with respect to the sample attributed to
Mesembriportax acrae in Bed 3aN.
dP* Pe
INGaox S Vv N x S V
Ceratotherium praecox (QSM)
basal breadth . : fasalOS 555690) O25 40 era 43 10532,” 3,46 ae
unworn crown height So — —— IP S51 — —
dP, M;
ING S Vv INO ox S Vv
Sivatherium hendeyi (3aN)
basal breadth . 4 = 324 2045 io2) 7243 153) 33588 1579) See
unworn crown height a — — 42 42,78 2,28 3533
Giraffa sp. (3aN)
basal breadth . ; 5 ol eR 2 Gee oe: 46 34,88 1,37) el
unworn crown height Seay, S08 1,26 8,36 103 27202 0,73 2.70
Simatherium demissum (3aN)
basal breadth . : cn oe LS LOG T S33) iS 905 1,30 6,82
unworn crown height SS — — —_—- — — —
Mesembriportax acrae See
basal breadth . IA S40 OSS 6,17 ales 1,09 7,18
unworn crown height = tS — — —_—- — == —-
Mesembriportax acrae (3aN)
basal breadth ‘
unworn crown height SS — — Le a2 -- —
UNS
—
i=)
—
(oe)
S
\O
oo
\o
ON
WwW
N
—
—
fq
io)
N
N
—
—
—
ON
N
Nn
towards increasing size in Mesembriportax acrae in 3aN times, or a mixture of
specimens from M. acrae and a larger (unidentified) boselaphine, or from M.
acrae and a larger, dentally very similar tragelaphine. Sorting out the alterna-
tives remains a goal of future research. For the moment, the possibility of
sample mixture limits, but does not entirely rule out, interpretation of the Bed
3aN boselaphine age profile.
UNGULATE MORTALITY IN THE VARSWATER FORMATION 239
The two alcelaphine antelope species (Damalacra neanica and D. acalla),
that are superabundant in Bed 3aS and that are perhaps the best represented
species in the composite Langebaanweg assemblage, were excluded from consid-
eration because criteria to separate their teeth have not yet been developed. A
search for such criteria is planned, and if none are found, a mortality profile
based on mixed samples will be presented in a future paper. Future research
should also permit the presentation of profiles for several additional ungulate
species represented in the OSM, the PPM, or both, and perhaps also for some
well-represented carnivores.
In theory, at least three basic methods exist for estimating individual age
from teeth (see Morris 1972 or Spinage 1973 for general reviews). The first
involves counting the number of growth increments or ‘annuli’ in cementum on
the roots of teeth. In many species, including close living relatives of some that
are important here, annuli counts have been shown to correlate closely with age.
A more obvious, but generally less accurate method of age determination is
subjective evaluation of dental eruption and wear. Finally, age may be estimated
by measuring a dental dimension, particularly crown height, that clearly varies
with age.
Cementum annuli are often difficult to observe and count in fossils (Spiess
1979), and the preparation of teeth for examination is time-consuming and
destructive. Subjective evaluation of dental eruption and wear generally results
in age classes that differ greatly among themselves in the number of months or
years that each covers. Additionally, the method works best with whole denti-
tions, while the Langebaanweg samples consist mainly of teeth that were
isolated from jawbones during mining operations. These considerations leave
crown height measurements as the most practical alternative for estimating the
ages of individual Langebaanweg ungulates.
The mathematical relationship between advancing age and decreasing
crown height has not been established for most living species and cannot be
established for those from Langebaanweg, all of which are extinct. However, for
hypsodont ungulates such as the Langebebaanweg species of concern here, it has
been argued that the following assumptions permit useful estimates of age from
crown height (Klein 1978; Klein er al. 1981):
(i) that reduction in crown height is roughly constant through the life of a
tooth, that is, that the relationship between decreasing crown height and
advancing age 1s approximately linear:
(ii) that for a deciduous tooth, the chronological age of complete crown
reduction—when the crown is all but worn away—is the age when the tooth
is replaced by a permanent tooth. For a permanent tooth, the chronological
age of complete crown reduction is the age past which no individuals
survive in the wild, sometimes known as ‘potential ecological longevity’.
The dental eruption/replacement schedules and potential ecological longevi-
ties of extinct species may be inferred from those of their closest living
relatives of similar size and morphology. Estimates inferred for pertinent
240
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Langebaanweg species are presented in Table 2. It is possible to show
mathematically that only very large errors in these estimates will materially
affect the shape of age profiles based on them (Klein et al. 1981);
(111) that the amount of crown height lost per unit time on a deciduous
tooth equals the initial unworn crown height divided by the time interval
between age of eruption (usually birth) and age of replacement by a
TABLE 2
Ages of dental eruption and replacement and of potential ecological longevity inferred for the
Langebaanweg species considered in this paper. All figures are in years.
dP4 P4
Potential
Age of Age of Age of ecological Basis for inference
eruption replacement eruption longevity
Ceratotherium praecox . 0 6 6 35 Data on the dentally very similar
black rhinoceros (Diceros bicornis)
(Goddard 1970)
dP, M;
Age of Age of Age of Age of Basis for inference
eruption replacement eruption replacement
Giraffa sp. . : : 0 4,5 3h 5) 28 Data on the dentally very similar
modern giraffe (Giraffa camelo-
pardalis) (Hall-Martin 1976)
Sivatherium hendeyi : 0 6 4,67 37,24 Assumption that S. hendeyi para-
meters would exceed those of
modern giraffe by roughly the
same (1/3) proportion that S.
hendeyi teeth exceed modern
giraffe teeth in size
dP, M3;
Potential
Age of Age of Age of ecological Basis for inference
eruption replacement eruption longevity
Mesembriportax acrae . 0 DES 2 18 Data on extant bovids of similar
size, such as Lichtenstein’s harte-
beest (Alcelaphus lichtensteini)
(Mitchell 1965), black wildebeest
(Connochaetes gnou) (Von Richter
1971, 1974), and greater kudu
(Tragelaphus strepsiceros) (C.
Simpson 1966)
Simatherium demissum . 0 3,5 2,5 20 Assumption that S. demissum para-
meters would be smaller than those
of the Cape buffalo (Syncerus
caffer) (Grimsdell 1973: Sinclair
1977) by roughly the same (1/4)
proportion that S. demissum teeth
are smaller than Cape buffalo ones
permanent tooth. The amount of crown height lost per unit time on a
permanent tooth equals the initial unworn crown height divided by the time
interval between age of eruption and age at ‘potential ecological longevity’.
Initial crown height may usually be estimated from unworn or lightly worn
teeth present in any sample large enough to calculate an age profile. The
initial crown heights used in this study are presented in Table 3. It may be
shown mathematically that only a very large error in estimated initial crown
height will materially affect the shape of an age profile (Klein er al. 1981).
The key assumption here is that the rate of crown height reduction is
constant. In the present context, it is pertinent that a more or less constant rate
had
been shown to characterize teeth of the Cape buffalo (Syncerus caffer)
UNGULATE MORTALITY IN THE VARSWATER FORMATION 241
TABLE 3
Initial unworn crown heights (in millimetres) used to calculate age profiles for Langebaanweg
ungulate species considered in this paper. The initial unworn height of dP, in Giraffa sp. and
of M, in both Giraffa sp. and Sivatherium hendeyi was taken as the mean height plus one
standard deviation from the mean height of unworn specimens in the Langebaanweg samples.
In the absence of any completely unworn specimens, the initial height of dP, in S. hendeyi
was taken as the mean height plus one standard deviation from the mean height of thirteen
very lightly worn specimens. Giraffa and S. hendeyi dP,’s and M,;’s whose heights exceeded
the calculated ‘initial heights’ were automatically assigned to the youngest age class possible.
The initial height of dP* in Ceratotherium praecox was estimated by adding 0,5 mm to
the height of the highest tooth present, which was very lightly worn. The initial height of the
C. praecox P* was taken as the height of the single unworn specimen present. In the absence
of any unworn specimens, the initial height of dP, in Mesembriportax acrae was taken as
1 mm higher than the highest, lightly worn dP, in the Quartzose Sand Member sample. The
initial height of the M. acrae M, was taken as 0,5 mm higher than the highest (very) lightly
worn M; in the Bed 3aN sample. The initial height of the Simatherium demissum M; was
estimated by adding 1,5 mm to the height of the highest-crowned M; present, which was
lightly worn. There were no unworn or lightly worn S. demissum dP,’s in the sample, so the
initial crown height of this tooth was estimated by multiplying the ratio between S. demissum
M,; initial crown height and Cape buffalo M, initial height (36/53) by the initial height of the
Cape buffalo dP, (24,0 mm), as determined in the author’s previous work.
Given the variety of methods used to obtain initial crown heights, it is obvious that the
values presented below are arbitrary to some extent, but it may be shown mathematically
that only very large departures fiom these values would materially affect the shapes of the
age profiles calculated from them.
Initial (unworn) crown height (mm)
dP* P*
Ceratotherium praecox : . 45,0 65,1
dP, M;
Giraffa sp. : ; ‘ =m 1653 27,8
Sivatherium hendeyi . : ~ 2354 45,1
Mesembriportax acrae , . 10,0 33,0
Simatherium demissum : . 16,3 36,0
(Grimsdell 1973) and of the giraffe (Giraffa camelopardalis) (Hall-Martin 1976),
which are close living relatives of the Langebaanweg buffalo (Simatherium
demissum) and giraffids (Sivatherium hendeyi and Giraffa sp.) respectively. A
roughly constant rate has also been demonstrated in the Rocky Mountain elk
(Cervus canadensis) (Klein et al. 1981), whose teeth are notably similar in size
and morphology to those of Langebaanweg Mesembriportax acrae.
The elk study was undertaken specifically to check the reliability of the
assumptions listed above. It was found that crown height was not a particularly
accurate predictor of individual elk age, but the distribution of elk ages predicted
from crown heights closely approximated the distribution of known ages, when
both predicted and known ages were grouped into relatively broad, but analyti-
cally useful age classes. The age class used was based on 10 per cent of potential
ecological longevity (approximately 16 years in elk, leading to a class interval of
1,6 years). 10 per cent of potential ecological longevity has also been used for
grouping predicted ages within each species here, where it has the particular
advantage of allowing direct comparison of age profiles among species that
probably had very different potential longevities.
242 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
While the elk study strongly supported the use of crown heights to construct
age profiles, it did suggest some modifications in the assumptions listed above.
In particular, on average, elk shed their deciduous teeth before the crowns are
completely worn away, and a better estimate of the (hypothetical) age of
complete reduction in elk would be ‘age of shedding plus 25 per cent’. On
reflection, it seems likely that most ungulates shed their deciduous teeth before
the crowns are completely reduced and ‘age of shedding plus 25 per cent’ has
been used for each species in this study. Its principal effect is to place more
individuals in the second 10 per cent of lifespan and fewer in the first. The elk
study further suggested that permanent teeth which erupt later (e.g. M, or M;)
fit the assumptions of constant crown height reduction and of reduction to ‘0’ at
or very near ‘potential ecological longevity’ better than permanent teeth which
erupt earlier (e.g. M,). This result has been taken into account here as well.
In order to construct a profile that will include individuals of all possible
ages within a species, crown heights must be measured on a category of
deciduous teeth and on a category of permanent teeth. For Langebaanweg
Sivatherium hendeyi, Giraffa sp., Simatherium demissum, and Mesembriportax
acrae, dP, and M; were selected, mainly for the ease with which they may be
recognized when isolated. In each species M; erupted before dP, was shed, so
that the age profile produced from dP, crown heights overlaps with the one
produced from the M; heights. In each case the overlap occurs in the second 10
per cent of lifespan, and the number of individuals assigned to that interval in
the final (composite) age profile was based on either dP, or M;, whichever
suggested the larger number.
In the rhinoceros, Ceratotherium praecox, dP, was shed before M, erupted.
Use of these two teeth would thus automatically exclude some individuals, and it
is obviously desirable to select another pair. Two further considerations affected
the selection. First, it is difficult, if not impossible, consistently to distinguish M,
from M, or M!' from M? when these teeth are isolated, as most of the rhinoceros
specimens were. Second, the structure of rhinoceros mandibular teeth suggests
that their rate of wear may be exceptionally rapid just after eruption, seriously
violating one of the assumptions behind the use of crown heights to predict age.
The maxillary teeth appear structurally better suited to the assumptions. These
considerations led to the selection of dP* and P* for construction of the
rhinoceros age profile to be presented here, although, in fact, the one derived
from dP, and P, is basically similar in shape and implications.
The dental dimension taken as crown height is essentially the same for all
species and is illustrated in Figures 2 to 6. It is the minimum distance between
the occlusal surface cf a tooth and the base of the enamel, measured on the
buccal face for mandibular teeth and on the lingual face for maxillary ones. On
multilobed (or multilophed) teeth such as those of the species involved here, the
measurement may be made on any lobe or loph. Measurements made on the
anteriormost lobe (or loph) have been used to calculate the age profiles
presented below, except in the case of Sivatherium hendeyi, where measure-
UNGULATE MORTALITY IN THE VARSWATER FORMATION 243
ments made on the second (or middle) lobe of M; were used. The reason is that
many S. hendeyi M;’s are broken, and the second lobe is easily identifiable as
belonging to an Ms, whereas the first is not. All measurements were made with
Helios dial-reading calipers to the nearest tenth of a millimetre.
THE MORTALITY PROFILES AND THEIR IMPLICATIONS
Figures 2 to 6 present the age (mortality) profiles for each of the Lange-
baanweg species of concern here, as well as the crown height frequency
distributions on which the profiles are based. The figures also show the fre-
quency distributions of basal breadths for the same teeth whose crown heights
were measured.
If each dental sample is truly homogeneous, basal breadths would probably
be normally distributed, since normality is an almost universal characteristic of
linear measurements on biological specimens. A significant departure from
normality may indicate that dental size is sexually dimorphic or that a sample
actually includes specimens from more than one species. (In either case, if
enough specimens were included, the frequency distributions would be multi-
modal.) Applications of various tests suggested by Simpson ef al. (1960) and
Sokal & Rohlf (1969) to the Langebaanweg basal breadth distributions revealed
only one significant departure from normality. This was for Bed 3aN Mesembri-
portax acrae, supporting the suggestion (above) that the sample may be taxo-
nomically mixed.
Assuming that the relatively large samples available for Sivatherium hen-
deyi, Giraffa sp., and Ceratotherium praecox presumably reflect the populations
from which they were drawn, the normal shape of the basal breadth distributions
supports taxonomic homogeneity in each case and suggests that the dentitions of
the species were not sexually dimorphic in size. (The alternative—that the teeth
in each instance were drawn almost entirely from one sex—seems highly
improbable). Perhaps even more important in the present context is that the
heights of unworn crowns also appear to be distributed normally in those species
(Giraffa sp. and especially Sivatherium hendeyi) where the samples of unworn
crowns are reasonably large (Table 1). Generally speaking, marked sexual
dimorphism in size is probably quite rare in ungulate dentitions (see, for
example, the measurements on teeth of known sex in Klein 1974, 1975; Klein et
al. 1981), which justifies ignoring sex in calculating age profiles from ungulate
crown heights.
Examination of the mortality profiles presented separately in Figures 2 to 6
and recast as a group in Figure 7, shows that there are two basic types. In type
one, characterizing Sivatherium hendeyi and Giraffa sp., individuals in the first
10 per cent of lifespan dominate heavily and successive lifespan segments include
progressively fewer individuals, with very few beyond 40 per cent of potential
lifespan. Type one is a classic ‘catastrophic’ mortality profile. In type two,
characterizing Ceratotherium praecox, Simatherium demissum, and Mesem-
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
244
‘}X9] 94) Ul pourteydxoa se ‘suonnqmsip
JYysIoY UMOIO dy) WO paye[Noyed sea JOU pueY-jYys11 19ddn oy) ur a[yord o8e oY *s,{~V UIOMUN Jo s}YZIOY4 UMOIO
oY} IO} pue syjpeoig jeseq 10} poJuasoid o1e suONRIADp plepuRIs pue sURd| ‘sosse[O WU ¢‘~ OUI podno1s udEq
SABY SJUSWOINSBOU [RUISIIO oY], ‘soMUBEqosULT] ‘UONeUIOY Jo}eMsIeA ‘IoquIayW] oA10Yydsoyg [eI>][9g 24) JO Ne¢
pog Woy a[dures Mapuay winisayjvargy dy} Ul S}YsIOY UMOIO puR syIpeosg [eseq ‘| pue "gp Jo UONNGINSIP ou], *Z “S14
we cz S C2 Ol Gl S| Sil 02 S22 Se ww oz Sz s'2z Oz si
SS
RSS SSS SSSR SIS SSS
Ses825: S$ BSSSoe
$3 $3
~ oo oP <S
Ol Ol
Oz (oy
(9q0| 48113) o£ oe
syBiey uMold |
ysyppeiq jpspq @i Es, Ov
(o}*)
(pZE=N) WW ZS FSbO™7
SSS
Ol
(b22=N)
0z 02
(@qo} puodes) |
yyBiey umMmoso
(2b=N) 82'2 +8L'2b
£yw wiomun
(eq0| 1841) Jo
yspoesg |pspq Es'>
uDdsoej!! jo %
%OO0i O06 08 QL 09 OS Ob O£ OZ Oi O
SS_SS >
=e
= foo 2
=—- Noe peg
3140Y’d JOV = cont SAMNVVESONV 1
= OoSz2
MMApUuay WNLIAY{DAIS
D
@
N
OO£
245
UNGULATE MORTALITY IN THE VARSWATER FORMATION
"1X9] OY} Ul poureydxa se ‘suonNqiyjsip 1YysI9Yy UMOIO dy} WO
payepnoyeo sem JouIOS puey-Yysts Joddn ayy ut sfyoid ase oy] “YyI90} UIOMUN Jo s}YBIOY UMOID dy) IO] pue syIpPeoIq
[eseq 10} pojuesoid ore suoneIAap piepueys pue suray] “sassejo wut ¢‘Q OJUI padnos3 useq savy s}UOWIOINseoW
[BUISIIO oY, “‘Somueegosuey] ‘uOoneULIOY IoJeMsIeA ‘Ioquioy s110Ydsoug [eI2]]2g ey) Jo Nee pog wo. ojdures
(oursenoarjeg pur) “ds vffoiy oy) ul s}y8Ioy UMOID pue sypecrq [eseq ‘; pue gp JO UONNGMsIp sy, “¢ “SI
ww SZ o's SZ (oxe)] S‘2l O's! Sill wwoog Gil
a tee
(v=N) 92'1+80'SI
Pyp usomun
wwO sz (ox Spl 00! s‘2l o'SI SLI 002 22 loxey4 Siz OoE wuooEe loved
(Sp=N) £W =
(Ol=N)€2'0FZ022
€w uwsomun
updsej!| jo %
(eu!6D440eD/Dq 8)
‘ds DsJoug
%001_06 08 OL 09 OS Ob OF OZ O1_ |
i—F Ol >
=Per
— 3
= Ss
| @
J a
qa Ss
— 2
[=a <.
3140¥d 39 =a
=i
—j @
-—+ Op
Osi c‘2l (oe
—
(ZS=N) 92 1F bE'dl
(okey. c‘2z2 002
No¢ peg
SSAMNVVESAONV 1
246 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
LANGEBAANWEG
QSM
number of
individuals
Ceratotherium praecox
basal
breadth
70,32£3,46 (N=43)
——
p4
5 dP* crown height (N=11) S— unworn P4(65,1mm) Pt crown height (N=53) crown breadth
45 35 25 1Smm 60 70 80mm
Fig. 4. The distribution of dP* and P* crown heights and of P* crown breadths in the Ceratotherium praecox
sample from the Quartzose Sand Member, Varswater Formation, Langebaanweg. The original measurements
have been grouped into 1 mm classes. The mean and standard deviation are presented for P* crown breadth.
The age profile in the upper right-hand corner was calculated from the crown height distributions, as
explained in the text.
LANGEBAANWEG
Simatherium demissum (3aN)
AGE PROFILE
individuals
O 10 20 3040 5060 70 8090 100%
% of lifespan
dP,
basal breadth crown height M3
5 5 5 19,25+ 1,48 (N=1I0)
==
10 25 bmm 175 15 12 Z5mm IS 75 20 225 25mm
Fig. 5. The distribution of dP, and M; basal breadths and crown heights in the Simatherium demissum sample
from Bed 3aN of the Pelletal Phosphorite Member, Langebaanweg. The original measurements have been
grouped into 0,5 mm classes. The mean and standard deviation of M; breadth are presented. The age profile
in the upper right-hand corner was calculated from the crown height distributions, as explained in the text.
247
UNGULATE MORTALITY IN THE VARSWATER FORMATION
1X9} OY] UI pouTe{dxo se ‘suOINqIIjsIp yYsIOYy UMOIO
OY] WOT, poyepNoyeo o1OM JOUIOS puey-}Yys 1oddn oy} ul soyyoid ose oy] ‘syipeoiq jeseq 10}; pojyudsoid ov suONvIADp piepUs pu sURd;\, ‘Sasse]O
WILU $*() OJUI podnojs Uddq DARY SJUIWIOINSRIW [PUISIIO OY “SoOMUveQosUPT ‘UONPUIO Jo}VMSIL A ‘Ioquidj] aIOYdsoyg Jel][9d 241 JO Nee pog Woy
pur Ioquisyy purs ssozJ1end oy) Wos sojdures avsov xpjsodiquiasay IYI Ul SJYysIOY UMOIO puke SYy\pRoiq [eseq ‘J pue "gp JO UOTNIISIP 94, °9 ‘314
UIWIOMG cuGMEGUNO|NNGicinGliaS 2
(612N) WSO
wwo se ¢ sz aca sa cu
(€2=N) NOE
updsaji; 3o %
%00!I 0608 0109 OS O# O£ OZ Ol O
N0¢
OcuGiccsc Sic 1Ocn Giceuuse Guo
s WSO
Ol
I S
ae 2‘l2
W usoMun
——f--
(IZ2N)22'2F vOL!
Ol
Ew fw
yspoesq AN
jOS0q (apna
UDdS9}1| JO %
% 00! 06 08 0 09 OS OF O£ OZ O1 O
x a
< <
a a
5 S.
Ole WSO (0)
SAMIdOYUd 39V
(21 =N) 601 FZI'SI
ww¢'2z Oz SI
cI
ao
Oz s'2z2 se s'zz oc s'ze se Sue wwciz O22 Su SI
¢
G2
SZl
Ol
Ol
\)
wwc'z <¢ sz oF sta wuwe'z o sz
WSO s WSO S
¢ Baie
(Z=N) 8S OF OF'6
Ol Ol
wwe'z ¢g sz of Sa wwe oO siz
Ss S
No¢ NO¢
+
(v=N) 8607810! 5
syBiey uMOsJD «= J PD 8.4 |DSOq
Vyp Yyp
90490 xXOssOd/IsAGqQUEesEy
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
248
(N=62)
Ceratotherium (QSM)
Sivatherium (3aN)
(N=5I7)
O 80 90 100
z=
o
m
ft
'S
Ss °
iS (Yo)
2s
S 8
iS
E g
°
La)
°
WN
WU
°
fe)
= °
za
o (op)
© ro)
rr (0)
= fe)
3 S
ao
do
OS cS
ied vo
Sa 2
SB 9
ro)
ap)
°
WN
°
S IWAGIAIGNI
Mesembriportax (QSM’
Mesembriportax (3aN)
(N=27)
(N=27)
OF LIFESPAN
Yo
Figure 7.
UNGULATE MORTALITY IN THE VARSWATER FORMATION 249
briportax acrae, individuals beyond 40 per cent of lifespan predominate heavily
and ones in lifespan segments between 10 and 40 per cent are particularly
infrequent. Type two would be a classic ‘attritional’ mortality profile, except for
the relative rarity of individuals in the first 10 per cent of lifespan. Application of
the Kolmogorov—Smirnov test (results in the caption of Fig. 7) supports the
assertion that the Sivatherium and Giraffa profiles resemble each other and
differ from those of the other species, which are, however, similar to each other.
The catastrophic shape of the Sivatherium and Giraffa mortality profiles clearly
suggests that the individuals present in the Bed 3aN channel fill were victims of
drowning, and thus that their superabundance versus other species in the deposit
may reflect a greater tendency to remain near the river during flood periods. The
most likely explanation for this behaviour is that the trees on which the giraffids
browsed were largely restricted to the immediate vicinity of the river. Other species,
such as the rhinoceros and the boselaphine, which probably browsed on understorey
plants, and the buffalo and alcelaphines, which were probably grazers, were
probably attracted away from the river during flood intervals by the vegetation flush
and more widely available surface-water accompanying rains.
After the giraffids, the alcelaphines are the most common species in Bed
3aN, and it is possible that, their food preferences aside, they were more prone
than other species to attempt to cross the river in flood periods. Together with a
reduction in the density of woodland along the river, this could account for the
superabundance of alcelaphines v. other species in Bed 3aS. Although the
alcelaphine crown heights have yet to be measured, subjective examination
suggests that they will provide ‘catastrophic’ age profiles at least broadly similar
to the giraffid ones.
Assuming that the giraffids are the most common species in the Bed 3aN
channel fill because they were more likely than other species to be caught in
floods, it would obviously be interesting to know whether flooding was seasonal
Fig. 7. Age profiles of Sivatherium hendeyi, Giraffa sp. (and Palaeotragine), Ceratotherium
praecox, Simatherium demissum, and Mesembriportax acrae in the Quartzose Sand Member
and in Bed 3aN of the Pelletal Phosphorite Member, Varswater Formation, Langebaanweg.
The Kolmogorov-Smirnov results below indicate that the profiles of S. hendeyi and Giraffa sp.
are Statistically indistinguishable from one another, but differ significantly from the profiles of
other species, which are in turn statistically indistinguishable from one another. A Kolmogo-
rov-Smirnov value of 1,36 implies a difference significant at the 0,05 level; a value of 1,63
implies a difference significant at the 0,01 level. Values reflecting a difference significant at the
0,05 level or below are underlined.
Siva- Cerato- Giraffa |§ Mesembri- Sima-
therium therium sp. (and portax therium
hendeyi_ praecox Palaeo- acrae demissum
(3aN) (QSM) __tragine) (QSM) (3aN) (3aN)
(3aN)
Sivatherium hendeyi (3aN) —
Ceratotherium praecox (QSM) 4,99 —
Giraffa sp. (and Palaeotragine) (3aN) 0,70 3,87 —
Mesembriportax acrae (QSM) 3524: 0,69 250) =
(3aN) 329 ‘
Simatherium demissum (3aN) 2,09 0,59 U7 Oaer 20340 =
250 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
or not. If the giraffids were seasonally restricted breeders, as most modern
African ungulates are (Mentis 1972), and if flooding were seasonal, crown height
distributions such as those in Figures 2 and 3 could be expected to exhibit
patterned multimodality (Kurtén 1953). Successive modes representing cohorts
of individuals with average birth dates a year apart would be separated by
equidistant gaps representing the average amount of crown height lost by each
cohort between flood seasons.
Clearly, neither the Sivatherium nor the Giraffa crown height distributions
in Figures 2 and 3 exhibit the kind of multimodality from which seasonality may
be reasonably inferred. In the case of the Giraffa distributions, the reason may
be relatively small sample size. In the case of the Sivatherium distributions,
based on much larger samples, the reason may be that the species bred more or
less throughout the year or that flooding (drowning) was not seasonal. In
modern Giraffa camelopardalis, the closest living relative of Sivatherium, breed-
ing peaks tend to be subtle or absent (Mentis 1972; Foster & Dagg 1972).
However, it is also important to point out that Sivatherium hendeyi was
relatively low-crowned, particularly relative to (inferred) potential individual
lifespan. This means that even if breeding were seasonal, the average amount of
crown height lost by an age cohort each year was relatively small and there was
probably substantial overlap in crown heights between individuals of adjacent
cohorts. The detection of patterned multimodality reflecting seasonal births and
deaths may therefore require truly enormous samples. It is pertinent here that
the author failed to find multimodality in a large sample of similarly low-
crowned elk, in which seasonally restricted births and deaths were historically
documented (Klein ef al. 1981). Overall then, the giraffids are probably less than
ideal species for testing the hypothesis of seasonal bone accumulation at Lange-
baanweg. Far more appropriate would be the alcelaphines, because they are far
more hypsodont relative to (inferred) potential lifespan and because their close
living relatives aften exhibit well-defined birth peaks. Additionally, alcelaphine
teeth are superabundant in the Bed 3aS channel fill. The possibility of using
them to detect seasonal mortality is added reason for measuring their crown
heights in the near future.
The mortality profiles of Ceratotherium praecox and Mesembriportax acrae
in the QSM only partly support the a priori suggestion that QSM species would
exhibit attritional patterns. This is because individuals in the first 10 per cent of
lifespan are seriously underrepresented relative to their probable level of mortal-
ity from attritional factors. The situation is similar to that noted by Sinclair
(1977) for Cape buffalo on the Serengeti Plain and by Goddard (1970) for black
rhinoceros in Tsavo National Park. In both instances, large samples of skulls
observed in the field included remarkably few individuals in the first 10 per cent
of lifespan, though such individuals were known to be characterized by relatively
high mortality, as in free-ranging large mammal populations generally. In both
instances, the rarity of young skulls is attributed to their greater tendency to
disintegrate from weathering or to be broken up by carnivores.
UNGULATE MORTALITY IN THE VARSWATER FORMATION Sh
Assuming that the relative lack of very young individuals in the QSM
profiles at least partly reflects carnivore destruction or removal of bones before
burial, it becomes especially interesting that very young individuals are extreme-
ly well represented in ‘attritional’ profiles constructed from the crown heights of
large ungulates in late Pleistocene archeological and carnivore (probable Hyaena
brunnea) bone accumulations in southern Africa (Klein 1978 and unpublished).
With regard to the archeological sites, the implication would be either that the
occupants were expert at locating the carcasses of very young animals before
carnivores destroyed them or removed parts to dens, or that the occupants
themselves were active predators on very young animals. The latter alternative
seems more plausible, given the likely desire of hominids to avoid conflict with
other potential scavengers whose special senses would probably bring them to a
carcass first. These considerations lead to the further suggestion that early
Pleistocene hominids, hypothetically relying more heavily on scavenging, would
probably produce a bone accumulation in which ‘attritional’ profiles were
relatively deficient in very young individuals, similar to those from Langebaan-
weg, rather than those from later Pleistocene archeological sites.
The age profiles of Bed 3aN Simatherium demissum and Mesmbriportax
acrae require comment not because they are relatively deficient in very young
individuals, but because they are clearly not ‘catastrophic’ in a deposit where it
has already been shown that catastrophic death took place. In the case of Bed
3aN M. acrae, it is possible that the profile has been distorted from catastrophic
_ shape by taxonomic admixture in the sample (see above), though it is difficult to
see how admixture could have this effect. Overall, since both the S$. demissum
and M. acrae profiles in Bed 3aN closely resemble those of the QSM species, it
seems most likely that they are based on dentitions which were either reworked
from the QSM deposits or which were washed off the floodplain adjacent to the
3aN channel. One obvious test of this hypothesis would be to examine bones of
Bed 3aN S. demissum and M. acrae to see if they exhibit patterns of weathering
or carnivore-gnawing different from those of the 3aN giraffids and perhaps
similar to those of the QSM species. This will be an aspect of future research.
SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
The mortality profiles constructed from dental crown heights of five Lange-
baanweg ungulate species belong to two clearly distinct types. Type one, in
which individuals in the first 10 per cent of potential lifespan predominate and in
which there are progressively fewer individuals in each succeeding lifespan
segment, characterizes the giraffids, Sivatherium hendeyi and Giraffa sp., found
in the channel fill deposits of Bed 3aN. The shape of the profile suggests that the
giraffids died catastrophically, probably by drowning during periods of high river
flow. This suggests in turn that the giraffids are superabundant v. other species
in the channel fill because they were more inclined to remain near the river
during flood periods. The most plausible explanation of this behaviour is that the
trees on which they browsed were largely confined to the river margins.
252. ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Other species with different feeding-habits were probably attracted away from
the river during flood intervals by a rain-induced vegetation flush and increase in
surface water.
In the second type of mortality profile, characterizing the rhinoceros Cera-
totherium praecox and the boselaphine antelope Mesembriportax acrae in the
floodplain sediments of the Quartzose Sand Member, and the buffalo Simather-
ium demissum and the boselaphine M. acrae in Bed 3aN, individuals beyond 40
per cent potential lifespan predominate and there are relatively few individuals
in lifespan segments between 10 and 40 per cent. The shape of the profiles
suggests death by natural attrition (from predation, endemic disease, etc.).
though individuals in the first 10 per cent of lifespan are under-represented v.
their probable level of natural mortality. This is probably because their bones
were particularly susceptible to weathering or to destruction or removal by
carnivores before burial. The fact that the Bed 3aN profiles of S. demissum and
M. acrae are very similar to those of QSM acrae suggests that the bones of S.
demissum and M. acrae in the 3aN channel fill were either reworked from older
(QSM) deposits or swept off the floodplain adjacent to the 3aN channel.
Assuming that the under-representation of very young individuals in the
Langebaanweg ‘attritional’ profiles at least in part reflects differential carnivore
destruction or removal of their bones v. those of older animals, it is potentially
meaningful that very young individuals are very well represented in ‘attritional’ age
profiles of large ungulates in late Pleistocene archeological sites in southern Africa.
Since the late Pleistocene people were probably much less successful at locating
fresh carcasses than other predators and/or scavengers, the implication is that they
actively preyed on the young animals. If, as logic suggests, earlier Pleistocene
hominids were more dependent on scavenging (and less successful at hunting), it
follows that attritional profiles of ungulates in their sites would resemble the
Langebaanweg ones in the under-representation of very young individuals.
The Langebaanweg assemblage includes several other species which are
sufficiently well represented to permit construction of mortality profiles. Most
promising in terms of their abundance are the alcelaphines, Damalacra neanica
and D. acalla, which probably also have the greatest potential for revealing
whether flooding by the ancient Langebaanweg River was seasonal or not. In
future research with the Langebaanweg assemblage, the author will focus on
measurement and analysis of the alcelaphine material, as well as on age (and
possible sex) determination in other well-represented species.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The author thanks Q. B. Hendey for encouragement to undertake this
study and for stimulating discussion of its implications. K. Allwarden helped to
draft the figures: K: Allwardens ko W. Butzer, A=W. Gentry and2@ mene
Hendey commented critically on the manuscript. Financial support for the
author’s research was provided by the National Science Foundation (Washing-
ton;4D@2):
UNGULATE MORTALITY IN THE VARSWATER FORMATION DS
REFERENCES
BisHop, W. W. 1980. Paleogeomorphology and continental taphonomy. Jn: BEHRENSMEYER,
A. K. & HILL, A. P. eds. Fossils in the Making: 20-37. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Bone, E. L. & SINGER, R. 1965. Hipparion from Langebaanweg, Cape Province, and a
revision of the genus in Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 48: 273-397.
BuTtzer, K. W. 1973. On the sedimentary sequence of Langebaanweg ‘E’ Quarry, Cape
Province, South Africa. Quaternaria 17: 237-243.
De Muizon, C. & HENDEY, Q. B. 1980. Late Tertiary seals of the South Atlantic Ocean. Ann.
S. Afr. Mus. 82: 91-128.
DINGLE, R. V., Lorp. A. R. & HENDEY, QO. B. 1979. New sections in the Varswater Formation
(Neogene) of Langebaan Road, south-western Cape, South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 78:
81-92.
Foster, J. B. & Daca, A. I. 1972. Notes on the biology of the giraffe. E. Afr. Wildl. J. 10:
1-16.
Gentry, A. W. 1974. A new genus and species of Pliocene boselaphine (Bovidae, Mammalia)
from South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 65: 145-188.
Gentry, A. W. 1980. Fossil Bovidae (Mammalia) from Langebaanweg, South Africa. Ann. S.
Afr. Mus. 79: 213-337.
GopDaRD, J. 1970. Age criteria and vital statistics of a black rhinoceros population. E. Afr.
Wildl. J. 8: 105-121.
GRIMSDELL, J. J. R. 1973. Age determination of the African buffalo, Syncerus caffer Sparrman.
wali Wildl. J: tl: 31-53.
HALi-Martin, A. J. 1976. Dentition and age determination of the giraffe. J. Zool., Lond. 180:
263-289.
Harris, J. M. 1976. Pliocene Giraffoidea (Mammalia, Artiodactyla) from the Cape Province.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 69: 325-353.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1970a. A review of the geology and palaeontology of the Plio/Pleistocene
deposits at Langebaanweg, Cape Province (with an appendix, The Langebaanweg Bovi-
dae, by A. W. Gentry). Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 56: 75-117.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1970b. The age of the fossiliferous deposits at Langebaanweg, Cape Province.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 56: 119-131.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1972a. Further observations on the age of the mammalian fauna from
Langebaanweg, Cape Province. Palaeoecol. Afr. 6: 172-175.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1972b. A Pliocene Ursid from South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 59: 115-132.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1973. Fossil occurrences at Langebaanweg, Cape Province. Nature, Lond. 244:
13-14.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1974. The Late Cenozoic Carnivora of the south-western Cape Province. Ann.
S. Afr. Mus. 63: 1-369.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1976a. The Pliocene fossil occurrences in ‘E’ Quarry, Langebaanweg, South
Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 69: 215-247.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1976b. Fossil peccary from the Pliocene of South Africa. Science 192: 787-789.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1977. Fossil bear from South Africa. $. Afr. J. Sci. 73: 112-116.
HENDEY, QO. B. 1978a. Late Tertiary Hyaenidae from Langebaanweg, South Africa, and their
relevance to the phylogeny of the family. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 76: 265-297.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1978b. Late Tertiary Mustelidae (Mammalia, Carnivora) from Langebaanweg,
South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 76: 329-357.
HENDEY, QO. B. 1980. Agriotherium (Mammalia, Ursidae) from Langebaanweg, South Africa,
and relationship of the genus. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 81: 1-109.
HENDEY, Q. B. 1981. Palaeoecology of the Late Tertiary fossil occurrences in ‘E’ Quarry,
Langebaanweg, South Africa, and a reinterpretation of their geological context. Ann. S.
Afr. Mus. 84: 1-104.
HENDEY, Q. B. & Deacon, H. J. 1977. Studies in palaeontology and archaeology in the
Saldanha Region. Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 42: 371-381.
HENDEY, Q. B. & REPENNING, C. A. 1972. A Pliocene Phocid from South Africa. Ann. S. Afr.
Muse 59: 71-98. ;
Hoover, D. A. 1972. A late Pliocene rhinoceros from Langebaanweg, Cape Province. Ann. S.
Afr. Mus. 59: 151-191.
254 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Hoover, D. A. 1976. The late Pliocene Equidae of Langebaanweg, Cape Province, South
Africa. Zool. Verh., Leiden 148: 1-39.
KENSLEY, B. F. 1972. Pliocene marine invertebrates from Langebaanweg, Cape Province. Ann.
S. Afr. Mus. 60: 173-190.
KENSLEY, B. F. 1977. A second assemblage of Pliocene invertebrate fossils from Langebaan-
weg, Cape. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 72: 189-210.
KLEIN, R. G. 1974. On the taxonomic status, distribution, and ecology of the blue antelope,
Hippotragus leucophaeus (Pallas, 1766). Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 65: 99-143.
KLEIN, R. G. 1975. The fossil history of Raphicerus H. Smith, 1827 (Bovidae, Mammalia) in
the Cape Biotic Zone. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 71: 169-191.
KLEIN, R. G. 1978. Stone age predation on large African bovids. J. archaeol. Sci. 5: 195-217.
Kein, R. G., Wor, C., FREEMAN, L. G. & ALLWARDEN, K. 1981. The use of dental crown
heights for constructing age profiles of red deer and similar species in archaeological
samples. J. archaeol. Sci. 8: 1-31.
KurTEN, B. 1953. On the variation and population dynamics of fossil and recent mammal
populations. Acta zool. fenn. 76: 1-122.
Maculo, V. J. 1973. Origin and evolution of the Elephantidae. Trans. Am. phil. Soc. 63: 1-149.
Macuio, V. J. & HENDEy, Q. B. 1970. New evidence relating to the supposed Stegolophodont
ancestry of the Elephantidae. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 25: 85-87.
Me_ntis, M. T. 1972. A review of some life history features of the large herbivores of Africa.
The Lammergeyer 16: 1-89.
MiTcHELL, B. L. 1965. Breeding, growth and ageing criteria of Lichtenstein’s Hartebeest. The
Puku 3: 97-104.
Morris, P. 1972. A review of mammalian age determination methods. Mammal Rev. 2: 69-104.
Pocock, T. N. 1976. Pliocene mammalian microfauna from Langebaanweg; a new fossil genus
linking the Otomyinae with the Murinae. S. Afr. J. Sci. 72: 58-60.
Ricu, P. V. 1980. Preliminary report on the fossil avian remains from Late Tertiary sediments
at Langebaanweg (Cape Province), South Africa. $. Afr. J. Sci. 76: 166-170.
RICHTER, W. von. 1971. Observations on the biology and ecology of the black wildebeest
(Connochaetes gnou). J. sth. Afr. Wildl. Mgmt. Ass. 1: 3-16.
RICHTER, W. von. 1974. Connochaetes gnou. Mammalian Species 50: 1-6.
Simpson, C. D. 1966. Tooth eruption, growth and ageing criteria in the greater kudu—
Tragelaphus strepsiceros Pallas. Arnoldia, (Rhodesia) 2: 1-12.
Simpson, G. G. 1971. Fossil penguin from the Late Cenozoic of South Africa. Science 171:
1144-1145.
Simpson, G. G. 1975. Notes on variation in penguins and on fossil penguins from the Pliocene
of Langebaanweg, Cape Province, South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 69: 59-72.
Simpson, G. G. 1979. A new genus of late Tertiary penguin from Langebaanweg, South Africa.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 78: 1-9.
Stimpson, G. G., RoE, A. & Lewontin, R. C. 1960. Quantitative Zoology. New York:
Harcourt, Brace & World.
SincLair, A. R. E. 1977. The African Buffalo. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
SINGER, R. 1961. The new fossil sites at Langebaanweg, South Africa. Curr. Anthrop. 2:
385-387.
SINGER, R. & Hoover, D. A. 1958. A Stegolophodon from South Africa. Nature, Lond. 182:
101-102.
SOKAL, R. R. & ROHLF, F. J. 1969. Biometry. San Francisco: W. H. Freeman & Co.
Spiess, A. E. 1979. Reindeer and caribou hunters: an archaeological study. New York:
Academic Press.
SPINAGE, C. A. 1973. A review of the age determination of mammals by means of teeth, with
especial reference to Africa. E. Afr. Wildl. J. 11: 165-187.
TANKARD, A. J. 1975. Varswater Formation of the Langebaanweg-—Saldanha area, Cape
Province. Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 17: 265-283.
Voornigs, M. R. 1969. Taphonomy and population dynamics of an early Pliocene vertebrate
fauna, Knox County, Nebraska. Contrib. Geol. Spec. Pap. Univ. Wyo. 1: 1-69.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largiliierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8—9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
“semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid- tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. ‘Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. ‘... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. .. in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
' (b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
R. G. KLEIN
UNGULATE MORTALITY AND SEDIMENTARY
FACIES IN THE LATE TERTIARY
VARSWATER FORMATION, LANGEBAANWEG,
SOUTH AFRICA
On ANT 7 AUGUST 1981 ) ISSN 0303-2515
4:
— KATFSONTAR
OCT 191981
LIBRARIES
ANNALS
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM ©
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction 2
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 « 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes .. .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
“As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Pagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
- et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BuULLOuGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.—H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHER, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & RAFFy, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Konn, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Stid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 84 #4Band
August 1981 Augustus
Part 7 Deel
D> S
Souig no WAS
THE SYNONYMIZATION OF FRIODOS
K. H. BARNARD WITH AMPELISCA KROYER
(CRUSTACEA, AMPHIPODA)
By
GORDAN S. KARAMAN
&
J. LAURENS BARNARD
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
16, 238 528) 32 4 Set pei oS eo)
El, tase) CED), 3, CUD) Dy GED
GE, 5, , en), ICES, 210), 2h SD), 226), 23,250)
EDITOR/REDAKTRISE
Ione Rudner
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 018 4
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
THE SYNONYMIZATION OF TRIODOS K. H. BARNARD
WITH AMPELISCA KROYER (CRUSTACEA, AMPHIPODA)
By
GORDAN S. KARAMAN
Biological Institute, Titograd
&
J. LAURENS BARNARD
Smithsonian Institution, Washington
(With 3 figures)
[MS accepted 8 April 1981]
ABSTRACT
The genus Jriodos K. H. Barnard 1916, is re-examined and synonymized with the genus
Ampelisca Kréyer, 1842 (family Ampeliscidae). The type species, Triodos insignis K. H.
Barnard, 1916, is redescribed and figured and removed to Ampelisca as a valid species. The
validity of the genus Byblis is discussed.
CONTENTS
PAGE
ROCHE OTT ieee MR eRe a5 Gi ANTE cp eaMe a Oana ne ae me ZS
ATP CUS GA ITOVEh NE Ws SYMON eee ae ees es eee 256
TAINO, Oe IOC sh.o.8 biog owe ¢atas nee aia eras eee a 256
ANPUDAUISCD WATIG MIS (UK, lel, IskaninenG)).. cosas acenecaensaaaca 256
TUNE FOROS OH NS EMIS JENIOIIS «doco oe oases casceabemscosc 262
PXCKMOWICASEMIE TIES at wate rsh otic tore: oe Shona aie ate cet ons 263
REleTenCESipaemeeie et ee Lee SR esi cdtty re tice vt Page 263
INTRODUCTION
During our work on the revision of the families and genera of the World
Gammaridea (monograph in preparation), the validity of two genera in the
family Ampeliscidae was studied.
We re-examined the type species of the genus Triodos, T. insignis K. H.
Barnard, 1916, described from South Africa, because the original description
was poorly illustrated and the exact taxonomic position of the genus was
uncertain.
Based on our study, Triodos insignis is removed to the genus Ampelisca
Kroyer as a valid species, and the genus Jriodos K. H. Barnard, 1916, is
synonymized with Ampelisca Kroyer.
JES)
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 84 (7) 1981: 255-264, 3 figs.
256 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Ampelisca Kroyer, new synonymy
Ampelisca Kroyer, 1842: 154 (Ampelisca eschrichtii Kroyer, 1842, monotypy). Stebbing, 1906:
98. J. L. Barnard, 1960: 3 (including key to species). G. S. Karaman, 1975: 5.
Pseudoptalmus [sic| Stimpson, 1853: 57 (Pseudoptalmus pelagicus Stimpson, 1853, here
selected, = Ampelisca eschrichtii Kroyer, 1842).
Araneops Costa, 1853: 169 (Araneops diadema Costa, 1853, here selected).
Tetromatus Bate, 1857: 139 (Tetromatus typicus Bate, 1857, here selected).
Triodos K. H. Barnard, 1916: 140 (Triodos insignis K. H. Barnard, 1916, original designation)
[new synonym].
INVALIDITY OF TRIODOS
K. H. Barnard (1916) described Triodos insignis a new genus and species
from South Africa (off the Umhloti River, depth 100 fathoms).
At p. 140 he wrote that this genus ‘combines in a remarkable manner the
characters of the three hitherto recognized genera of Ampeliscidae’. Because
this species was very poorly figured, later workers considered the head to have
a produced anteroventral corner and pereopod 7 to be like that in Ampelisca.
After detailed examination of Triodos insignis from new material, it was
evident that it belongs to the genus Ampelisca with a short head such as that of
other species (A. rubella Costa, 1864, etc.). All other taxonomic characters of
T. insignis are identical with those of members in the genus Ampelisca.
The distoposterior lobe of article 2 on pereopod 7 has at the anteroventral
margin of the lobe one seta more than is usual in the genus Ampelisca, but
Ampelisca rubella, and Ampelisca spinimana Chevreux, 1887a also have one to
two setae at the anteroventral corner on the distoposterior lobe of article 2 on
pereopod 7. For this reason, the pilosity of pereopod 7 in 7. insignis belongs to
the Ampelisca form.
Ampelisca insignis (K. H. Barnard), new combination
Figs 1-3
Triodos insignis K. H. Barnard, 1916: 140, pl. 26 (figs 8-10). J. L. Barnard, 1969: 132.
Griffiths, 1974: 223; 1975: 104.
Description
Female
8,6 mm with nonsetose oostegites. Body smooth except last metasomite
and urosomites; last metasomite with two dorsoposterior plumose setae (Fig.
3A); urosomites 1-2 elevated, triangular in lateral view (Fig. 3E), laterally
compressed, bearing one row of short plumose setae along each lateral side;
urosomites 2—3 coalesced.
Coxae 1-4 longer than broad, with convex distal (= ventral) margin
provided with one row of long plumose setae, without distinct marginal notch.
Coxa 1 dilated distally (Fig. 2A), coxa 4 with well-developed distoposterior
lobe produced sharply in proximal part (so that lateral margins of coxa 4 are
not parallel (Fig. 2D)).
SYNONYMIZATION OF TRIODOS K. H. BARNARD WITH AMPELISCA KROYER 257
Fig. 1. Ampelisca insignis (K. H. Barnard), female 8,6 mm. A. Lateral body. B. Antenna
2. C. Lateral head. D. Left Mandible. E. Epimera 1-3, number placed near posteroventral
corner of each. F. Maxilla 1 (11th spine on outer plate hidden). G. Antenna 1.
258 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Epimeral plates 1-3 smooth, nearly subrounded (Fig. 1E).
Head longer than first two pereonites combined, obtuse (Fig. 1C), scarcely
longer than tall, with short rostrum; lateral cephalic lobes obtuse, straight,
anteroventral corner not produced nor pointed, like those in many other
Ampelisca species (A. rubella, etc.). One corneal lens present on each side near
dorsoanterior tip of head.
Antenna 1 short, slender, slightly exceeding peduncular article 4 of
antenna 2 (Fig. 1A); peduncular article 2 of antenna 1 slightly longer than
article 1, article 3 short; accessory flagellum absent; main flagellum longer than
peduncle, consisting of 9 articles, some of them with one aesthetasc each (Fig.
1G).
Antenna 2 long, nearly as long as body: peduncular article 3 short,
peduncular article 4 scarcely longer than 5, slender (Fig. 1B); flagellum 23-
articulate, bearing long setae.
Labrum incised distally (Fig. 2F), broader than long (tall). Labium normal,
with well-developed inner lobes (Fig. 2B).
Mandible with well-developed strong triturative molar, incisor toothed;
palp 3-articulate, article 1 short, articles 2-3 subequal in length, setose, non-
falciform, not dilated distally (Fig. 1D).
Maxilla 1: inner lobe with 1 simple seta, outer lobe with 11 spines (Fig. 1F
showing only ten), provided with one to four lateral teeth each; palp 2-
articulate, second article dilated distally, provided with distal teeth accompa-
nied by several spines and subdistal setae.
Maxilla 2 with narrowed lobes, inner lobe without dorsal oblique row of
setae (Fig. 2E).
Maxilliped: inner lobe short, with two distal spines intermixed with several
plumose setae; outer lobe reaching tip of second palp article, bearing one row
of strong spines along inferior margin; palp 4-articulate, palp article 3 not
lobed, article 4 with nail shorter than remaining part of article (Fig. 2C).
Gnathopods 1-2 linear, simple, gnathopod 1 shorter than gnathopod 2
(Fig. 2A, I). Gnathopod 1: article 5 longer than 6, densely setose along
margins; article 6 tapering distally, with dactyl shorter than article 6, bearing 4
setae along inferior margin and 1 seta at outer margin.
Gnathopod 2: article 5 linear, long, densely setose; article 6 much shorter
than 5, tapering distally, dactyl with five setae along inferior margin and with
one seta at outer margin (Fig. 21).
Pereopod 3 linear, with articles 4-6 bearing long plumose setae along both
margins; article 4 slightly inflated; dactyl slender, straight, longer than article 6
(Fig. 3B).
Pereopod 4 like that of pereopod 3, but slightly longer (Fig. 2D). Pereopod 5:
article 2 ovoid, with short distoposterior lobe and with smooth posterior margin,
anterior margin with one row of plumose setae; articles 3-4 short (Fig. 2G); article
5 produced distoposteriorly, bearing one row of short spines on apex; article 6 with
long distal setae, dactyl short, nail-shaped, with two dorsal teeth.
SYNONYMIZATION OF TRIODOS K. H. BARNARD WITH AMPELISCA KROYER 259
3 =|
Ss he
SEE )
I ZEZ
ites
BAF Yi UJ pEF,
Zo AV77 WF 1 A
AY)
—— i A a.
; oe pees De
a ie a A -
Fig. 2. Ampelisca insignis (K. H. Barnard), female 8,6 mm. A. Gnathopod 1. B. Lower lip.
C. Maxilliped. D. Pereopod 4. E. Maxilla 2. F. Upper lip. G. Pereopod 5. H. Telson.
I. Gnathopod 2. D and G = medial view.
260 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
, J | 7, van) Y]/
} D
:
Beet Ze afles
ee =
/
tikes
Zi
y FZ
WA
Ls)
y ,
“S Z (Die 2
Fig. 3. Ampelisca insignis (K. H. Barnard), female 8,6 mm. A. Pereopod 6. B. Pereopod
3. C. Pereopod 7. D. Dactyl of pereopod 6. E. Lateral urosome (inner ramus of uropod 1
pulled laterally to show spines). F. Uropod 3. A, B and C = medial view.
Pereopod 6: article 2 with stronger distoposterior lobe and less setose
anterior margin than those of pereopod 5; articles 3—7 like those of pereopod 5
(Fig. 3A).
Pereopod 7: nearly as long as pereopod 6, but of different shape: article 2
very large, dilated medially, with large distoposterior lobe reaching distal tip of
article 3 (Fig. 3C), bearing numerous plumose setae along posterior and ventral
margins; article 3 short; article 4 shorter than 3, poorly produced at distoanter-
ior tip and bearing one long distoposterior seta; article 5 slightly inflated, longer
than broad, bearing one row of plumose setae along distoposterior margin;
SYNONYMIZATION OF TRIODOS K. H. BARNARD WITH AMPELISCA KROYER 261
article 6 slightly shorter and narrower than 5, almost smooth; dactyl narrow,
almost as long as article 6, spiniform.
Pleopods well developed, normal, with two retinacula each.
Uropods 1-2 short. Uropod 1: peduncle stout, poorly spinose (Fig. 3E),
rami slender, pointed distally, almost smooth, outer ramus slightly longer than
inner. Uropod 1 only slightly exceeding apex of peduncle of uropod 2.
Uropod 2: peduncle stout, longer than rami, poorly spinose (Fig. 3E), rami
nearly subequal, stouter than these on uropod 1, bearing spines along margins.
Uropod 3 short, but strongly exceeding apex of uropod 2: peduncle stout,
scarcely shorter than ramus (Fig. 3F), smooth; rami almost subequal, bearing
plumose setae along outer margin, uniarticulate, almost foliaceous, inner ramus
tapering distally.
Telson much exceeding apex of peduncle on uropod 3, longer than broad,
incised two-thirds of its length (Fig. 2H); each lobe tapering distally, bearing
several setae, one pair of short sensory setae occurring on proximal part of each
lobe.
Male
Unknown.
Variability
Epimeral plates 1-3 more or less subrounded.
Material examined
South Africa: WCD 229 Z, University of Cape Town, Ecological Survey, 4
specimens (figured female 8,6 mm).
Localities cited
South Africa: Umhloti River mouth NW 1/2 W., distant 15 miles (Natal),
100 fathoms (K. H. Barnard 1916, Griffiths 1974); summary below indicated by
Griffiths (1975).
Distribution
Cape of Good Hope to Natal, South Africa, 183 m.
Remarks
Ampelisca misakiensis Dahl (1944) (and see Imbach 1969; Nagata 1965;
Margulis 1968) is so close to A. insignis that it may, at best, represent only a
subspecies. Imbach showed considerable variability in the head of misakiensis
in the South China Sea, whereas Dahl described a head quite close to that of
insignis in his Japanese material. If all the specimens identified by Imbach are
indeed a single species, then a great deal of variability does exist and we
therefore cannot find any distinctions between insignis and misakiensis. They
have many characters in common which are rather unusual in Ampelisca: both
262 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
urosomite 1 and urosomites 2—3 (fused) have a dorsal process (not in all Imbach
specimens and poorly in Dahl figure), lateral facial spine(s) on peduncle of
uropod 1, and setal creep on article 2 of pereopod 7 (setae creeping on to
anterior margin of main lobe). The Japanese specimens and some specimens of
the South China Sea from Imbach have the large rostrum on which the ocular
lenses are found, but Imbach also shows specimens with the small rostral area
as in INSIgnis.
Before misakiensis is made a synonym of insignis, the South China Sea
specimens of Imbach should once again be examined and work should be done
on the occurrence of the species all through the Indian Ocean, from Indo-China
to South Africa.
THE PROBLEM OF THE GENUS BYBLIS
Byblis Boeck, 1871, is very similar to Ampelisca but differs from the latter
(sensu auctorum) by (i) article 2 of pereopod 7 being provided with setae at the
ventroanterior margin near its conjunction with article 3; (ii) short, obtuse
telson, incised up to half of its length; and (111) the narrow article 7 of pereopod
7. These are further discussed below.
(1) The condition of pilosity on article 2 of pereopod 7 cannot be accepted
as a distinctly valid character for separating the genera Byblis and Ampelisca
from each other because of the observed transition in shape of this character
among many species of both genera. For example, article 2 of pereopod 7 lacks
any setae at the ventroanterior margin near its conjunction with article 3
(Ampelisca sarsi Chevreux, 1887b, A. brevicornis Costa, 1853, and many other
species of Ampelisca); article 2 of pereopod 7 has one or two setae at the
anteroventral margin near its conjunction with article 3 (A. insignis, A. cucul-
lata J. L. Barnard, 1954, A. misakiensis Dahl, 1944, A. iyoensis Nagata, 1959;
article 2 of pereopod 7 has numerous setae at the anteroventral margin near its
conjuction with article 3, like species in the genus Byblis (for example B.
cyclops Walker 1904, see Imbach 1969, pl. 5)
(11) The shape of the telson seems to be the only good character at the
moment separating the genera Ampelisca and Byblis. The telson in Byblis is as
long as broad or broader than long, obtuse distally, incised maximally up to
half of the telsonic length—although Ampelisca agassizi (Judd, 1896) (= com-
pressa Homes, 1905, = vera J. L. Barnard, 1954, see Mills, 1967) also bears an
obtuse telson; Byblis serrata Smith, 1873, also has a telson tapering distally like
Ampelisca, but it is incised only half-way. On the other hand, Ampelisca
cyclops Walker, 1904, has a telson like normal Ampelisca but incised scarcely
more than half of its length.
(iii) The shape of article 7 (dactyl) of pereopod 7 is a problematic
taxonomic character because of its large variability within the species and
populations of Ampelisca (see A. iyoensis in Imbach, 1969).
SYNONYMIZATION OF TRIODOS K. H. BARNARD WITH AMPELISCA KROYER 263
For the moment, we retain Ampelisca and Byblis as distinct because of the
different shapes of the telson, but the discovery of new species may require
synonymization of the genera.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
We thank Dr C. L. Griffiths of the Zoology Department, University of
Cape Town, for lending us material of Triodos insignis and Dr T. H. Barry,
Director of the South African Museum, for his kind assistance in this matter.
We also thank Irene F. Jewett who inked our drawings for press, Elizabeth B.
Harrison and Janice Clark who helped us prepare the text.
REFERENCES
BARNARD, J. L. 1954. Amphipoda of the family Ampeliscidae collected in the eastern Pacific
Ocean by the Velero III and Velero IV. Allan Hancock Pacif. Exped. 18(1): 1-137.
BARNARD, J. L. 1960. New bathyal and sublittoral ampeliscid amphipods from California, with
an illustrated key to Ampelisca. Pacific Naturalist 1(16): 1-36.
BARNARD, J. L. 1969. The families and genera of marine gammaridean Amphipoda. Bull. U.S.
nat. Mus. 271: 1-535.
BaRNarD, K. H. 1916. Contributions to the crustacean fauna of South Africa. 5. The Amphi-
poda. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 15: 105-302.
Bate, C. S. 1857. A synopsis of the British edriophthalmous Crustacea Ann. Mag. nat. Hist.
(2)19: 135-152.
Boeck, A. 1871. Crustacea amphipoda borealia et arctica. Forhandl. VidenskSelsk. Krist. 1870:
83-280.
CHEVREUX, E. 1887a. Crustacés amphipodes nouveaux dragués par L’Hirondelle, pendant sa
campagne de 1886. Bull. Soc. zool. Fr. 12: 566-580.
CHEVREUX, E. 1887b. Nouvelles espéces de Crustacés amphipodes du sudouest de la Bretagne.
Association Francaise pour l'avancement des Sciences, Congrés de Toulouse 1887: 1-4.
Costa, A. 1851-53. Fauna del regno di Napoli, pp. 1-2, 1-2, 1-6, 1-2, 1-4, for Talitrus,
Orchestia, Callisoma, Lysianassa, Guerinia. Catalogo de’ Crostacei del Regno di Napoli.
Costa, A. 1864. Di due nuove specie di Crostacei Amfipodi del golfo di Napoli. Ann. Mus.
Zool. Univ. Napoli 2: 153-157.
Dau., E. 1944. Amphipoda of the family Ampeliscidae from Professor Sixten Bock’s Expedi-
tion to Japan 1914. Arkiv Zool. 36A(1): 1-18.
GriFFiTHS, C. L. 1974. The Amphipoda of Southern Africa part 3. The Gammaridea and
Caprellidea of Natal. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 62: 209-264.
GriFFiTHs, C. L. 1975. The Amphipoda of Southern Africa part 5. The Gammaridea and
Caprellidea of the Cape Province west of Cape Agulhas. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 67: 91-181.
Houmes, S. J. 1905. The Amphipoda of southern New England. Bull. Bur. Fish., Wash. 24:
459-529.
ImpacH, M. C. 1969. Gammaridean Amphipoda from the South China Sea. Naga Rep. 4:
39-167.
Jupp, S. D. 1896. Descriptions of three species of sand fleas (amphipods) collected at Newport,
Rhode Island. Proc. U.S. nat. Mus. 18: 593-603.
KARAMAN, G. S. 1975. The family Ampeliscidae of the Adriatic Sea. Acta Adriat. 17(3): 1-67.
Kroyer, H. 1842. Une nordiske Slaegter og Arter af Amfipodernes Orden, henhorende til
Familien Gammarina. (Forelobigt Uddrag af et Arbejde). Naturh. Tidsskr. 4: 141-166.
Marcuiis, R. Ja. 1968. Ampeliscidae (Amphipoda, Gammaridea) severozapadnoi chasti
yozhno-kitaiskogo morja. Zool. Zh. 47: 1479-1488. Russian with Eng. summary and title:
Ampeliscidae (Amphipoda, Gammaridea) in the north-western part of the South China
Sea.
Mixts, E. L. 1967. A re-examination of some species of Ampelisca (Crustacea: Amphipoda)
from the east coast of North America. Can. J. Zool. 45: 635-652.
264 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
NaGatTa, K. 1959. Notes on five species of the amphipod genus Ampelisca from the stomach
contents of the triglid fishes. Publs. Seto mar. biol. Lab. 7: 67-82.
NacatTa, K. 1965. Studies on marine gammaridean Amphipoda of the Seto Inland Sea. I.
Publs. Seto mar. biol. Lab. 13: 131-170.
SmitH, S. I. in A. E. VERRILL 1873. Crustacea, ex. Isopoda, Report upon the invertebrate
animals of Vineyard Sound and the adjacent waters with an account of the physical
characters of the region. U.S. Comm. of Fish and Fisheries. Pt. I. Report on the Condition
of the Sea Fisheries of the South Coast of New England in 1871 and 1872: 295-778.
STEBBING, T. R. R. 1906. Amphipoda I. Gammaridea. Tierreich 21: 1-806.
Stimpson, W. 1853. Synopsis of the marine Invertebrata of Grand Manan: or the region about
the mouth of the Bay of Fundy, New Brunswick. Smithson. Contr. Knowl. 6: i-iv, 5-66.
WaLKER, A. O. 1904. Report on the Amphipoda collected by Professor Herdmann, at Ceylon,
in 1902. Suppl. Rep. 17, Ceylon Pearl Oyster Fisheries 1904: 229-300.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the J/nternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata could, rae 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856:
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: “tis, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, i861:
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 165, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
“semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
2)
e.g. *... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
' (b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
GORDAN S. KARAMAN
&
J. LAURENS BARNARD
THE SYNONYMIZATION OF TRIODOS
K. H. BARNARD WITH AMPELISCA KROYER
(CRUSTACEA, AMPHIPODA)
Qg .
oO
\WS
by
g 5
oe bY
< ~
tL
O q :
“nse ON. D
XS
€
\N
S31u\
UE
Ly.
a
Om
INSTIT
x=
SMITHSONIA
INSTIT
OPS SONIAN INSTITUTION NOILOALILSNI NWINOSHLINS S3IYVYUGIT LIBRARIES
ff
fee
ae
wt
ae
INOSHLINS SJIYVY dia LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLIA
ES
NVINOSHLINS S3Iut
NVINOSHLINS SJIY\
SMITHSONIAN
SMITHSONIAN
NVINOSHLINWS
SMITHSONIAN
. \S NS _ id = oe = wm QE
ASE = = = : 2 Qu
SAN 2. os o : ~
Be = : =" : : S A
Vacs O oa rs Pe 5 .
Stee z uy = 23} = Xx
ITHSONIAN INSTITUTION | NOILALILSNI ~oaluvedgi BRR oe
(io
ti, a 2) = 2) a e) by, .
bby, Be) = a 5 = = GL,
Yi fi = fe = = - GF #
ie RG El. ce = ea a za UY" fe
m = m ~ fh m n*
INOSHIINS |S 4 l\yYVual a B RAR IES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLIM
< y, = = as =
= =
= ee) = - =
g 2 g 2 8
z = 2 & z=,
>" = \ > = >”
z ap) Zz ” Zz
HSONIAN INSTITUTION Meteo Me _LIBRARTES SMITHSONIA
2 uJ re uw z Yy,
Aas — SF Cif,
= i - = = Y ff
4 a. + dic:
= ea) mM os ¥
© a O aS re)
PA a = a Zz
S3SIYVYUSIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILONLILSNI
NVINOSHLINS SAluvedill LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
6 3 o ie :
= pe) ee 20 i
=) By “ Y =e)
= a | Gy GG x =
sae = n “ye - &
Se Ww == wn = :
ITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOLEA TEES NI WIND SH aa a ne ee SMITHSONIA
= . ep) se
a “an = < < <x ES
= S\ NX == se — 4 = WAS
Fa SK 4 yh fo = 4H yet fy = NS
ES 2 FH 3 5 GY 2S
= : > GQ = > = 4
” ~! PL Ww) PA w) se
INOSHLIWS S3!uYvVYUgIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION =NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLIW
i a 2 ie 2 > ee
Ws LJ LJ ve NG
NXE = 4 z = = ar NX
Sa s : = 5 MN
RO < ee <2 = < = NSN
WS WLW ce at os 4 as 4 N Y
ers O e O = O |
me a Zz ai Zz mee ze ay
IITHSCNIAN INSTITUTION NOILONLILSNI LIBRARIES SMITHSONIA
ig . i z a oe ay
UW w — ow =a se Y j Uy
Gly, 2 = 2 5 50 S wy
Gr i = i = iF
x | OS ata ” ae ” wa yes
a z S Zz a Zz
INOSHLIWS S43 (uvudl _t! BRARI ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHILIW
Bee NS YY &- GWYYZ — NMA - cy aa A>, (1 Sees
». a) oe ol tj m Lone = OLAS m easy m
w ce nm _ uw) . = wm
JTION NOILALILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS S3INVUSIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION N
my 2 Z = Reon? <a = @e oz
SN = = —- ogre +] = ae
ae: 5 x. a os D oH
\ & = S* ne S ‘2 2
= = : = = = :
¥giq_ LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILMLILSNI_NVINOSHLIWS Saluvuait_L
~ =e “A = = NAS z =
4 x =a < ao W's < c
= S S : 5 MY = =
oO = Stas , (@) = Ext oO
= ell zZ. aad = A) eed za
ITION | NOILN.LILSNINVINOSHLIWS (S31YVYaI7 LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION _N
oO weed > O r — Oo say eel oe)
~ w . = wo — w at
= Pe) NSN 2 0 is a ae
= SW DZ =) =
iz Es A = - E ae es
b = O's = ae . F
z Pe ey ha w z n z
YdI1 LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYSIT_L
Page hs. we) @) 2
= LY 3 Fs
2 Ag? Z 5 Gy 2 : -
"A \ KEK @ D ow J: GoD n n
x SW SN Oo Ts Oo Vi Wp em O —
ia N \S = a ig ie oe = 2. ou
= ~ SS > = >” = > =
w) = 2 7p) 2 7p) = Ww?
ITION NOILALILSNI_NVINOSHLINS LIBRARIES INSTITUTION Puy
(ep) 5 = Ww —
ud & Y ss 7 Lu = ed
w = Ws oc = o aie a
< Et os eo = <x so ee
facd ae: N a 4+ % ar oe
= Wee fe S an 5 i:
sy z ot oS z ae z ea
YdIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILONLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYUEIT L
a = Fi z . Ree = ak.
wo 2 er © os Si O =
ms b> 8) ~— Se) . fe 5
a3 ea =) e BW >
= Bi = = = i
2)
m Zz vA Zz a Zz o
1 INSTITUTIO h
JTION f NOILALILSN S a & aK A S TUT J
Xt = << = i= = < =
. 4 Ua fx = = z A Zz =
2 GY 3 z B i B :
oO G,* Se ope a8 e) 35 Oo
y 2 Zo a = = = E =
e > : Cl = > = > = iS
x = ; W) ae ap) Zz 7p) =
yugiqy LIBRARIFS SMITHSONIAN NVINOSHLIWS S3I1u¥VYEIT L
BINDS :
NOILALILSNI
LIBRARIES
NOILALILSNI
ess
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. N
JTION NOILNLILSN! NVINOSHLINS S3JIYVedIT LIBRARIES
5
INSTITUTION NOILQLILSNI
SAIUVYUGIT LIBRARIES
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI
INSTITUTION
Saiuvddl
INSTITUTION
Saravedi
INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3I1YVYestIT L
YdIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN
yy, SAATITO.
ri ee FY
AN
WS
AN
NS
AN
WS
AN
~ =
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION LIBRARIES :
“WT
3 9088 01206 6767 |
Sis e gras een te
Eiims Sora dink ee: on 5 2
f
Hay
yay FM)
vi
wee
Fad Nei ae
FERSE SFO Pars 43 ye
VSereey atl
bik eg ta er
cares oro
Been,
A FER ee lath i hechta tao
me PNT ree te
ra CE
bap PR,
Oe ne
be tert
Ay Wea Sey ere
eae eee
Segen er FAP weer ys ee wisy, 2
Neth a! Gar sh eee ee AAS A Bs
SG NWS 7 0) ees i sO oa) te
Pee ies 2 ebay
BS en
Bee 2 tert er alwl acne
OPPs ee WES Ee
SARI EU I YS Hark Heels
bi ek eric Vite Way.
eee oe
Ferg ee ye
Qmeer ea pas
ae oe
SBS we ak eee
wie
Fie Lae oh Wwe Ae Beep}
ee ee eee Heat es
1S are ee Se ele &
PON: Begs Org Oe des PES4) 65 4a
Ca tae Baitehehrhe ok Etre Pee
YE le ae re Bae, &
ole
vou ye a els eae
to tet,
51 Y= SPs Sus
pia
oS RH
hl hndin ba a hea AY =Y AES
ees heat a
I PEAS Ray
Bape:
eee RA oy heey wae. %? i, *
Ee ey. WEE Bea, ve
“hs AW FEET EO a US dey wae
72 Sey, ‘shod POS CER BN AL ere 23
a intel in ogo PRLS Sid
re, eles 4 wus
ete SG BASs Hs a) es
te Wey. SER E En Oe) ith
St Fis fh ACR Sein ee Ty Bee EE
SU BE Sy) bib Lit 5
ee ee MB. PPA
. nbs 6 rato
ne ef > Z
bi eae oe wt Vey
i eee Om er ea
A Sd ae wey
WW wig EF ey ale
ba St Reh Se ake o ere
PSA WN 58
Aa e ie
¥.
oth’ le ees eae
oP upatee, Evite o
<-
v
ater see
SESSA BY NS 2:
SEDI EY Diy
Py.
aS
rh
See
eR es
=
6
a
Y
Ne 2 tere
‘
etx Ss
x
i
RF tat